Home

1762-RM001 - Rockwell Automation

1. Modbus Addressing Modbus Address Reference Modbus Function Code decimal 0001 to 4096 Read Write Modbus Coil Data space 1 5 15 10001 to 14096 Read Only Modbus Contact Data space 2 30001 to 30256 Read Modbus Input Register space 4 30501 Modbus Data Table Coil File Number 4 30502 Modbus Data Table Contact File Number 4 30503 Modbus Data Table Input Register File Number 4 30504 Modbus Data Table Holding Register File Number 4 30506 Pre Send Delay 4 30507 Modbus Slave Address 4 30508 Inter character Timeout 4 30509 RTS Send Delay 4 30510 RTS Off Delay 4 30511 Parity 4 30512 Presentation Layer Error Code 4 30512 Presentation Layer Error Code 4 30513 Presentation Layer Error Count 4 30514 Executed Function Code Error 4 30515 Last Transmitted Exception Code 4 30516 File Number of Error Request 4 30517 Element Number of Error Request 4 30518 Function Code 1 Message Counter Read Single Output Coil 4 30519 Function Code 2 Message Counter Read Discrete Input Image 4 30520 Function Code 3 Message Counter Read Single Holding Register 4 30521 Function Code 4 Message Counter Read Single Input Register 4 30522 Function Code 5 Message Counter Set Clear Single Output Coil 4 30523 Function Code 6 Message Counter Read Write Single Holding Register 4 30524 Function Code 8 Message Counter Run Diagnostics 4 30525 Function Code 15 Message Counter
2. iles i i Data Files Function Files 2 Mode Address Level r 2 z Parameter Sg Elo ss 5 9 j 2 3 8888 8 FEE ce d la jo le le l l E Ie l la lw JE e W 5 IE o L km z 5 l E amp ERE G Ela Els Ell la E jj js Source e e e e e e e e Index Search Result e e e e e e e 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Example 1 ASC 4 String Search 0 Source ST38 40 i S Index 35 If input slot 1 bit 10 is set search the string String Search ST52 80 in ST52 80 starting at the 36th character for Result N10 0 the string found in ST38 40 In this example the position result is stored in N10 0 Error Conditions The following conditions cause the controller to set the ASCII Error bit S 5 15 e Source string length is less than 1 or greater than 82 Index value is less than 1 or greater than 82 Index value is greater than Source string length The destination is not changed in any of the above conditions When the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word S 6 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 304 ASCII Instructions ASR ASCII String Compare Instruction Type input ASR ASCII String Compare Execution Time for the ASR Instruction
3. Address iles i i Data Files Function Files 2 Mode Address Level r T S m Parameter is E e E z 5 E gm ce E LA E NE E Toe m g je o j _ 0 e ls le S e e oO i io e Z jua 5s la E 2 E b FA z a e 8 e la l a S u Channel AND Mask e e e e e e e OR Mask e e e e e e e e Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element ARD ASCII Read Characters ARD ASCII Read I CEN gt Channel 0 Dest ST10 4 lt DN gt Control R6 3 String Length 10 lt cCER gt Characters Read 0 lt Error 0 lt Instruction Operation This instruction executes on either a false or true rung However a false to true rung transition is required to set the EN bit to repeat the instruction Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ARD Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FAN 3 or later 132 3 us 49 7 us character 11 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 108 us 44 us character 10 7 us Use the ARD instruction to read characters from the buffer and store them in a string To repeat the operation the rung must go from false to true Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel i
4. iles Function Files Address Level Data Files 2 Mode o z E Sg T Parameter 2 E E e ie 5 cc a im e I e 5 E v E T gja e Belle l SEE le lo l E IE ls je s IE ls lo lm le l lu b b IS IQ ESE I IS la e 8 le ia sl 2 fs S la Channel Destination Control e e 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 302 ASCII Instructions ASC String Search ASC String Search Source ST10 6 Index 5 String Search ST10 7 Result N71 0 lt Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Instruction Operation When the rung goes from false to true the control element Enable EN bit is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction Once the requested number of characters are in the buffer all characters including the Termination characters are moved to the destination string The number of characters moved is stored in the POS word of the control data file The number in the Characters Read field is continuously updated and the Done bit DN is not set until all of the characters have been read Exception If the controller finds termination characters before done read
5. Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count A Count B Not Used Not Used Example 12 fl off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example 2 y off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value Example 4 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 5 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 6 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 2 Count input A leads count input B 3 Count input B leads count input A Blank cells don t care ft rising edge y falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 106 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Mode 7 Quadrature Counter phased inputs A and B With External Reset and Hold HSC Mode 7 Examples Input 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CE Comments Terminals Bit 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count A Count B Z reset Hold Example 12 ff off 0 off 0 fon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example 2 off 0 off 0 o
6. Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 34 1 0 Configuration 15 Inv LDW Type ToThisCtr ee is Range12To15 0 ToThisCounter 0 16 Range12To15 0 ToThisCounter 1 Range12To15 1 HiLimOrDirWr Range12To15 1 HiLimOrDirWr 17 Range12T015 0 Type 18 x m ne Range12To15 0 LoadDirectWrite Range12To15 1 LowLimit Range12To15 1 LowLimit 13 Range12To15 0 Invert 20 Out15 Out14 Out13 Out12 Out11 Out10 Out09 Out08 Out07 OutOG OutOS Out04 Out03 Out02 Out01 Out00 Range12To15 1 OutputControl 0 15 2 Inv Low Type ToThisCtr pri a veg 3 Range12To15 1 ToThisCounter 0 22 Range12To15 1 ToThisCounter 1 Range12To15 2 HiLimOrDirWr Range12To15 2 HiLimOrDirWr 23 Range12To15 1 Type 24 Range12T015 1 LoadDirectWrite Range12To15 2 LowLimit Range12To15 2 LowLimit 9 5 Range12To15 1 Invert 26 Out15 Out14 Out13 Out12 Out11 Out10 Out09 Out08 Out07 OutOG OutOS Out04 Out03 Out02 Out01 Out00 Range12To15 2 OutputControl 0 15 2 Inv LDW Type ToThisCtr ioe C5 Range12To15 2 ToThisCounter 0 28 Range12To15 2 ToThisCounter 1 Range12T015 3 HiLi
7. Word Bit Description 6 DLL Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 5 9 0 CTS 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD 4to15 Reserved 10 0 Software Handshaking Status 1to15 Reserved 11 Echo Character Count 12 Received Character Count 13 to 18 Reserved 19 Bad Character Count 20 to 22 Reserved Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 78 Function Files io Channel 0 Channel 1 Generic ASCII Echo Character Count 1 Transmitter ENABLED Character Count Received p Bad Character Count D Modem Lines RTS CTS Active Node Table Block of Communications Status File Active Node Table Block Word Description 23 Active Node Table Category Identifier Code always 3 24 Length e always 4 for DH 485 e always 18 for DF1 Half Duplex Master e always 0 for DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Slave Modbus RTU Slave Modbus RTU Master and ASCII 25 Format Code always 0 26 Number of Nodes e always 32 for DH 485 e always 255 for DF1 Half Duplex Master e always 0 for DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Slave Modbus RTU Slave Modbus RTU Master and ASCII 27 Active Node Table DH 485 and DF1 Half Duplex Master Nodes 0 to 15 CS0 27 1 is node 1 CS0 27 2 is node 2 etc This is a bit mapped register that displays the status of each node on
8. Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Timer Instructions Overview Chapter 8 Timer and Counter Instructions Timers and counters are output instructions that let you control operations based on time or a number of events The following Timer and Counter Instructions are described in this chapter Instruction Used To Page TON Timer On Delay Delay turning on an output on a true rung 155 TOF Timer Off Delay Delay turning off an output on a false rung 156 RTO Retentive Timer On Delay turning on an output from a true rung 156 The accumulator is retentive CTU Count Up Count up 159 CTD Count Down Count down 159 RES Reset Reset the RTO and counter s ACC and status 160 bits not used with TOF timers For information on using the High Speed Counter output s see Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch on page 87 Timers in a controller reside in a timer file A timer file can be assigned as any unused data file When a data file is used as a timer file each timer element within the file has three sub elements These sub elements are e Timer Control and Status Preset This is the value that the timer must reach before the timer times out When the accumulator reaches this value the DN status bit is set TON and RTO only The preset data range is from 0 to 32767 The minimum required update interval is 2 55 seconds regardles
9. T Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Mode Level D Q iS Parameter FIF E E z eis s 9 o m z ols zl HEEE AAE e gae EB Em Ele2495 55 55 s5 s zu t Sa EPI mmm RO9aE sEjmE Sju Source elelelelelele ejejojojojojojojojo elele e e e eje Destination e e e ej elje e elejlej ejejeje je eje ojojo 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files SCL Scale Instruction Type output SCL Scale Execution Time for the SCL Instruction Source N7 0 0 lt Controller When Rung Is Rate 10000 N7 1 0 lt True False offset A MicroLogix 1200 10 5 us 0 0 us Dest Me MicroLogix 1500 8 7 us 0 0 us lt The SCL instruction causes the value at the Source address to be multiplied by the Rate slope value The resulting value is added to the Offset and the rounded result is placed in the Destination The following equations express the linear relationship between the input value and the resulting scaled value Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 178 Math Instructions scaled value rate x source 10000 offset where e rate scaled max scaled min input max input min offset scaled min input min x rate Rate and Offset can both be immediate values The data range for rate and of
10. Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Protocol Configuration 451 Modbus RTU Slave Communications Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 Series B and higher Processors only Parameter ptions Programming Software Default RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments x20 ms Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay x20 ms 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from receive to transmit mode When the Control Line is set to Ha f Duplex Modem this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion Modbus Slave Memory Map The modbus Memory map is summarized in and detailed in Modbus to MicroLogix Memory Map Summary MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764
11. Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access OPP Output PTO 0 0PP longword 0to2 147 483 647 status read only Pulses Produced 32 bit INT The PTO OPP Output Pulses Produced is generated by the PTO sub system and can be used in the control program to monitor how many pulses have been generated by the PTO sub system Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Using High Speed Outputs 131 PTO Accel Decel Pulses Independent ADI Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access ADI Accel Decel PTO 0 ADI bit Oor1 control read write Pulses Independent The PTO ADI Accel Decel Pulses Independent bit is used to define whether the acceleration and deceleration intervals will be the same or if each will have a unique value When this bit is set 1 separate profiles are used When this bit is clear 0 the PTO will operate with the deceleration profile as a mirror of the acceleration profile If separate acceleration and deceleration profiles are desired you must choose a long integer file number and a starting element There must be four long elements available in the file Element 1 Acceleration Count Element 2 Deceleration Count Elements 3 and 4 reserved The choice of selecting a common profile or separate profiles must be made at the time of programming This cannot be changed once the program is
12. i ion Files a Data Files Function Files S Mode Level 5 Parameter E gs E e S z x amp B S n 3 T E c olajos jo l l zELErF kb lkwuwEgB LSo t e fom fz a fa a SS lew e Bl SIS E18 le alels lela Sla Source elelelelele ele elelelelel elel eleljelele ele ele Mask elelelelele ele ejejojojojojojojojojojojojojo ele Compare elel elelelje ele ejejojojojojojojojojojojojojo ele 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type input Execution Time for the LIM Instructions Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 6 4 us 6 1 us long word 14 4 us 13 6 us MicroLogix 1500 word 5 5 us 5 3 us long word 12 2 us 11 7 us The LIM instruction is used to test for values within or outside of a specified range The LIM instruction is evaluated based on the Low Limit Test and High Limit values as shown in the following table LIM Instruction Operation Based on Low Limit Test and High Limit Values When Ad RugStete Low Limit High Limit Te
13. Instruction Description Page Instruction Description Page ABL Test Buffer for Line 291 NEG Negate 175 ABS Absolute Value 176 NEO Not Equal 164 ACB Number of Characters in Buffer 293 NOT Logical NOT 194 ACI String to Integer 294 ONS One Shot 150 ACL ASCII Clear Buffers 284 OR Logical OR 193 ACN String Concatenate 295 OSF One Shot Falling 151 ADD Add 174 OSR One Shot Rising 151 AEX String Extract 296 OTE Output Energize 148 AHL ASCII Handshake Lines 298 OTL Output Latch 149 AIC ASCII Integer to String 286 OTU Output Unlatch 149 AND Bit Wise AND 192 PID Proportional Integral Derivative 255 ARD ASCII Read Characters 299 PTO Pulse Train Output 119 ARL ASCII Read Line 301 PWM Pulse Width Modulation 137 ASC String Search 302 RAC Reset Accumulated Value 111 ASR ASCII String Compare 304 RCP Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only 359 AWA ASCII Write with Append 287 REF I O Refresh 231 AWT ASCII Write 289 RES Reset 160 BSL Bit Shift Left 203 RET Return from Subroutine 225 BSR Bit Shift Right 204 RTA Real Time Clock Adjust Instruction 58 CLR Clear 176 RTO Retentive Timer On Delay 156 COP Copy File 200 SBR Subroutine Label 224 CPW Copy Word 199 SCL Scale 177 CTD Count Down 159 SCP Scale with Parameters 178 CTU Count Up 159 SQC Sequencer Compare 215 DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 182 SQL Sequencer Load 221 DIV Divide 175 SQ0 Sequencer Output 218 DLG Data Log Inst
14. Relative Timing Accelerate Status AS Run Status RS Decelerate Status DS Enable EN Done DN Idle ID Jog Pulse JP Jog Continuous JC IY Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Start of PTO Start of PTO Standard Logic Enable Example In this example the rung state is a maintained type of input This means that it enables the PTO instruction Normal Operation NO and maintains its logic state until after the PTO instruction completes its operation With this type of logic status bit behavior is as follows Stage Rung State Sub Elements Normal Operation NO Using High Speed Outputs 123 The Done DN bit becomes true 1 when the PTO completes and remains set until the PTO rung logic is false The false rung logic re activates the PTO instruction To detect when the PTO instruction completes its output monitor the done DN bit a mm Relative Timing Accelerate Status AS Run Status RS Decelerate Status DS Enable EN Done DN Idle ID Jog Pulse JP Jog Continuous JC Pulse Train Outputs PTO Function File Start of PTO Start of PTO
15. 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 HR SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 56 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RS Logix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 System Status File 409 RTC Minutes Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S841 word 0 to 59 status read only 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 MIN SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 56 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RS Logix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values RTC Seconds Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 842 word 0 to 59 status read only 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 SEC SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 56 for more informatio
16. T Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r 1 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r read only Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 18 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 1762 OX6 Output Image For each output module the output data file contains the controller directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 5 correspond to output terminals 0 through 5 Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 r w Ir w r w Ir w r w r w Word 1 eco e c A ow N e r w read and write 0 always at a 0 or OFF state 1762 0A8 1762 0B8 and 1762 OW8 Output Image For each output module the output data file contains the controller directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 7 correspond to output terminals 0 through 7 Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 r w Ir w r w r w Ir w Ir w Ir w r w gt Word e eco e c A 21 N e r w read and write 0 always at a 0 or OFF state 1762 0B16 and 1762 OW16 Output Image Por each output module the output data file contains the controller directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 15 correspond to output terminals 0 through 15 Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11
17. Within the RSLogix 500 Function File Folder you see a PTO Function File with two elements PTOO 1762 L24BXB 1762 L40BXB and 1764 28BXB and PTO1 1764 28BXB only These elements provide access to PTO configuration data and also allow the control program access to all information pertaining to each of the Pulse Train Outputs TIP If the controller mode is run the data within sub element fields may be changing Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 124 Using High Speed Outputs Function Files E lal x Hsc PTO PwM sri Jen Rrc par re MM Lol El PTO 0 m OUT Output DN Done DS Decelerating Status RS Run Status AS Accelerating Status RP Ramp Profile ES Control Stop IS Idle Status ED Error Detected Status NS Normal Operation Status JPS Jog Pulse Status JCS Jog Continuous Status ADI Accel Decel Pulses Independent JF Jog Pulse JC Jog Continuous EH Enable Hard Stop EN Enable Status follows rung state ER Error Code OF Output Frequency Hz OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz JF Jog Frequency Hz TOP Total Output Pulses To Be Generated OPP Output Pulses Produced L ADP Accel Decel Pulses or File Elem if ADI 1 PTO 1 Wu D Pulse Train Outp ut The variables within each PTO sub element along with what type of behavior and Function Fil access the control pr
18. network Diagnostic Counter Block of Communications Status File With RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 and later formatted displays of the diagnostic counters for each configured channel are available under Channel Status These displays include a Clear button that allows you to reset the diagnostic counters while monitoring them online with the programming software TIP Function Files For the MicroLogix 1500 LRP with OS Series C FRN 8 and higher clicking on the Clear button while online monitoring Channel Status of either channel 0 or channel 1 will reset all of the channel status diagnostic counters for both channels to zero Prior to OS Series C FRN 8 the only channel status diagnostic counters that are reset when the Clear button is clicked are the ones on the channel that the programming terminal is connected through For instance if your programming terminal is connected online via channel 0 and you are monitoring the Channel Status of channel 1 when you click on the Clear button only the channel 0 diagnostic counters will be reset the channel 1 diagnostic counters will not be reset Diagnostic Counter Blocks are shown for e DH 485 on page 69 e DF1 Full Duplex on page 70 e DF1 Half Duplex Slave on page 71 e DF1 Half Duplex Master on page 72 e DF1 Radio Modem on page 73 Modbus RTU Slave on page 74 Modbus RTU Master on page 76 e ASCII on page 77 DH 485 Diagnostic Counters B
19. Subroutine Execution Time for the SBR Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 11 0 us 1 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1 0 us 1 0 us Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Program Control Instructions 225 RET Return from Subroutine RET Return SUS Suspend SUS Suspend Suspend ID 1 TND Temporary End CTND gt The SBR instruction is a label which is not used by the processor It is for user subroutine identification purposes as the first rung for that subroutine This instruction is the first instruction on a rung and is always evaluated as true Instruction Type output Execution Time for the RET Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 11 0 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1 0 us 0 0 us The RET instruction marks the end of subroutine execution or the end of the subroutine file It causes the controller to resume execution at the instruction following the JSR instruction user interrupt or user fault routine that caused this subroutine to execute Instruction Type output The SUS instruction is used to trap and identify specific conditions for program debugging and system troubleshooting This instruction causes the processor to enter the suspend idle mode causing all outputs to be de energized The suspend ID and the suspend file program file number or subroutine file number identifying where the
20. 1 ACC 2 120 4 L5 20 4 B 2 21 0 TF LACC 2 21 6 LESE 20 1 B3 1 5 9 T4 1 5 9 T4 49 B3 1 6 5 T4 7 1 T 1 19 7 B 1 1 21 6 TFT 21 8 TFT 19 8 BP 22 3 TRL 224 T4 ACC 5 1 L8 2 5 5 T4 1 ACC 16 0 T 1 ACC 19 9 L 1 2 20 4 TA ACC 7 5 TFT LACC 20 5 L 5 2 21 0 TP T ACC P 21 8 0 1 2 5 4 L8 1 5 9 TI ACC 22 9 0 1 1 0 2 12 8 L8 6 5 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 386 MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Execution Time Example Word Level Instruction Using an Indirect Address ADD Instruction Times ADD Instruction Addressing ADD Instruction 2 5 us Source A N7 Source A 4 8 us Source B T4 ACC Source B 5 1 us Destination N Destination 20 1 us Total 32 5 us Execution Time Example Bit Instruction Using an Indirect Address XIC B3 e XIC 0 9 us 4 8 us 5 7 Us True case e XIC 0 0 Us 4 8 Us 4 8 us False case MicroLogix 1500 Scan Time Worksheet Calculate the scan time for your control program using the worksheet below Input Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion 1 0 is used 53 ys Expansion Input Words X 3 us or X 7 5 us if Forcing is used Number of modules with Input words X 10 us Input Scan Sub Total Program Scan Add execution times of all instructions in you
21. 264 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Automatic Manual AM Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access AM Automatic Manual PD10 0 AM binary bit 0 or 1 control read write The auto manual bit can be set or cleared by instructions in your ladder program When off 0 it specifies automatic operation When on 1 it specifies manual operation In automatic operation the instruction controls the control variable CV In manual operation the user control program controls the CV During tuning set this bit to manual TIP Output limiting is also applied when in manual Control Mode CM Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access CM Control Mode PD10 0 CM binary bit 0 or 1 control read write Control mode or forward reverse acting toggles the values E SP PV and E PV SP Forward acting E PV SP causes the control variable to increase when the process variable is greater than the setpoint Reverse acting E SP PV causes the control variable to decrease when the process variable is greater than the setpoint PV in Deadband DB Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access DB PV in Deadband PD10 0 DB binary bit 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the
22. Data Table Address Fiera yer Size in Elements 02 Read Input Status 1xxxx 03 Read Holding Registers 4xxxx i Error ER o di i 04 Read Input Registers 3 xxx E Target Device i 05 Write Single Coil Dioses Message done DN fo Message Timeout 06 write Single Register 4xxxx Message Transmitting ST 0 MB Data Address 1 65536 15 Write Multiple Coils Oxxxx Message Enabled EN e Slave Node Address dec 16 Write Multiple Registers 4xxxx Error Error Code Hex 0 No errors Error Description Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Communications Instructions 329 The controller supports eight Modbus commands If the target device supports any of these Modbus command types the controller should be capable of exchanging data with the device Supported Modbus commands include Modbus Command Types Modbus Command Used For 01 Read Coil Status reading bits 02 Read Input Status reading bits 03 Read Holding Registers reading words 04 Read Input Registers reading words 05 Write Single Coil writing 1 bit 06 Write Single Register writing 1 word 15 Write Multiple Coil writing multiple bits 16 Write Multiple Registers writing multiple words 1 MicroLogix 1200 Series C FRN 8 and higher and MicroLogix 1500 Series C FRN 9 and higher Data Table Address This variable defines the starting address i
23. Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access OVF Overflow HSC 0 0VF long word 32 bit INT control read write The OVF Overflow defines the upper count limit for the counter If the counter s accumulated value increments past the value specified in this variable an overflow interrupt is generated When the overflow interrupt is generated the HSC sub system rolls the accumulator over to the underflow value and the counter continues counting from the underflow value counts are not lost in this transition The user can specify any value for the overflow position provided it is greater than the underflow value and falls between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 108 4 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 To load data into the overflow variable the control program must toggle low to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system TIP Data loaded into the overflow variable must be greater than the data resident in the high preset HSC 0 HIP or an HSC error is generated Underflow UNF Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UNF Underflow HSC 0 UNF long word 32 bit INT control read write The UNF
24. application 1 A machine ot process monitored and controlled by a controller 2 The use of computer or processot based routines for specific purposes ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A standard for defining codes for information exchange between equipment produced by different manufacturers The basis of character sets used in most microcomputers a string of 7 binary digits represents each character baud rate The speed of communication between devices Baud rate is typically displayed in K baud For example 19 2K baud 19 200 bits per second bit The smallest unit of memory used in discrete or binary logic where the value 1 represents ON and 0 represents OFE block diagrams A method used to illustrate logic components or a sequence of events Boolean operators Logical operators such as AND OR NAND NOR NOT and Exclusive OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form logic statements or circuits Can have an output response of T or F Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 490 Glossary Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 branch A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program Its primary use is to build OR logic communication scan A part of the controller s operating cycle Communication with devices such as other controllers and operator interface devices takes place during this period control program User logic the application that d
25. 2 Control file only S00 Sequencer Output t indirect addressing Sao _ Sequencer Output File B3 0 Mask N7 0 Dest N7 1 Control R6 0 Length 1 lt Position 0 lt CEN gt DN gt Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SQO Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 23 2 us 7 1 us long word 26 6 us 74 us MicroLogix 1500 word 20 0 us 6 3 us long word 23 1 us 6 3 us On a false to true rung transition the SQO instruction transfers masked source reference words or long words to the destination for the control of sequential machine operations When the rung goes from false to true the instruction increments to the next step word in the sequencer file Data stored there is transferred through a mask to the destination address specified in the instruction Data is written to the destination word every time the instruction is executed The done bit is set when the last word of the sequencer file is transferred On the next false to true rung transition the instruction resets the position to step one If the position is equal to zero at start up when you switch the controller from the program mode to the run mode the instruction opera
26. 8 F CR is 2 5 F e g a je 2 2 le l z 2 i fF ly jw I2 IE e si ls Je o a le z X 5 E a t 2 EC aa ES Ej aja S 8 a Low Limit e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Test e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e High Limit e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing 4 TheF file is valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series C and higher controllers only IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Using the Math Instructions Chapter 10 Math Instructions General Information Before using math instructions become familiar with the following topics at the beginning of this chapter e Using the Math Instructions Updates to Math Status Bits e Using the Floating Point F Data File Instructions Use these output instructions to perform computations using an expression or a specific arithmetic instruction Instruction Used To Page ADD Ad Addiwovdus o Ww SUB Subtract Subtract two values 174 MUL Multiply Multiply two values 175 D
27. DH Network Node 19 Node 40 Node 51 SLC 5 04 PLC 5 DeviceNet and Ethernet Networks The illustration below shows a DeviceNet network using DeviceNet Interfaces 1761 NET DNJP connected to an Ethernet network using an SLC 5 05 In this configuration controllers on the DeviceNet network can reply to requests from devices on the Ethernet network but cannot initiate communications to devices on Ethernet Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 348 Communications Instructions Configuring a Remote Message DeviceNet and Ethernet Networks SLC 5 03 DeviceNet Network DNI E MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 SLC 5 05 Ethernet Network SLC 5 05 PLC 5E You configure for remote capability in the RSLogix 500 Message Setup screen Example Configuration Screen and Network The message configuration shown below is for the MicroLogix 1500 at node 12 on the DH 485 network This message reads five elements of data from the SLC 5 04 node 51 on the DH network starting at address N 50 0 The SLC 5 04 at Node 23 of the DH network is configured for passthru operation TIP The MicroLogix 1200 capabilities are the same as the MicroLogix 1500 in this example Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Communications Instructions 349 T MSG Rung 42 34 MG11 0
28. Embedded I O Configuration Tab Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2011 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 467 Adjust Input filters as needed Module 0 Bul 1764 MicroLogix1500 x Embedded General Configuration Embedded ID Configuration r Input Filter Input Latch Inputs 0 1 x hee T Inputs 2 3 defaut I ch l Inputs 4 5 defaut EXER FP Bit3 fi Inputs 6 7 inputs defaut eg oc m Inputs 8 to 11 defaut Moose D o Bt5 f Fr e7 M Problem 2 The HSC instruction does not accumulate counts and the Error Code ER shows a value of 1 Solution A file number was entered into PFN but the value entered was less then 3 or greater then 255 or the file number entered was correct however the file does not exist Create the NEW program file by Right mouse clicking on Program Files 1 Controler Properties E Processor Status A Function Files AM io Configuration Lap 2 Data Files BA Cross Re O 20 output Di n INPUT O s2 status D 83 BINARY DI T4 TIMER Problem 3 Some of my outputs will not turn On or Off when the ladder logic appeats to indicate that they should Solution OMB Output Mask Bits Verify what the OMB has been configured for in the HSC function file If an output s has been assigned to the HSC for control then the output s will not be controlled anywhere else in the ladder program Only the HSC will h
29. I O Configuration folder 3 For manual configuration drag the Compact I O module to the slot For automatic configuration you must have the controller connected online to the computer either directly or over a network Click the Read I O Config button on the I O configuration screen RSLogix 500 will read the existing configuration of the controller s I O Some I O modules support or require configuration To configure a specific module double click on the module an I O configuration screen will open that is specific to the module Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Chapter 2 Controller Memory and File Types This chapter describes controller memoty and the types of files used by the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 controllers The chapter is organized as follows Controller Memory on page 43 Data Files on page 48 Protecting Data Files During Download on page 49 Static File Protection on page 51 Password Protection on page 52 Clearing the Controller Memory on page 53 e Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock on page 53 Controller Memory File Structure MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 user memory is comprised of Data Files Function Files and Program Files and B Ram files for the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP processor Function Files are exclusive to the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers they are not available in the MicroLogix 1000 or SLC controllers TIP The file types shown b
30. If the Auto Start bit AS is set this will start the interrupt on power up and set the Timed Interrupt Enabled bit TIE automatically allowing the interrupt to execute Shown in the above example If the AS bit is not set then the TIE bit must be set through the ladder logic in order for the interrupt to execute The User Interrupt Enable bit UIE determines if the interrupt executes or not The following example illustrates a message write from an SLC 5 03 or higher processor to a Micrologix 1500 processor with an installed RTC module that has been enabled This example can also be applied for messaging between Micrologix 1200 and 1500 controllers When messaging from a Micrologix 1200 1500 controller to another Micrologix 1200 1500 it is recommended that RTC 0 be used as the source instead of 8 37 8 42 Minimum Hardware Software requirements Micrologix 1200 Series B FRN 2 Micrologix 1500 Series B FRN 4 RSLOGIX 500 is 4 10 00 02 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 479 Example The example shows network connections using DH 485 however DF1 Full or Half Duplex will also work T24vdc Additional Micrologix 1200 1500 s 1761 CBL HM02 1 Configure the SLC s Channel 0 port for DH 485 protocol 2 Enter the following ladder logic into the SLC processor Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 480 Knowledgebase Quick Starts MSG Read Wnite Message Type Peer To Peer Read Write Write
31. MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 D Integral E 0 Intearal Read 1 Integral Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Communications Instructions 327 When ECP is chosen you ate able to select which slot position 1 to 16 the communications module resides in The 1764 LRP processor can support up to two communications modules with full messaging functionality MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 TIP You can use multiple communications modules in a 1764 LRP MicroLogix 1500 system but you can only message through the first two A communications module physically positioned after the first two can only be used for I O scanning If Channel 0 or Channel 1 is selected with that channel configured for Modbus RTU Master then the next line will display Modbus Command Otherwise the next line displays Communication Command Communication Command MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 m 500CPU Read 500CPU Read S00CPU Write 485CIF Read 485CIF Write PLC5 Read PLCS Write CIP Generic The controller supports six seven for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Series C and higher different types of communications commands If the target device supports any of these command types the controller should be capable of exchanging data with the device Supported commands include Communication Command Types Communication Description Used For Command 500CPU Read The target device is compatible with and supports the reading da
32. Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Observe the following restrictions when using the CPW instruction The length of the data transferred cannot exceed 128 words e Function files can be used for Source or Destination but not both When referencing either a PLS file or a function file addressing must be specified to the sub element level You can reference a sub element of bits in a function file containing a combination of read only and read write bits You cannot directly reference the high word of a long word as an operand in the CPW instruction A Major fault 003F is generated if the execution of the instruction exceeds the data table space A Major fault 0044 is generated if a write attempt fails to the RTC function file This only occurs when attempting to write invalid data to the RTC function file Examples of invalid data ate setting the Day of Week to zero or setting the Date to February 30th Addressing Modes and File Types are shown in the following table CPW Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Pldrese c Mode Level al 3 Parameter E E e E z ec S 75 2 8 5s OQ is ciooegger rIzmszmEkr uoeooEB5gslst elem le Els
33. e RAM integrity test failed e FLASH integrity test failed MicroLogix 1200 only 0002 UNEXPECTED RESET e The controller was unexpectedly Non User e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and reset due to a noisy environment using surge suppressors in your or internal hardware failure controller s User Manual e he default program is loaded e Verify battery is connected MicroLogix MicroLogix 1500 only 1500 only e Retentive Data is lost See page e Contact your local Rockwell Automation 401 MicroLogix 1200 only representative if the error persists 0003 MEMORY MODULE Memory module memory error This Non User Re program the memory module If the error USER PROGRAM IS ferror can also occur when going to persists replace the memory module CORRUPT the Run mode 0004 MEMORY INTEGRITY While the controller was powered Non User e Cycle power on your unit Then ERROR up ROM or RAM became corrupt re download your program and start up your system e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controller s User Manual e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Error Code Hex 0005 Advisory Message RETENTIVE DATA IS LOST MicroLogix 1200 only Description Retentive Data is lost See page 401 Fault Classification Recoverable Fault Messages and Error Codes 415 Recommended Action Contact
34. ec a T n 3 t E 5 z m g la jo lg le _ z SIE l a lw 2 E e Is le ls s s lo o le z lua Bh mlt ala El E g e la E ia E m e Swi HFO e e e e e e e e Destination e o o e o Control 2 e e Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 210 File Instructions LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load LFL Instruction Type output F Load CEN gt Execution Time for the LFL Instruction ource N7 0 um w r DN 5 Controller Data Size When Rung Is ontro 2 Length 1 lt CEM 2 True False Position i MicroLogix 1200 word 25 5 uS 10 4 us long word 31 6 us 10 4 us MicroLogix 1500 word 22 2 us 9 7 us long word 27 4 us 9 7 us On a false to true rung transition the LFL instruction loads words or long words into a user created file called a LIFO stack This instruction s counterpart LIFO unload LFU is paired with a given LFL instruction to remove elements from the LIFO stack Instruction parameters have been programmed in the L
35. 198 Move Instructions Mask Example Word Addressing Level Word Value in Value in Binary Hexadecimal 15114 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 Value in Destination FFFF 1 41 41 41 11 11 1171111 Before Move Source Value 5555 0 110 1 0 1 0 1 01110111011 Mask FOFO 1 11 11 11 10 0 0 0 111 10 10 0 0 Value in Destination 5F5F 0 1 J0 11 11 11 1111 011 111 1 After Move e Valid constants for the mask are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word The mask is displayed as a hexadecimal unsigned value from 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFE Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table MVM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 5 Address Data Files Function Files 2 Address Level gt Mode P Parameter E g je T a Eels is 5 E a a a oT e ls g To 5o E o s oa a je R l l z E i z la la 3 E Ie ls e ls Je o l lv la k lz w BIS lt E 2 El a amp Es e g8 le la E l 2 l ls fa Source e e e e e e e e e e e Mask e e e e e e e e e e e Destination ele e o o ele ele ele 1 The ST file is not valid for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series A processors 2 3 See Imp
36. 412 System Status File Notes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Identifying Controller Faults Appendix D Fault Messages and Error Codes This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller Topics include identifying controller faults contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance While a program is executing a fault may occur within the operating system or yout program When a fault occurs you have various options to determine what the fault is and how to correct it This section describes how to clear faults and provides a list of possible advisory messages with recommended corrective actions Automatically Clearing Faults You can automatically clear a fault by cycling power to the controller when the Fault Override at Power Up bit S 1 8 is set in the status file You can also configure the controller to clear faults and go to RUN evety time the controller is power cycled This is a feature that OEMs can build into their equipment to allow end users to reset the controller If the controller faults it can be reset by simply cycling power to the machine To accomplish this set the following bits in the status file e S2 1 8 Fault Override at Power up e S2 1 12 Mode Behavior If the fault condition still exists after cycling power the controller re enters the fault mode For more information on status bits see System Status File on page 389 TIP You can declare your own application specific
37. Hsc PTO Pw stl Ell H EN 4 Catalog Number Integer H SAS Series L REV Revision L FT Functionality Type LMP Module Present 0 LWP Write Protect Indicator L FO Fault Override H LPC Load Program Compare L LE Load On Error L L Load Always L MB Made Behavior Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Function Files 61 The parameters and their valid ranges are shown in the table below MMI Function File Parameters Feature Address DataFormat Type UserProgram Access MP Module Present MMI 0 MP binary bit status read only WP Write Protect MMI 0 WP binary bit control read only FO Fault Override MMI 0 FO binary bit control read only LPC Program Compare MMEO LPC binary bit control read only LE Load On Error MMI 0 LE binary bit control read only LA Load Always MMI 0 LA binary bit control read only MB Mode Behavior MMI 0 MB binary bit control read only FT Functionality Type The LSB of this word identifies the type of module installed e 1 Memory Module MM1 2 Real Time Clock Module RTC 3 Memory and Real Time Clock Module MM1RTC e 4 Memory Module MM2 5 Memory and Real Time Clock Module MM2RTC MP Module Present The MP Module Present bit can be used in the user program to determine when a memory module is present on the controller This bit is updated once p
38. Place the PID instruction in the MANUAL mode then place the processor in the RUN mode While monitoring the PID display adjust the process manually by writing to the CO percent value When you feel that you have the process under control manually place the PID instruction in the AUTO mode Adjust the gain while observing the relationship of the output to the setpoint over time When you notice that the process is oscillating above and below the setpoint in an even manner record the time of 1 cycle That is obtain the natural period of the process Natural Period 4x deadtime Record the gain value Return to the MANUAL mode stop the process if necessary Set the loop update time and STI time interval if applicable to a value of 5 to 10 times faster than the natural period For example if the cycle time is 20 seconds and you choose to set the loop update time to 10 times faster than the natural rate set the loop update time to 200 which would result in a 2 second rate Set the gain K value to 1 2 the gain needed to obtain the natural period of the process For example if the gain value recorded in step 9 was 80 set the gain to 40 Set the reset term T to approximate the natural period If the natural period is 20 seconds as in our example you would set the reset term to 3 0 3 minutes per repeat approximates 20 seconds Now set the rate Ty equal to a value 1 8 that of the reset term Fo
39. Reply Msg Timeout x20 ms 1 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms fo Reply Msg Timeout 20 ms 1 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 Cancel Apply Help Cancel Apply Help When the system driver is DF1 Half Duplex Master the following parameters can be changed DF1 Half Duplex Master Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Channel 1 only Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Channel 0 0 1200 amp LSP MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Channel 1 only 1 LRP Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 192K Parity none even none Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 255 is reserved for broadcast Control Line No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking Full Duplex Modem RTS on No Handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC Duplicate Packet enabled disabled enabled Detect Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions if the sender s Message Retries are set greater than 0 RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments
40. SWP Source ST10 1 DATA O0 13 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SWP Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B and higher 13 7 us 2 2 us swapped word 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B and higher 11 7 us 1 8 us swapped word 10 0 us Use the SWP instruction to swap the low and high bytes of a specified number of words in a bit integer or string file The SWP instruction has 2 operands e Source is the word address containing the words to be swapped Length is the number of words to be swapped regardless of the file type The addtess is limited to integer constants For bit and integer filetypes the length range is 1 to 128 For the string filetype the length range is 1 to 41 Note that this instruction is restricted to a single string element and cannot cross a string element boundary Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table SWP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 1 Data Files Function Files Address Address Level gt Mode o a Parameter E Ei 2 E e S t ec amp a E S m 3 t5 E 5 E m g la le B e e z E lt z a 2 3 E Je l je s ls o m a la h E a E 2 E5 la a Ejs E 2 jS ja
41. Setpoint Scaling PD10 0 SC binary bit 0 or 1 control read write The SC bit 1s cleared when setpoint scaling values ate specified Loop Update Too Fast TF Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access TF Loop Update Too jPD10 0 TF binary bit 0 or 1 status read write Fast The TF bit is set by the PID algorithm if the loop update time specified cannot be achieved by the controller due to scan time limitations Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 266 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 If this bit is set correct the problem by updating your PID loop at a slower rate or move the PID instruction to an STI interrupt routine Reset and rate gains will be in error 1f the instruction operates with this bit set Derivative Action Bit DA Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access DA Derivative Action Bit PD10 0 DA binary bit Oor1 control read write When set 1 the derivative rate action DA bit causes the derivative rate calculation to be evaluated on the error instead of the process variable PV When clear 0 this bit allows the derivative rate calculation to be evaluated where the derivative is performed on the PV CV Upper Limit Alarm UL Tuning Parameter Address Data Format
42. TIP The ONS instruction for the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 provides the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers The ONS instruction is a retentive input instruction that triggers an event to occur one time After the false to true rung transition the ONS instruction remains true for one program scan The output then turns OFF and remains OFF until the logic preceding the ONS instruction is false this re activates the ONS instruction The ONS Storage Bit is the bit address that remembers the rung state from the previous scan This bit is used to remember the false to true rung transition ONS Instruction Operation Rung Transition Storage Bit Rung State after Execution false to true one scan storage bit is set true true to true storage bit remains set false true to false false to false storage bit is cleared false Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table ONS Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 gt Address Data Files Function Files Address Level 2 Mode o Parameter E s sg E z E o S s 5 9 e ES Q 2 8 Ja je E S a a 1 o o 2 T e Oo ao o 9 o S fb goo E e 3 Is Je Lr a e o E ir m c c fm 5 2 o v io le le iL lo io E le le la la a a S a IS a
43. These bits can be used in the control program for error detection e Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 U0 through U3 and the CJC sensor U4 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection MicroLogix 1500 If the application requires more I O than the embedded I O that the controller Compact Expansion 0 provides you can attach I O modules These additional modules are called expansion I O Expansion 1 0 Modules Compact I O Bulletin 1769 is used to provide discrete and analog inputs and outputs and in the future specialty modules For the MicroLogix 1500 you can attach up to 16 additional I O modules The number of modules that can be attached is dependent on the amount of power required by the I O modules See the MicroLogix 1500 User Manual publication 1764 UM001 for more information on valid configurations TIP Visit the MicroLogix web site http www ab com micrologix for the MicroLogix 1500 Expansion 1 0 System Qualifier Addressing Expansion 1 0 The figure below shows the addressing for the MicroLogix 1500 and its I O The expansion I O is addressed as slots 1 through 16 the controller s embedded I O is addressed as slot 0 Power supplies and cables are not counted as slots but 1 Limit of 8 modules for Series A Base Unit Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 1 0 Configuration 25 must be added to the RSLogix 500 project in the I O configuration Modul
44. e 17585 Quick Start Pulse Width Modulation PWM on page 462 17586 Quick Start High Speed Counter HSC on page 463 e 17605 Quick Start Message MSG on page 468 17653 Quick Start Selectable Timed Interrupt STI on page 471 e 17655 Quick Start Real Time Clock RTC on page 473 e 17657 Quick Start Trim Pots on page 475 e 17712 Quick Start User Interrupt Disable UID on page 477 18689 Quick Start RTC Synchronization Between Controllers on page 478 18728 Quick Start Data Logging DLG on page 481 TIP The PWM function is only available when using the BXB models of the MicroLogix 1200 or 1500 Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 v4 00 or later and select the PTO tab then select the next to PTO 0 See Below 3 Function Files LOL x Hsc PTO pwm sti jen Atc par TP MMi alel BEDU a 1 IT DUT Output DN Done DS Decelerating Status HRS Run Status HAS Accelerating Status H RP Ramp Profile HIS Idle Status i ED Error Detected Status NS Normal Operation Status JPS Jog Pulse Status H JES Jog Continuous Status HJP Jog Pulse HJC Jog Continuous H EH Enable Hard Stop H EN Enable Status follows rung state ER Error Code DF Output Frequency Hz OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz JF Jog Frequency Hz H TOP Total Output Pulses To Be Generated H OPP Output Pulses Produced ADP A
45. only with control line set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 434 Protocol Configuration DF1 Half Duplex Master Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Channel 1 only Parameter Options Programming Software Default RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments only with control line set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Message Retries 0 to 255 3 Specifies the number of times the master device attempts to re send a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the slave device For use in noisy environments where acknowledgements may become corrupted in transmission Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from transmit to receive mode When the Control Line is set to Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of
46. s s s te e ya e ta 4 82 Chapter 5 High Speed Counter iy Sry ewan cte A do e abuti Maca ie 5 87 Programmable Limit Switch Overview visi ii uc E x da 5 87 High Speed Counter HSC Function Pile is 22er ec 5 87 High Speed Counter Function File Sub Elements Summary 5 89 HSC Function Pile Sub Eleme nts 5 25 0000 t Rut 5 90 HSL High Speed Counter Loads su wes tower ae tee serene 5 110 RAC Reset Accumulated Value vcs oe en Ps 5 111 Programmable Limit Switch PES File us cei ew cack bak ees 5 112 Chapter 6 PTO Pulse Train Outp t ii ais eov atc oe A eet s eee AL i 6 119 Pulse Tr m Qutput Funciones wince e cce eet d e 6 119 Pulse Train Outputs PTO Function File oer errem 6 123 Pulse Train Output Function File Sub Elements Summaty 6 124 PWM Pulse Width Modulation sees 6 137 PWM Function 1 Saas px pias Ra Wr S ERROR Foxy TE REEL 6 137 Pulse Width Modulation PWM Function File suus 6 138 Pulse Width Modulated Function File Elements Summary 6 139 Chapter 7 XIC Examine if Closed AIO s Examine 1t Opt mp ys ET Ee eS aca EO RE us 7 147 OTE Output Buetelze sce ie trepido n vt bee ERSTE 7 148 OTL Output Latch OTU Output Unlatch Jis nos ojo Hes Ha S EE RD 7 149 ONS One o Dob wa rsen vb PP EINE RU TU PCIE TTE RE 7 150 OSR One Shot Rising OSF OneShot Falling 2s 295 ede Fa ee ooo qa 7 151 Chapter 8 Timer Instructions Overview ncc cade osea qupd tals AE Ead 8 153 TON Ab iver
47. www rockwellautomation com support americas phone en html or contact Canada your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A S Kar Plaza Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Autom
48. 2 Mode wn o E Parameter E E 2 E S jo a o a iz S c S su TEE E E e g jo S 9 ls lx S E V e f j cL A o a dE E o m le 2 lu 4 E la amp rjj a S la e S S ja a JE a S S lao Source e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e 2 1 See Important note abo 2 See TOD Instruction Des t indirect addressing ination Operand below IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files TOD Instruction Destination Operand The destination can be either a word address or math register The maximum values permissible once converted to BCD are e 9999 if the destination is a word address allowing only a 4 digit BCD value e 32768 if the destination is the math register allowing a 5 digit BCD value with the lower 4 digits stored in 13 and the high order digit in 14 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 188 Conversion Instructions If the destination is the math register it must be directly addressed as 8 13 S 13 is the only status file element that can be used Updates to Math Status Bits Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets 0 1 Overflow sets if BCD result is larger than 9999 On overflow the minor
49. 202 File Instructions Destination Source Word to File This instruction uses the following operands e Source The source operand is the address of the value or constant used to fill the destination The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word or any IEEE 754 32 bit value TIP A constant cannot be used as the source in a timer T counter C or control R file Destination The starting destination address where the data is written Length The length operand contains the number of elements The length can range from 1 to 128 word 1 to 64 long word or 1 to 42 3 word element such as counter TIP The source and destination operands must be of the same file type unless they are bit B and integer N Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table FLL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 E TOP Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level 2 Mode B 3 Parameter E 8 g E e S t ec amp e S a t E 5 E e a g ln jo l jo l l l E e l la a IE e 5 I 5 lE o lv a ke lz amp ls l E la E l2 Eb E amp I la amp l2 le la E le 2 ls Sla Source e e e e
50. 60H Target node cannot respond because file is protected 70H PCCC Description Processor is in Program Mode 80H PCCC Description Compatibility mode file missing or communication zone problem 81H Modbus Error 1 Illegal Function 82H Modbus Error 2 Illegal Data Address 83H Modbus Error 3 Illegal Data Value 84H Modbus Error 4 Slave Device Failure 85H Modbus Error 5 Acknowledge 86H Modbus Error 6 Slave Device Busy 87H Modbus Error 7 Negative Acknowledge 88H Modbus Error 8 Memory Parity Error 89H Modbus Error Non standard reply Actual code returned can be found in the upper byte of sub element 22 90H PCCC Description Remote station cannot buffer command BOH PCCC Description Remote station problem due to download COH PCCC Description Cannot execute command due to active IPBs DOH One of the following e No IP address configured for the network e Bad command unsolicited message error e Bad address unsolicited message error e No privilege unsolicited message error D1H Maximum connections used no connections available D2H Invalid internet address or host name D3H No such host Cannot communicate with the name server D4H Connection not completed before user specified timeout D5H Connection timed out by the network Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Communications Instructions 353 Error Code Descri
51. ABS instruction 10 176 absolute value instruction 10 176 ACB instruction 20 293 accuracy timer 8 154 ACI instruction 20 294 ACL instruction 20 284 ACN instruction 20 295 active nodes status C 403 ADD instruction 10 174 address 1 489 Addressing considerations 437 addressing direct addressing 4 83 1 0 1 24 immediate addressing 4 63 indirect addressing 4 83 indirect addressing of a bit 4 85 indirect addressing of a file 4 84 indirect addressing of a word 4 84 modes 4 82 using in line indirection 20 305 AEX instruction 20 296 AHL instruction 20 298 AIC instruction 20 286 AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1 489 Allen Bradley contacting for assistance D 421 allow future access setting 2 53 AND instruction 12 192 application 1 489 ARD instruction 20 299 arithmetic flags C 390 ARL instruction 20 301 ASC instruction 20 302 ASCII definition 1 489 ASCII character set 20 307 ASCII clear buffers instruction 20 284 ASCII control data file 20 283 ASCII file 20 282 ASCII handshake lines instruction 20 298 ASCII instruction error codes 20 306 ASCII instructions 20 279 error codes 20 306 status bits 20 282 20 283 timing diagram 20 305 Index ASCII integer to string instruction 20 286 ASCII number of characters in buffer instruction 20 293 ASCII protocol parameters 20 281 ASCII read characters instruction 20 299 ASCII read line instruction 20 301 ASCII string compare instruction 20 304 ASCII string concatenate 20 295 ASCII stri
52. ATTENTION If any other software package such as RSLINX has control of The Data Logging utility is the only supported method for retrieving data that has been stored in the processor 1 Install the DLOG utility found at http www ab com plclogic micrologix 2 Execute DLCA1764 EXE 3 Configure Port Baud Rate and DF1 Node as shown below f Data Log Monitor 21 xl MicroLogix Data Log Capture Application Copyright 2000 Rockwell Automation Released Version 3 0 0 1 Settings for ML1500 LAP Processor Port Baud Rate DF1 Node cow 18200 E Connect Quit 4 Click Connect FYI By default the MicroLogix 1500 communications are configured for 19200 baud If using defaults select 19200 above otherwise select the baud rate configured in the MicroLogix Channel Configuration Screen If a correct configuration has been selected the utility software will indicate that it has connected to the processor as shown below f Connected to DATA LOG zl x Connected to DATA_LOG i Read Status 5 Click Read Status once a valid connection is established Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 485 The DLOG utility will now retrieve the status information from the ML1500 processor Queue Allocated Recorded Disconnect Read Status Read Log In this example you can see that Que 0 has 100 records allocated and 5 recorded IMPORTANT
53. Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access Tl Reset Term T PD10 0 Ti word 0 to 32 767 control read write INT Reset T word 4 is the Integral gain ranging from 0 to 3276 7 when RG 0 or 327 67 when RG 1 minutes per repeat Set the reset time equal to the natural period measured in the above gain calibration A value of 1 adds the maximum integral term into the PID equation TIP Reset term is affected by the reset and gain range RG bit For information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 265 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 262 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Rate Term Ty Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access TD Rate Term Ty PD 10 0 TD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write Rate Tg word 5 is the Derivative term The adjustment range is 0 to 327 67 minutes Set this value to 1 8 of the integral gain Tj TIP This word is not effected by the reset and gain range RG bit For information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 265 Time Mode TM Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access TM Time Mode PD10 0 TM binary 0or1 control read write The time mode bit specifies when the PID is in timed mode 1 or STI mode 0 This bit can be set or cleared by instructions in
54. END OF SCAN DETECTED set at the end of scan error e Enter the status file display in your programming software and clear the fault e Enter the Run mode Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Fault Messages and Error Codes 417 Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0021 EXPANSION POWER A power failure is present on the Non User Re apply power to the expansion I O bank FAIL EPF expansion I O bank See Important note below MicroLogix 1500 only This error code is present when the controller is powered and power is not applied to the expansion 1 0 bank This is a self clearing error code When power is re applied to the expansion 1 0 bank the fault is cleared See Important note below If this fault occurs while the system is in the RUN mode the controller faults When expansion 1 0 power is restored the controller clears the fault and re enters the RUN mode IMPORTANT If you change the mode switch while this fault is present the controller may not re enter the RUN mode when expansion I O power is restored If an EPF condition is present and expansion I O power is OK toggle the mode switch to PROGRAM and then to RUN The fault should clear and the controller enters the RUN mode TIP This error may also occur if there is a hardware failure on e Cycle power on your unit the bus with either a MicroLogix 1200 or MicroLogix e Co
55. Limit Output CV Output Min Cv j 0 nE u Deadband D ScaledErorSE 0 sP 0 Feed Forward Bias fo EmorCode 0 PY 0 DN 0 Cancel Help EN 0 Publication 1762 RMO001H EN P July 2014 256 Process Control Instruction Input Parameters The table below shows the input parameter addresses data formats and types of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter Input Parameter Descriptions Address Data Format Range Type User For More Program Information Access SPS Setpoint PD10 0 SPS word INT 0 to 16383 control read write 256 PV Process Variable user defined word INT 0 to 16383 control read write 256 MAXS Setpoint Maximum PD10 0 MAXS word INT 32 768 to 32 767 control read write 257 MINS Setpoint Minimum PD10 0 MINS word INT 32 768 to 32 767 control read write 257 OSP Old Setpoint Value PD10 0 0SP word INT 32 768 to 32 767 status read only 257 OL Output Limit PD10 0 0L binary 1 enabled control read write 258 0 disabled CVH Control Variable High PD10 0 CVH word INT 0 to 100 control read write 258 Limit CVL Control Variable Low Limit PD10 0 CVL word INT 0 to 100 control read write 258 1 The range listed in the table is for when scaling is not enabled With scaling the range is from minimum scaled MINS to maximum scaled MAXS Setpo
56. Negate NEG 0 0 2 9 3 0 0 0 12 1 3 0 Not Equal NEQ 1 1 1 3 1 3 2 7 2 5 2 5 Not NOT 0 0 2 4 2 5 0 0 9 2 2 5 One Shot ONS 1 9 2 6 3 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Or OR 0 0 2 2 2 8 0 0 9 2 3 0 One Shot Falling OSF 37 2 8 5 4 Long Word addressing level does not apply One Shot Rising OSR 3 0 3 4 5 4 Output Enable OTE 1 1 1 4 1 6 Output Latch OTL 0 0 1 0 0 6 Output Unlatch OTU 0 0 1 1 0 6 Proportional Integral Derivative PID 11 0 295 8 24 Pulse Train Output PTO 24 4 85 6 1 9 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 24 7 1266 13 Reset Accumulator RAC Word addressing level does not apply 10 0 21 2 2 0 1 0 Refresh REF 0 0 see p 380 0 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Reset RES 0 0 5 9 1 0 Return RET 0 0 1 0 0 3 Real Time Clock Adjust RTA 34 4 7 556 2 false to true transition Retentive Timer On RTO 24 18 0 34 Subroutine SBR 1 0 1 0 0 3 Scale SCL 0 0 10 5 25 Scale with Parameters SCP 0 0 31 5 3 8 0 0 52 2 6 0 Sequencer Compare sac 74 23 5 3 9 74 26 3 44 Sequencer Load SOL 7 0 21 7 3 4 74 24 3 3 9 Sequencer Output S00 74 232 3 9 71 26 6 44 Square Root SOR 0 0 26 0 1 5 0 0 30 9 2 5 Selectable Timed Interrupt Start STS 0 0 57 5 1 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply Subtract SUB 0 0 3 4 3 3 0 0 12 9 3 5 Suspend SUS n a n a 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Service Communications SVC 0 0 208 1 6 0 word Swap SWP 0 0 137 22 5 swapped word Temporary End TND 0 0 0 9 0 5 Pu
57. O cable is configured in the user program and a cable is physicallypresent but the types do not match cable that is not present e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode or e Add the missing cable e Cycle power Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Fault Messages and Error Codes 421 Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex xxgBi2 EXPANSION 1 0 e Either an expansion I O power Non User e Correct the user program to eliminate a POWER SUPPLY supply is configured in the user power supply that is not present CONFIGURATION program but no power supply is Be ile reload th dent MISMATCH ERROR present or a E NE van expansion I O power supply e With power removed add the missing is configured in the user program power supply and a power supply is physically present but the types do not match xxgc 2 EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion I O object i e cable Non User e Correct the user program 1 0 OBJECT TYPE power supply or module in the user configuration so that the object types MISMATCH program I O configuration is not the match the actual configuration and same object type as is physically e Re compile reload the program and enter present the Run mode Or e Correct the actual configuration to match the user program I O configuration e Cycle power 0x1F39 INVALID STRING The first word of string data contains Recoverable Check the first word
58. Ona ela oe aeos ance e e e ipe loe edo 8 155 TOF Timet OT Delay oc122 dria icd tede adim nies 8 156 RTO Retentive Timer On Delay coe io oce ere tung Ret rh 8 156 How Counters Worl 22 esposte oec a A a C oc ROPA d RO 8 157 CTU Count Up CTI oun DOWN us eto i qd teo letta def ua ar M tae 8 159 RES RSSeto esc ra Repo M UEM use es C ER Ue hui B gu A tut lege 8 160 Table of Contents 7 Chapter 9 Compare Instructions Using the Compare Instructions ix ei Too ce tob c deed Nena 9 163 EQU Equal NEOs NOt Equal xe Su quos eet x PAS 9 164 GRT Greater Than DES se Dese TA eos ot t a Hes Aet c afi teta aa 9 165 GEQ Greater Than or Equal To LEQ Less Than or Equal Tou s 4 peer eme Pra o e ER ad 9 165 MEQ Mask Compare fot Equal iiss yon ey erre eens 9 166 UM mi Testi oce do eo dite RUE e eU E eA 9 167 Chapter 10 Math Instructions Using the Math Instructions oer e Ce d 10 169 Updates to Math Status Bits 5i c d Ente bI ere eem 10 170 Using the Floating Point F Data File asda ars erroe tins 10 171 ADD Add SUD SUD acc Edo eee x a SUR SH Sens ed CE TERES SS 10 174 MUL Multiply DIV Dividere ines tdou nienn kiea nae iea ee pa 10 175 NEG Nesate od ve I be d ge ig dc f EEE qu Ond Me 10 175 CER Globo pde te ura Peter dato poete Peel ntes 10 176 ABS Absoldte Value a itur oink ES E IE RES 10 176 SCL Seile tested a eee ak RERO ipa ta EA 10 177 SCP Scale with Parametets 5 281 o ux dace pi Lou ES 10 178 SOR DCU ALE
59. S le JE SIE S Gl ISISIE 1S Sla s Ia S l Sia Source ele e ele e eejej lejej e eje e ele e Destination e e ele e elelelelele ele Length 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 TheF file is valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series C and higher controllers only IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output Execution Time for the COP Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 19 08 us 0 8 us word 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 15 9 us 0 67 us word 0 0 us File Instructions 201 The COP instruction copies blocks of data from one location into another COP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 ZA Address Data Files Function Files 2 Address Level gt Mode S Parameter E g 2 E e E E ec a ym B S 778s5 le Els c g jo 18 le j l E IE l a lw 14 JE j sii s s o l lv lm le l lu b a S la amp 2 F IG Elas e EJs je la E Ja 2 la js e Source ele elelelelele Ere Destination ele elelelelele PES Length e 1 The ST file is not valid for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series A processors 2 See Important note about
60. Source B I 0 0 Dest N72 0 0 MOV MOVE eea Source I 0 0 0 Dest N71 0 The two rungs shown cause the controller to verify that the value I 0 remains the same for two consecutive scans before it executes the FRD This prevents the FRD from converting a non BCD value during an input value change TIP To convert numbers larger than 9999 BCD the source must be the Math Register S 13 You must reset the Minor Error Bit S 5 0 to prevent an error Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 186 Conversion Instructions Example The BCD value 32 760 in the math register is converted and stored in N7 0 The maximum soutce value is 32767 BCD FRD From BCD Source 8 13 00032760 Dest N7 0 32760 14 13 0000 0000 0000 0011 0010 0111 0110 0000 15 0 15 0 5 digit BCD 0 0 0 3 2 7 6 0 3 2 7 6 O0 N7 0Decimal 0111 1111 1111 1000 You should convert BCD values to integer before you manipulate them in your ladder program If you do not convett the values the controller manipulates them as integers and their value may be lost TIP If the math register S 13 and S 14 is used as the source for the FRD instruction and the BCD value does not exceed four digits be sure to dear word 8 14 before executing the FRD instruction If 14 is not cleared and a value is contained in this word from another math instruction located elsewhere in the program an incorrect decimal
61. System Overhead Add this number if your system includes a 1762 RTC or 1762 MMI1RIC 100 us Housekeeping Overhead 210 us System Overhead Sub Total Totals Sum of all sub totals Multiply by Communications Multiplier from Table Total Estimated Scan Time 1 Communications Overhead is a function of the device connected to the controller This will not occur every scan Communications Multiplier Table Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Multiplier at Various Baud Rates Protocol 38 4K 19 2K 9 6K 48K 24K 12K 600 300 Inactive DF1 Full Duplex 1 50 1 27 1 16 1 12 1 10 1 09 1 09 1 08 1 00 DF1 Half Duplex 1 21 1 14 1 10 1 09 1 08 1 08 1 08 1 07 1 01 DH 485 N A 1 16 1 11 N A N A N A N A N A 1 10 at 19 2K 1 07 at 9 6K Modbus 1 22 1 13 1 10 1 09 1 09 1 09 1 09 1 09 1 00 ASCII 1 55 1 33 1 26 1 22 1 21 1 19 1 19 1 18 1 01 Shut Down 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 Inactive is defined as No Messaging and No Data Monitoring For DH 485 protocol inactive means that the controller is not connected to a network Programming Instructions Memory usage and Execution Time MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Appendix B MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time This appendix contains a complete list of the MicroLogix 1500 programming instructions The list shows
62. The UIF instruction is used to flush remove pending interrupts from the system selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 242 Using Interrupts Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 corresponding flush bits Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UIF Instruction Interrupt Element Decimal Corresponding Value Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Evnt amp bies Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 HSC High Speed Counter HSCI 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero 1 The MicroLogix 1200 has one HSC Interrupt HSCO The MicroLogix 1500 has two HSCO and HSC1 To flush interrupt s 1 Select which interrupts you want to flush 2 Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected 3 Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt 4 Enter the sum into the UIF instruction For example to disable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 EI Event 1 32 EII Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value 3 Function Files usc ero STi en H PFN Program File Number ER Error Code HUI User
63. Underflow defines the lower count limit for the counter If the counter s accumulated value decrements past the value specified in this variable an underflow interrupt is generated When the underflow interrupt is generated the HSC sub system resets the accumulated value to the overflow value and the counter then begins counting from the overflow value counts are not lost in this transition The user can specify any value for the underflow position provided it is less than the overflow value and falls between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 To load data into the underflow variable the control program must toggle low to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 109 TIP Data loaded into the overflow variable must be greater than the data resident in the high preset HSC 0 HIP or an HSC error is generated Output Mask Bits OMB Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access OMB Output Mask Bits HSC 0 0MB word 16 bit binary control read only The OMB Output Mask Bits define which outputs on the controller can be directly controlled by the high speed counter The HSC sub system has the ability to directly without control program interaction turn outputs ON or OFF based on the HSC accumulator rea
64. Unload Bit i R6 0 10 If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan you must create a loop in your application using the JMP LBL and CTU instructions This instruction uses the following operands e File The file operand is the address of the bit array that is to be manipulated Control The control operand is the address of the BSL s control element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Size of bit array number of bits Word 2 not used 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the bit array has shifted one position 3 ER Error Bit when set indicates that the instruction detected an error such as entering a negative number for the length or source operand 4 UL Unload Bit is the instruction s output Avoid using the UL unload bit when the ER error bit is set e Bit Address The source is the address of the bit to be transferred into the bit array at the first lowest bit position Length The length operand contains the length of the bit array in bits The valid data range for length is from 0 to 2048 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 204 File Instructions BSL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table For definitions of the terms used in
65. been assigned a unique single byte code value that appears in the MSB of the second word of the control block The error code is also displayed on the PID Setup Screen in RSLogix 500 Error Code Description of Error Condition or Conditions Corrective Action 11H 1 Loop update time D gt 1024 Change loop update time 0 lt D lt 1024 2 Loop update time D 0 12H Proportional gain K 0 Change proportional gain K to 0 Ke 13H Integral gain reset T lt 0 Change integral gain reset T to 0 T 14H Derivative gain rate Ty lt 0 Change derivative gain rate Tyto 0 lt Ty 15H Feed Forward Bias FF is out of range Change FF so it is within the range 16383 to 16383 23H Scaled setpoint min Change scaled setpoint min MinS to MinS gt Scaled setpoint max Maxs 32768 MinS MaxS 432767 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Process Control Instruction 269 Error Code Description of Error Condition or Conditions Corrective Action 31H If you are using setpoint scaling and If you are using setpoint scaling then change MinS gt setpoint SP gt MaxS or the setpoint SP to MinS lt SP lt Maxs or If you are not using setpoint scaling and If you are not using setpoint scaling then change 0 gt setpoint SP gt 16383 the setpoint SP to 0 lt SP lt 16383 then during the initial execution of the PID loop this error occurs and bit 11 of word 0 of the con
66. file is a read only file in the controller that contains information on the status of the embedded and local expansion I O The data file is structured as 1 0 Status File Word Description 0 Embedded Module Error Code Always zero 1to6 Expansion Module Error Code The word number corresponds to the module s slot number Refer to the I O module s documentation for specific information MicroLogix 1200 1 to 18 Expansion Module Error Code The word number corresponds to the module s slot number Refer to the 1 0 module s documentation for specific information MicroLogix 1500 1 1t08 for Series A Base Units Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 80 Function Files Notes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Instruction Set Chapter Programming Instructions Overview The following table shows the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 programming instructions listed within their functional group Functional Group Description Page High Speed Counter HSL RAC The high speed counter instructions along with the HSC function file allow you to monitor and control the high speed outputs Generally used with DC inputs MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP only High Speed Outputs PTO PWM The high speed output instructions along with the PTO and PWM function files allow you 119 to monitor and control the high speed o
67. if bit S 4 7 is monitored in an SLC 500 then that bit will be on for 1 28 seconds and off for 1 28 seconds for a total cycle time of 2 56 seconds If bit S 4 7 is monitored in a MicroLogix 1500 then that bit will be on for 0 0128 seconds and off for 0 0128 seconds for a total cycle time of 0 0256 seconds Minor Error Bits Overflow Trap Bit Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 0 binary Oor1 status read write If this bit is ever set 1 upon execution of the END or TND instruction a major errot 0020H is generated To avoid this type of major error from occurring examine the state of this bit following a math instruction ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG SCL TOD or FRD take appropriate action and then clear bit S 5 0 using an OTU instruction with S 5 0 Control Register Error Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 2 binary Oor1 status read write The LFU LFL FFU FFL BSL BSR SQO SQC and SQL instructions are capable of generating this error When bit 5 2 is set 1 it indicates that the error bit of a control word used by the instruction has been set If this bit is ever set upon execution of the END or TND instruction major error 0020H is generated To avoid this type of major error from occurring examine the state of this bit following a control register instruction take appropriate action and then clear bit 5 2 using an OTU inst
68. o LZ I m is lests l N zm lt e A ha E E o or on fe fe fu S fe be e I fo S SS S Ela S lo S la Counter e e Preset e e Accumulator 1 Valid for Counter Files only Timer and Counter Instructions 159 Using Counter File Control and Status Bits Like the accumulated value the counter status bits are also retentive until reset as desctibed below CTU Instruction Counter Control and Status Bits Counter Word 0 Data File 5 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 12 C5 0 0V OV overflow Is Set When the accumulated value wraps from 432 767 And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU indicator to 32 768 and continues to count up instruction is enabled bit 13 C5 0 DN DN done accumulated value preset value e accumulated value preset value or indicator e a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled bit15 C5 0 CU CU countup rung state is true e rung state is false enable e a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled CTD Instruction Counter Control and Status Bits Counter Word 0 Data File 5 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 11 C5 0 UN UN underflow Is Set When the accumulated value
69. or file which is applied to both file and source When mask bits are set to 1 data is allowed to pass through for comparison When mask bits are reset to 0 the data is masked does not pass through to for comparison The immediate data ranges for mask are from 0 to OxFFFF or 0 to OxFFFFFFFF TIP If mask is direct or indirect the position selects the location in the specified file e Source This is the value that is compared to file Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 wotds Word 0 not used Word 1 Length contains the number of steps in the sequencer reference file Word2 Position the current position in the sequence 1 2 3 4 EN Enable Bit is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled DN Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false ER Error Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set FD Found bit is set when the status of all non masked bits in the source address match those of the word in the sequencer reference file This bit is assessed each time the SQC instruction is evalu
70. the controller may have hundreds or thousands of scans within each of the stages illustrated in the examples Conditions Required to Start the PTO The following conditions must exist to start the PTO e The PTO instruction must be in an idle state For idle state behavior all of the following conditions must be met Jog Pulse JP bit must be off Jog Continuous JC bit must be off Enable Hard Stop EH bit must be off Normal Operation NS bit must be off The output cannot be forced e The rung it is on must transition from a False state 0 to a True state 1 Momentary Logic Enable Example In this example the rung state is a momentary or transitional type of input This means that the false to true rung transition enables the PTO instruction and then returns to a false state prior to the PTO instruction completing its operation If a transitional input to the PTO instruction is used the Done DN bit turns on when the instruction completes but only remains on until the next time the PTO instruction is scanned in the user program The structure of the control program Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 122 Using High Speed Outputs Stage Rung State Sub Elements Normal Operation NO determines when the DN bit goes off So to detect when the PTO instruction completes its output you can monitor the Done DN Idle ID or Normal Operation NO status bits y EE ddp E Im gba
71. 0 1 us DIV word 10 3 us 0 0 us long word 36 7 us 0 0 us Use the MUL instruction to multiply one value by another value Source A x Source B and place the result in the Destination Use the DIV instruction to divide one value by another value Source A Source B and place the result in the Destination If the Sources are single words and the Destination is directly addressed to 8 13 math register then the quotient is stored in S 14 and the remainder is stored in 8 13 If long words are used then the results are rounded Instruction Type output Execution Time for the NEG Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 2 9 us 0 0 us long word 12 1 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 1 9 us 0 0 us long word 10 4 us 0 0 us Use the NEG instruction to change the sign of the Source and place the result in the Destination Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 176 Math Instructions CLR Clear CLR Clear Dest N7 0 0 lt ABS Absolute Value ABS Absolute Value I Source N7 0 0 Dest N7 1 0 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the CLR Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 1 3 us 0 0 us long word 6 3 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 1 2 us 0 0 us long word 5 5 us 0 0 us Use the CLR instruction to set the Destination to a value of z
72. 1 B N 1 bit 1920 Modbus bit elements 120 commands 1 2 and 15 words Commands 1 and 2 are read only 15 is write only B N multi register 120 Modbus register elements commands 3 4 and 16 120 words Commands 3 and 4 are read only 16 is write only 1 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series C and later and 1500 Series C and later only Message Type must be 500CPU or PLC5 The Local File Type and Target File Type must both be Floating Point 2 MicroLogix 1200 Series C FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 Series C FRN 9 and higher Target Device Parameters 2101 General p This Controller Control Bits Communication Command 500CPU Read Ignore if timed out TO 0 Data Table Address Size in Elements Awaiting Execution EW 0 Channel ea Error ER 0 T Target Device Message done DN 0 Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST D Data Table Address Message Enabled EN o Local Node Addr dec 2 octal Local Remote r Error Error Code Hex 0 r Error Description No errors Message Timeout This value defines how long in seconds the message instruction has to complete its operation once it has started Timing begins when the false to true rung transition occurs enabling the message If the timeout period expires the message errors out The default value
73. 1 0 r w r w Ir w r w ir w r w jr w Ir w r w Ir w r w Ir w r w jr w r w r w Word r w read and write 1769 0B32 Output Data File For each module slot x word 0 in the output data file contains the control program s directed state of the discrete output points E Output Bit Position 15 14 13 T7 TT 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 hl 0 0 lr w frw r w r w rw Irw r w Irw fr w Jef r w rf Ir w nw r w r w 1 ir w r w r w r w Ir w r w r w r w Ir w Ir w r w Ir w TAN r w Ir w Ir w r w write 1 0 Configuration 29 Analog 1 0 Configuration 1769 IF4 Input Data File For each input module words 0 through 3 contain the analog values of the inputs Bit Position 1 0114 13 12 71 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 0 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 1 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 2 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 3 not used 3 82 81 SO UO 100 U1 01 U2 02 U3 O3 Setto 0 The bits are defined as follows e SGN Sign bit in two s complement format e Sx General status bits for channels 0 through 3 This bit is set 1 when an error over or under range exists for that channel e Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection Ox
74. 1 3 1 9 2 6 2 6 FIFO Load FFL 9 8 10 0 34 9 7 10 9 3 9 FIFO Unload FFU 97 27 7 0 65 3 4 9 7 29 4 1 25 long 3 4 word word Fill File FLL 0 0 12 1 0 43 12 0 0 0 12 3 0 8 long 2 5 word word Convert from BCD FRD 0 0 12 3 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Gray Code GCD 0 0 9 5 Greater Than or Equal To GEO 1 1 1 2 1 3 25 2 6 2 9 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 MicroLogix 1500 Controllers MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 383 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words Greater Than GRT 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 5 2 6 2 4 High Speed Load HSL 0 0 39 7 7 3 0 0 40 3 7 8 Immediate Input with Mask IIM 0 0 22 5 3 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply Interrupt Subroutine INT 1 0 1 0 0 3 Immediate Output with Mask I0M 0 0 19 4 3 0 Jump JMP 0 0 1 0 0 5 Jump to Subroutine JSR 0 0 8 0 1 5 Label LBL 1 0 1 0 0 5 Less Than or Equal To LEO 1 1 12 1 3 25 2 6 2 9 Less Than LES 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 5 2 6 2 9 LIFO Load LFL 97 22 2 34 9 7 27 4 39 LIFO Unload LFU 9 7 25 6 34 9 7 27 4 34 Limit LIM 5 3 5 5 2 3 11 7 12 2 40 Master Control Reset MC
75. 1 XIC instruction which has 1 operand consumes 1 user word 1 EQU instruction which has 2 operands consumes 2 user words 1 ADD instruction which has 3 operands consumes 3 user words e Function files do not consume user memory TIP Although the controller allows up to 256 elements in a file it may not actually be possible to create a file with that many elements due to the user memory size in the controller MicroLogix 1200 User Memory The MicroLogix 1200 controller supports 6K of memory Memory can be used for program files and data files The maximum data memory usage is 2K words as shown below 2 0K 0 5K oK Data Words 0K Program Words 4K 4 3K See MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time on page 375 to find the memory usage for specific instructions 1 These are approximate values For actual memory usage see the tables in Appendix A and B of this manual Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 46 Controller Memory and File Types Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 MicroLogix 1500 User Memory MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Processor The 1764 LSP processor supports over 7K of memory Memory can be used for program files and data files The maximum data memory usage is 4K words as shown below 2 e A Data Words e o A 0K Program Words 3 65K 4 35K MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor The 1764 LRP processor supports 14K of memory Memory can be used for
76. 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O0 r w r w Ir w r w Ir w ir w jr w r w r w Ir w r w ir w r w Ir w r w r w Word r w read and write 1762 0V32T 1762 O0B32T Output Image For each output module the output data file contains the controller directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 15 together with word 0 1 correspond to output terminals 0 31 Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 1009 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 r w r w Ir w r w r w Ir w jr w r w r w Ir w r w ir w r w Ir w r w Ir w Word Bit Position 1 0 Configuration 19 15 14 113 72 r w Ir w r w ir w Word r w r W Ir w r w r w rAw r w Ir w lr w r w Ir w r w r w read and write Analog 1 0 Configuration The following table shows the data ranges for 0 to 10V dc and 4 to 20 mA Valid Input Output Data Word Formats Ranges Normal Operating Range Full Scale Range Raw Proportional Data Scaled for PID 0 to 10V dc 10 5V dc 32760 16380 0 0V dc 0 0 4 to 20 mA 21 0 mA 32760 16380 20 0 mA 31200 15600 4 0 mA 6240 3120 0 0 mA 0 0 1762 IF20F2 Input Data File For each input module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the analog values of the inputs The module can be configured to use either raw proportional data or scaled for PID data The input data
77. 111 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Up Count Down Not Used Not Used Example 1 f on U off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 104 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Mode 4 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 111 0 0 2 HSCO 111 0 0 3 HSCO ICE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Example 2 on U Tof onli IASC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care rising edge y falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 5 Two Input Counter up and down with External Reset and Hold HSC Mode 5 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSC0 111 0 0 2 HSC0 111 0 0 3 HSCO CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 111 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Direction Reset Hold Example 1 f on U off on off off lon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 1 0 0 Example 2 on U Toff If on off off lon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 1 0 0 Exampl
78. 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files FRD Instruction Source Operand The source can be either a word address or the math register The maximum BCD source values permissible are e 9999 if the source is a word address allowing only a 4 digit BCD value e 32768 if the source is the math register allowing a 5 digit BCD value with the lower 4 digits stored in 8 13 and the high order digit in 14 If the source is the math register it must be directly addressed as 8 13 13 is the only status file element that can be used Conversion Instructions 185 Updates to Math Status Bits Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets S 0 1 Overflow sets if non BCD value is contained at the source or the value to be converted is greater than 32 767 otherwise resets On overflow the minor error flag is also set 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit always resets TIP S1 Always provide ladder logic filtering of all BCD input devices prior to performing the FRD instruction The slightest difference in point to point input filter delay can cause the FRD instruction to overflow due to the conversion of a non BCD digit 15 EQU FRD EQUAL FROM BCD E Source A N7 1 Source I 0 0 0 0
79. 2000 2230 00 2301 103455 231 amp 400 4405 Record 01 10 2000 23 00 00 2308 103456 215 8100 4395 Record7 01 10 2000 23 33000 2350 103457 208 feo a5 Record8 01 11 2000 00 0000 2295 103457 1209 eras 4505 Recordg 01 11 2000 00 30 00 2395 103456 211 8190 4305 Record 10 01 11 2000 01 0000 2310 103455 224 8195 4455 Record 11 01 11 2000 013000 2295 103456 1233 8190 4495 String Length of Record The size of a record is limited so that the length of the maximum formatted string does not exceed 80 characters The following table can be used to determine the formatted string length Data MemoryConsumed Formatted String Size delimiter l byes aate word 2 bytes 6 characters long word 4 bytes 11 characters date 2 bytes 10 characters time 2 bytes 8 characters Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 366 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only For queue 0 the formatted string length is 59 characters as shown below Data Date Time N7 11 L14 0 T4 5 ACC 11 3 0 11 2 Characters 10 1 18 1 6 1 1 1 J6 1 16 1 J6 10 14 8 14 6 14 11 1 6 1 6 1 6 59 characters Number of Records Using Queue 0 as an example each record consumes Record Fi
80. 21 346 remote packet support E 426 RES instruction 8 160 reserved bit 1 496 reset accumulated value instruction 5 717 Index 505 reset instruction 8 160 restore 1 496 RET instruction 16 225 retentive data 1 496 retentive data lost status bit C 401 retentive timer on delay instruction 8 156 return from subroutine instruction 16 225 RS 232 definition 1 496 RTA instruction 3 58 RIC day of month status C 408 day of week status C 409 function file 3 56 hours status C 408 minutes status C 409 month status C 408 Quick Start example F 473 seconds status C 409 year status C 407 RTC Synchronization Quick Start example F 478 RTC synchronization Quick Start example F 478 RTO instruction 8 156 RTU definition 1 497 run mode 1 497 rung 1 497 S save 1 497 SBR instruction 16 224 scale instruction 10 177 scale with parameters instruction 10 178 Scan 1 497 scan time 1 497 last 100 Sec scan time status C 407 maximum scan time status C 404 scan time worksheet MicroLogix 1200 A 380 MicroLogix 1500 8 386 scan toggle status bit C 407 SCL instruction 10 177 SCP instruction 10 178 selectable timed interrupt Quick Start example F 471 selectable timed interrupt STI function file 18 242 selectable timed start instruction 18 238 sequencer compare instruction 15 215 sequencer instructions 15 215 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 506 Index sequencer load instruction 15 221 sequencer output instruction 15 218 service communica
81. 34 words are allocated Pus m 6 for FIFO stack starting Position 9 7 at N7 12 ending at a N7 45 LFL and LFU Instruction Pair So rc 8 N7 10 em 9 LFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next N745 33 available position 9 in this case Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 This instruction uses the following operands LIFO The LIFO operand is the starting address of the stack Destination The destination operand is a word or long word address that stotes the value which exits from the LIFO stack The LFU instruction unloads this value from the last location on the LIFO stack and places it in the destination address The address level of the destination must match the LIFO stack If LIFO is a wotd size file destination must be a wotd size file If LIFO is a long word size file destination must be a long word size file File Instructions 213 Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 wotds Word 0 Word 1 Length maximum number of words or double words in the stack Word 2 Position the next available location where the instruction unloads data 1 EU Enable Unload Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when se
82. 395 offline 1 494 offset 1 494 off state leakage current 1 494 one shot 1 495 one shot falling instruction 7 151 one shot instruction 7 750 one shot rising instruction 7 757 online 1 495 ONS instruction 7 750 operating system catalog number status C 410 FRN status C 410 series letter status C 410 operating voltage 1 495 OR instruction 12 193 OSF instruction 7 151 OSR instruction 7 151 OTE instruction 7 148 OTL instruction 7 149 OTU instruction 7 749 outgoing message command pending status bit C 406 output device 1 495 output instruction 7 748 output latch instruction 7 149 output scan 1 495 output unlatch instruction 7 149 overflow flag C 390 overflow trap status bit C 399 P password protection 2 52 PCCC 1 495 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 PD data file 19 254 PID analog 1 0 scaling 19 269 application examples 19 274 application notes 19 270 errors 19 268 PID concept 19 253 PID equation 19 254 PID instruction 19 255 tuning parameters 19 260 PLS file 5 112 Polled report by exception defined 437 power save timeout 3 63 power up mode behavior bit C 393 process control instruction 19 253 processor 1 495 processor battery low status bit C 401 processor catalog number status C 410 processor files 1 495 processor revision status C 411 processor series status C 410 program control instructions 16 223 program end instruction 16 226 program file definition 1 495 program files 2 46 program mode 1
83. 57 127 W 119 77 67 Jw X 24 18 030 CAN 56 38 070 18 88 58 130 X 120 78 70 x AY 25 19 031 EM 57 39 071 9 89 59 131 Y 121 79 71 y AZ 26 1A 032 SUB 58 3A 072 90 5A 132 Z 122 7A 172 z 27 1B 033 ESC 59 3B 07 3 91 5B 133 123 7B 173 28 1C 034 FS 60 3C 074 k 92 5C 134 124 7C 174 29 1D 035 IGS 61 3D 075 l 93 5D 135 125 7D 1755 AA 30 1E 036 RS 62 3E 076 94 5E 136 126 7E 176 J 31 1F 037 US 63 3F 077 1 95 5F 137 127 7F 177 DEL The standard ASCII character set includes values up to 127 decimal 7F hex The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Controllers also support an extended character set decimal 128 to 255 However the extended character set may display different characters depending on the platform you are using Decimal values 0 through 31 are also assigned Ctrl codes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 308 ASCII Instructions Notes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Messaging Overview Chapter 2 1 Communications Instructions This chapter contains information about the Message MSG and Service Communications SVC communication instructions This chapter provides information on Messaging Overview on page 309 e SVC Setvice Communications on page 310 e MSG Message on page 313 e The Message Element on page 314 e Timing Diagram for the MSG Instruction on page 320 e MSG Instruction Ladder Logic on
84. Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 A 3 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode o E Parameter E 2 E amp a g F F Is 8 5 s gt ale c g jo j jo z l a a 14 e Is Je S sz LE j v Lr E j aq n S 2 o m le 2 lu lo S a j z a o m a S a e 6 a E j a S S j Source e e e e e e e e e Destination Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 AWA ASCII Write with Append AWA ASCII Write Append Channel Source Control String Length Characters Sent Error CEN 5 0 lt N 5 CER gt ASCII Instructions 287 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the AWA Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 268 us 12 us character 14 1 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 236 us 10 6 us character 12 5 us Use the AWA instruction to write characters from a source string to an external device This instruction adds the two appended characters that you configure on the Channel Configuration screen The default is a carriage return and line feed appended to the end of the string TIP You configure append characters via the C
85. B does not apply to the NOT instruction The NOT instruction only has one source value Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 192 Logical Instructions IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Updates to Math Status After a logical instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are Bit updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0 3 in the processor status S file S2 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S070 Cary aWwaysmset NNN 0 1 Overflow always resets 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if result is negative MSB is set otherwise resets AND Bit Wise AND Instruction Type output AND Bitwise AND Execution Time for the AND Instruction Source A N7 0 0000h Controller Data Size When Rung Is Source B N7 1 0000h True False Dest sire MicroLogix 1200 word 2 2 US 0 0 us long word 9 2 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 2 0 us 0 0 us long word 7 9 us 0 0 us The AND instruction performs a bit wise logical AND of two sources and places the result in the destination Truth Table for the AND Instruction Destination A AND B Source A 111 11 11 11 10 J1 10 10 JO J0 JO 1 1 JO J0 Source B 1 11 10 JO 11 1 1 1 1 11 JO JO JO JO 1 1 Destination 1 11
86. Block on page 67 for more information Outgoing Message Command Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 2 binary Oor1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 2 See General Channel Status Block on page 67 for more information Communications Mode Selection Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 3 binary 0 or 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 3 See General Channel Status Block on page 67 for more information Communications Active Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 4 binary Oor1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 4 See General Channel Status Block on page 67 for more information Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Scan loggle Bit System Status File 407 Address Data For
87. CSx 11 The number of messages received with no errors Polls Sent CSx 15 The number of poll packets sent by the processor Lack of Memory CSx 17 The number of times the processor could not receive a message because it did not have available memory Last Normal Poll List Scan CSx 19 Time in 100 ms increments of last scan through Normal Poll List Last Priority Poll List Scan CSx 21 Time in 100 ms increments of last scan through Priority Poll List Message Retry CSx 13 The number of message retries sent by the processor Undelivered Messages CSx 12 The number of messages that were sent by the processor but not acknowledged by the destination device Duplicate Messages CSx 18 The number of times the processor received a message packet identical Received to the previous message packet Bad Packets Received CSx 16 The number of incorrect data packets received by the processor for which no ACK was returned Max Normal Poll List Scan CSx 20 Maximum time in 100 ms increments to scan the Normal Poll List Max Priority Poll List Scan CSx 22 Maximum time in 100 ms increments to scan the Priority Poll List RTS Request to Send CSx 9 1 The status of the RTS handshaking line asserted by the processor CTS Clear to Send CSx 9 0 The status of the CTS handshaking line received by the processor DCD Data Carrier Detect CSx 9 3 Channel 1 of 1764 LRP only The status of the DCD handshaking line 1 x equals the Channel number received by the p
88. Chapter 2 Controller Memory and Controller Memory cy ese p e bete doe tee ta Ced Oe Etat ait 2 43 File Types Data Peso anke ed nece ac Ue o v e e See M AC eic ORATIO 2 48 Protecting Data Files During Download isses 2 49 Static File Prot chon Seepa piasda iaaa a rh ta aaia 2 51 Pass woth Proteci n od Acid peace ec S D opto ae de do 2 52 Clearing the Controller Memory 4 453 Ete HERREN RARO 2 53 Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock i4 steh e hn 2 53 Chapter 3 Function Files OVERVIEW aap vau oet eM rure UV el ate E ARE a QUT Add 3 55 Real Time Clock Function Elles sero ror ea 3 56 RTA Real Time Clock Adjust Instruction 005 3 58 Trim Pot Information Function Piles jhe b He edo eae 3 59 Memory Module Information Function File 000 3 60 DAT Function File MicroLogix 1500 only 0004 3 63 Base Hardware Information Function File 0 3 66 Communications Status File s 4 04 045 i0aqiks dy TCR SR etd 3 66 Input Output Status File ooo 3s Sat outibestieys Dake 3 79 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 6 Table of Contents Programming Instructions Overview Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Using High Speed Outputs Relay Type Bit Instructions Timer and Counter Instructions Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Chapter 4 Instruct SG ev wine ep ees dope ae baa dob edt ia dott du 4 81 Using the Instruction Descriptions
89. Configuration Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 1762 OF4 Output Data File For each module slot x words 0 through 3 contain the channel output data Raw Proportional Format Bit Position 15 14 13 17211310259 8 7 6 5 4 43 Channel 0 Data 0 to 32 760 Channel 1 Data 0 to 32 760 Channel 2 Data 0 to 32 760 o X 9lWord Oo CO CO oj oj oO CO N oj oj O O oO o o OF Channel 3 Data 0 to 32 760 Words 0 through 3 contain the analog output data for channels 0 through 3 respectively The module ignores the don t care bits 0 through 2 but checks the sign bit 15 If bit 15 equals 1 the module sets the output value to OV or 0 mA Scaled for PID Format Bit Position 15 14 13 17211330259 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Channel 0 Data 0 to 16 380 Channel 2 Data 0 to 16 380 N gt Word oO oj oj Oj ojoj ojl OF oO CO CO oO CO CO o 1 Channel 1 Data 0 to 16 380 1 1 Channel 3 Data 0 to 16 380 Words 0 through 3 contain the analog output data for channels 0 through 3 respectively The module ignores the don t care bits 0 and 1 but checks the sign bit 15 and bit 14 If bit 15 equals 1 the module sets the output value to OV or 0 mA If bit 15 equals zero and bit 14 equals 1 the module sets the output value to 10 5V dc or 21 mA Specialty 1 0 Configuration 1762 IR4 RTD resistance Module Input
90. Configuration Use the information in this appendix for configuring communication protocols The following protocols are supported from any RS 232 communication channel e DH 485 e DF1 Full Duplex e DF1 Half Duplex e DF1 Radio Modem Modbus M RTU e ASCII This appendix is organized into the following sections e DH 485 Communication Protocol on page 423 e DF1 Full Duplex Protocol on page 426 e DF1 Half Duplex Protocol on page 427 DF1 Radio Modem Protocol on page 438 Modbus RTU Protocol on page 446 e ASCII Driver on page 455 See your controller s User Manual for information about required network devices and accessories The information in this section describes the DH 485 network functions network architecture and performance characteristics It also helps you plan and operate the controller on a DH 485 network DH 485 Network Description The DH 485 protocol defines the communication between multiple devices that coexist on a single pair of wires DH 485 protocol uses RS 485 Half Duplex as its physical interface RS 485 is a definition of electrical characteristics it is nota protocol RS 485 uses devices that are capable of co existing on a common data circuit thus allowing data to be easily shared between devices The DH 485 netwotk offers e interconnection of 32 devices multi master capability Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 424 Protocol Configuration Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P
91. D 1 Channel Status syso B sys1 amp Lap 2 Modem Lines RTS CTS rr rr Clear B Cross Reference E o0 output Bi n input Bi s2 status Communication Status Function DF1 Radio Modem Channel Status Status Field Diagnostic File Location Definition Messages Sent CSx 10 The total number of DF1 messages sent by the processor including message retries Messages Received CSx 11 The number of messages received with no errors Lack of Memory CSx 17 The number of times the processor could not receive a message because it did not have available memory Undelivered Messages CSx 12 The number of messages that could not be sent by the processor due to Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 bad modem handshake signals Protocol Configuration 445 Communication Status Function DF1 Radio Modem Channel Status Status Field Diagnostic File Location Definition Duplicate Messages CSx 18 The number of times the processor received a message packet identical Received to the previous message packet Bad Packet Received CSx 16 The number of data packets received by the processor that had bad checksum or were truncated RTS Request to Send CSx 9 1 The status of the RTS handshaking line asserted by the processor CTS Clear to Send CSx 9 0 The status of the CTS handshaking line received by the processor DCD Data Carrier Detect CSx 9 3 1764 LRP only The status of the DCD handsha
92. D1 and 2 way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses subcategory F1 The MicroLogix controllers support the DF1 Full Duplex protocol via RS 232 connection to external devices such as computers or other controllers that support DF1 Full Duplex DF1 is an open protocol Refer to DE Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual Allen Bradley publication 1770 6 5 16 for more information DF1 Full Duplex Operation DF1 Full Duplex protocol also referred to as DF1 point to point protocol is useful where RS 232 point to point communication 1s required This type of protocol supports simultaneous transmissions between two devices in both directions DF1 protocol controls message flow detects and signals errors and retties if errors ate detected Protocol Configuration 427 When the system driver is DF1 Full Duplex the following parameters can be changed DF1 Full Duplex Configuration Parameters All MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Channel 0 0 1200 amp LSP MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Channel 0 or 1 0 or 1 LRP Driver DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Full Duplex Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Source ID Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 1 Control Line no handshaking Full Duplex modem no handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC Embedded Res
93. Driver Modbus RTU Slave pe Address Baud 19200 M Parity NONE v Modbus Data Table File Numbers Coils 0x 10 Input Registers 99 I 2 Contacts 199 11 Holding Registers 4000 f 3 v Expanded Protocol Control Control Line Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshak InterChar Timeout x1 ms RTSOffDelap x20ms D RTS Send Delay x20 ms 0 Pre Transmit Delay 1 ms 0 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 450 Protocol Configuration 1 To set up Channel 0 and data files for Modbus communication select the Channel 0 Configuration tab For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel 0 or Channel 1 2 Choose Modbus RTU Slave driver and assign driver characteristics 3 Enter Modbus Data Table File Numbers Select the Expansion check box to utilize multiple holding register data files MicroLogix 1200 Series C FRING and higher and MicroLogix 1500 Series C FRIN7 and higher only Requires RS Logix 500 version 5 50 or higher to program TIP The controller default is one data file of 256 registers The Expansion check box enables an additional five files and 1280 holding registers The five additional tables do not need to be individually defined but sequentially follow the first integer or bit file For example if the first file is N10 or B10 then the additional five files will be N11 or B11 N12 or B12 N13 or B13 N14 or B14 and N15 or B15 4 Enter the data table si
94. E j E i la Source Length 1 See Important note about indirect addressing Swap Sourc SWP B Length ST10 1 DATA O0 13 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Example Source Value before executing SWP instruction abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzabcdefg Source Value before executing SWP instruction badcfehgjilknmporgtsvuxwzyabcdefg The underlined characters show the 13 words where the low byte was swapped with the high byte Chapter 15 Sequencer Instructions Sequencer instructions are used to control automatic assembly machines or processes that have a consistent and repeatable operation They are typically time based or event driven Instruction Used To Page SOC Sequencer Compare Compare 16 bit data with stored data 215 S00 Sequencer Output Transfer 16 bit data to word addresses 218 SOL Sequencer Load Load 16 bit data into a file 221 Use the sequencer compare instruction to detect when a step is complete use the sequencer output instruction to set output conditions for each step Use the sequencer load instruction to load data into the sequencer file The primary advantage of sequencer instructions is to conserve program memory These instructions monitor and control 16 word or 32 long word discrete output
95. E z E jo S S le a S jo ls Sis ec a pe o F a a e z lE e o je S j j z 2 i l ka a JE g Is e o sz e jk je j mE a B o0 l i Jm qe 2 o t e ua o a E cr a o m a E la E lo S ja j e j a F S fa Source Destination e o o e o 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element ACN String Concatenate ACN String Concatenate Source A Source B Dest ST10 11 ST10 12 ST10 10 Instruction Operation The controller searches the source file type ST for the first character between 0 and 9 All numeric characters ate extracted until a non numeric character or the end of the string is reached Action is taken on if numeric characters are found The string length is limited to 82 characters Commas and signs are allowed in the string Howevet only the minus sign is displayed in the data table This instruction sets the following math flags in the controller status file Math Flag Description S 0 1 Overflow V Flag is set if the result is outside of the valid range S 0 2 Zero Z Flag is set if the result is zero S 0 3 Sign S Flag is set if the result is negative S 5 0 Overflow Trap Flag is set when the Overflow flag S 0 1 is set 5 15 ASCII String Flag is set if the Source string exceeds 82 characters Manipu
96. ED Error Detected Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO instruction is in an error state If an error state is detected the specific error is identified in the error code register PTO 0 ER The ED bit opetates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is in an error state Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not in an error state PTO Normal Operation Status NS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access NS Normal Operation Status PTO 0 NS bit Qor1 status read only The PTO NS Normal Operation Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO is in its normal state A normal state is ACCEL RUN DECEL or DONE with no PTO errors The NS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is in its normal state Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not in its normal state Using High Speed Outputs 129 PTO Enable Hard Stop EH Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type X User Program Description Access EH Enable Hard Stop PTO O EH bit 0 or 1 control read write The PTO EH Enable Hard Stop bit is used to stop the PTO sub system immediately Once the PTO sub system st
97. Embedded 1 0 Chapter 1 1 0 Configuration This section discusses the various aspects of Input and Output features of the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 controllers Each controller comes with a certain amount of embedded I O which is physically located on the controller The controller also allows for adding expansion I O This section discusses the following I O functions Embedded I O on page 15 MicroLogix 1200 Expansion I O on page 16 MicroLogix 1200 Expansion I O Memory Mapping on page 17 MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion I O on page 24 e MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion I O Memory Mapping on page 26 I O Addressing on page 37 I O Forcing on page 38 Input Filtering on page 38 e Latching Inputs on page 39 The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 provide discrete I O that is built into the controller as listed in the following table These I O points are referred to as Embedded I O Controller Family Inputs Outputs Quantity Type Quantity Type MicroLogix 1200 1762 L24BWA 114 24V de 10 relay Controllers 1762424AWA 14 120V ac 10 relay 1762 L24BXB_ 14 24V de 10 5 relay 5 FET 1762 LAOBWA 24 24V de 16 relay 1762 L40AWA 24 120V ac 16 relay 1762 LA0BXB 24 24V dc 16 8 relay 8 FET MicroLogix 1500 1764 24BWA 12 24V dc 12 relay Base Units 1764 24AWA 12 120V ac 12 relay 1764 28BXB 16 24V dc 12 6 relay 6 FET Publicatio
98. Enabled and Disabled XON XOFF Allows you to Enable or Disable XON XOFF software handshaking XON XOFF software handshaking Disabled involves the XON and XOFF control characters in the ASCII character set When the receiver receives the XOFF character the transmitter stops transmitting until the receiver receives the XON character If the receiver does not receive an XON character after 60 seconds the transmitter automatically resumes sending characters Also when the receive buffer is more than 8096 full an XOFF character is sent to the remote device to pause the transmission Then when the receive buffer drops to less than 8096 full an XON character is sent to the remote device to resume the transmission RTS Off Delay Allows you to select the delay between when a transmission is ended and when RTS is dropped 0 x20 ms Specify the RTS Off Delay value in increments of 20 ms Valid range is 0 to 65535 RTS Send Allows you to select the delay between when RTS is raised and the transmission is initiated Specify 0 Delay x20 ms the RTS Send Delay value in increments of 20 ms Valid range is 0 to 65535 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 458 Protocol Configuration Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 17583 Quick Start Pulse Train Output PTO Appendix F Knowledgebase Quick Starts The following Quick Statt topics are included e 17583 Quick Start Pulse Train Output PTO on page 459
99. Error Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set Length The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Destination if they are file data types The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 256 Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Destination if they are file data types It determines the next location in the stack to be masked and moved to the destination Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 Position is incremented on each false to true transition Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table S00 Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 y Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level 2 Mode o o E Parameter 8 g E e E t ec amp a 7 7 91 s 3 ea gt E Bo rm o va je R O j z S l l a a 9 JE Is S S e o co o o w o e lz a B a E a Ee Z E lo m la S j e 8 e ja E a JE jo aj s File e e e e D Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 20 Sequencer Inst
100. Expansion Comms Port Hj 500CPU Read TIP You can use multiple 1769 SDN scanner modules in a 1764 LRP MicroLogix 1500 system but you can only message through the first two A scanner physically positioned after the first two can only be used for I O scanning CIP Generic Communication Command MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 500CPU Read E 500CPU Read 500CPU Write 485CIF Read 485CIF Write PLC5 Read PLCS Write CIP Generic The 1764 LRP processor supports the six standard types of communications commands same as all other MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers and CIP Generic on the Expansion Comms Port When any of the six standard commands are chosen you can initiate standard messages to destination devices connected to DeviceNet products that support PCCC messaging including MicroLogix and SLC controllers using 1761 NET DNI s 1203 GU6 drive interface and other MicroLogix 1500 controllers using 1769 SDN scanner modules You can initiate reads writes program upload download and online monitoring across DeviceNet This is functionally identical to DH 485 and DH networking Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Communications Instructions 341 CIP stands for Common Industrial Protocol CIP is a newer and more versatile protocol than PCCC It is an open protocol that is supported by newer Allen Bradley controllers and third party products CIP messaging is the native messaging format for DeviceNet Al
101. File on page 247 for more information Real Time Clock RTC This file type is associated with the Real Time Clock time of day function See Real Time Clock Function File on page 56 for more information Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 56 Function Files Function Files File Name File File Description Identifier Trim Pot Information TPI This file type contains information about the Trim Pots See Trim Pot Information Function File on page 59 for more information Memory Module MMI This file type contains information about the Memory Module See Memory Module Information Information Function File on page 60 for more information Data Access Tool DAT This file type contains information about the Data Access Tool See DAT Function File Information MicroLogix 1500 only on page 63 for more information MicroLogix 1500 only Base Hardware Information BHI This file type contains information about the controller s hardware See Base Hardware Information Function File on page 66 for the file structure Communications Status CS This file type contains information about the Communications with the controller See File Communications Status File on page 66 for the file structure 1 0 Status File 10S This file type contains information about the controller I 0 See Input Output Status File on page 79 for the file structu re Real Time Clock Function File The real time
102. HSC0 111 0 0 3 HSCO CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Not Used Reset Hold Example 1 f on off off jon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 0 Example 2 on off on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example3 on off off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 4 on U loff on off Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 5 d Clear accumulator 20 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care rising edge y falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 2 Counter with External Direction HSC Mode 2 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 111 0 0 2 HSCO 111 0 0 3 HSCO ICE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Direction Not Used Not Used Example 1 f off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 103 HSC Mode 2 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 111 0 0 2 HSCO 111 0 0 3 HSCO CEBit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 H
103. IMPORTANT The PWM function can only be used with the controller s embedded 1 0 It cannot be used with expansion I O modules PWM Pulse Width Modulation PWM Number 1 IMPORTANT The PWM instruction should only be used with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 PWM Function BXB units Relay outputs are not capable of performing very high speed operations Instruction Type output Execution Time for the PWM Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 126 6 us 24 7 us MicroLogix 1500 107 4 us 21 1 us The PWM function allows a field device to be controlled by a PWM wave form The PWM profile has two primary components Frequency to be generated Duty Cycle interval The PWM instruction along with the HSC and PTO functions are different than all other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor This is necessaty because of the high performance requirements of these instructions Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 138 Using High Speed Outputs Pulse Width Modulation PWM Function File Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 The interface to the PWM sub system is accomplished by scanning a PWM instruction in the main program file file number 2 ot by scanning a PWM instruction in any of the subroutine files A typical operating sequence of a PWM instruction is as follows 1 The rung that a
104. Input Input Word Mask O JO 10 I0 JO 0 10 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Input Data Data is Not Updated Updated to Match Input Word File Length This is the number of masked words to transfer to the input data file Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below IIM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 Data Files Function Files E ponen Address Level S8 Parameter E s lie T amp s 5 E gt 7 o j9 jo j l S lb l a E le 3 5 g ol e la z a i 2 E a El El le B EE 22 l j isis Slot e e Mask e e e e e e e e e Length IOM Immediate Output with Mask Instruction Type output IOM ai TITRE p TIP This instruction is used for embedded 1 0 only It is not designed to be Mask N7 0 used with expansion I 0 Length 1 Execution Time for the IOM Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 22 3 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP 18 4 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP 19 4 us 0 0 us The IOM instruction allows you to selectively update output data without waiting for the automatic output scan This instruction uses the following operands e Slot The slot is the physical location that is updated with data fro
105. Interrupt Executing LIE User Interrupt Enable UIL User Interrupt Lost H UIP User Interrupt Pending TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled AS Auto Start r ED Error Detected SPM Set Paint Msec between interrupts cOaoOococoococouu lel ES Rrc Jen mM oat vei alel Using Interrupts 243 The Selectable Timed Interrupt STI provides a mechanism to solve time critical control requirements The STI is a trigger mechanism that allows you to scan or solve control program logic that is time sensitive Example of where you would use the STI are PID type applications where a calculation must be performed at a specific time interval motion application where the motion instruction PTO needs to be scanned at a specific rate to guarantee a consistent acceleration deceleration profile e A block of logic that needs to be scanned more often How an STI is used is typically driven by the demands requirements of the application It operates using the following sequence 1 The uset selects a time interval 2 When a valid interval is set and the STI is properly configured the controller monitors the STI value 3 When the time petiod has elapsed the controller s normal operation is interrupted 4 The controller then scans the logic in the STI program file 5 When the STI file scan is completed the controller returns to where it was ptiot to the interrupt and continues normal operat
106. J bit 0to7 status read write Preset Interrupt 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The HPI High Preset Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator reaches the high preset value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the high preset condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the high preset this bit is used as conditional logic Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 97 This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected Low Preset Interrupt executes Underflow Interrupt executes Overflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode High Preset Reached HPR Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access HPR High HSC 0 HPR Ibi Preset Reached t 2t07 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The HPR High Preset Reached status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC is greater than or equal to the high preset variable HSC 0 HIP This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in an executing mode Underflow UF Description Address Data For
107. July 2014 token passing access control the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network e maximum network length of 1219 m 4000 ft The DH 485 protocol supports two classes of devices initiators and responders All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers To determine which initiator has the right to transmit a token passing algorithm is used The following section desctibes the protocol used to control message transfers on the DH 485 network DH 485 Token Rotation A node holding the token can send a message onto the network Each node is allowed a fixed number of transmissions based on the Token Hold Factor each time it receives the token After a node sends a message it passes the token to the next device The allowable range of node addresses 0 to 31 There must be at least one initiator on the network such as a MicroLogix controller or an SLC 5 02 ot higher processor DH 485 Broadcast Messages A broadcast write command is sent as a DH 485 Send Data No Acknowledgement SDN packet No acknowledgement or reply is returned DH 485 Configuration Parameters When communications are configured for DH 485 the following parameters can be changed Parameter Options Programming Software Default _ Node Address 1 to 31 decimal 1 Token Hold Factor 1to4 2 Max Node Address 1 to 31 31 The major software issues you need to resolve before installing
108. LPO word 16 bit binary 2to7 control read write 110 HSC Function File Sub Elements 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 N a not applicable All examples illustrate HSCO Terms and behavior for HSC1 are identical Program File Number PFN Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access PFN Program HSC 0 PFN File Number word INT 0to7 control read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The PEN Program File Number variable defines which subroutine is called executed when HSCO counts to High Preset or Low Preset or through Overflow ot Underflow The integer value of this variable defines which program file will run at that time A valid subroutine file is any program file 3 to 255 See also Interrupt Latency on page 236 Error Code ER Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access ER Error Code HSC 0 ER word INT 0 to 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HS C Mode MOD on page 101 The ERs Error Codes detected by the HSC sub system are displayed in this word Errors include Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 91 HSC Error Codes Error Code Name Mode Description Number less than 3 greater than 255
109. Line Determine the number of characters in the buffer up to e MicroLogix 1200 Series B 291 and including the end of line character FRN 3 or later ACB Number of Characters in Determine the total number of characters in the buffer e MicroLogix 1500 Series B 293 Buffer FRN 4 or later ACI String to Integer Convert a string to an integer value 294 ACN String Concatenate Link two strings into one 295 AEX String Extract Extract a portion of a string to create a new string 296 AHL ASCII Handshake Lines Set or reset modem handshake lines 298 ARD ASCII Read Characters Read characters from the input buffer and place them into 299 a string ARL ASCII Read Line Read one line of characters from the input buffer and 301 place them into a string ASC String Search Search a string 302 ASR ASCII String Compare Compare two strings 304 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 280 ASCII Instructions Instruction Types and Operation Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 There are two types of ASCII instructions ASCII string control and ASCII port control The string control instruction type is used for manipulating data and executes immediately The port control instruction type is used for transmitting data and makes use of the ASCII queue More details are provided below ASCII String Control These instructions are used to manipulate string data When a string control instruction is encountered in a la
110. Max Priority Poll List Scan 100ms p Modem Lines RTS CTS DCD Clear DF1 Radio Modem Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Channel 1 only Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 1 9 0 CTS 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD 4to15 Reserved 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 Total Message Packets Received 12 Undelivered Message Packets 13to15 Reserved 16 Bad Message Packets Received 17 No Buffer Space Received Packet Dropped 18 Duplicate Message Packets Received 19to 22 Reserved Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 74 Function Files Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 igi xi Channel 0 1 DF1 Radio Modem Messages Sent oid Undelivered Messages m Messages Received 0 Duplicate MessagesReceived p Lack of Mem Pkt Dropped oS Bad Packets Received Bo Modem Lines RTS CTS DCD Modbus RTU Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Data Link Layer MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 4 9 0 CTS
111. P July 2014 396 System Status File STI Mode STI Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 0 binary 0 or 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STEO UIP See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 242 for more information STI Enabled Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 1 binary Oor1 control read write 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 TIE See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 242 for more information STI Executing Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 2 binary 0 or 1 control read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 UIX SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 242 for more information Memory Module Program Compare Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 9 binary Oor1 control read only When this bit is
112. PWM instruction is on is solved true the PWM is started 2 A waveform at the specified frequency is produced 3 The RUN phase is active A waveform at the specified frequency with the specified duty cycle is output 4 The rung that the PWM is on is solved false 5 The PWM instruction is IDLE While the PWM instruction is being executed status bits and data are updated as the main controller continues to operate Because the PWM instruction is actually being executed by a parallel system the status bits and other information are updated each time the PWM instruction is scanned while it is running This provides the control program access to PWM status while it is running TIP PWM status is only as fresh as the scan time of the controller Worst case latency is the maximum scan of the controller This condition can be minimized by placing a PWM instruction in the STI selectable timed interrupt file or by adding PWM instructions to your program to increase how often a PWM instruction is scanned Within the PWM function file are two PWM elements Each element can be set to control either output 2 O0 0 2 on 1762 L24BXB 1762 L40BXB and 1764 28B XB or output 3 00 0 3 on 1764 28BXB only Function file element PWM 0 is shown below a Function Files HSC Pro Pw sti jen RrE oat te wm srl E Pen r OUT Output OS Decelerating Status HRS Aun Status HAS Accelerating Status H PP Profile Parameter Select HIS I
113. Pigment T4 0 PRE Mixing Time Current Recipe ap Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 363 7 Change from Recipe 1 to Recipe 2 and enter the following data Tei RCPFleO RCPExample o Address Length Initial Data Description N7 0 1 333 Red Pigment N 1 1 333 Green Pigment N 2 1 333 Blue Pigment 1 T4 0 PRE 1000 c Time Current Recipe The Recipes are now configured 8 Create the following ladder logic Yellow Paint Recipe 1 1 B30 RCP l i Recipe 2 Recipe File Number Recipe Number File Operation Purple Paint Recipe 53 0 53 0 B3 0 RCP Recipe 1 0 2 Recipe File Number Recipe Number File Operation White Paint Recipe RCP B3 0 B3 0 B3 0 ill n n Recipe 2 0 1 Recipe File Number Recipe Number File Operation Application Explanation of Operation When B3 0 0 is energized and B3 0 1 and B3 0 2 are de energized Recipe File O Recipe number 0 is executed loading the following values to create Yellow paint e N7 0 500 e N7 1 500 e N7 2 0 e T4 0 PRE 500 Publication 1762 RMO001H EN P July 2014 364 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Data Logging Queues and Records Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 When B3 0 1 is energized and B3 0 0 and B3 0 2 are de energized Recipe File O Recipe number 1 is e
114. Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 372 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Retrieving Reading Records Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 TIP If a queue is full and another record is saved the oldest record is over written Queue behavior is the same as a FIFO stack first in first out lfa q deleted DLS information can be ueue is full and an additional record is saved the first record is used in the following types of instructions Instruction Type Operand Relay Bit Destination Output Bit Compare Source A Source B Low Limit LIM instruction Test LIM instruction High Limit LIM instruction Source MEQ instruction Mask MEO instruction Compare MEQ instruction Math Source A Source B Input SCP instruction Logical Source A Source B Move Source Data is retrieved from a data logging queue by sending a logical read command that addresses the Data Log retrieval file The oldest record is retrieved first and then deleted The record is de power failure before the The data is retrieved as a leted as soon as it is queued for transmission If there is a transmission is complete the record is lost n ASCII string with the following format date UDS time UDS 1 Data gt lt UDS gt lt 2 Data UDS UDS Last Data NUL e where date mm dd yyyy ASC
115. REF instruction inside a program loop unless the program is thoroughly analyzed i ATTENTION The watchdog and scan timers are reset when executing the Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Information About Using Interrupts Chapter 18 Using Interrupts Interrupts allow you to interrupt your program based on defined events This chapter contains information about using interrupts the interrupt instructions and the interrupt function files The chapter is arranged as follows Information About Using Interrupts on page 233 User Interrupt Instructions on page 237 Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 242 Using the Event Input Interrupt EII Function File on page 247 See also Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch on page 87 The purpose of this section is to explain some fundamental properties of the User Interrupts including e What is an interrupt e When can the controller operation be interrupted Priority of User Interrupts Interrupt Latency e User Fault Routine What is an Interrupt An interrupt is an event that causes the controller to suspend the task it is currently performing perform a different task and then return to the suspended task at the point where it suspended The Micrologix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 support the following User Interrupts User Fault Routine Event Interrupts 4 High Speed Counter Interrupts e Se
116. Range Type User Program Descriptions Access UL CV Upper Limit Alarm PD10 0 UL binary bit Oor1 status read write The control variable upper limit alarm bit is set when the calculated CV output exceeds the upper CV limit CV Lower Limit Alarm LL Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access LL CV Lower Limit Alarm PD10 0 LL binary bit Oor1 status read write The control variable lower limit alarm bit is set 1 when the calculated CV output is less than the lower CV limit Process Control Instruction 267 Setpoint Out Of Range SP Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access SP Setpoint Out of Range PD10 0 SP binary bit 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the setpoint e exceeds the maximum scaled value or is less than the minimum scaled value PV Out Of Range PV Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access PV PV Out of Range PD10 0 PV binary bit 00r1 status read write The process variable out of range bit 1s set 1 when the unscaled process variable exceeds 16 383 or e is less than zero Done DN Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access DN Done PD10 0 DN binary bit 0
117. STS Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 1 Data Files Function Files Address Address Level D Mode 7 E g e T Parameter bs E E e 8 z E 5 es os e pi su E p 3 3 g a B eue Ee l zw ls je jx S 8 o l lv la le w B h S amp e S Ib IB 1G ie S g e 12 Is e la lo e le 8 Time e e e e e e e e e 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files UID User Interrupt Disable Instruction Type output UID User Interrupt Disable ine Execution Time for the UID Instruction Interrupt Types 5 Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 10 8 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 10 8 us 0 0 us The UID instruction is used to disable selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding disable bits Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UID Instruction Interrupt Decimal Corresponding Value Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 240 UIE User Interrupt Using Interrupts Enable Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P Ju
118. Screen B3 0 MSG ND 0000 lE Read Write Message CEN gt 0 MSG File MG11 0 DN Setup Screen CER gt l MSG Rung 2 0 MG11 0 General f This Controller r Control Bits ert Ignore if timed out TO e Modbus Command 03 Read Holding Registers 4xxnx E Data Table Address Nod Awaiting Execution EW 0 Size in Elements Error ER e m Target Device Message done DN e Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST e MB Data Address 1 65536 Message Enabled EN o Slave Node Address dec r Error Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors Rung 0 shows a standard RSLogix 500 message MSG instruction preceded by conditional logic 1 Access the message setup screen by double clicking Setup Screen 2 The RSLogix 500 Message Setup Screen appears This screen is used to setup or monitor message parameters for This Controller Target Device and Control Bits Descriptions of each of these sections follow This Controller Parameters If a Channel configured for Modbus Master is selected in the Channel field of the Message Setup Screen the following Modbus Command options will become available 01 Read Coil Status Oxxxx e 02 Read Input Status 1xxxx 03 Read Holding Registers Axxxx 04 Read Input Registers 2xxxx e 05 Write Single Coil 0xxxx 06 Write Single Register 4xxxx e 15 Writ
119. See page 305 for more information Enter Enter ing Parameters the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel O or Channel f Source is the string element you want to write Control is the control data file See page 283 String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to write from the source string 0 to 82 If you enter a 0 the entire string is written This is wotd 1 in the control data file Characters Sent POS is the number of characters that the controller sends to an external device This is wotd 2 in the control data file Characters Sent POS is updated after all characters have been transmitted The valid range for POS is from 0 to 82 The number of characters sent to the destination may be smaller or greater than the specified String Length CLEN as described below Characters Sent POS may be smaller than String Length LEN if the length of the string sent is less than what was specified in the String Length LEN field Characters Sent POS can be greater than the String Length LEN if inserted values from in line indirection are used If the String Length LEN is greater than 82 the string written to the destination is truncated to 82 characters Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See p
120. Siu Source e e e e e e e e e e e LIFO e e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 212 File Instructions LFU Last In First Out LIFO Unload LFU Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Instruction Type output LIFO Unload CEU gt Execution Time for the LFU Instruction LIFO N7 0 Dest E CON 2 Controller Data Size When Rung Is ontro a Length 1 lt lt EM gt True False Konon gs MicroLogix 1200 word 29 1 us 10 4 us long word 31 6 us 10 4 us MicroLogix 1500 word 25 6 us 9 7 us long word 27 4 us 9 7 us On a false to true rung transition the LFU instruction unloads words or long wotds from a user created file called a LIFO stack The data is unloaded using last in first out order Instruction parameters have been programmed in the LFL LFU instruction pait shown below LFL Some Ao EE e EPM Control R6 0 j EM EH P RI Length 34 N7 13 1 engl oon LFU instruction N7 14 2 LFU unloads data from 3 LIFO UNLOAD iri EU stack N7 12 at 4 L N7 1 DN iti i Dest N7 11 NEM posteo 5
121. Source A ST10 8 Source B ST10 9 Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FAN 3 or later 19 2 us 4 0 us matching character 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 7 5 us 3 5 uis matching character 0 0 us Use the ASR instruction to compare two ASCII strings The controller looks for a match in length and upper lower case characters If two strings are identical the rung is true if there are any differences the rung is false Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source A is the location of the first string used for comparison Source B is the location of the second string used for comparison Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ASR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address iles Function Files Address Level Data Files 2 Mode P Er E c o T Parameter E 58 amp a Si c ar S js is ls 2 oO oie lo g jo le _ E Ie Je I lm Ia JE Ie lS le s PIE o _ lw la e lz lu 5 l S a e 2 OIG E la s 8 e ja e JE l z S Source A Source B 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation If the stri
122. System Status File Forces Enabled Address Data Format Type User Program Access 1 5 binary 1 status read only This bit is always set 1 by the controller to indicate that forces are enabled Forces Installed Address Data Format Type User Program Access S 1 6 binary Oor1 status read only This bit is set 1 by the controller to indicate that 1 or more inputs or outputs are forced When this bit is clear a force condition is not present within the controller Fault Override At Power Up Address Data Format Type User Program Access 1 8 binary 00r 1 control read only When set 1 causes the controller to clear the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 at power up The power up mode is determined by the controller mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S 1 12 See also FO Fault Override on page 62 Startup Protection Fault Address Data Format Type User Program Access 1 9 binary Oor1 control read only When set 1 and the controller powers up in the RUN or REM RUN mode the controller executes the User Fault Routine prior to the execution of the first scan of your program You have the option of clearing the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 to resume operation If the User Fault Routine does
123. Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words 1 0 Refresh REF 0 0 see p 386 0 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Reset RES 0 0 4 8 1 0 Return RET 0 0 1 0 0 3 Real Time Clock Adjust RTA 2 6 4 1 426 8 false to true transition Retentive Timer On RTO 22 15 8 3 4 Subroutine SBR 1 0 1 0 0 3 Scale SCL 0 0 8 7 2 5 Scale with Parameters SCP 0 0 21 0 3 8 0 0 447 6 0 Sequencer Compare sac 6 3 20 1 3 9 6 3 22 7 44 Sequencer Load SOL 6 3 19 1 3 4 6 3 21 1 3 9 Sequencer Output S00 6 3 20 0 3 9 6 3 23 1 44 Square Root SOR 0 0 22 3 1 5 0 0 26 0 25 Selectable Timed Interrupt Start STS 0 0 50 7 1 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply Subtract SUB 0 0 29 3 3 0 0 11 2 3 5 Suspend SUS N A N A 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Service Communications svel 0 0 166 1 4 11 0 service one channel word Service Communications 0 0 327 1 4 1 0 service two channels word Swap SWP 0 0 117418 115 swapped word Temporary End TND 0 0 1 0 0 5 Convert to BCD TOD 0 0 14 3 1 8 Off Delay Timer TOF 10 9 2 5 3 9 On Delay Timer TON 2 5 15 5 3 9 User Interrupt Disable UID 0 0 0 8 0 9 User Interrupt Enable UIE 0 0 0 8 0 9 User Interrupt Flush UIF 0 0 10 6 0 9 Examine if Closed XIC 0 0 0 9 1 0 Examine if Open XIO 0 0 0 9 1 0 Exclusive Or XOR 0 0 23 2 8 0 0 8 9 3 0 1 Only valid for MicroLogix 1500 Series B Processors 2 This value for the SVC instruction
124. User Interrupt Enable EIlO UIE binary bit control read write 250 UIL User Interrupt Lost EIlO UIL binary bit status read write 250 UIP User Interrupt Pending EII 0 UIP binary bit status read only 250 EIE Event Interrupt Enabled EII 0 EIE binary bit control read write 251 AS Auto Start EII 0 AS binary bit control read only 251 ED Error Detected EII 0 ED binary bit status read only 251 ES Edge Select EII 0 ES binary bit control read only 251 IS Input Select EIN 0 1S word INT control read only 252 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Using Interrupts 249 Ell Function File Sub Elements Ell Program File Number PFN Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access PFN Program File Number EII 0 PFN word INT control read only PEN Program File Number defines which subroutine is called executed when the input terminal assigned to EII 0 detects a signal A valid subroutine file is any program file 3 to 255 The subroutine file identified in the PFN variable is not a special file within the controller It is programmed and operated the same as any other program file From the control program perspective it is unique in that it is automatically scanned based on the configuration of the EI Ell Error Code ER Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ER Error Code EII 0 ER word INT status read
125. a communications port IMPORTANT f ASCII write instructions execute continuously you may not be able to re establish communications with RSLogix 500 when the controller is placed into the RUN mode MicroLogix 1200 Series A and MicroLogix 1500 Series A The AWA and AWT instructions only successfully transmit an ASCII string out of the RS 232 port when the channel is configured for DF1 Full Duplex protocol If the RS 232 port is configured for any protocol other than DF1 Full Duplex the AWA and AWT instructions will error out with an error code of 9 DF1 Full Duplex packets take precedence over ASCII strings so if an AWA or AWT instruction is triggered while a DF1 Full Duplex packet is being transmitted the ASCII instruction will error out with an error code of 5 See on page 427 for the DF1 Full Duplex protocol parameters that you set via the Channel 0 configuration screens in your programming software Configuration of the two append characters for the AWA instruction can be found in the General tab of Channel Configuration option in RSLogix 500 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 282 ASCII Instructions String ST Data File MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 and later and MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 and later For the AWA and AWT instructions you can use DF1 Full Duplex protocol as described above To use the full ASCII instruction set use ASCII protocol as described below See on page 456 for the ASCII parameters
126. and PWM files are only used in MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 3 The DAT files are only used in MicroLogix 1500 controllers 4 The floating point and programmable limit switch files are available in MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series C controllers 5 The string file is available in MicroLogix 1200 controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and later and 1764 LRP processors User Memory User memory is the amount of storage available to a user for storing ladder logic data table files I O configuration etc in the controller User data files consist of the system status file I O image files and all other user creatable data files bit timer counter control integer string long word MSG and PID Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Controller Memory and File Types 45 A wotd is defined as a unit of memory in the controller The amount of memory available to the user for data files and program files is measured in user words Memory consumption is allocated as follows For data files a word is the equivalent of 16 bits of memory For example 1 integer data file element 1 user word 1 long word file element 2 user words 1 timer data file element 3 user words TIP Each input and output data element consumes 3 user words due to the overhead associated with 1 0 forcing For program files a word is the equivalent of a ladder instruction with one operand For example
127. and watch the values change Trim Pot Example Ladder Logic The following example will MOVe the value from trim pot 0 POTO into the preset word of the free running timer at T4 0 TIP Since the trim pots only adjust from 0 to 250 the timer preset is only adjustable from 0 to 250 seconds E LAD 2 TRIMPOT pF MOV Move E Source TPI 0 POTO 0 lt Dest T4 0 PRE 0 o Timer On Delay Timer Time Base Preset T4 0 DN Using a trim pot to adjust a value larger then 250 By using the SCP instruction a ladder program can be written which will allow the trim pot to adjust between 32768 to 32767 using standard word 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 using long words IMPORTANT Remember that the trim pots only have 3 4 of a turn resolution Knowledgebase Quick Starts 477 The following example takes the input value of trim pot 0 0 250 and scales it from 0 to 600 using the Scale with Parameters instruction SCP The scaled value is placed in the preset of the free running timer at T4 0 This allows for POT 0 to adjust from 0 to 10 minutes 600 Sec ES LAD 2 TRIMPOTSCP SCP 0000 Scale w Parameters Input TPI 0 POTO Input Min Input Max Scaled Min Scaled Max 6 T4 0 PRE 0 lt Output T4 0 DN TON 0001 Timer On Delay Timer T4 0 Time Base Preset 17712 Quick Start User The UID
128. array Refer to the Compact I O High Speed Counter User Manual publication 1769 UM006 for detailed information The default value for the Output Array is all zeros 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description Out15 Out14 Out13 Out12 Out11 Out10 Out09 Out08 OutO7 Out 06 Out05 Out04 Out03 OutO2 Out01 Out0O OutputOnMask 0 OutputOnMask 15 Out15 Out14 Out13 Out12 Out11 Out10 Out09 Out08 OutO7 Out 06 Out 5 Out04 Out03 Out02 OutO1 Out00 OutputOffMask 0 OutputOffMask 15 R15 R14 R13 R12 R11 R10 R09 R08 R07 R06 R05 R04 R03 R02 R01 ROO RangeEn 0 RangeEn 15 Reserved RBF ResetBlownFuse RPW RREZ Zinh Zinv Dinh Dinv RCU RCO SP En Ctr0ControlBits Ctr0En RPW RREZ Zinh Zinv Dinh Dinv RCU RCO SP En Ctr1ControlBits RPW Dinv RCU RCO SP En Ctr2ControlBits tifisohresel RPW Dinv RCU RCO SP En Ctr3ControlBits CtrOResetCountOverflow Reserved Ctr ResetCountUnderflow Range12To15 0 HiLimOrDirWr Range12To15 0 HiLimOrDirWr Ctr DirectionInvert Ctr DirectionInhibit Ctr ZInvert Range12To15 0 LowLimit Range12To15 0 LowLimit Ctr Zinhibit Ctr ResetRisingEdgeZ Ctr ResetCtrPresetWarning Outi5 Out14 Out13 Out12 Out11 Out10 Out09 Out08 Out07 Out06 Out05 Out04 Out03 Out02 Out01 Out0O Range12To15 0 OutputControl 0 15
129. as the program currently in the controller All protected data file numbers types and sizes number of elements currently in the controller exactly match that of the program being downloaded to the controller If all of these conditions are met the controller will not write over any data file in the controller that is configured as Download Protected when a program is downloaded from a memory module or programming software If any of these conditions are not met the entire User Program is transferred to the controller Additionally if the program in the controller contains protected files the Data Protection Lost indicator S 36 10 is set to indicate that protected data has been lost For example a control program with protected files is transferred to the controller The original program did not have protected files or the files did not match The data protection lost indicator S 36 10 is then set The data protection lost indicator represents that the protected files within the controller have had values downloaded and the user application may need to be re configured TIP The controller will not clear the Data Protection Lost indicator It is up to the user to clear this bit Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Static File Protection Controller Memory and File Types 51 When a data file is Static File Protected the values contained in it cannot be changed via communications except during a program download to the con
130. been lost Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 352 Communications Instructions Error Code Description of Error Condition OBH Target node does not accept this type of MSG instruction OCH Received a master link reset one possible source is from the DF1 master OFH DCOMM button was activated while an ASCII instruction was waiting to execute 10H Target node cannot respond because of incorrect command parameters or unsupported command 12H Local channel configuration protocol error exists 13H Local MSG configuration error in the Remote MSG parameters 15H Local channel configuration parameter error exists 16H Target or Local Bridge address is higher than the maximum node address 17H Local service is not supported 18H Broadcast is not supported 20H PCCC Description Host has a problem and will not communicate 21H Bad MSG file parameter for building message 30H PCCC Description Remote station host is not there disconnected or shutdown 37H Message timed out in local processor 39H Local communication channel reconfigured while MSG active 3AH STS in the reply from target is invalid 40H PCCC Description Host could not complete function due to hardware fault 45H MSG reply cannot be processed Either Insufficient data in MSG read reply or bad network address parameter 50H Target node is out of memory
131. bit control read write The UIE User Interrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable STI subroutine processing This bit must be set if you want the controller to process the STI subroutine at the configured time interval If you need to restrict when the STI subroutine is processed clear the UIE bit An example of when this is important is if a series of math calculations need to be processed without interruption Before the calculations take place clear the UIE bit After the calculations are complete set the UIE bit and STI subroutine processing resumes STI User Interrupt Lost UIL Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIL User Interrupt Lost STEO UIL binary bit status read write The UIL User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that indicates an interrupt was lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 246 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Using Interrupts This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear the lost condition STI User Interrupt Pending UIP User Program Access Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type UIP User Interrupt Pending STI 0 UIP binary bit status read only The UIP User Interr
132. bit is used to enable or disable the HSC HSC 0 HIP High Preset is the upper set point in counts that defines when the HSC will generate an interrupt and execute the PFN sub routine Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2011 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 465 Example The following example uses the HSC in Mode 0 Up Counter The Up Counter clears the accumulated value 0 when it reaches the High Preset HIP This mode configures 11 0 0 0 I 0 0 as the HSC 0 input TIP Each mode for the HSC will configure the inputs for different functionality In this example the HSC will count input pulses coming into 1 0 0 when the total numbet of pulses counted equals the High Preset HIP the HSC will jump to subroutine file 3 The HIP is set for 5000 pulses in this example Also once the HIP is reached the HSC will then reset HSC 0 ACC to zero 0 and start counting again IMPORTANT Itis assumed that the user has connected a device to 0 0 to generate pulses TIP The following ladder logic does not need to be entered into File 2 however this allows for easy viewing of the accumulated counts from the HSC 0 ACC IMPORTANT Ladder Logic Subroutine file 3 must be created in order for this example to work If the subroutine is not created the CPU will fault due to an HSC Error Code 1 nvalid File Number for PEN has been entered E43 Project H Help E 3 Controller i Controller Properties Processor Status L6 Function Files AU 10 C
133. bit when the controller completes its processing of the HSC subroutine User Interrupt Pending UIP Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UIP User HSC 0 UIP fbi Interrupt Pending t 0to7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The UIP User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot be executed immediately This bit is maintained by the controller and is set and cleared automatically User Interrupt Lost UIL Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UIL User HSC O UIL bi Interrupt Lost t 0to7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The UIL User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear the lost condition Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 95 Low Preset Mask LPM Description Address Data Format Hsc Modes Type User Program Access LPM Low HSC O LPM bi Preset Mask
134. broadcasts the message so that it can be received by the intended slave This slave to slave transfer is a built in function of the master device and can also be used by programming software to upload and download programs to processors on the DF1 Half Duplex link Standard Mode Channel Configuration xi GOERS E General Channel 0 xi Driver pr Half Duplex Master Node Address Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master 7 Node bases 1 decimal 1 decimal Baud 1200 Baud 1200 Parity NONE g Parity NONE Ra Polling Ranges Polling Ranges Priority High 0 Normal High D Normal Poll Priority High 0 Normal High 0 Normal Poll fg isc Si me Si Priority Low oss Normal Low 255 Geese Priority Low 255 Normal Low 255 Group Size Protocol Control Control Line Half Duplex without Continuous Carrier Y Error Detection CRC bd Polling Mode Std single msg per scan IV Duplicate Packet Detect Protocol Control Control Line Hal Duplex without Continuous Carrier CRC E ACK Timeout 20 ms so ATS Off Delay x20 ms fo ACK Timeout x20 ms 50 RTS Off Delay 20 ms 0 Error Detection RTS Send Delay 20 ms fo Polling Mode Std multiple msgs per scan RTS Send Delay x20 ms 0 Message Retries E M Duplicate Packet Detect Message Retries 3 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms o Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 Cancel Apply Help Cancel Apply Help Publication 1
135. convert data to the maximum full range value during an under range condition The bits reset when the under range condition clears SGNx The sign bit for channels 0 through 3 1762 OF4 Input Data File For each module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the analog output module status data for use in the control program 1762 0F4 Input Data File Bit Position 15 114 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Reserved S03 IS02 S01 SO0 1 Reserved UOO 1000 U01 001 UO2 002 UO3 003 The bits are defined as follows e SOx General status bits for output channels 0 through 3 This bit is set when an error over or under range exists for that channel or there is a general module hardware error OOx Over range flag bits for output channels 0 through 3 These bits indicate an input signal above the user range and can be used in the control program for error detection The module continues to convert analog data to the maximum full range value while this bit is set 1 The bit is reset 0 when the error clears e UOx Under range flag bits for output channels 0 through 3 These bits indicate an input signal below the user range They can be used in the control program for error detection The module continues to convert analog data to the minimum full range value while this bit is set 1 The bit is reset 0 when the error clears Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 22 0
136. cr pnr nr rcr j nr nr j jr jq Word r read x not used always at a 0 or OFF state Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 1 0 Configuration 27 1769 IA16 1769 1016 and 1769 IQ16F Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 15 correspond to input terminals 0 through 15 Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 r r r p r r r r r r r r r r r r Word r read 1769 1032 Input Data File For each input module slot x word 0 in the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit Position 15 14 13 12 Y 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 JO r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r gt Word r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r read 1769 IQ6X0W4 Input Image For each module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 5 correspond to input terminals 0 through 5 bits 6 through 15 are not used Input Bit Position 15 14 13 172 11 110 X X x X fx X X X X jx fr k gr jr jr jr c Word e co e c1 A Cc N e r read x not used always at a 0 or OFF state Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 28 1 0 Confi
137. cycle time 4 Free Running Clock Comparison for SLC 500 and MicroLogix Controllers The Free Running Clocks in the SLC 500 and MicroLogix controllers function the same but have different resolutions The resolution of the Free Running Clock depends upon which controller you are using e SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1000 10 ms bit 0 010 seconds bit MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 100 us bit 0 0001 seconds bit The following table illustrates the differences Free Running Clock Cycle Times all Times are in Seconds Bit SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 On Off Time Cycle Time On Off Time Cycle Time 4 0 0 010 0 020 0 0001 0 0002 8 1 0 020 0 040 0 0002 0 0004 S 4 2 0 040 0 080 0 0004 0 0008 S 4 3 0 080 0 160 0 0008 0 0160 S 4 4 0 160 0 320 0 0016 0 0320 S 4 5 0 320 0 640 0 0032 0 0640 S 4 6 0 640 1 280 0 0064 0 1280 S 4 7 1 280 2 560 0 0128 0 2560 S 4 8 2 560 5 120 0 0256 0 5120 S 4 9 5 120 10 240 0 0512 0 1024 S 4 10 10 240 20 480 0 1024 0 2048 S 4 11 20 480 40 960 0 2048 0 4096 S 4 12 40 960 81 92 0 4096 0 8192 Free Running Clock Cycle Times all Times are in Seconds System Status File 399 Bit SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 On Off Time Cycle Time On Off Time Cycle Time S 4 13 81 92 163 84 0 8192 1 6384 8 414 163 84 327 68 1 6384 3 2768 S 4 15 327 68 655 36 3 2768 6 5536 For example
138. data file or function file The definitions of the terms used in these tables are listed below this example table Valid Addressing Modes and File Types Example Table mme Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 z Mode Level S Parameter E E 2 E e S cc B ma panel 6 l7 7 Sss z5 e do pogserlIlrlmEkraenusgs r s s e er fen fie ue Os asa EI Bl S la ES ela la lela le lS la Source A ejejojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj jo ele Source B ejejojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj jo ele Destination eje je e e ele eje ejeje e e e e e ele ee 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files The terms used within the table are defined as follows e Parameter The parameter is the information you supply to the instruction It can be an address a value or an instruction specific parameter such as a timebase Data Files See Data Files on page 48 Function Files See Function Files on page 55 e CS See Communications Status File on page 66 e IOS See Input Output Status File on page 79 e DLS See Data Log Status File on page 370 Address Mode See Addressing Modes on page 82 Addressing Level Address levels describe the granul
139. determined by the type of device that is being driven the mechanics of the application or the device components being moved Data less than zero and greater than 20 000 generates a PTO errot Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 130 Using High Speed Outputs PTO Operating Frequency Status OFS Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access OFS Operating PTO 0 0FS word INT 0to20 000 status read only Frequency Status Hz The PTO OFS Output Frequency Status is generated by the PTO sub system and can be used in the control program to monitor the actual frequency being produced by the PTO sub system TIP The value displayed may not exactly match the value entered in the PTO 0 0F This is because the PTO sub system may not be capable of reproducing an exact frequency at some of the higher frequencies For PTO applications this is typically not an issue because in all cases an exact number of pulses are produced PTO Total Output Pulses To Be Generated TOP Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Description Format Program Access TOP Total Output PTO 0 TOP long word 0 to 2 147 483 647 control read write Pulses To Be Generated 32 bit INT The PTO TOP Total Output Pulses defines the total number of pulses to be generated for the pulse profile accel run decel inclusive PTO Output Pulses Produced OPP
140. downloaded into the controller The selection of the ramp type must be made ptior to going to run The acceleration and deceleration counts must be entered before the PTO is enabled If the four long elements are not properly identified the controller will return a 3 error in the PTO function file when going to run PTO Accel Decel Pulses or File Elem if ADI 1 ADP Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access ADP Accel Decel PTO 0 ADP long word 32 bit see below control read write Pulses INT The PTO ADP Accel Decel Pulses defines how many of the total pulses TOP variable will be applied to each of the ACCEL and DECEL components The ADP will determine the acceleration and deceleration rate from 0 to the PTO Output Frequency OF The PTO Output Frequency OF defines the operating frequency in pulses second during the run portion of the profile Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 132 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 TIP When entering the ADP parameters the PTO will generate an Accel Decel Error if one of the following conditions occur The total pulses for the acceleration and deceleration phases is less than 0 The total pulses for the acceleration and deceleration phases is greater than the total output pulses to be generated TOP Acceleration and deceleration values can either be identical ADI 0 o
141. each other Each node that is enabled for Store amp Forward has a user configured Store amp Forward Table to indicate which received packets it should re broadcast based on the packet s source and destination addresses IMPORTANT RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 allows you to configure the MicroLogix DF1 Radio Modem driver but does not allow you to configure the Store amp Forward Table file In order to use the Store amp Forward capability with RSLogix version 6 10 10 you must download a pre configured default ladder file for your particular processor from the MicroLogix web site www ab com micrologix which has a binary file B3 0 15 pre configured for the DF1 Radio Modem Store amp Forward Table file Configuring the Store amp Forward Table The Store amp Forward Table can be configured to use any valid binary data table file B3 B9 through B255 of length 16 words Each bit in the file corresponds to a DF1 Radio Modem node address In order to configure a MicroLogix to Store amp Forward message packets between two other nodes the bits corresponding to the addresses of those two other nodes must be set For instance if node 2 is used to Store amp Forward message packets between nodes 1 and 3 then both bits Bx 1 and Bx 3 where x is the configured data table file number would have to be set in the Store amp Forward Table file see Figure You can set bit 255 to enable Store amp Protocol Configuration 443 Forwatd
142. eis the exponent 1 to 254 mis the mantissa 0 f lt 1 The valid range for floating point numbers is from 3 4028 x 10 to 3 4028 x 1079 Definitions Overflow occurs when the result of an operation produces an exponent that is gteater than 254 Underflow occurs when the result of an operation produces an exponent that is less than one Floating Point Exception Values Zero represented by an exponent and a mantissa of zero Both positive and negative zero are valid Denormalized represented by an exponent of zero and a non zero mantissa part Since denormalized numbers have very small insignificant values they are treated as zero when used as source operand for most instructions This reduces execution time Denormalized numbets are not generated by the instructions but are propagated by some instructions Zero is generated on an underflow Infinity represented by an exponent of 255 and a mantissa part of zero Both positive and negative infinity are generated when operations overflow Infinity is propagated through calculations NAN not a number is represented by an exponent of 255 and a non zero mantissa part NANs are used to indicate results that are mathematically undefined such as 0 0 and adding plus infinity to minus infinity All operations given a NAN as input must generate a NAN as output Math Instructions 173 LSB Round to Even Rule Floating point operations are rounded using the roun
143. file for each configuration is shown below Raw Proportional Format Bit Position rd S E orari FP E UA R AS annel 0 Data 0 to 1 0 Channel 1 Data 0 to 32768 0 0 0 2 reserved 3 reserved 4 reserved S1 S0 5 U0 00 UT JOT reserved Scaled for PID Format Bit Position rd 15 14 13 12 anne 11 10 ata 0 to 16 Wo oe oo e c P Ls N c 1 0 0 Channel 1 Data 0 to 16 383 0 0 2 reserved 3 reserved 4 reserved ST S0 5 U0 J00 UT JOT reserved Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 20 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 The bits ate defined as follows e Sx General status bits for channels 0 and 1 This bit is set when an error ovet or under range exists for that channel or there is a general module hardware error Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 and 1 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection e Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 and 1 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection 1762 IF20F2 Output Data File For each module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the channel output data Raw Proportional Format T Bit Position 15 14 1 3 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 10 Channel 0 Data 0 to 32 768 0 0 40 1 0 Channel 1 Data 0
144. for the output low source is from 0 to 65 535 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types are shown below HSL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Data Files Function Files aes Address Level 2 Mode o a Parameter E ts g E N E ec a 8 9 iB is S 5 2 c go ln je 9 jo l S le l lm 4 JE e IS e 5 Je o im le l lu b lo S lat EIS IE IB OE laSa E S le a El l S Counter Number High Preset ele e e e e ele ele Low Preset ee e o o e e o o e o Output High Source ele e e e eje Output Low Source ele e o o elele ele RAC Reset Accumulated Value Instruction Type output RAC Reset Accumulated Value a D Counter HSCO Controller Execution Time When Rung Is Source 0 True False MicroLogix 1200 21 2 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 17 8 us 0 0 us The RAC instruction resets the high speed counter and allows a specific value to be written to the HSC accumulator The RAC instruction uses the following parameters Counter Number Specifies which high speed counter is being used Counter Number 0 HSCO MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Counter Number 1 HSC1 MicroLogix 1500 only Source Specifies the locat
145. i i Data Files Function Files 2 Mode Address Level m o D Parameter Sg E jo S S S jw g i 8e859 h i 2 g lva lo l lo l l l E lig l l ln Jw JE le sl s amp oL ele oi S fk uma S ja E j 5 8 S Channel Source e e Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Example I1 AWA EN f ASCII WRITE APPEND 10 Channel 0 Source ST37 42 DN If input slot 1 bit 10 is set read 25 characters from ee on i s Edu ST37 42 and write it to the display device Then ndi Characters Sent 0 write a carriage return and line feed default Error 00 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 ASCII Instructions 289 In this example when the rung goes from false to true the control element Enable EN bit is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction The controller sends 25 characters from the start of string ST37 42 to the display device and then sends user configured append characters The Done bit DN is set and a value of 27 is present in POS word of the ASCII control data file When an error is detected the error code is written to the Error Code Byte and the Error Bit ER 1s set See ASCII Instruction Error Codes on page 306 for a list of the error codes and recommended actio
146. indirect addressing FLL Fill File FLL Fill File Source N7 0 Dest N7 1 Length 1 IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files The source and destination file types must be the same except bit B and integer N they can be interchanged It is the address that determines the maximum length of the block to be copied as shown in the following table Maximum Lengths for the COP Instruction Source Destination Data Type 1 word elements ie word 2 word elements ie long word 1 3 word elements ie counter 1 42 word elements ie string 1 Range of Length Operand 1 to 128 to 64 to 42 to 3 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the FLL Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 14 0 6 us word 0 0 us long word 15 1 2 us long word 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 12 1 0 43 us word 0 0 us long word 12 3 0 8 us long word 0 0 us The FLL instruction loads elements of a file with either a constant or an address data value for a given length The following figure shows how file instruction data is manipulated The instruction fills the words of a file with a source value It uses no status bits If you need an enable bit program a parallel output that uses a storage address Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014
147. is the mask used to rese the RTS control line Bit 1 corresponds to the RTS control line A value of 2 in the AND mask resets the RTS control line a value of 0 leaves the line unchanged e OR Mask is the mask used to sz the RTS control line Bit 1 corresponds to the RTS control line A value of 2 in the OR mask sets the RTS control line a value of 0 leaves the line unchanged Control is the control data file See page 283 Channel Status displays the current status 0000 to 001F of the handshake lines for the specified channel This status is read only and resides in the POS field in the control data file The following shows how to determine the channel status value In this example the value is 001F Channel 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 Status Bit Handshake reserved pep RTS CTS aie e o o o Pp pjpppponh en Channel 0 0 1 F Status Word 2 of the Control Element 001F 1 The DCD handshake line is only supported on Channel 1 ASCII Instructions 299 Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 306 for error code desctiptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below AHL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82
148. ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 5 8 through CSx 0 5 15 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 67 for more information Maximum Scan Time Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 22 word 0 to 32 767 status read write This word indicates the maximum observed interval between consecutive program scans The controller compares each scan value to the value contained in S 22 If a scan value is larger than the previous the larger value is stored in 8 22 This value indicates in 100 us increments the time elapsed in the longest program cycle of the controller Resolution is 100 us to 0 us For example the value 9 indicates that 800 to 900 us was observed as the longest program cycle System Status File 405 User Fault Routine File Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 29 word 0 to 255 status read only This register is used to control which subroutine executes when a User Fault is generated STI Set Point Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 30 word 0 to 65535 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is
149. major fault by writing your own unique value to S 6 and then setting bit S 1 13 to prevent reusing system defined codes The recommended values for user defined faults are FF00 to FFOF Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 414 Fault Messages and Error Codes Manually Clearing Faults Using the Fault Routine The occurrence of recoverable or non recoverable user faults can cause the user fault subroutine to be executed If the fault is recoverable the subroutine can be used to correct the problem and clear the fault bit S 1 13 The controller then continues in the Run or test mode The subroutine does not execute for non user faults See User Fault Routine on page 236 for information on creating a user fault subroutine Fault Messages This section contains fault messages that can occur during operation of the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 programmable controllers Each table lists the error code description the probable cause and the recommended corrective action Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0001 NVRAM ERROR The default program is loaded to the Non User e Re download or transfer the program controller memory This occurs e Verify battery is connected MicroLogix 1500 only e if a power down occurred during ont program download or transfer e Contact your local Rockwell Automation from the memory module representative if the error persists
150. not clear bit S 1 13 the controller faults and does not enter an executing mode Program the User Fault Routine logic accordingly TIP When executing the startup protection fault routine S 6 major error fault code contains the value 0016H System Status File 393 Load Memory Module On Error Or Default Program Address 1 10 User Program Access read only Data Format Range Type binary 0 or 1 control For this option to work you must set 1 this bit in the control program before downloading the program to a memory module When this bit it set in the memory module and power is applied the controller downloads the memory module program when the control program is corrupt or a default program exists in the controller TIP If you clear the controller memory the controller loads the default program The mode of the controller after the transfer takes place is determined by the controller mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S 1 12 See also LE Load on Error on page 62 Load Memory Module Always Address 1 11 User Program Access read only Data Format Range Type binary 0 or 1 control For this option to work you must set 1 this bit in the control program before downloading the program to a memory module When this bit is set in the memory module and power is applied the controller downloads the memory module prog
151. ode e Eaa tc ete RAD 14 204 FFL First In First Out FIFO Load 15 Poet owen xs 14 206 FFU First In First Out FIFO Unload a na a sot mr 14 208 LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load 12 ee ep en n 14 210 LFU Last In First Out LIFO Unload x veo eer Re X 14 212 SWP SWAD o bee ipee neuer a a S E EE EE E 14 214 Chapter 15 SOG Sequencer CoDpafe us ea a E taii eet 15 215 SOs Sequencer Oboe posset tios ed recie eee 15 218 SOLS Sequence Eoque ice ceo EE eed tee e d 15 221 Chapter 16 JMP J mp to Tabel 52225 eee cb qe ebbe pr Eo a 16 223 EBE Label sii 339 34S gen pe opu d eroe ptio ia 16 224 JSR Jump to Subroutine cc 1 rax riter b Va ko Eten 16 224 SBR S br u ne Label 4i ode ere EE T atc 16 224 RET Return from 5ubtOoutlhies dcr oc oe wa A 16 225 SUS Sts peril oet ee daa aah el NE dated dere deos 16 225 TND EPenporaty Eel ia ui cand a tut eddie D tette toad 16 225 END S Prostam Ea estet teu ee 9B oe CUR sola e Ea 16 226 MCR Master Control Reset itio yer vk RISE EM 16 226 Chapter 17 IM Immediate Input with Mask 0 0000000088 17 229 IOM Immediate Output with Mask 0 000000 0a 17 230 REEFE IRKORetfeslizesos e EA IM eee edd 17 231 Chapter 18 Information About Using Interrupts leeseeeeeese 18 233 User Interrupt Instructions tak coset eal NA Cot tig nailed n 18 237 INT Interrupt Subroutine 1455 e bet oti do te p aea 18 238 STS Selectable Timed SUC ouo od t bre ros er ht
152. of Recipes E Force Files Hel E 00 OUTPUT Name Untitled Description E n INPUT 5 Custom Data Monitors Location where recipe data is stored applies to all recipe files Pl CDM 0 Untitled User Program C Data Log Queue e File This is the number identifying the RCP file It is the Recipe File Number used in the RCP instruction in your ladder program and identifies the recipe database Number of Recipes This is the number of recipes contained in the RCP file This can never be more than 256 This is the Recipe Number used in the RCP instruction in your ladder program Name This is a descriptive name for the RCP file Do not exceed 20 characters Desctiption This is the file description optional Location where recipe data is stored applies to all recipe files This allows you to designate a memory location for your RCP files User Program You can allocate User Program ladder logic memory for recipe operations Once User Program memory is assigned for recipe use it cannot be used for ladder logic TIP User Program memory can be changed back from recipe operations to ladder logic IMPORTANT When User Program memory is used for recipe data the usage is as follows 1K words of User Program memory 5K words of recipe data memory Like your ladder logic the recipe data stored in User Program memory can be saved to the controller s memory module 1764 MM1 MM2 M
153. of characters in the buffer that the controller finds 0 to 1024 This parameter is read only e Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 306 for error descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ACB Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 Address iles Function Files Address Level Data Files 2 Mode P Er z E Sg T Parameter E E E e 8 E 5 le i B S Fe Bis is e e ls e oe iW o 19 j l z IS e l lm 14 JE e Is le Is JE Ia e lo le z u 2 S a i f E 5 ala S EJ a l Z l lz S Channel Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 294 ASCII Instructions ACI String to Integer ACI String to Integer Source T10 0 Dest N7 0 0 lt Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Instruction Operation When the rung goes from false to true the Enable bit EN is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The Done bit DN is set on completion of the instruction The contr
154. on numeric passwords Controller passwords consist of up to 10 digits 0 9 Each controller program may contain two passwords the Password and the Master Password Passwords restrict access to the controller The Master Password takes precedence over the Password The idea is that all controllers in a project would have different Passwords but the same Master Password allowing access to all controllers for supervisory of maintenance purposes You can establish change or delete a password by using the Controller Properties dialog box It is not necessary to use passwords but if used a master password is ignored unless a password is also used Controller Properties x General Compiler Passwords Controller Communications Password Mew l Remove Master Password TIP If a password is lost or forgotten there is no way to bypass the password to recover the program The only option is to clear the controller s memory Clearing the Controller Memory Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock Controller Memory and File Types 53 If the Memory Module User Program has the Load Always functionality enabled and the controller User Program has a password specified the controller compates the passwords before transferring the User Program from the Memory Module to the controller If the passwords do not match the User Program is not transferred and the program mismatch bit is set S 5 9 If you
155. only Any ER Error Code detected by the EIT sub system is displayed in this register The table below explains the error codes Ell Error Codes Error Recoverable Fault Description Code Controller 1 Invalid Program File Program file number is less than 3 greater than 255 or Number does not exist 2 Invalid Input Selection Valid numbers must be 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 3 Input Selection Overlap Ells cannot share inputs Fach Ell must have a unique input Ell User Interrupt Executing UIX Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIX User Interrupt Executing EII 0 UIX binary bit status read only The UIX User Interrupt Executing bit is set whenever the EII mechanism detects a valid input and the controller is scanning the PFN The EII mechanism clears the UIX bit when the controller completes its processing of the EII subroutine Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 250 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Using Interrupts The EI UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an EII interrupt is executing Ell User Interrupt Enable UIE Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIE User Interrupt Enable EIl O UIE binary bit control read write The UIE User Interrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable EI su
156. or 1 status read only The PID done bit is set 1 for one scan when the PID algorithm is computed It resets 0 whenever the instruction is scanned and the PID algorithm was not computed applies to timed mode only Enable EN Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access EN Enable PD10 0 EN binary bit 0 or 1 status read only The PID enabled bit is set 1 whenever the PID instruction is enabled It follows the rung state Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 268 Runtime Errors Process Control Instruction Integral Sum IS Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access IS Integral Sum PD10 0 I8 long word 2 147 483 648 to status read write 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 This is the result of the integration Zef Eai Tj Altered Derivative Term AD Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access AD Altered PD10 0 AD long word 2 147 483 648 to status read only Derivative Term 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 This long word is used internally to track the change in the process variable within the loop update time Error code 0036 appears in the status file when a PID instruction runtime error occurs Code 0036 covers the following PID error conditions each of which has
157. or does not exist 2 Invalid Mode n a Invalid Mode 3 Invalid High 0 1 High preset is less than or equal to zero 0 Preset 2to7 High preset is less than or equal to low preset 4 Invalid Overflow 0 to 7 High preset is greater than overflow 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 Function Enabled FE Description Address Data Format ySC Modes Type User Program Access FE Function HSC O FE bi Enabled 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 t 0to7 control read write The FE Function Enabled is a status control bit that defines when the HSC interrupt is enabled and that interrupts generated by the HSC are processed based on their priority This bit can be controlled by the user program or is automatically set by the HSC sub system if auto start is enabled See also Priority of User Interrupts on page 235 Auto Start AS Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access AS Auto Start HSC 0 AS bi 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 t 0 to 7 control read only The AS Auto Start is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit defines if the HSC function automatically starts whenever the controller enters any run or test mode The CE Counting Enabled bit must also be set to enable the HSC Publication 1762 R
158. other If the resulting values ate equal the rung state is true If the resulting values ate not equal the rung state is false For example Source Compare 111 1 1 11 10 1 10 10 10 O I0 11 11 0 0 11 11 1 1111 11 1 11 10 JO JO f0 10 JO JO JO Mask Mask 101 0 JO 11 11 1 1 11 11 JO JO JO JO 1 111 11 JO JO 1 1 1 1 1 1 JO JO JO JO 1 1 Intermediate Result Intermediate Result 1 11 JO IO 11 10 1 JO 10 JO JO IO JO JO JO JO 11 10 01 1 J1 11 10 JO JO JO 10 JO JO JO Comparison of the Intermediate Results not equal The source mask and compare values must all be of the same data size either word or long word The data ranges for mask and compare are e 32768 to 32767 word e 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 LIM Limit Test LIM Limit Test Low Lim N7 0 0 lt Test 0 0 lt High Lim N7 1 0 lt Compare Instructions 167 The mask is displayed as a hexadecimal unsigned value from 0000 to FFFF FFFF Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table MEO Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Address
159. out Valid File Type Combinations Communications Instructions 337 Valid transfers between file types are shown below fot MicroLogix messaging Local Data Types Communication Type Target Data Types o 0 B N L lt gt read write 485CIF T lt gt read write 485CIF C lt gt read write 485CIF R lt gt read write 485CIF gr gt write 485CIF 1 Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages 2 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later only Example 3 Local Read from a PLC 5 Message Instruction Setup T MSG Rung 2 34 MG11 0 This Controller Communication Command Data Table Address N70 Size in Elements 10 1 Channel 0 PLCS Read Ignore if timed out TO r Control Bits Awaiting Execution EW pl Target D evice Message Timeout 5 Data Table Address N 7 50 Local Node Addr dec 2 octal Error ER Message done DN Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Local Remote Local j Eror Error Code Hex 0 Description No errors In this example the controller reads 10 elements from the target device s Local Node 2 N7 file starting at word N7 50 The 10 words are placed in the controller s integer file starting at word N7 0
160. output Execution Time for the MCR Instructions Controller Instruction When Rungis 7 True False MicroLogix 1200 MCR Start 1 2 us 1 2 us MCR End 1 6 us 1 6 us MicroLogix 1500 MCR Start 0 8 us 0 8 us MCR End 1 0 us 1 0 us The MCR instruction works in pairs to control the ladder logic found between those pairs Rungs within the MCR zone are still scanned but scan time is reduced due to the false state of non retentive outputs Non retentive outputs are reset when the rung goes false This instruction defines the boundaries of an MCR Zone An MCR Zone is the set of ladder logic instructions bounded by an MCR instruction pair The start of an MCR zone is defined to be the rung that contains an MCR instruction preceded by conditional logic The end of an MCR zone is defined to be the first rung containing just an MCR instruction following a start MCR zone rung as shown below Program Control Instructions 227 0030 E CMCR gt Ladder Logic within MCR Zone 0033 CMCR gt While the rung state of the first MCR instruction is true execution proceeds as if the zone were not present When the rung state of the first MCR instruction is false the ladder logic within the MCR zone is executed as if the rung is false All non retentive outputs within the MCR zone ate reset MCR zones let you enable or inhibit segments of your program such as for recipe applications When you pr
161. page 323 Local Messages on page 324 Configuring a Local Message on page 325 Local Messaging Examples on page 333 e Remote Messages on page 346 Configuring a Remote Message on page 348 e MSG Instruction Error Codes on page 351 The communication instructions read or write data to another station Instruction Used To Page SVC Interrupt the program scan to execute the service communications part 310 of the operating cycle The scan then resumes at the instruction following the SVC instruction MSG Transfer data from one device to another 313 The communication architecture is comprised of three primary components e Ladder Scan e Communications Buffers e Communication Queue These three components determine when a message is transmitted by the controller For a message to transmit it must be scanned on a true rung of logic When scanned the message and the data defined within the message if it is a write message are placed in a communication buffer The controller continues to scan the remaining user program The message is processed and sent out of the controller via the communications port after the ladder logic completes during the Service Communications part of the operating cycle unless an SVC is executed Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 310 Communications Instructions SVC Service Communications SVC Service Communications Channel Select Publication 1762 RM
162. parameter in the SCP instruction Special Considerations when Using Floating Point Parameters If any of the parameters except Output are NAN not a number Infinity or De normalized then the result is NAN If y yo Of x xo result in an overflow then the result is NAN Other Considerations If y4 yo 0 the Result becomes the Scaled Start value If x xo 0 and x xo the Result becomes the Scaled Start value If x4 xo 0 and x does not equal xp The Result becomes a negative overflow for integer values or a negative NAN for floating point values Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 180 Math Instructions SOR Square Root Instruction Type output SOR Square Root Execution Time for the SOR Instruction Source N7 0 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Dest N7 1 0 True False MicroLogix 1200 word 26 0 us 0 0 us long word 30 9 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 22 3 us 0 0 us long word 26 0 us 0 0 us The SQR instruction calculates the square root of the absolute value of the source and places the rounded result in the destination The data ranges for the source is 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word The Carry Math Status Bit is set if the source is negative See Updates to Math Status Bits on page 170 for more information SOR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the te
163. power was lost the error conditions are cleared the controller resumes operation using the ATTENTION Under error conditions physical outputs are turned off Once A data table value Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table OTL and OTU Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Address Data Files Function Files E EE Level Parameter ge T x amp as Ss 8 E ol latent ZSe SEB EE SSE S SEE i OperandBit e e e ejel e ele elelelele e e elele 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type input Execution Time for the ONS Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 2 6 us 1 9 us Relay Type Bit Instructions 151 Execution Time for the ONS Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1500 2 2 us 1 7 us
164. processor is at an older revision you must upgrade the operating system to FRN 3 or higher to use an expansion cable and power supply On the Internet go to http www ab com micrologix to download the operating system upgrade Select MicroLogix 1500 System go to downloads The expansion power supply cannot be connected directly to the controller It must be connected using one of the expansion cables Only one expansion power supply may be used in a MicroLogix 1500 system Exceeding these limitations may damage the power supply and result in unexpected operation ATTENTION LIMIT OF ONE EXPANSION POWER SUPPLY AND CABLE MicroLogix 1500 Discrete 1 0 Configuration Compact Expansion l 0 Memory Mapping 1769 IA8I Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 7 correspond to input terminals 0 through 7 bits 8 through 15 are not used Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 X X X X X X X r r jt jr ur j jr jr e eo e ol A wo N e Word r read x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1769 IM12 Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 11 correspond to input terminals 0 through 11 bits 12 through 15 are not used Bit Position 15 4 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 j 6 5 4 3 2 31 J0 X X X x n nr
165. program files and data files The maximum data memory usage is 4K words as shown below Data Words A o uw A A 10K 10 7K e A Program Words IMPORTANT For the MicroLogix 1500 the maximum file size of any single ladder file is 6 4K words You can utilize the entire programming space by using multiple ladder files through the use of subroutines The 1764 LRP processor also supports 48K bytes of battery backed memory for Data Logging or Recipe operations See Chapter 22 for Data Logging and Recipe information See MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time on page 381 to find the memory usage for specific instructions Controller Memory and File Types 47 Viewing Controller Memory Usage 1 Highlight and open Controller Properties 72 1500 LRP 2 The amount of Memory Used and Memory Left will appear in the Controller Properties window once the program has been vetified Controller Properties Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 48 Controller Memory and File Types Data Files Data files store numeric information including I O status and other data associated with the instructions used in ladder subroutines The data file types are File Name File File Words per File Description Identifier Number Element Output File 0 0 1 The Output File stores the values that are written to the physical outputs during the Output
166. r Word 3 Hie Enable o Hz zi Enable 5o Hz zi Input Hange Input Range Jd to 1 VDC fi Dto 10 YDE si Data Format Data Format F aw Proportional F Paw Proportional oF OK Cancel Help Application Notes The following paragraphs discuss e Input Output Ranges e Scaling to Engineering Units Zero crossing Deadband Output Alarms Output Limiting with Anti reset Windup e The Manual Mode e Feed Forward fully understand its function and how it will affect your process Unexpected ATTENTION Do not alter the state of any PID control block value unless you AN operation could result with possible equipment damage and or personal injury Input Output Ranges The input module measuring the process variable PV must have a full scale binary range of 0 to 16383 If this value is less than 0 bit 15 set then a value of Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Process Control Instruction 271 zero is used for PV and the Process var out of range bit is set bit 12 of word 0 in the control block If the process variable is greater than 16383 bit 14 set then a value of 16383 is used for PV and the Process var out of range bit is set The Control Variable calculated by the PID instruction has the same range of 0 to 16383 The Control Output word 16 of the control block has the range of 0 to 100 You can set lower and upper limits for the instruction s calculated output
167. range is from 0 to 2 You can also specify LEN or POS Bit delimiter b Bit number The valid bit number range is from 0 to 15 The bit number is the bit location within the string file element Bit level addressing is not available for words 1 and 2 of the control element Examples R62 Element 2 control file 6 R6 2 0 13 Bit 13 in sub element 0 of element 2 control file 6 R18 1 LEN Specified string length of element 1 control file 18 R18 1 POS Actual string length of element 1 control file 18 ACL ASCII Clear Buffers Instruction Type output ACL aa eas Buffers Execution Time for the ACL Instruction anne Transmit Buffer Yes Controller When Instruction Is Receive Buffer No True False MicroLogix 1200 clear buffers 0 0 us Publication 1762 RM001 both 249 1 us receive 28 9 us transmit 33 6 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later clear buffers 0 0 us both 203 9 us receive 24 7 us transmit 29 1 us H EN P July 2014 ASCII Instructions 285 The ACL instruction clears the Receive and or Transmit buffer s This instruction also removes instructions from ASCII queue TIP For MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and MicroLogix 1500 FRN 8 and higher the ACL instruction can also be used to clear the DF1 communication buffers when the channel is configured for any of the DF1 communication drivers Select 0 for the channel number that is configured for DA or 1 for channel
168. resistance Input Module User Manual publication number 1769 UM005 for details OCx Open circuit detection bit for channels 0 through 5 These bits are set 1 when either an open or shorted input for RTD inputs or an open input for resistance inputs is detected TIP Short circuit detection for resistance inputs is not indicated because 0 is a valid number Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 through 5 using RTD inputs only These bits can be used in the control program for error detection There is no under range error for a direct resistance input because 0 is a valid number Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 5 using either RTD or resistance inputs These bits can be used in the control program for error detection 1769 IT6 Thermocouple Module Input Data File The input data file contains the analog values of the inputs Bit Position 15 14 13 172 11 109 8 7 6 5b 4 3 2 91 J0 Analog Input Data Channel 0 Analog Input Data Channel 1 Analog Input Data Channel 2 Analog Input Data Channel 3 Analog Input Data Channel 4 Analog Input Data Channel 5 OC7 0 6 0C5 0C4 0C3 0C2 0C1 0C0 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 82 S1 S0 UO 00 U1 01 U2 02 U3 03 U4 04 U5 05 U6 06 U7 07 The bits are defined as follows 1 0 Configuration 33 e Sx General status bit for channels 0 through 5 and CJC sensors S6 and S7 This bi
169. routine was executed Recoverable e Either reset bit S 1 9 if this is consistent PROTECTION FAULT at power up prior to the main ladder with the application requirements and program Bit 1 13 Major Error change the mode back to RUN or Halted was not clearedat the end of e clear S 1 13 the Major Error Halted bit the User Fault Routine The User before the end of the User Fault Routine Fault Routine ran because bit 1 9 was set at power up 0017 NVRAM MEMORY Bit 2 9 is set in the controller and Non Recoverable Transfer the memory module program to the MODULE USER the memory module user program controller and then change to Run mode PROGRAM does not match the controller user MISMATCH program 0018 MEMORY MODULE The user program in the memory Non User e Upgrade the OS using ControlFlash to be USER PROGRAM module is incompatible with the OS compatible with the memory module eer WITH e Obtain a new memory module e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for more information about available operating systems your controller 001A USER PROGRAM The user program is incompatible Non User e Upgrade the OS using ControlFlash INCOMPATIBLE WITH with the OS e Contact your local Rockwell Automation OS AT POWER UP representative for more information about available operating systems your controller 0020 MINOR ERROR AT A minor fault bit bits 0 7 in S 5 was Recoverable e Correct the instruction logic causing the
170. s a ess sr tex zi c L5 le BEBE T sl S eu a B 3 2 See S 5 e o l lo le l kh b h S let E SE Ela Es e S e la E a lE la ls i Channel Receive Buffer Transmit Buffer 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 286 ASCII Instructions AIC ASCII Integer to String AIC Integer to String I Source N7 0 Dest ST14 1 AIC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types Instruction Operation When Clear Receive Buffer and Clear Transmit Buffer are both set to Yes all Receive and Transmit instructions ARL ARD AWA and AWT are removed from the ASCII queue When instructions are removed from the ASCII queue the following bits are set ER 1 RN 0 EU 0 and ERR OxOE Instruction Type output Execution Time for the AIC Instruction Controller Data Size When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 29 3 us 5 2 us character 0 0 us long word 82 0 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later word 25 us 4 3 us character 0 0 us long word 68 7 us 0 0 us The AIC instruction converts an integer or long word value source to an ASCH string destination The source can be a constant or an address The source data range is from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647
171. set 1 in the controller its user program and the memory module user program must match for the controller to enter an executing mode If the user program does not match the memory module program or if the memory module is not present the controller faults with error code 0017H on any attempt to enter an executing mode Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 System Status File 397 An RTC module does not support program compare If program compare is enabled and an RTC only module is installed the controller does not enter an executing mode See also LPC Load Program Compare on page 62 Math Overflow Selection Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 14 binary 00r 1 control read write Set 1 this bit when you intend to use 32 bit addition and subtraction When S 2 14 is set and the result of an ADD SUB MUL or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address underflow or overflow e the overflow bit S 0 1 is set e the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set and the destination address contains the unsigned truncated least significant 16 or 32 bits of the result The default condition of S 2 14 is cleared 0 When S 2 14 is cleared 0 and the result of an ADD SUB MUL or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address underflow or overflow e the overflow bit S 0 1 is set e the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set the destinatio
172. some devices start addressing at 0 The Modbus Data Address in the Message Setup Screen may need to be incremented by one to properly access a Modbus slave s memory depending on that slave s implementation of memory addressing Local Slave Node Address This is the destination device s node number if the devices are on a DH 485 using 1761 NET AIC DeviceNet using 1761 NET DND DF1 or Modbus network TIP To initiate a broadcast message on a DH 485 DF1 Half Duplex or DF1 Radio Modem network set the local node address to 1 To initiate a broadcast message on a Modbus network set the slave node address to 0 Do not initiate more than one Modbus broadcast message at a time When sequentially triggering multiple Modbus broadcast messages insert at least 10 msec delay in between each message Local Remote This variable defines the type of communications that is used Always use local when you need point to point communications via DF1 Full Duplex or network communications such as Ethernet IP using 1761 NET END DeviceNet using 1761 NET DND DF1 Half Duplex or DF1 Radio Modem For DH 485 use local if the target node is on the same DH 485 network as this controller or remote if the path to the target node goes through one or more communication bridges Five examples of local messaging are shown in this section e 500CPU message type e 485CIF message type e PLC5 message type e CIP Generic message type over DeviceNet via
173. tab The node address is listed as Source ID Setting Controller Baud Rate The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate which is 19200 This is the default baud rate for a MicroLogix devices on the DH 485 network All devices must be at the same baud rate This rate is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 8 to CS0 5 15 Configure the baud rate via Channel Configuration using RSLogix 500 Select the Channel 0 tab Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 426 Protocol Configuration DF1 Full Duplex Protocol Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Setting Maximum Node Address Once you have an established network set up and are confident that you will not be adding more devices you may enhance performance by adjusting the maximum node address of your controllers It should be set to the highest node address being used IMPORTANT All devices should be set to the same maximum node address MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Remote Packet Support These controllers can respond and initiate with device s communications or commands that do not originate on the local DH 485 network This is useful in installations where communication is needed between the DH 485 and DH networks DF1 Full Duplex protocol provides a point to point connection between two devices DF1 Full Duplex protocol combines data transparency American National Standards Institute ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategory
174. tan ents Thy 20 283 ACE ASCH Cleat Buffets otiia we Oeo e Eu ata aaa 20 284 AIC ASCII Integer to String oi oi in ES C bte eoi ERR 20 286 AWA ASCII Write with Append uda doe setate ie RAD 20 287 AWT ASCII Witte guan ed ba kierie Snes I le V 20 289 ABL Test D lerionlife 155 61 o Pn betels do Sob or hdd 20 291 ACB Number of Characters in Buffer 00004 20 293 AC Stic to Integer d eder e n Ea Ia Re 20 294 ACN String Colncalenate 4 4 Cover Tees one pa we teers 20 295 AEX Stine Extracta re eee oo E RR ER 20 296 AHL ASCII Handshake Limes ete SA oec lx 20 298 ARD ASCII Read Characters ii udo eet bila hae edo 20 299 ARE SA SGT Read DB iet bth ih pat petto urb de ondes dede 20 301 ASG ASWING SCAG eb Eas esae Pers Fue s pese REA 20 302 ASR ASCII String Compare 45e ee WC E Eh 20 304 Timing Diagram for ARD ARL AWA and AWT Instructions 20 305 Using In line Tndirection so ise tere RP n 20 305 ASCII Instruction Error Codes n sunaa vete pe he ae 20 306 ASCI Ghatacter Seb srini oaa tete eS tbe pane 20 307 Chapter 21 Messaging Overvieyi seno stove CONES eure EC Eus 21 309 SVC Service Communications xs eee eos ounce e Aer ru 21 310 MSG Messages cuc eoo US vespere dps 21 313 Tbe Message Blement i5 ri eser REAIRR Se STG OSES 21 314 Timing Diagram for the MSG Instruction 44 21 320 9 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 10 Table of Contents Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and D
175. that you set via the Channel 0 and Channel 1 for the 1764 LRP configuration screens in your programming software Configuration of the two append characters for the AWA instruction can be found in the General tab of Channel Configuration option in RSLogix 500 File Description The string data file is used by the ASCII instructions to store ASCII character data The ASCII data can be accessed by the source and destination operands in the ASCII instructions The string data file can also be used by the copy COP and move MOV MVM instructions String files consist of 42 word elements One string file element is shown below You can have up to 256 of these elements in the string file String Data File Structure String Element Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Word upper byte lower byte 0 String Length number of characters range is from 0 to 82 1 character 0 character 1 2 character 2 character 3 40 character 78 character 79 41 character 80 character 81 Addressing String Files The addressing scheme for the string data file is shown below Format Explanation ST String file STf e s f File number The valid file number range is from 3 to 255 Element delimiter Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 ASCII Instructions 283 Format Explanation e Element number The valid element number range is from 0 to 255 Each element is 42 words i
176. the ASCII instruction currently executing The ER error bit is set for each instruction that is removed from the ASCII queue Protocol Overview ASCII Instructions 281 When any of the other port control instructions ate encountered in a ladder logic program it may or may not execute immediately depending on the contents of the ASCII queue The ASCII queue is a FIFO first in first out queue which can contain up to 16 instructions The ASCII queue operates as follows e When the instruction is encountered on a rung and the ASCII queue is empty the instruction executes immediately It may take several program scans for the instruction to complete When the instruction is encountered on a rung and there are from 1 to 15 instructions in the ASCII queue the instruction is put into the ASCII queue and is executed when the preceding instructions are completed If the ASCH queue is full the instruction waits until the next program scan to determine if it can enter the ASCII queue The controller continues executing other instructions while the ASCII port control instruction is waiting to enter the queue Programming ASCII Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions always precede the ASCII instruction with conditional logic that detects when new data needs to be sent or send data on a time interval If sent on a time interval use an interval of 0 5 second or greater Do not continuously generate streams of ASCII data out of
177. the RTC from functioning and decrease the drain on the battery during storage RTC 0 BL The Battery Low bit will be set 1 when the battery is low This means that the battery will fail in less than 14 Days after which the RTC data may become invalid At this time the RTC module will need to be replaced General On the ML1200 the trim pots are located next to the communication port On the ML1500 the trim pots are located below the mode switch under the left access door of the processor Each of the trim pots can be used to manipulate data within the controller The data value of the trim pots can be used throughout the control program as timer counter analog presets etc M11200 M11500 Adjust the trim pots using a small flathead screwdriver By turning the trim pot the data will change within a range of 0 to 250 fully clockwise The maximum rotation of each pot is three quarters of a turn e uy fully counterclockwise fully clockwise Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 476 X Knowledgebase Quick Starts Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 Getting Started Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 v4 00 or later and select the TPI tab See Below Function Files POTO Trim Pot 0 Data 0 250 0 POT1 Trim Pot 1 Data 0 250 ER Error Code 0 There is no configuration needed for the trim pots The values are read only While online turn the trim pots
178. the end of an ASCII line received Setting the second ASCII Termination character to undefined Mf and the first ASCII Termination character to a defined value M indicates a single character termination sequence Control Line Toggles between No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem and Full Duplex Modem No Handshaking Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Protocol Configuration 457 ASCII Channel Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and higher and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Parameter Description Programming Software Default Delete Mode The Delete Mode allows you to select the mode of the delete character Toggles between Ignore Ignore CRT and Printer Delete Mode affects the characters echoed back to the remote device When Delete Mode is endled the previous character is removed from the receive buffer e In CRT mode when a delete character is encountered the cortroller echos three characters to the device backspace space and backspace This erases the previous character on the terminal e n Printer Mode when a delete character is encountered the controller echos the slash character then the deleted character Enable the Echo parameter to use Delete Mode Echo When Echo Mode is enabled all of the characters received are echoed back to the remote device This Disabled allows you to view characters on a terminal connected to the controller Toggles between
179. the memoty usage and instruction execution time for each instruction Execution times using indirect addressing and a scan time worksheet are also provided The tables below lists the execution times and memory usage for the programming instructions These values depend on whether you are using word or Jong word as the data format Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words ASCII Test Buffer for Line ABL 11 4 94 7 6 char 3 3 Long Word addressing level does not apply Absolute Value ABS 0 0 3 1 ASCII Number of Characters in ACB 11 0 842 3 3 Long Word addressing level does not apply Buffer ASCII String to Integer ACI 0 0 14 2 6 3 1 5 0 0 20 3 9 5 char 1 5 char ASCII Clear Buffer ACL 0 0 clear 1 2 Long Word addressing level does not apply both 203 9 receive 24 7 transmit 29 1 ASCII String Concatenate ACN 0 0 ei 102 20 char Add ADD 0 0 2 5 3 3 0 0 10 4 3 5 ASCII String Extract AEX 0 0 1244 2 6 25 Long Word addressing level does not apply char ASCII Handshake Lines AHL 108 893 5 3 ASCII Integer to String AIC 0 0 25 4 3 char 1 4 0 0 68 7 1 6 And AND 0 0 2 0 2 8 0 0 79 3 0 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 38
180. the network If a bit is set 1 the corresponding node is active on the network If a bit is clear 0 the corresponding node is inactive 28 Active Node Table DH 485 and DF1 Half Duplex Master Nodes 16 to 31 CS0 28 1 is node 16 CS0 28 2 is node 17 etc Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Input Output Status File Active Node Table Block Active Node Table DF1 Half Duplex Master Nodes 32 to 47 29 Function Files 79 CS0 29 1 is node 32 CS0 29 2 is node 33 etc hr Active Node Table DF1 Half Duplex Master Nodes 240 to 255 CS0 42 1 is node 240 CS0 42 2 is node 241 etc If you are using RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 or higher you can view the active node table by clicking on Processor Status and then selecting the tab for the configured channel e i iDataFile 2 STATUS Node 32 64 96 128 160 192 Main Proc Scan Times Math Chan 0 fi DF1 Half Duplex Master ctive Node Table 0 0 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 Properties 16 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 Usage Debug Errors Protection Merr_4 Radix Structured X Help The input output status IOS
181. then the MINS Setpoint Minimum patameter corresponds to the value of the setpoint in engineering units when the control input is at its minimum value TIP MinS MaxS scaling allows you to work in engineering units The deadband error and SPV are also displayed in engineering units The process variable PV must be within the range of 0 to 16383 Use of Mins MaxS does not minimize PID PV resolution Scaled errors greater than 32767 or less than 32768 cannot be represented If the scaled error is greater than 32767 it is represented as 32767 If the scaled error is less than 32768 it is represented as 32768 Old Setpoint Value OSP Input Parameter Address Data Range Type User Descriptions Format Program Access OSP Old PD10 0 0SP word 32 768 to 432 767 status read only Setpoint Value INT The OSP Old Setpoint Value is substituted for the current setpoint if the current setpoint goes out of range of the setpoint scaling limiting parameters Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 258 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Process Control Instruction Output Limit OL Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access OL Output Limit PD10 0 0L binary 1 enabled control read write 0 disabled An enabled 1 value enables output limiting to the values defined in PD10 0 CVH Control Variable High a
182. to your MSG instruction Codes E0 to EF represent EXT STS codes 0 to F Codes FO to FC represent EXT STS codes 10 to 1C Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 354 Communications Instructions Notes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 RCP Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only Chapter 22 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only This chapter describes how to use the Recipe and Data Logging functions Instruction Type output Execution Time for the RCP Instruction Controller Operation When Rung ls True False MicroLogix 1500 Load 30 7 us 7 9 us word 0 0 us 13 8 us long word or floating point Store 28 5 us 8 5 us word 0 0 us 15 1 us long word or floating point The RCP file allows you to save custom lists of data associated with a recipe Using these files along with the RCP instruction lets you transfer a data set between the recipe database and a set of uset specified locations in the controller file system When you create a recipe file you chose whether to store the recipe data in User Program memory or Data Log Queue memory IMPORTANT The Data Log Queue option can only be used with 1764 LRP MicroLogix 1500 Series C or higher controllers If you are using a 1764 LSP MicroLogix 1500 controller you must select User Program This section contains the following topics Recipe File and Programming Example on page 361 Examp
183. with each input filter setting can be found in your controller s User Manual The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers provide the ability to individually configure inputs to be latching inputs sometimes referred to as pulse catching inputs A latching input is an input that captures a very fast pulse and holds it for a single controller scan The pulse width that can be captured 1s dependent upon the input filtering selected for that input The following inputs can be configured as latching inputs Controller MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 DC Inputs 0 through 3 0 through 7 You enable this feature with RSLogix 500 programming software With an open project 1 Open the Controller folder 2 Open the I O Configuration folder 3 Open slot 0 controller 4 Select the embedded I O configuration tab 5 Select the mask bits for the inputs that you want to operate as latching inputs 6 Select the state for the latching inputs The controller can detect both on rising edge and off falling edge pulses depending upon the configuration selected in the programming software Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 40 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 The following information is provided for a controller looking for an on pulse When an external signal is detected on the controller latches this event In general at the next input scan follo
184. write 131 JP Jog Pulse PTO 0 JP bit 00r 1 control read write 134 JC Jog Continuous PTO 0 JC bit 0 or 1 control read write 135 EH Enable Hard Stop PTO 0 EH bit 00r1 control read write 129 EN Enable Status follows rung state PTO 0 EN bit 0 or 1 status read only 129 ER Error Code PTO 0 ER word INT 2 to 7 status read only 136 OF Output Frequency Hz PTO 0 0F word INT 0 to 20 000 control read write 129 OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz PTO 0 0FS word INT 0 to 20 000 status read only 130 JF Jog Frequency Hz PTO 0 JF word INT 0 to 20 000 control read write 134 TOP Total Output Pulses To Be Generated PTO 0 TOP long word 0 to control read write 130 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 OPP Output Pulses Produced PTO 0 0PP long word 0 to status read only 130 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 ADP Accel Decel Pulses PTO 0 ADP long word see p 131 control read write 131 32 bit INT CS Controlled Stop PTO 0 CS bit 0 or 1 control read write 133 PTO Output OUT Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access OUT Output PTO 0 0UT word INT 2 or 3 control fread only The PTO OUT Output vatiable defines the output O0 0 2 or O0 0 3 that the PTO instruction controls This variable is set within the function file folder when the control program is written and cannot be set by the user program e When OUT 2 PTO pulses output 2 O0 0 0 2 of the embedde
185. your ladder program When set for timed mode the PID updates the CV at the rate specified in the loop update parameter PD10 0 LUT When set for STI mode the PID updates the CV every time the PID instruction is scanned in the control program When you select STI program the PID instruction in the STI interrupt subroutine The STI routine should have a time interval equal to the setting of the PID loop update parameter PD10 0 LUT Set the STI period in word STI 0 SPM For example if the loop update time contains the value 10 for 100 ms then the STI time interval must also equal 100 for 100 ms TIP When using timed mode your processor scan time should be at least ten times faster than the loop update time to prevent timing inaccuracies or disturbances Loop Update Time LUT Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access LUT Loop Update Time PD10 0 LUT word INT 1to 1024 control read write Process Control Instruction 263 The loop update time word 13 is the time interval between PID calculations The entry is in 0 01 second intervals Enter a loop update time five to ten times faster than the natural period of the load The natural petiod of the load 1s determined by setting the reset and rate parameters to zero and then increasing the gain until the output begins to oscillate When in STI mode this value must equal the STI time interval value loade
186. 0 10 N50 48 10 26 N50 26 N50 49 10 42 N50 42 N50 50 10 11 N50 11 N50 48 11 27 N50 27 N50 49 11 43 N50 43 N50 50 11 12 N50 12 N50 48 12 28 N50 28 N50 49 12 44 N50 44 N50 50 12 13 N50 13 N50 48 13 29 N50 29 N50 49 13 45 N50 45 N50 50 13 14 N50 14 N50 48 14 30 N50 30 N50 49 14 46 N50 46 N50 50 14 15 N50 15 N50 48 15 31 N50 31 N50 49 15 47 N50 47 N50 50 15 The element number displayed on the DAT corresponds to the data register as illustrated in the table The protection bit defines whether the data is read write or read only When the protection bit is set 1 the corresponding data address is considered read only by the DAT The Protected LED illuminates whenever a read only element is active on the DAT display When the protection bit is clear 0 ot the protection bit does not exist the Protected LED is off and the data within the corresponding address is editable from the DAT keypad IMPORTANT Although the DAT does not allow protected data to be changed from its keypad the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data Protection bits do not provide any overwrite protection to data within the target integer file It is entirely the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten TIP Remaining addresses within the target file can be used without restrictions addresses N50 51 and above in this example The DAT always starts at word 0 of a data file It cannot start a
187. 0 Series C and higher controllers only Updates to Math Status Bits Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files After a math instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 in the processor status file S2 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry sets if carry is generated otherwise resets 0 1 Overflow sets when the result of a math instruction does not fit into the destination otherwise resets 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if result is negative MSB is set otherwise resets Using the Floating Point F Data File Floating Point Data File Structure Floating Point Element Math Instructions 171 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 2 14 Math Overflow examines the state of this bit to determine the value of the Selected result when an overflow occurs S 5 0 Overflow Trap sets if the Overflow Bit is set otherwise resets 1 Control bits Overflow Trap Bit S 5 0 Minor error bit S 5 0 is set upon detection of a mathematical overflow or division by zero If this bit is set upon execution of an END statement or a Temporary End TND instruction the recoverable major error code
188. 0020 is declared In applications where a math overflow or divide by zero occurs you can avoid a controller fault by using an unlatch OTU instruction with address S 5 0 in your program The rung must be between the overflow point and the END or TND statement The following illustration shows the rung you can use to unlatch the overflow trap bit File Description Floating point files contain IEEE 754 floating point data elements One floating point element is shown below You can have up to 256 of these elements in each floating point file 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 2 A s t Exponent Value High Word 1 S Sign Bit 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Mantissa Low Word Floating point numbers are represented using the IEEE 754 format where Bit 31 is the sign bit This bit is set for negative numbers note that negative zero is a valid value Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 172 Math Instructions Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Bits 23 to 30 are the exponent e Bits 0 to 22 are the mantissa The value represented by a 32 bit floating point number not one of the exception values defined on page 172 is given by the following expression Note the restoration of the suppressed most significant bit of the mantissa Cx 2 I x atm where sis the sign bit 0 or 1
189. 014 156 TOF Timer TOF Timer and Counter Instructions Off Delay Timer Off Delay I EN 5 Timer T4 0 Time Base 1 0 cCDN 5 Preset 0 lt Accum 0 lt Instruction Type output Execution Time for the TOF Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 2 9 us 13 0 us MicroLogix 1500 2 5 us 10 9 us Use the TOF instruction to delay turning off an output The TOF instruction begins to count time base intervals when rung conditions become false As long as rung conditions remain false the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached The accumulator is reset 0 when rung conditions go true regardless of whether the timer is timed out TOF timers are reset on power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following control and status bits Timer Control and Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 13 T4 0 DN DN timer done Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs rung conditions go false and the accumulated value is greater than or equal to the preset value rung conditions are true bit 14 T4 0 TT TT timer timing rung conditions are false and accumulated value is less than the preset value rung conditions go true or when the done bit is reset bit15 T4 0 EN EN timer enable rung conditions are true
190. 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD 4to15 Reserved 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 Total Message Packets Received for This Slave 12 Total Message Packets Received 13 Link Layer Error Count 14 Link Layer Error Code 15 to 22 Reserved Modbus RTU Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Presentation Layer MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors Word Bit Description 43 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 10 si C 44 Length always 14 45 Format Code always 0 46 Pre Send Time Delay 47 Oto7 Node Address 8to15 Reserved 48 Inter Character Timeout 49 RTS Send Delay Function Files 75 Modbus RTU Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Presentation Layer MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors Word Bit Description 50 RTS Off Delay 51 0 to 7 Baud Rate 8and9 Parity 10to 15 Reserved 52 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 6 53 Length always 32 54 Format Code always 0 55 Presentation Layer Error Code 56 Presentation Layer Error Count 57 Execution Function Error Code 58 Last Transmitted Exception Code 59 Data File Number of Error Request 60 Element Number of Error Request 61 Function Code 1 Message Cou
191. 1 contains the Preset and Word 2 contains the Accumulated Value Word Bit 15 14 13 12 131 10 9 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 J0 Word 0 U CD DN OV TUN Not Used Word 1 Preset Value Word 2 Accumulated Value CU Count Up Enable Bit CD Count Down Enable Bit DN Count Done Bit OV Count Overflow Bit UN Count Underflow Bit Preset When the accumulator reaches this value the DN bit is set The preset data range is from 32768 to 32767 e Accumulator The accumulator contains the current count The accumulator data range is from 32768 to 32767 The accumulated value is incremented CTU or decremented CTD on each false to true rung transition The accumulated value is retained when the rung condition again becomes false and when power is cycled on the controller The accumulated count is retained until cleared by a reset RES instruction that has the same address as the counter TIP The counter continues to count when the accumulator is greater than the CTU preset and when the accumulator is less than the CTD preset Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table CTD and CTU Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Data Files Function Files EN Address ata Files gt Mode Level P E Parameter E Jele T a sess s t z S eles skr aei
192. 1 on the 1764 LRP only and Yes for both the Receive and Transmit Buffers When the ACL instruction is executed any pending outgoing DF1 replies any pending incoming DF1 commands and any pending outgoing DF1 commands are flushed Any MSG instructions in progress on that channel will error out with an error code of OxOC This instruction executes immediately upon the rung transitioning to a true state Any ASCII transmissions in progress are terminated when the ACL instruction executes TIP The ASCII queue may contain up to 16 instructions that are waiting to run Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 Receive Buffer clears the Receive buffer when set to Yes and removes the Receive ASCII port control instructions ARL and ARD from the ASCII queue e Transmit Buffer clears the Transmit buffer when set to Yes and removes the Transmit ASCII port control instructions AWA and AWT from the ASCII queue Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ACL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 Address iles Function Files Address Level Data Files 2 Mode E E c o 5 Parameter E E Elo s S 2 o Eo 5 le e zit
193. 1 to N7 0 each time the sub routine is scanned This example also sets the User Interrupt Enable bit and the Auto Start bit allowing the STI to execute Olx jer RTC par re ww eH cso uos Function Files HSC PTO PwM f 3 H ER Error Code 0 H UI User Interrupt Executing 0 UIE User Interrupt Enable 1 UIL User Interrupt Lost 0 UIP User Interrupt Pending 0 TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled HAS Auto Start 1 ED Error Detected 0 SPM Set Point Msec between interrupts 2 000 IMPORTANT Ladder Logic Subroutine file 3 must be created in order for this example to work If the subroutine is not created the CPU will fault due to a STI Error Code 1 Invalid File Number for PFN has been entered EE LAD 3 STI ADD Add m Source A Source B Dest 17655 Quick Start Real Time Clock RTC Knowledgebase Quick Starts 473 Notes on using Interrupt bits If the Auto Start bit AS is set this will start the interrupt on power up and set the Timed Interrupt Enabled bit TIE automatically allowing the interrupt to execute Shown in the above example If the AS bit is not set then the TIE bit must be set through the ladder logic in order for the interrupt to execute The User Interrupt Enable bit UIE determines if the interrupt executes or not General Information The RTC provides Year Month Day Day of Month Day of Week Hour Minute and
194. 10 J0 10 1 10 10 0 fO JO JO JO JO 10 IMPORTANT Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions For mote information see Using Logical Instructions on page 191 and Updates to Math Status Bits on page 192 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Logical Instructions 193 OR Logical OR Instruction Type output OR Bitwise InclusiveOR Execution Time for the OR Instruction Source A N7 0 0000h lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Source B N7 1 0000h True False Dest Nee MicroLogix 1200 word 2 2 US 0 0 us long word 92 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 2 0 us 0 0 us long word 79 us 0 0 us The OR instruction performs a logical OR of two sources and places the result in the destination Truth Table for the OR Instruction Destination A ORB Source A 1 1 1 1 11 10 11 10 10 10 0 0 1 11 JO JO Source B 1110 01191 11 JO JO JO JO n 1 Destination 1 011111111111111 11 ft JO JO nnmnnn IMPORTANT Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions XOR Exclusive OR Instruction Type output XOR Bitwise Exclusive OR Execution Time for the XOR Instruction Source A N7 0 0000h Contro
195. 11 0 ER Binary On or Off Status Read Only Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 320 Communications Instructions Timing Diagram for the MSG Instruction Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 The Error Bit ER is set when message transmission has failed An error code is wtitten to the MSG File The ER bit and the error code are cleared the next time the associated rung goes from false to true Done DN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 DN Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Done Bit DN is set when the message is transmitted successfully The DN bit is cleared the next time the associated rung goes from false to true Start ST Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 ST Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Start Bit ST is set when the processor receives acknowledgment ACK from the target device The ST bit is cleared when the DN ER or TO bit is set The DF1 Radio Modem and Modbus RTU Master protocols do not have acknowledgements When the channel that the MSG instruction 1s being initiated on is configured for either of these two drivers the Start Bit ST is set when the message has been successfully transmitted The following section describes the timing diagram for a message instruction 3 Target node 5 Target node processes packet 1 Rung goes true receives packet successfully and ret
196. 1747 SDN Modbus RTU Message type Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 334 Communications Instructions Parameter This Controller A summary of the message instruction configuration parameters is shown in the following table Channel Description Identifies the communication channel Always Channel 0 or Channel 1 or Expansion Communications Port for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Communication Command 500CPU 485CIF PLC5 and ECP message types Specifies the type of message Valid types are e 500CPU Read e 500CPU Write e 485CIF Read e 485CIF Write e PLC5 Read e PLC5 Write e CIP Generic Modbus Command Specifies the type of message Valid types are e 01 Read Coil Status e 02 Read Input Status e 3 Read Holding Registers e 04 Read Input Registers e 05 Write Single Coil e 06 Write Single Register e 15 Write Multiple Coils e 16 Write Multiple Registers Data Table Address For a Read this is the starting address which receives data Valid file types are B T C R N and L for Modbus commands B and N only For a Write this is the starting address which is sent to the target device Valid file types are 0 I B T C R N L ST and RTC for Modbus commands B and N only Size in elements Defines the length of the message in elements e 1 word elements valid size 1 to 103 e 2 word elements valid size 1 to 51 e 8 word RTC elements valid si
197. 2 MicroLogix 1500 Controllers MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words ASCII Read Characters ARD 10 7 108 44 char 4 3 Long Word addressing level does not apply ASCII Read Line ARL 10 6 114 443 14 3 char ASCII String Search ASC 0 0 13 44 3 5 16 0 matching char ASCII String Compare ASR 0 0 7 5 3 5 1 8 Long Word addressing level does not apply matching char ASCII Write with Append AWA 12 5 ne 106 3 4 char ASCII Write AWT 12 8 237 10 6 13 4 char Bit Shift Left BSL 1 4 26 4 1 06 13 8 word Bit Shift Right BSR 1 4 26 1 1 07 13 8 word Clear CLR 0 0 1 2 1 0 0 0 5 5 1 0 File Copy COP 0 0 15 9 0 67 2 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply word Copy Word CPW 0 0 15 8 0 7 word Count Down CTD 8 5 75 24 Count Up CTU 8 5 64 24 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD 0 0 0 9 1 9 Divide DIV 0 0 10 3 2 0 0 0 36 7 3 5 Data Log DLG 6 7 675411 8 24 6 7 67 5 11 8 date 24 date stamp stamp 12 4 time 12 4 time stamp stamp 16 2 long word 9 1 word logged logged Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC 0 0 6 8 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Equal EOU 1 1 1 2
198. 496 program scan definition 1 496 MicroLogix 1200 scan time worksheet A 380 MicroLogix 1500 scan time worksheet B 386 programmable limit switch 5 87 5 112 programmable limit switch file 5 112 programming device 1 496 programming instructions 4 81 proportional integral derivative application notes 19 270 PID instruction 19 255 PID tuning 19 274 runtime errors 79 268 the PID concept 19 253 the PID equation 19 254 protocol 1 496 DF1 full duplex E 426 DF1 half duplex 427 DF1 radio modem F 439 DH485 communication F 423 Modbus RTU 447 protocol configuration F 423 F 459 PTO function file 6 123 instruction 6 119 Quick Start example F 459 publications related 1 14 pulse train output function file 6 123 instruction 6 119 Quick Start example F 459 pulse width modulation function file 6 138 instruction 6 137 Quick Start example F 462 Purpose of this Manual 1 13 PWM function file 6 138 instruction 6 137 Quick Start example F 462 0 quadrature encoder 5 104 queue 22 359 RAC instruction 5 111 RCP instruction 22 359 read 1 496 real time clock accuracy 3 57 battery low indicator bit 3 58 disabling 3 57 function file 3 56 real time clock Quick Start example F 473 real time clock adjust instruction 3 58 recipe 22 359 recipe instruction 22 359 REF instruction 17 231 refresh instruction 17 231 related publications 1 14 relay 1 496 relay logic 1 496 relay type instructions 7 147 remote messages
199. 5 Dest N15 0 Dest N15 20 In this example the controller uses the following addresses Operand Base Address Offset Value in 24 Working Address Source A N7 0 20 N7 20 Destination N15 0 20 N15 20 TIP Inthe SLC and ML1000 controllers there are some instructions that clear 8 24 after the instruction completes For this reason you must insure that the index register is loaded with the intended value prior to the execution of an indexed instruction Indirect Addressing Example An equivalent example using indirect addressing is shown below In place of using the index register S 24 the user can designate any other valid word address as the indirect address Multiple indirect addresses can be used within an instruction The following ADD instruction uses an indirect address in the Source A and Destination addresses If the indirect offset value is 20 stored in N7 3 the controller uses the data stored at the base address plus the indirect offset to perform to instruction Indirect ADD Working ADD Add I Add I Source A N7 N7 3 Source A N7 20 SourceB 25 Source B 25 Dest N15 N7 3 Dest N15 20 In this example the controller uses the following addresses Operand Base Address Offset Value in N7 3 Working Address Source A N7 0 20 N7 20 Destination N7 0 20 N15 20 High Speed Counter Overview Programmable Limit Switch Overview High Speed Counter HSC Function File Chapte
200. 55 When the DAT reads a valid integer file number it can access the first 48 elements 0 to 47 of the specified file on its display screen The next 48 bits words 48 to 50 are used to define the read only or read write privileges for the 48 elements The only integer file that the DAT interfaces with is the file specified in the TIF location The TIF location can only be changed by a program download Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 64 Function Files IMPORTANT Use your programming software to ensure that the integer file you specify in the TIF location as well as the appropriate number of elements exist in the controller s user program The example table below shows a DAT configured to use integer file number 50 DAT 0 TIF 50 Element Data Address Protection Bit Element Data Address Protection Bit Number Number 0 N50 0 N50 48 0 16 N50 16 50 49 0 32 N50 32 50 50 0 1 N50 1 N50 48 1 17 N50 17 50 49 1 33 N50 33 50 50 1 2 N50 2 N50 48 2 18 N50 18 50 49 2 34 N50 34 50 50 2 3 N50 3 N50 48 3 19 N50 19 50 49 3 35 N50 35 50 50 3 4 N50 4 N50 48 4 20 N50 20 50 49 4 36 N50 36 50 50 4 5 N50 5 N50 48 5 21 N50 21 50 49 5 37 N50 37 50 50 5 6 N50 6 N50 48 6 22 N50 22 50 49 6 38 N50 38 50 50 6 7 N50 7 N50 48 7 23 N50 23 50 49 7 39 N50 39 50 50 7 8 N50 8 N50 48 8 24 N50 24 50 49 8 40 N50 40 50 50 8 9 N50 9 N50 48 9 25 N50 25 50 49 9 41 N50 41 50 50 9 10 N5
201. 6 S 2 15 Math Overflow Selection 397 S 3H Watchdog Scan Time 397 SA Free Running Clock 398 5 Minor Error Bits 399 8 6 Major Error Code 402 S7 Suspend Code 402 8 Suspend File 402 9 Active Nodes Nodes 0 to 15 403 10 Active Nodes Nodes 16 to 31 403 8 13 8 14 Math Register 403 S 15L Node Address 404 15H Baud Rate 404 22 Maximum Scan Time 404 29 User Fault Routine File Number 405 30 STI Set Point 405 31 STI File Number 405 33 Channel 0 Communications 405 35 Last 100 uSec Scan Time 407 36 10 Data File Overwrite Protection Lost 407 37 RTC Year 407 38 RTC Month 408 39 RTC Day of Month 408 40 RTC Hours 408 41 RTC Minutes 409 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 390 Status File Details Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 System Status File Address Function Page 42 RIC Seconds 409 53 RTC Day of Week 409 8 57 OS Catalog Number 410 58 OS Series 410 59 0S FRN 410 60 Processor Catalog Number 410 S 61 Processor Series 410 62 Processor Revision 411 8 63 User Program Functionality Type 411 S 64L Compiler Revision Build Number 411 S 64H Compiler Revision Release 411 Arithmetic Flags The arithmetic flags are assessed by the processor following the execution of any math logical or move instruction The state of these bits remains in effect until the next math logical or move instruction in the program is executed
202. 65 equal to a second value 2 MEO Mask Compare for Equal Test portions of two values to see whether 166 they are equal LIM Limit Test Test whether one value is within the range of 167 two other values Using the Compare Most of the compare instructions use two parameters Source A and Source B Instructions MEQ and LIM have an additional parameter and are described later in this chapter Both sources cannot be immediate values The valid data ranges for these instructions ate 32768 to 32767 word 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table EQU NEO GRT LES GEO and LEO Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Address Data Files Function Files m Ei Mode Level 7 Parameter E So E a s 529 a zt a g E oO 959 og n Clo cml ELT ale e sir Seiaglagli zzeEuwzre 4 El w z 9559 olim z uoLimat rzaduwmutmdEoS9aduEsa si mas 3iu e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e ource e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e ource Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 164 Compare Instructions EQU Equal NEO Not Equal EQU Equa
203. 7 7 3 0 0 47 3 78 Immediate Input with Mask IIM 0 0 26 4 3 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply Interrupt Subroutine INT 1 0 1 0 0 3 Immediate Output with Mask I0M 0 0 223 3 0 Jump JMP 0 0 0 0 5 Jump to Subroutine JSR 0 0 8 4 1 5 Label LBL 1 0 1 0 0 5 Less Than or Equal To LEO 1 1 3 1 3 2 7 2 8 2 9 Less Than LES 4 3 1 3 2 7 2 8 2 9 LIFO Load LFL 0 4 25 5 3 4 10 4 31 6 3 9 LIFO Unload LFU 10 4 29 1 3 4 10 4 31 6 3 4 Limit LIM 6 1 6 4 23 13 6 144 4 0 Master Control Reset MCR Start 12 1 2 1 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply MCR End 1 6 1 6 1 5 Masked Comparison for Equal MEQ 1 8 1 9 1 8 3 1 3 9 3 5 Move MOV 0 0 24 2 5 0 0 8 3 2 0 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 371 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ys Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True T in False True T m Message Steady State MSG 6 0 20 0 2 9 Long Word addressing level does not apply Message False to True 230 0 Transition for Reads Message False to True 264 1 6 word Transition for Writes Multiply MUL 0 0 6 8 2 0 0 0 31 9 3 5 Masked Move MVM 0 0 7 8 2 0 0 0 11 8 3 0
204. 762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 DF1 Half Duplex Master MSG based Polling Mode Operation With MSG based Polling Mode the master device only initiates communication with a slave when a MSG instruction to that slave is triggered in ladder logic Once the read or write command has been transmitted the master waits the Reply MSG Timeout period and then polls that slave for a reply to its command The master can be configured either to ignore 4MSG based Polling don t allow slaves to initiate or to accept MSG based Polling allow slaves to initiate MSGs that may have been triggered and queued up in the slave Protocol Configuration 433 Message Based Polling Mode Channel Configuration x x General Channel 0 General Channel 0 Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master Node Address Driver DF1 Half Duplex Master Node Address 1 decimal 1 decimal Baud 1200 E Baud 1200 M Parity NONE z Parity NONE bd Protocol Control Control Line Half Duplex without Continuous Carrier r Protocol Control Control Line Half Duplex without Continuous Carrier ACK Timeout x20 ms o ACK Timeout x20 ms 50 Error Detection CRC Y RTS Off Delay x20 ms fo Error Detection CRC Ne RTS Off Delay 20 ms 0 Polling Mode Msg Don t allow Slaves to Initia RTS Send Delay x20 ms o Polling Mode 3 Allow Slaves to Initiate RTS Send Delay x20 ms 0 v Duplicate Packet Detect Message Retries IV Duplicate Packet Detect Message Retries 3
205. 9 B51 57 41 B51 41 B51 89 10 B51 10 B51 58 42 B51 42 B51 90 11 B51 11 B51 59 43 B51 43 B51 91 12 B51 12 B51 60 44 B51 44 B51 92 13 B51 13 B51 61 45 B51 45 B51 93 14 B51 14 B51 62 46 B51 46 B51 94 15 B51 15 B51 63 47 B51 47 B51 95 The bit number displayed on the DAT corresponds to the data bit as illustrated in the table The protection bit defines whether the data is editable or read only When the protection bit is set 1 the corresponding data address is considered read only by the DAT The Protected LED illuminates whenever a read only element is active on the DAT display When the protection bit is clear 0 or the protection bit does not exist the Protected LED is off and the data within the corresponding address is editable from the DAT keypad Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 66 Function Files Base Hardware Information Function File Communications Status File Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 IMPORTANT Although the DAT does not allow protected data to be changed from its keypad the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data Protection bits do not provide any overwrite protection to data within the target bit file It is entirely the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten TIP Remaining addresses within the target file can be used without restrictions addresses B51 96 and above in this example
206. BOO oc calvin oaa o bat um qot d bu ede ter 10 180 Chapter 11 Conversion Instructions Using Decode and Encode Instructions 000005 11 181 DCD Decode 4 16 1 Of 16s 2a bob i ste e eee ek ae 11 182 ENC Encode 1 of 16 1015 5 2 evo esr rr aot da ac 11 182 FRD Convert from Binary Coded Decimal BCD 11 184 TOD Convert to Binary Coded Decimal BCD 11 187 GOD Gray Codere eot bit pag CDU RA FAR doe c Rog n 11 189 Chapter 12 Logical Instructions Using Logical Instructions z 4 4o ni itc ba oe S AL 12 191 Updates to Math Status Bits acero ORE 12 192 AND Bie Wise AND S Peta Sretna En ESEE VE RT AR eee 12 192 OR sLopical OR tag feds hotehins stis Dake irt pei ons 12 193 XOR Exclusive OR dia ex USE vr eer Led 12 193 NOT L g NOT 2o iu raa ST ein tuta vase bc 12 194 Chapter 13 Move Instructions MON ed OVES deste dudar du satus er ASE ht c teur 13 195 MVM Masked MOwe iia ia d oerte chem Riad 13 197 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 8 Table of Contents File Instructions Sequencer Instructions Program Control Instructions Input and Output Instructions Using Interrupts Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Chapter 14 GPW Copy Wordissa cett bise o eet o dole eara i tel 14 199 COR Copy Pile o ue er icu o dee CHORO INIM P DERE 14 200 ULE pb Peu erui oU eau More olds ace Nera 14 201 BSL Bit Shift Left dou die ted dc YU n dot obl Br ROI stand 14 203 BSR Bit Shift Right ds
207. C 1 for CIP 2 for Modbus Master Word read only 3 for PCCC Messaging bits 07 00 CMD code bits 15 08 FNC code derived Word read only for CIP Messaging bits 07 00 Service Code bits 15 08 Supplemental Object Path Data Count for Modbus Master bits 07 00 Function Code bits 15 08 reserved 4 Internal Physical Address Word read only 5 MG11 0 RBL PCCC Remote Bridge Link ID Y Word read only CIP Supplemental Object Path Data bytes 0 and 1 Modbus Master not used 6 MG11 0 LBN PCCC Local Bridge Node Address Y Word read only CIP Supplemental Object Path Data bytes 2 and 3 Modbus Master not used 7 MG11 0 RBN PCCC Remote Bridge Node Address MN Word read only CIP Supplemental Object Path Data bytes 4 and 5 Modbus Master not used 8 MG11 0 CHN Channel bits 07 00 0 for Channel 0 1 for Channel 1 Y Word read write Slot bits 15 08 0 to 16 9 MG11 0 NOD Target Node Number Y Word read write 10 MG11 0 MTO Message timeout setting or preset in seconds Y Word read write Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Message File Element Communications Instructions 315 Sub Name Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 11 PCCC and CIP Number of bytes to read write Word read only Modbus Master Number of Modbus elements to read write 12 Target Location information See tables on page 315 for options Y Word _ read o
208. C AIC AIC AIC ET Pie Zi Personal 3 le cs z e j fa Computer TE 8 Hs esl j E p i illl MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 EEEN Example 2 Local DeviceNet Network with DeviceNet Interface 1761 NET DNI DNI SLC 5 03 with 1747 SDN DNI PanelView 550 DeviceNet Network DNI DNI DN DNI Master Personal 2 a p T TU Computer TES i MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Communications Instructions 325 Example 3 Local DF1 Half Duplex Network Rockwell Software RSLinx 2 0 or RS 232 higher SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and uu SLC 5 05 or PLC 5 processors configured for DF1 Half Duplex Master tlli Tresor Modem MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix 1000 Slave 1200 Slave 1500 Slave SLC 5 04 Slave SLC 5 03 with 1747 KE Interface Module Slave TIP
209. C for Source A in Instruction Type input GRT LES GEO and LEO instructions Execution Time for the GEO and LEO Instructions Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False long word 2 8 US 2 7 US MicroLogix 1500 word 1 2 us 1 1 us long word 2 6 us 2 5 us Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 166 Compare Instructions The GEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is greater than or equal to a second value The LEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is less than or equal to a second value GEO and LEO Instruction Operation Instruction Relationship of Source Values Resulting Rung State GEO AB true A B false LEO A gt B false A lt B true IMPORTANT Only use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for Source A in GRT LES GEQ and LEQ instructions MEO Mask Compare for Equal Instruction Type input MEQ 1 Masked Equal I Execution Time for the MEQ Instructions Source N7 0 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Mask N7 1 0000h True False Compare Ma MicroLogix 1200 word 1 9 us 1 8 us long word 3 9 us 3 1 us MicroLogix 1500 word 1 7 us 1 7 us long word 3 5 us 2 9 us The MEQ instruction is used to compare whether one value source is equal to a second value compare through a mask The source and the compare are logically ANDed with the mask Then these results are compared to each
210. CCEL pulses and the type of profile s curve or trapezoid 3 The ACCEL phase completes 4 The RUN phase is entered and the number of pulses defined for RUN are output 5 The RUN phase completes 6 Decelerate DECEL is entered and pulses are produced based on the accelerate decelerate parameters which define the number of DECEL pulses and the type of profile s curve or trapezoid 7 The DECEL phase completes 8 The PTO instruction is DONE Using High Speed Outputs 121 While the PTO instruction is being executed status bits and information are updated as the main controller continues to operate Because the PTO instruction is actually being executed by a parallel system status bits and other information are updated each time the PTO instruction is scanned while it is running This provides the control program access to PTO status while it is running TIP PTO status is only as fresh as the scan time of the controller Worst case latency is the same as the maximum scan of the controller This condition can be minimized by placing a PTO instruction in the STI selectable timed interrupt file or by adding PTO instructions to your program to increase how often a PTO instruction is scanned The charts in the following examples illustrate the typical timing sequence behavior of a PTO instruction The stages listed in each chart have nothing to do with controller scan time They simply illustrate a sequence of events In actuality
211. Carry Flag Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 0 0 binary Oor1 status read write This bit is set 1 if a mathematical carry or borrow is generated Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 When a STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 0 is restored when execution resumes OverFlow Flag Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 0 1 binary 00r 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation does not fit in the destination Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 Whenever this bit 1s set 1 the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is also set 1 When an STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 1 is restored when execution resumes Zero Flag Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 0 2 binary Oor1 status read write System Status File 391 This bit is set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation or data handling instruction Is zero Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 When an STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 2 is restored when execution resumes Sign Flag Address Data Format Range Typ
212. Control Line selection This allows messaging to occur in a Report by Exception mode with radio modems using hardware handshaking based on the status of the DCD Transmission can only occur when DCD is low indicating that no other nodes are currently transmitting Received characters ate considered valid while DCD is high Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 442 Protocol Configuration Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 A DCD Wait Timeout parameter configures the length of time after triggering a MSG that the DCD must go low in order for a message to be transmitted Otherwise the MSG will error out with a 09 error code The DF1 Radio Modem driver can be used in a pseudo Master Slave mode with any radio modems as long as the designated Master node is the only node initiating MSG instructions and as long as only one MSG instruction is triggered at a time For modern serial radio modems that support full duplex data port buffering and radio transmission collision avoidance the DF1 Radio Modem driver can be used to set up a Masterless peer to peer radio network where any node can initiate communications to any other node at any time as long as all of the nodes are within radio range so that they receive each other s transmissions Using Store amp Forward Capability DF1 Radio Modem also supports Store amp Forward capability in order to forward packets between nodes that are outside of radio range of
213. Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 107 Toggle low to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system Load new HSC parameters using the HSL instruction See HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 110 The data loaded into the high preset must be less than or equal to the data resident in the overflow HSC 0 OVF parameter or an HSC error is generated Low Preset LOP Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access LOP Low Preset HSC 0 LOP long word 32 bit INT control read write The LOP Low Preset is the lower setpoint in counts that defines when the HSC sub system generates an interrupt To load data into the low preset the control program must do one of the following e Toggle low to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system e Load new HSC parameters using the HSL instruction See HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 110 The data loaded into the low preset must greater than or equal to the data resident in the underflow HSC 0 UNF parameter or an HSC error is generated If the underflow and low preset values are negative numbers the low preset must be a number with a smaller absolute value Overflow OVF
214. Data File For each module slot x words 0 through 3 contain the analog values of the inputs Words 4 and 5 provide sensor channel status feedback The input data file for each configuration is shown below Word 15 7 0 Bit 0 Analog Input Data Channel 0 1 Analog Input Data Channel 1 2 Analog Input Data Channel 2 1 0 Configuration 23 Word 15 14 13 12 1 1709 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 3 Analog Input Data Channel 3 4 Reserved OC3 0C2 OC1 OCO Reserved 3 S2 S1 SO 5 UO 00 U1 001 U2 02 U3 03 Reserved c The bits are defined as follows e Sx General status bits for input channels 0 through 3 This bit is set 1 when an error over or under range open circuit or input data not valid condition exists for that channel or there is a general module hardware error An input data not valid condition is determined by the user program See the MicroLagix 1200 RTD Resistance Input Module User Manual publication number 1762 UM003 for details OCx Open circuit indication for channels 0 through 3 using either RTD or resistance inputs Short circuit detection for RTD inputs only Short circuit detection for resistance inputs is not indicated because 0 is a valid number Ox Over range flag bits for input channels 0 through 3 using either RTD or resistance inputs These bits can be used in the control program for error detection e Ux Under
215. Data Files are the others Function Files provide an efficient and logical interface to controller resources Controller resources are resident permanent features such as the Real Time Clock and High Speed Counter The features are available to the control program through either instructions that are dedicated to a specific function file or via standard instructions such as MOV and ADD The Function File types are File Name File File Description Identifier High Speed Counter HSC This file type is associated with the High Speed Counter function See Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch on page 87 for more information Pulse Train Output PTO This file type is associated with thePulse Train Output Instruction See Pulse Train Outputs PTO Function File on page 123 for more information MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units only Pulse Width Modulation PWM This file type is associated with the Pulse Width Modulation instruction See Pulse Width Modulation PWM Function File on page 138 for more information MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units only Selectable Timed Interrupt STI This file type is associated with the Selectable Timed Interrupt function See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 242 for more information Event Input Interrupt Ell This file type is associated with the Event Input Interrupt instruction See Using the Event Input Interrupt Ell Function
216. EN P July 2014 96 X Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Low Preset Reached LPR Description Address Data Format usc Modes Type User Program Access LPR Low HSC 0 LPR bit 2 to 7 status read only Preset Reached 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The LPR Low Preset Reached status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC is less than or equal to the low preset variable HSC 0 LOP This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in an executing mode High Preset Mask HPM Description Address Data Format Hsc Modes Type User Program Access HPM High I HSCO HPM bi Preset Mask 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 t 0to7 control read write The HPM High Preset Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a high preset interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a High Preset Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit High Preset Interrupt HPI Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access HPI High HSC 0 HPI
217. F User Interrupt Flush UIF User Interrupt Flush Interrupt Types Using Interrupts 241 Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UIE Instruction Interrupt Element Decimal Corresponding _ Value Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 HSC High Speed Counter HSCI 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero 1 The MicroLogix 1200 has one HSC Interrupt HSCO The MicroLogix 1500 has two HSCO and HSC1 To enable interrupt s 1 Select which interrupts you want to enable 2 Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected 3 Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt 4 Enter the sum into the UIE instruction For example to enable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 EII Event 1 32 EII Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value OTE or UIE this instruction must be the ast instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL Instruction Type output Execution Time for the UIF Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 12 3 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 10 6 us 0 0 us
218. FL LFU instruction pair shown below LFL Ta Some N 0 eo Destination Position o 17 12 EM N7 11 N22 0 Length 34 N7 13 1 engl oston 3 LFU instruction N7 14 2 eg unloads data from 3 zz ud LFO UNLOAD EU stack N7 12 at 4 LIF N7 12 LDN iti Dest N7 11 E positi n DUC 5 34 words are allocated Tu HeD 6 for FIFO stack starting Position 9 7 at N7 12 ending at re N7 45 LFL and LFU Instruction Pair Source 8 N7 10 gt 9 LFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next N745 33 available position 9 l in this case Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 This instruction uses the following operands e Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position in the LIFO stack The data size of the source must match the LIFO stack If LIFO is a word size file source must be a word value or constant If LIFO is a long word size file source must be along word value or constant The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word LIFO The LIFO operand is the starting address of the stack File Instructions 211 Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value ate stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the s
219. File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2 y i Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode o Parameter E E a s S la lS z lz E g jo n 5 l S S e zx a wv 8 K o lo e l a b a E a t Z E IB IG a E la e 13 e la JE a a z jS a Source e e e e e e e e Destination ele e jo o e o Updates to Math Status Bits Math Status Bits The Controller always reset set if the Gray code input is negative otherwise is reset set if the destination is zero otherwise reset always reset With this Bit S 0 0 Carry 0 1 Overflow 0 2 Zero Bit 0 3 Sign Bit 5 0 Overflow Trap set if the Overflow Bit is set otherwise reset Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 190 Conversion Instructions Notes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Chapter 12 Logical Instructions The logical instructions perform bit wise logical operations on individual words Instruction Used To Page AND Bit Wise AND Perform an AND operation 192 OR Logical OR Perform an inclusive OR operation 193 XOR Exclusive OR Perform an Exclusive Or operation 193 NOT Logical NOT Perform a NOT operation 194 Using Logical When using logical instructions obser
220. II characters date is optional time hh mm ss ASCII characters time is optional lt UDS gt User Defined Separator TAB COMMA or SPACE lt X Data gt ASCII decimal representation of the value of the data lt NUL gt record string is f the Real Time Clock m and time is formatted e The Communications De etrieved See the Data e The controller performs null terminated odule is not present in the controller lt date gt is formatted as 00 00 0000 as 00 00 00 vice determines the number of sets of data that have been recorded but not Log Status File on page 370 a the data integrity check for each record If the data integrity check is invalid a failure response is sent to the Communications Device The data set is deleted as soon as the failure response is q ueued for transmission Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 373 TIP For easy use with Microsoft Excel use the TAB character as the separator character Accessing the Retrieval You can use a dedicated retrieval tool or create your own application File Retrieval Tools There are a number of retrieval tools designed for use with Palm OS Windows CE Windows 9x and Windows NT You can download these free tools from our web site Visit http www ab com micrologix Information for Creating Your Own Application Controller Receives Communications Packet Comman
221. IV Divide Divide one value by another 175 NEG Negate Change the sign of the source value and place it 175 in the destination CLR Clear Set all bits of a word to zero 176 ABS Absolute Value Find the absolute value of the source value 176 SOR Square Root Find the square root of a value 180 SCL Scale Scale a value 177 SCP Scale with Parameters Scale a value to a range determined by creating 178 a linear relationship Most math instructions use three parameters Source A Source B and Destination additional parameters are described where applicable later in this chapter The mathematical operation is performed using both Source values The result is stored in the Destination When using math instructions observe the following Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 170 Math Instructions Add e Source and Destination can be different data sizes Sources are evaluated at the highest precision word or long wotd of the operands Then the result is converted to the size of the destination If the signed value of the Source does not fit in the Destination the overflow shall be handled as follows If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear a saturated result is stored in the Destination If the Source is positive the Destination is 32767 word or 2 147 483 647 long word If the result is negative the Destination is 32768 word or 2 147 483 648 long word If the Math Overflow Selecti
222. If five seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the message timed out Publication 1762 RMO001H EN P July 2014 338 Communications Instructions Valid File Type Combinations Valid transfers between file types are shown below for MicroLogix messaging Local Data Types Communication Type Target Data Types o t BNL lt gt read write 0 1 S B N L T lt gt read write T C lt gt read write C R lt gt read write R 1 Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages Example 4 Configuring a Local DeviceNet Message This section describes how to configure a local message using the scanner and a MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP processor An example network is shown below PC with RSNetWorx MicroLogix 1500 Controller 1 0 for DeviceNet software Bank with 1769 SDN Module 1770 KFD PC SI C AAA Communication __ Module T DeviceNet Network f E z q Ao E Series 9000 MicroLogix 1000 Controller MicroLogix 1200 Controller Photoeye Connected via 1761 NET DNI Connected vi
223. Instruction Set Reference Manual Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers Bulletins 1762 and 1764 TA i i Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of infor
224. It is recommended that isolation 1761 NET AIC be provided between the controller and the modem Configuring a Local Message Setup Screen Message The rung below shows a MSG instruction preceded by conditional logic Access the message setup screen by double clicking Setup Screen B3 0 MSG 0000 jr Read Write Message CEN gt 0 MSG File MG11 0 cDN gt Setup Screen lt ER 5 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 326 Communications Instructions The RSLogix Message Setup Screen is shown below This screen is used to setup This Controller Target Device and Control Bits Descriptions of each of the elements follow e 0000 e Read W e rite Message El MSGFile MGll1 LDN Setup Screen 1 sme 0001 END gt 0 Integr 0 500CPU Read 1 5 D D Local This Controller Parameters Channel The MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP support Channel 0 messaging only The MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP supports three different pathways for messaging Channels 0 and 1 ate RS 232 ports and are functionally identical to Channel 0 on the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP controllers The 1764 LRP also supports backplane communications through the Expansion Communication Port ECD as illustrated below ECP messaging is supported through the 1769 SDN DeviceNet scanner and 1769 SM1 DPI SCANport communications modules
225. L Limit values are a percentage 0 to 100 of the control variable The difference between selecting output alarms and output limits is that you must select output limiting to enable limiting Limit and alarm values are stored in the same words Entering these values enables the alarms but not limiting Entering these values and setting the limit enable bit enables limiting and alarms Anti reset windup is a feature that prevents the integral term from becoming excessive when the control variable reaches a limit When the sum of the PID and bias terms in the control variable reaches the limit the instruction stops calculating the integral sum until the control variable comes back in range The integral sum is contained in element IS The Manual Mode In the MANUAL mode the PID algorithm does not compute the value of the control variable Rather it uses the value as an input to adjust the integral sum IS so that a smooth transfer takes place upon re entering the AUTO mode In the MANUAL mode the programmer allows you to enter a new CV value from 0 to 100 This value is converted into a number from 0 to 16383 and written to the Control Variable address If your ladder program sets the manual output level design your ladder program to write to the CV address when in the MANUAL mode Remembet that the new CV value is in the range of 0 to 16383 not 0 to 100 Writing to the CV percent CVP with your ladder program has no effect in the MA
226. LRP Processors only Modbus Description Valid MicroLogix Addressing Addressing File Type Data File Number Address 0001 to 4096 Read Write Modbus Coil Data space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 bits 0 to 4095 10001 to 14096 Read Only Modbus Contact Data space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 bits 0 to 4095 30001 to 30256 Read Only Modbus Input Register space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 words 0 to 255 30501 to 30532 Modbus Communication Parameters Communication Status File 31501 to 31566 Read Only System Status File space Status S 2 words 0 to 65 40001 to 40256 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 words 0 to 255 40257 to 41280 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 words to 255 of four Holding Register files 41501 to 41566 Read Write System Status File space Status S 2 words 0 to 65 41793 to 42048 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 words 0 to 255 of the last Holding Register file 1 These addresses only become active when specially configured for expanded holding registers Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 452 Protocol Configuration Modbus Slave to MicroLogix Memory Map Detail MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors only
227. Logix messaging Local Data Types Communication Type Target Data Types _ T lt gt read write T G lt gt read write C R lt gt read write R RTC gt write N RTC 1 Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages 2 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later only Example 2 Local Read from a 485CIF Message Instruction Setup 4 MSG Rung 2 34 MG11 0 This Controller r Control Bits Communication Command 485CIF Read Ignore if timed out TO Data Table Address N7 0 Size in Elements 5 Channel 0 Awaiting Execution EW el Error ER Target Device Message done DH Message Timeout 15 Message Transmitting ST Data Table Offset 20 Message Enabled EN Local Node Addr dec 2 octal Local Remote Local p Eror Error Code Hex 0 No errors n Description In this example the controller reads five elements words from the target device s Local Node 2 CIF file starting at word 20 or byte 20 for non SLC 500 devices The five elements are placed in the controller s integer file starting at word N7 0 If 15 seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the message timed
228. M1RTC MM2RTC Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 362 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Data Log Queue For 1764 LRP processots you can store recipe data in the data log memory space 48K bytes IMPORTANT While recipe data stored in User Program memory can be saved to the controller s memory module recipe data stored in Data Log Queue memory cannot be saved to a memory module Data Log Queue memory is battery backed but cannot be saved to a memory module 3 Enter the RCP file parameters as shown below When finished click on OK File p OK OK Cancel Number of Recipes E Hel Name Paint Colors i Description RCP Quick Start example for mixing paint colors Location where recipe data is stored applies to all recipe files t User Program C DataLog Queue 4 A new window will appear In this window enter the values as shown below igi x Address Length InitialData Description N7 0 1 500 Red Pigment N7 1 1 500 Green Pigment N7 2 1 0 Blue Pigment T4 0 PRE 1 500 Mixing Time Current Recipe b H 5 Change the Current Recipe from 0 to 1 Notice the addresses were duplicated but the data was not 6 Enter the data for Recipe 1 as shown below Tei RCP FeO RCPEKample o Address Length InitialData Description N70 Red Pigment N 1 Green Pigment N7 2 Blue
229. MO01H EN P July 2014 92 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Error Detected ED Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access ED Error HSC O ED bi Detected t 0 to 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used in the control program to detect if an error is present in the HSC sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set 1 you should look at the specific error code in parameter HSC 0 ER This bit is maintained by the controller and is set and cleared automatically Counting Enabled CE Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access CE Counting HSC O CE bi Enabled t 0to7 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The CE Counting Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the High Speed Counter When set 1 counting is enabled when clear 0 default counting is disabled If this bit is disabled while the counter is running the accumulated value is held if the bit is then set counting resumes This bit can be controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle This bit must be set for the high spee
230. MO01H EN P July 2014 306 ASCII Instructions Examples For the following examples N7 0 25 N7 1 37 L8 0 508000 L8 1 5 Valid in line direction Input Flow rate is currently N7 0 liters per minute and contains L8 0 particles per liter contaminants Output Flow rate is currently 25 liters per minute and contains 508000 particles per liter contaminants Input Current position is N7 1 at a speed of L8 1 RPM Output Current position is 37 at a speed of 5 RPM Invalid in line indirection Input Current position is N5 1 at a speed of L8 1 RPM Output Current position is N5 1 at a speed of 5 RPM TIP Truncation occurs in the output string if the indirection causes the output to exceed 82 characters The appended characters are always applied to the output ASCII Instruction Error The following error codes indicate why the Error bit ER is set in the control Codes data file Error Code Description Recommended Action decimal hexadecimal 0 0x00 No error The instruction completed successfully None Required 3 0x03 The transmission cannot be completed because the CTS signal Check the modem and modem connections was lost 5 0x05 While attempting to perform an ASCII transmission a conflict Reconfigure the channel and retry operation with the configured communications protocol was detected 7 0x07 The instruction cannot be executed because the Reconfigure the c
231. MVM Masked Move Source N7 0 0 lt Mask N7 1 0000h lt Dest N7 2 0 lt Move Instructions 197 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the MVM Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 18 US 0 0 us long word 11 8 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 7 2 us 0 0 us long word 10 0 us 0 0 us The MVM instruction is used to move data from the source to the destination allowing portions of the destination to be masked The mask bit functions as follows Mask Function for MVM Instruction Source Bit Mask Bit Destination Bit 1 0 last state 0 0 last state 1 1 1 0 1 0 Mask data by setting bits in the mask to zero pass data by setting bits in the mask to one The mask can be a constant or you can vary the mask by assigning a direct address Bits in the Destination that correspond to zeros in the Mask are not altered Using the MVM Instruction When using the MVM instruction observe the following e Source Mask and Destination must be of the same data size i e all words ot all long words To mask data set the mask bit to zero to pass data set the mask bit to one The mask can be a constant value or you can vary the mask by assigning a ditect address TIP Bits in the destination that correspond to zeros in the mask are not altered as shown in the shaded areas in the following table Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014
232. NAK ed Duplicate Message Packets Received 0 1 2 3 4 15 ENQuiry Packets Received 16 7 8 9 19 to 22 Reserved Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Function Files 71 channe status OE Channel 0 Channel 1 DF1 Full Duplex Messages Sent Messages Received ENQs Received Lack of Memory Sent NAK Received NAK Undelivered Messages Loo Duplicate Messages Received o D p p EN sSent 0 b bo D Bad Packet Sent NAK Modem Lines RTS GIS DF1 Half Duplex Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 Length always 30 6 7 8 Format Code always 2 9 CTS RTS Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD 0 1 2 Reserved 3 4 to 15 Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Total Message Packets Received Undelivered Message Packets 0 1 2 3 Message Packets Retried 4 NAK Packets Received 15 Polls Received 16 7 8 9 Bad Message Packets Received No Buffer Space Duplicate Message Packets Received to 22 Reserved Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 72 Function Files iol xl Channel 0 DF1 Half Duplex Slave Messages Sent 0 Messages Retried Messages Received n Undelivered Messages n Polls Received B Duplicate Messages Rece
233. NUAL mode PID Rung State If the PID rung is false the integral sum IS is cleared and CV remains in its last state Feed Forward or Bias Applications involving transport lags may require that a bias be added to the CV output in anticipation of a disturbance This bias can be accomplished using the processor by writing a value to the Feed Forward Bias element word FF See page 263 The value you write is added to the output allowing a feed forward Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 274 Process Control Instruction Application Examples Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 action to take place You may add a bias by writing a value between 16383 and 016383 to word 6 with your programming terminal or ladder program PID Tuning PID tuning requires a knowledge of process control If you are inexperienced it will be helpful if you obtain training on the process control theory and methods used by your company There are a number of techniques that can be used to tune a PID loop The following PID tuning method is general and limited in terms of handling load disturbances When tuning we recommend that changes be made in the MANUAL mode followed by a return to AUTO Output limiting is applied in the MANUAL mode TIP This method requires that the PID instruction controls a non critical application in terms of personal safety and equipment damage The PID tuning procedure may not work for all cases It is strongl
234. Number value is less than 1 or greater than 82 ndex value greater than the length of the Source string The Destination string is not changed in any of the above error conditions When the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word S 6 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 298 ASCII Instructions AHL ASCII Handshake Lines AHL Ascii Handshake Lines Channel AND Mask OR Mask Control Channel Status Error L cEN gt 0002h lt DN gt 0000h R6 2 lt ER gt 0000h 0 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the AHL Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 89 3 us 10 8 us The AHL instruction is used to set or reset the RS 232 Request to Send RTS handshake control line for a modem The controller uses the two masks to determine whether to set or reset the RTS control line or leave it unchanged The channel configuration must be set to ASCII TIP Make sure the automatic modem control used by the port does not conflict with this instruction Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 L RP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 AND Mask
235. O0 0 4 OTE instructions are reset turned OFF when You enter or return to the program or remote program mode or power is restored e The OTE is programmed within an inactive or false Master Control Reset MCR zone Relay Type Bit Instructions 149 TIP A bit that is set within a subroutine using an OTE instruction remains set until the OTE is scanned again OTE or UIE this instruction must be the astinstruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL logic program Always be fully aware of the load represented by the output ATTENTION Never use an output address at more than one place in your AN coil Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table OTE Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Data Files Function Files Address Level Parameter estination DI I S D o x e DLS Data Log Immediate 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be use
236. O01H EN P July 2014 If a second message instruction is processed before the first message completes the second message and its data are placed in one of the three remaining communication buffers This process repeats whenever a message instruction is processed until all four buffers are in use When a buffer is available the message and its associated data are placed in the buffer immediately If all four buffers for the channel are full when the next fifth message is processed the message request not the data is placed in the channel s communications queue The queue is a message storage area that keeps track of messages that have not been allocated a buffer The queue operates as a first in first out FIFO storage area The first message request stored in the queue is the message that is allocated a buffer as soon as a buffer becomes available The queue can accommodate all MSG instructions in a ladder program When a message request in a buffer is completed the buffer 1s released back to the system If a message is in the queue that message is then allocated a buffer At that time the data associated with the message is tead from within the controller TIP If a message instruction was in the queue the data that is actually sent out of the controller may be different than what was present when the message instruction was first processed The buffer and queue mechanisms are completely automatic Buffers are allocated and released
237. Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection 1769 OF2 Output Data File Por each module words 0 and 1 in the output data file contain the channel 0 and channel 1 output data Bit Position 15 14 13 12 1 1 10 9 8 7 6 34 3 2 hl 0 SGN Channel 0 Data 0 to 32 768 SGN Channel 1 Data 0 to 32 768 9 IWord SGN Sign bit in two s complement format Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 30 1 0 Configuration 1769 IFAXOF2 Input Data File The input data file provides access to input data for use in the control program over range indication for the input and output channels and output data feedback as described below v Bit Position 15 14 13 12 15 1709 8 7 6 54 321 0 0 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 0 0 0 0 0 0 JO J0 1 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 J0 2 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 2 0 0 0 0 0 JO J0 3 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 3 0 0 0 0 0 10 J0 4 Not Used I3 12 4 110 5 NotUsed HO NotUsed H1 Not Used E1 E0 01 00 6 SGN Output Data Echo Loopback for Output Channel O O 0 O 10 JO 10 10 7 SGN Output Data Echo Loopback for Output Channel 1 O 0 O O JO O 10 1 All unused bits are set to 0 by the module IMPORTANT Input words 6 and 7 contain the Output Data Echo Loopback information for output channels 0 and 1 respectively Bit
238. Programmable Limit Switch This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected Low Preset Interrupt executes High Preset Interrupt executes Underflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode Count Direction DIR Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access DIR Count HSC O DIR bit 0 to 7 status read only Direction 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The DIR Count Direction status flag is controlled by the HSC sub system When the HSC accumulator counts up the direction flag is set 1 Whenever the HSC accumulator counts down the direction flag is cleared 0 If the accumulated value stops the direction bit retains its value The only time the direction flag changes is when the accumulated count reverses This bitis updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in a tun mode Mode Done MD Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access MD Mode HSCO MD fbit Oor1 status read write Done 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The MD Mode Done status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system when the HSC is configured for Mode 0 or Mode 1 behavior and the accumulator counts up to the High Preset Using the High Speed Counter and Pr
239. R Start 0 8 0 8 1 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply MCR End 1 0 1 0 1 5 Masked Comparison for Equal MEQ 1 7 17 1 8 2 9 3 5 3 5 Move MOV 0 0 2 3 2 5 0 0 6 8 2 0 Message Steady State MSG 6 0 17 0 2 9 Long Word addressing level does not apply Message False to True 198 0 Transition for Reads Message False to True 226 1 4 Transition for Writes word Multiply MUL 0 0 5 8 20 0 1 21 6 3 5 Masked Move MVM 0 0 72 2 0 0 0 10 0 3 0 Negate NEG 0 0 1 9 3 0 0 0 10 4 3 0 Not Equal NEQ 1 1 1 2 13 2 5 2 3 2 5 Not NOT 0 0 24 2 5 0 0 8 1 2 5 One Shot ONS 1 7 2 2 3 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Or OR 0 0 2 0 2 8 0 0 79 3 0 One Shot Falling OSF 3 4 2 7 54 Long Word addressing level does not apply One Shot Rising OSR 2 8 3 2 5 4 Output Enable OTE 0 0 1 2 1 6 Output Latch OTL 0 0 0 9 0 6 Output Unlatch OTU 0 0 0 9 0 6 Proportional Integral Derivative PID 8 9 251 8 24 Pulse Train Output PTO 21 1 72 6 1 9 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 21 1 107 4 1 9 Reset Accumulator RAC Word addressing level does not 0 0 17 8 2 0 apply Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 384 MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution
240. RTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 JMP Jump to Label 02 0 C JMP gt Chapter 16 Program Control Instructions Use these instructions to change the order in which the processor scans a ladder program Typically these instructions are used to minimize scan time create a more efficient program and troubleshoot a ladder program Instruction Used To Page JMP Jump to Label Jump forward backward to a corresponding 223 LBL Label label instruction In JSR Jump to Subroutine Jump to a designated subroutine and return 224 SBR Subroutine Label 224 RET Return from Subroutine I25 SUS Suspend Debug or diagnose your user program 225 TND Temporary End Abort current ladder scan 225 END Program End End a program or subroutine 226 MCR Master Control Reset Enable or inhibit a master control zone in 226 your ladder program Instruction Type output Execution Time for the JMP Instruction Controller When Rung Is True MicroLogix 1200 11 0 us False 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1 0 us 0 0 us The JMP instruction causes the controller to change the order of ladder execution Jumps cause program execution to go to the rung marked LBL abe number jumps can be forward or backward in ladder logic with
241. Reset and Gain Range RG bit is set to 1 For more information on reset and gain see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 265 The derivative term rate provides smoothing by means of a low pass filter The cut off frequency of the filter is 16 times greater than the corner frequency of the derivative term The PID instruction implemented by the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers is virtually identical in function to the PID implementation used by the Allen Bradley SLC 5 03 and higher processors Minor differences primarily involve enhancements to terminology The major difference is that the PID instruction now has its own data file In the SLC family of processors the PID instruction operated as a block of registers within an integer file The Micrologix 1200 and 1500 PID instruction utilizes a PD data file You can create a PD data file by creating a new data file and classifying it as a PD file type RSLogix automatically creates a new PD file or a PD sub element whenever a PID instruction is programmed on a rung The PD file then appears in the list of Data Files as shown in the illustration Each PD data file has a maximum of 255 elements and each PID instruction requires a unique PD element Each PD element is composed of 20 sub elements which include bit integer and long integer data All of the examples in this chapter use PD file 10 sub element 0 Process Control Instruction 255 PID Proportional Integral Derivative Instruct
242. SC1 I1 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Example 2 on onli IASC Accumulator 1 count 1 Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care rising edge y falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 3 Counter with External Direction Reset and Hold HSC Mode 3 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 111 0 0 1 HSCO 111 0 0 2 HSC0 111 0 0 3 HSC0 CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 111 0 0 6 HSC1 111 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Direction Reset Hold Example 1 off on off off lon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 1 0 0 Example 2 on on off off lon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 1 0 0 Example3 on off on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example 4 on off off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 5 on U loff on off Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 6 d Clear accumulator 20 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care rising edge y falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 4 Two Input Counter up and down HSC Mode 4 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 111 0 0 2 HSCO 111 0 0 3 HSC0 CEBit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1
243. SCP instruction produces a scaled output value that has a linear relationship between the input and scaled values This instruction solves the following equation listed below to determine scaled output Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Math Instructions 179 y 01 yo 6 x9l xo yo Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table SCP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Data Files Function Files nue Address Level 7 3 Mode Parameter ie E S K E k e a pi F e js E El olas a A E EE Input x e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Input Min xg ele e e e e e elele ele Input Max x4 ele e e e e e elele ele Scaled Min yg ele e e e e e elele ele Scaled Max yi ele e e e e e elele ele Output y e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only recommended for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files IMPORTANT Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Scaled Output
244. Scan Input File l 1 1 The Input File stores the values that are read from the physical inputs during the Input Scan Status File S 2 1 The contents of the Status File are determined by the functions which utilize the Status File See System Status File on page 389 for a detailed description Bit File B 3 9 to 255 1 The Bit File is a general purpose file typically used for bit logic Timer File T 49t0255 3 The Timer File is used for maintaining timing information for ladder logic timing instructions See Timer and Counter Instructions on page 153 for instruction information Counter File C 5 9t0255 3 The Counter File is used for maintaining counting information for ladder logic counting instructions See Timer and Counter Instructions on page 153 for instruction information Control File R 6 910255 3 The Control Data file is used for maintaining length and position information for various ladder logic instructions See Control Data File on page 283 for more information Integer File N 7 9 to 255 1 The Integer File is a general purpose file consisting of 16 bit signed integer data words Floating Point F 8 9 to 255 1 The Floating Point File is a general purpose file consisting of 32 bit File IEEE 754 floating point data elements See Using the Floating Point F Data File on page 171 for more information String File ST 9 to 255 42 The String File is a file that stores ASCII characters See String ST Data File on page 282 for more
245. Second information to the RTC Function file in the controller The RTC module is located in the processor unit under the processor cover Shown Below Like the Memory Module the RTC can be removed or inserted under power without risk of damage to the RTC or the processor module If the module is installed while the ML1200 1500 is executing the module will not be recognized until a power cycle occurs or the controller is placed into program mode or faults M11200 M11500 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2011 474 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Getting Started Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 v4 00 or later and select the RTC tab See Below 3 Function Files DOW Day Of The Week DS Disabled BL ATC Battery is Low oooccc cco Of Values can be entered for the Year Month Day Hour Minute and Seconds offline once downloaded the values will take effect immediately TIP The Day of the week is calculated by the RTC Online Pressing _setDatesTine_ this will set the ML1200 1500 clock to the same Date amp Time as the PC connected online Function Files DOW Day Of The Week DS Disabled BL ATC Battery is Low Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 17657 Quick Start Trim Pots Trim Pot 0 Trim Pot 1 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 475 Disable Clack m a Pressing will disable
246. See Data Table Address Offset on page 332 Local Bridge Address This variable defines the bridge address on the local network In the example DH 485 node 12 MicroLogix 1500 on Link ID 1 is writing data to node 51 SLC 5 04 on Link ID 100 The SLC 5 04 at node 17 is the bridge device This variable sends the message to local node 17 Remote Bridge Address This variable defines the remote node address of the bridge device In this example the remote bridge address is set to zero because the target device SLC 5 04 at node 63 octal is a remote capable device If the target device is remote capable the remote bridge address is not required If the target device is not remote capable SLC 500 SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and MicroLogix 1000 Series A B and C the remote bridge address 1s required Remote Station Address This variable is the final destination address of the message instruction In this example integer file 50 elements 0 to 4 of the SLC 5 04 on Link ID 100 at node 63 octal receives data from the MicroLogix 1500 controller at node 12 on Link ID 1 Communications Instructions 351 Remote Bridge Link ID This variable is a user assigned value that defines the remote network as a number This number must be used by any device initiating remote messaging to that network In the example any controller on Link ID 1 sending data to a device on Link ID 100 must use the remote bridge link ID of the passthru device In this exa
247. Set Clear for Block of Output Coils 4 30526 Function Code 16 Message Counter Read Write for Block of Holding Registers 4 30527 Modem Status 4 30528 Total messages responded to by this slave 4 30529 Total messages to this Slave 4 30530 Total Messages Seen 4 30531 Link Layer Error Count 4 30532 Link Layer Error 4 31501 to 31566 Read Only System Status File 4 40001 to 40256 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 1st Holding Register file 3 6 16 40257 to 40512 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 2nd Holding Register file 3 6 16 40513 to 40768 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 3rd Holding Register file 3 6 16 40769 to 41024 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 4th Holding Register file 3 6 16 41025 to 41280 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space bth Holding Register file 3 6 16 41501 to 41566 Read Write System Status File 3 6 16 41793 to 42048 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 6th Holding Register file 3 6 16 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Modbus Commands Protocol Configuration 453 The controller configured for Modbus RTU Slave responds to the Modbus command function codes listed in below Supported Modbus Commands as a Modbus RTU Slave MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors only Command Read Coil Status Function Code decimal 1 Subfunction Code decimal Read Input Status Read Holdin
248. Target Device SOOCPU Local Remote Local Control Block N100 0 Control Block Length 14 Setup Screen Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 MSG N100 0 14 Elements The example above messages the SLC 500 Date and Time data 8 37 S 42 to the Micrologix 1500 RTC each time the SLC processor is powered up and placed into the RUN mode or each time the Time Synchronization Bit B3 0 0 is enabled Any date time year values prior to 1998 that are sent to a Micrologix controller will generate a MSG Error Code 10h i ATTENTION Valid years for the Micrologix 1200 and 1500 begin with 1998 For each processor that requires its RTC to be synchronized a MSG write will be required This is done simply by duplicating the above ladder logic referencing a different Control Block i e N100 0 MSG1 N100 20 MSG2 N100 40 MSG3 etc and specifying a different node address in the MSG set up screen Knowledgebase Quick Starts 481 18728 Quick Start Data General Information Logging DLG The Data logging feature allows the creation of memory queues to capture or store application data as a record for later retrieval Each record is stored in a user configured battery backed queue The size of memory where queues are stored is 48K bytes this is independent of the rest of the processor memory The Data logging feature allows the capture or storage of application data as a record for latet retrieval Each record is sto
249. The DAT always starts at bit 0 of a data file It cannot start at any other address within the file The base hardware information BHI file is a read only file that contains a description of the MicroLogix 1200 Controller or the MicroLogix 1500 Base Unit Base Hardware Information Function File BHI Address Description BHI 0 CN CN Catalog Number BHI 0 SRS SRS Series BHI 0 REV REV Revision BHI 0 FT FT Functionality Type The Communications Status CS File is a read only file that contains information on how the controller communication parameters are configured and status information on communications activity The communications status file uses Communications Status File Size Controller Number of Word Elements MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series A Processor 44 1 word elements MicroLogix 1200 71 1 word elements MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors There is one Communications Status File for each communications port Communications Status File CSO corresponds to Channel 0 on the controller Communications Status File CS1 corresponds to Channel 1 on the 1764 LRP processor TIP You can use the Communications Status File information as a troubleshooting tool for communications issues Function Files 67 The data file is structured as Communications Status File Word Description JApplies to Controller Details on Page 6to22 DLL Diagnostic Coun
250. This Controller r Control Bits Communication Command 500CPU Read Ignore if timed out TO 0 Data Table Address N7 O Size in Elements 5 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Channel g Error ERE n Target Device Message done DN 0 Message Timeout 5 Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address N50 0 Message Enabled EN 0 Local Bridge Addr dec 17 pctal 21 Local Remote Remote Remote Bridge Addr dec 0 Remote Station Address dec 57 Remote Bridge Link ID 100 m Error Eror Code Hex 0 Description No errors DH 485 and DH Example Network 3 AICH SLC 5 03 DH 485 Network Node 5 Node 22 Link ID 1 Node 10 AIC Node 11 AIC Node 12 AIC AIC Node 17 MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 SLC 5 04 DH Network Node 23 octal 19 decimal Link ID 100 Node 63 octal 51 decimal Node 40 octal 32 decimal SLC 5 04 PLC 5 This Controller Parameters See Target Device Parameters on page 331 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 350 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Control Bits Parameters See Control Bits Parameters on page 318 Target Device Parameters Message Timeout See Message Timeout on page 331 Data Table Address
251. Total Output Pulses To Be Generated H OPP Output Pulses Produced ADP Accel Decel Pulses HM PTO 4 cO omccococcocococcococooccococcococscorfo lei e e e e ce e Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 461 The following ladder logic will need to be entered into File 2 KS LAD 2 By toggling Bit B3 0 the PTO can be activated Once running the PTO will generate the number of pulses entered into the PTO 0 TOP word and then stop To restart toggle B3 0 General Information on the PTO Once running the PTO will continue to generate pulses until all pulses have been generated or the PTO 0 EH Enable Hard Stop bit has been activated Once the EH bit is set the instruction will generate a PTO error of 1 hard stop detected In order to clear this error the PTO instruction must be scanned on a false rung of logic and the EH bit must be off To change the Total Output Pulses Generated in a working program a new value can be moved into PTO 0 TOP by using the MOV command IMPORTANT Once the PTO has been initiated and is generating pulses a new TOP value will not take effect until the PTO has either completed generating pulses and has been restarted or has been Hard Stopped using PTO 0 EH bit and been restarted Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2011 462 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 17585 Quick Start Pulse Width Modulation TIP The PWM function is only available when using th
252. W bit and set 1 the ST bit The target node has not yet examined the packet to see if it understands your request Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 322 Communications Instructions Once the ST bit is set 1 the controller waits for a reply from the target node The target node is not required to respond within any given time frame TIP If the Target Node faults or power cycles during the message transaction you will never receive a reply This is why you should use a Message Timeout value in your MSG instruction 4 Step 4 is not shown in the timing diagram If you do not receive an ACK step 3 does not occur Instead either no response or a negative acknowledge NAK is received When this happens the ST bit remains clear 0 No response may be caused by the target node is not there the message became corrupted in transmission the response was corrupted in response transmission A NAK may be caused by target node is busy target node received a corrupt message the message is too large When a NAK occurs the EW bit is cleared 0 and the ER bit is set 1 indicating that the message instruction failed 5 Following the successful receipt of the packet the target node sends a reply packet The reply packet contains one of the following responses e successful write request successful read request with data e failure with error code At the next end of scan REF or SVC instruction fo
253. Z EI la la S lo amp le ja 5E Js 8 e Source A Source B e e e Destination 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element AEX String Extract AEX String Extract Source ST10 0 Index 1 Number 5 Dest ST10 3 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Instruction Operation This instruction executes on a false to true rung transition Source D is appended to Source A and the result is put in the Destination Only the first 82 characters 0 to 81 are written to the destination If the string length of Source A Source B or Destination is greater than 82 the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit 8 5 15 is set and the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word 8 6 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the AEX Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FAN 3 or later 14 0us 2 9 u1s character 10 0 is MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 12 4 us 2 6 us character 0 0 us The AEX instruction creates a new string by taking a portion of an existing string and storing it in a new string ASCII Instructions 297 Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Source is the existing string The Source value is not affected by this instruction Index is the starting position from 1 to 82 of the string y
254. _ If you do not see 5 records verify your Data Logging Enable bit was toggled 5 times causing the 5 entries to be recorded in the Que 6 Select Read Log This will retrieve the data from the ML1500 processor TIP Data CANNOT be viewed in the Data Log Utility The utility only allows retrieval of the data stored in the Queues and creates an off line file Once the Read Log has completed the following screen will appear confirming the number of records that have been read from the Queue s f Connected to DATA LOG 5 records read from 1 queue Disconnect Read Status TIP Remember that once the data records have been read from the MicroLogix the queue is automatically cleared Save Data s 7 Click Save Data 8 Enter a file name In out example My DLG Data was used Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 486 Knowledgebase Quick Starts QUE 2 Queue 0 Queue D Queue D Queue 0 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2011 Make note of the filename about to be created and the directory it is being saved to for later reference pave as 00 Save in y My Documents gt ex E3 u My eBooks EA My Music History My Pictures File name MD LG_Data Save as type csv Files csv d Cancel My Network P 9 Using Microsoft Excel open the data file that was created FYI If you are unable to locate your file in Excel remember Files of type must be changed to Text Fil
255. a 1761 NET DNI 200000 0 oo nauP E 1305 Drive Connected via 1203 GU6 Enhanced DeviceNet Communications Module Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Communications Instructions 339 Message Setup Screen e 53 0 0000 e Read Write Message e 10 MSG File MG11 1 N e ER 0001 END Rung 0 shows a standard RSLogix 500 message MSG instruction preceded by conditional logic 1 Access the message setup screen by double clicking Setup Screen 2 The RSLogix 500 Message Setup Screen appears This screen is used to setup or monitor message parameters for This Controller Target Device and Control Bits Descriptions of each of these sections follow This Controller Parameters Channel The 1764 LRP supports three different pathways for messaging channels 0 and 1 are RS 232 ports and are functionally identical to MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP controllers The 1764 LRP also supports backplane communications through the Expansion Communication Port ECD as illustrated below MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 mE 0 Integral Read 1 Integral O o Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 340 Communications Instructions When ECP is chosen you are able to select which slot position 1 to 16 the scanner resides in The 1764 LRP processor can support up to two 1769 SDN scanner modules with full messaging functionality MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1
256. a is shifted right through the array then unloaded one bit at a time The following figure shows the operation of the BSR instruction Unload Bit R6 0 10 a7 46 145 a 43 42 Mu 40 39 138 3 36 35 34 33 f 38Bit Array 63 62 61 J60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 4B3 2 INVALID 69 68 67 66 65 64 j s ly Data block is shifted one bit at Source Bit a time from bit 69 to bit 32 23 06 File Instructions 205 This instruction uses the following operands File The file operand is the address of the bit array that is to be manipulated Control The control operand is the address of the BSR s control element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Size of bit array number of bits Word2 not used 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the bit array has shifted one position 3 ER Error Bit when set indicates that the instruction detected an error such as entering a negative number for the length or source operand 4 UL Unload Bit is the instruction s output Avoid using the UL unload bit when the ER error bit is set e Bit Address The source is the address of the bit to be transferred into the bit array at the last highest bit position Length The length operand contains the length of the bit array in bits The data ra
257. a network are discussed in the following sections Protocol Configuration 425 Software Considerations Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the network The following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on network performance e number of nodes on the network addresses of those nodes baud rate The following sections explain network considerations and describe ways to select parameters for optimum network performance speed Refer to your programming software s documentation for more information Number of Nodes The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes Unnecessary nodes such as a second programming terminal that is not being used slow the data transfer rate The maximum number of nodes on the netwotk is 32 Setting Node Addresses The best network performance occurs when node addresses are assigned in sequential order Initiators such as personal computers should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the network The valid range for the MicroLogix controllers is 1 to 31 controllers cannot be node 0 The default setting is 1 The node address is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 0 to CS0 5 7 Configure the node address via Channel Configuration using RSLogix 500 Select the Channel 0
258. a packet and the next RTS assertion ACK Timeout 0 to 255 can be set in 20 ms increments 50 x20 ms Specifies the amount of time the master will wait for an acknowledgement to a message it has transmitted before it retries the message or errors out the message instruction This timeout value is also used for the poll response timeout Reply MSG Timeout 0 to 255 can be set in 20 ms increments only with MSG based Polling Modes 1 x 20 ms Specifies the amount of time the master will wait after receiving an ACK to a master initiated MSG before polling the slave station for its reply Priority Polling Select the last slave station address to priority poll only with Standard Polling Modes 0 Range High Priority Polling Select the first slave station address to priority poll Entering 255 disables priority polling only 255 Range Low with Standard Polling Modes Normal Polling Select the last slave station address to normal poll only with Standard Polling Modes 0 Range High Normal Polling Select the first slave station address to normal poll Entering 255 disables normal polling only 255 Range Low with Standard Polling Modes Normal Poll Group Enter the quantity of active stations located in the normal poll range that you want polled during a 0 Size scan through the normal poll range before returning to the priority poll range If no stations are configured in the Priority Polling Range leave this paramet
259. a timer must be scanned at least every 2 5 seconds to prevent a timing error Instruction Type output TON Lines On Delay ig CEN2 Execution Time for the TON Instructions imer Time Base 10 CDN2 Controller When Rung Is Preset 0 lt Accum 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 118 0 us 3 0 us MicroLogix 1500 15 5 us 2 5 us Use the TON instruction to delay turning on an output The TON instruction begins to count time base intervals when rung conditions become true As long as rung conditions remain true the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached When the accumulator equals the preset timing stops The accumulator is reset 0 when rung conditions go false regardless of whether the timer has timed out TON timers are reset on power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following control and status bits Timer Control and Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 13 T4 0 DN Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs DN timer done accumulated value preset value rung state goes false bit 14 T4 0 TT TT timer timing rung state is true and accumulated value lt preset value e rung state goes false e DN bit is set bit15 T4 0 EN EN timer enable rung state is true rung state goes false Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2
260. adband has the same scaled units as the setpoint if you choose scaling Output Alarms You may set an output alarm on the control variable at a selected value above and ot below a selected output percent When the instruction detects that the control variable has exceeded either value it sets an alarm bit bit LL for lower limit bit UL for upper limit in the PID instruction Alarm bits are reset by the instruction when the control variable comes back inside the limits The instruction does not prevent the control variable from exceeding the alarm values unless you select output limiting Select upper and lower output alarms by entering a value for the upper alarm CVH and lower alarm CVL Alarm values are specified as a percentage of the output If you do not want alarms enter zero and 100 respectively for lower and upper alarm values and ignore the alarm bits Output Limiting with Anti Reset Windup You may set an output limit percent of output on the control variable When the instruction detects that the control variable has exceeded a limit it sets an alarm bit bit LL for lower limit bit UL for upper limit and prevents the control variable Process Control Instruction 273 from exceeding either limit value The instruction limits the control variable to 0 and 100 if you choose not to limit Select upper and lower output limits by setting the limit enable bit bit OL and entering an upper limit CVH and lower limit CV
261. age 306 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below AWT Instruction Valid Addressing Modes an d File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 2 Address iles Function Files Address Level Data Files 2 Mode 7 z E sg B Parameter S E lo s 5 E 5 le ec a E m os ENSIS 2 zy a la le l le l l lz E g l la la a JE e 1S e l JE IE o m le lz a 5 2 E le 5 j la s FS S la 6 Z je jz S fa Channel Source Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 ABL Test Buffer for Line ABL Ascii Test For Line I EN 5 Channel 0 Control R6 0 lt DN gt Characters 1 lt Error 0 lt lt ER 5 ASCII Instructions 291 Example I1 AWT ASCII WRITE EN 10 Channel 0 Source ST3720 DN Control R6 23 If input slot 1 bit 10 is set write 40 characters from String Length 40 ER ST37 20 to the display device Characters Sent 0 Error 0 In this example when the rung goes from false to true the control element Enable EN bit is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when
262. ail in less than 14 days and the real time clock module needs to be replaced When the battery low indicator bit is clear 0 the battery level is acceptable or a real time clock is not attached ATTENTION Operating with a low battery indication for more than 14 days may result in invalid RTC data if power is removed from the controller RTC Battery Life Expectancy Battery State Temperature Time Duration Operating 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F 5 years Storage 40 C to 25 C 40 F to 77 F 5 years minimum 26 C to 60 C 79 F to 140 F 3 years minimum 1 The operating life of the battery is based on 6 months of storage time before the real time clock is used Instruction Type output Execution Time for the RTA Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False 556 2 us false to true transition MicroLogix 1500 4 1 us 2 6 us 426 8 us false to true transition The RTA instruction is used to synchronize the controllers Real Time Clock RTC with an external source The RTA instruction will adjust the RTC to the nearest minute The RTA instruction adjusts the RTC based on the value of the RTC Seconds as described below IMPORTANT The RTA instruction will only change the RTC when the RTA rung is evaluated true after it was previously false false to true transition The RTA instruction will have no effect if the rung is always true or false RTA is set e If RTC Se
263. alf Duplex Modem No Handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC EOT Suppression enabled disabled disabled When EOT Suppression is enabled the slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued This saves modem transmission power when there is no message to transmit Duplicate Packet enabled disabled enabled Message Detect Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions if the sender s Message Retries are set greater than 0 Poll Timeout 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 3000 x20 ms Poll timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG instruction It is the amount of time that the slave device waits for a poll from the master device If the slave device does not receive a poll within the Poll Timeout a MSG instruction error is generated and the ladderprogram needs to re queue the MSG instruction If you are using a MSG instruction it is recommended that a Poll Timeout value of zero is not used Poll Timeout is disabled when set to zero RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments only with control line set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments only with control line
264. all outputs off and flashes the FAULT LED or enters the User Fault Routine allowing the control program to attempt recovery from the fault condition If the User Fault Routine is able to clear S 1 13 and the fault condition the controller continues to execute the control program If the fault cannot be cleared the outputs are cleared and the controller exits its executing mode and the FAULT LED flashes A Future Access DEM Lock ATTENTION If you clear the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 when the controller mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only is in the RUN position the controller immediately enters the RUN mode Address Data Format Type User Program Access 81 14 binary 00r 1 Status read only When this bit is set 1 it indicates that the programming device must have an exact copy of the controller program See Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock on page 53 for mote information First Scan Bit Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 15 binary Oor1 status read write When the controller sets 1 this bit it indicates that the first scan of the user program is in progress following entry into an executing mode The controller clears this bit after the first scan TIP The First Scan bit S 1 15 is set during execution of the start up protection fault routine Refer to S 1 9 for more information Publication 1762 RMO01H EN
265. and 1500 controllers only allow interrupts to be serviced during certain periods of a program scan They ate e At the start of a ladder rung e Anytime during End of Scan e Between data words in an expansion I O scan The interrupt is only serviced by the controller at these opportunities If the interrupt is disabled the pending bit is set at the next occurrence of one of the three occasions listed above Using Interrupts 235 OTE or UIE this instruction OTL OTE or UIE must be the ast instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL Priority of User Interrupts When multiple interrupts occur the interrupts are serviced based upon their individual priority When an interrupt occurs and another interrupt s has already occurred but has not been serviced the new interrupt is scheduled for execution based on its priority relative to the other pending interrupts At the next point in time when an interrupt can be serviced all the interrupts are executed in the sequence of highest priority to lowest priority If an interrupt occurs while a lower priority interrupt is being serviced executed the currently executing interrupt routine is suspended and the higher priority interrupt is serviced Then the lower priority interrupt is allowed to complete before return
266. are locked out because you do not have the password for the controller you can clear the controller memory and download a new User Program You can clear the memory when the programming software prompts you for a System or Master Passwotd to go on line with the controller To do so 1 Enter 65257636 the telephone keypad equivalent of MLCLRMEM MicroLogix Clear Memory 2 When the Programming Software detects this number has been entered it asks if you want to clear the memory in the controller 3 If you reply yes to this prompt the programming software instructs the controller to clear Program memory The controller suppotts a feature which allows you to select if future access to the User Program should be allowed or disallowed after it has been transferred to the controller This type of protection is particularly useful to an OEM original equipment manufacturer who develops an application and then distributes the application via a memory module or within a controller The Allow Future Access setting is found in the Controller Properties window as shown below Controller Properties x General Compiler Passwords Controller Communications T Enable Single Step Test Enable Force Protection Cancel Apply Help Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 54 Controller Memory and File Types Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 When Allow Future Access is deselected the controller req
267. arity at which an instruction allows an operand to be used For example relay type instructions XIC XIO etc must be programmed to the bit level timer instructions TON TOF etc must be programmed to the element level timers have 3 words per element and math instructions ADD SUB etc must be programmed to the word or long word level Addressing Modes The MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 support three types of data addressing e mmediate Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Programming Instructions Overview 83 e Direct e ndirect The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 do not support indexed addressing Indexed addressing can be duplicated with indirect addressing See Example Using Indirect Addressing to Duplicate Indexed Addressing on page 85 How or when each type is used depends on the instruction being programmed and the type of elements specified within the operands of the instruction By supporting these three addressing methods the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 allow incredible flexibility in how data can be monitored or manipulated Each of the addressing modes are described below Immediate Addressing Immediate addressing is primarily used to assign numeric constants within instructions For example You require a 10 second timer so you program a timer with a 1 second time base and a preset value of 10 The numbers 1 and 10 in this example are both forms of immediate addressing Direct Addressing When
268. arts a pulse sequence the only way to stop generating pulses is to set the enable hard stop bit The enable hard stop aborts any PTO sub system operation idle normal jog continuous or jog pulse and generates a PTO sub system error The EH bit operates as follows e Set 1 Instructs the PTO sub system to stop generating pulses immediately output off 0 Cleared 0 Normal operation PTO Enable Status EN Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access EN Enable Status PTO 0 EN bi follows rung state t 0 or 1 status read only The PTO EN Enable Status is controlled by the PTO sub system When the rung preceding the PTO instruction is solved true the PTO instruction is enabled and the enable status bit is set If the rung preceding the PTO instruction transitions to a false state before the pulse sequence completes its operation the enable status bit resets 0 The EN bit operates as follows e Set 1 PTO is enabled Cleared 0 PTO has completed or the rung preceding the PTO is false PTO Output Frequency OF Sub Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access OF Output Frequency Hz PTO 0 0F word INT 0 to 20 000 control read write The PTO OF Output Frequency variable defines the frequency of the PTO output during the RUN phase of the pulse profile This value is typically
269. as the need arises and message queuing occurs if buffers are full The controller initiates read and write messages through available communication channels when configured for the following protocols e DH 485 e DF1 Full Duplex e DF1 Half Duplex Master e DF1 Half Duplex Slave Modbus RTU Master For a description of valid communication protocols see Protocol Configuration on page 423 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SVC Instruction Controller When Rung is True False MicroLogix 1200 208 us 1 6 us per word 0 0 us Communications Instructions 311 Execution Time for the SVC Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP or 1764 LRP with 1166 us 1 4 us per word 0 0 us one channel selected MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor with both 327 us 1 4 us per word 0 0 us channels selected 1 This value for the SVC instruction isfor when the communications servicing function is accessing a data file The time increases when accessing a function file Under normal operation the controller processes communications once every time it scans the control program If you require the communications port to be scanned more often or if the ladder scan is long you can add an SVC Service Communications instruction to your control program The SVC instruction is used to improve communications performance throughput but also causes the ladder scan to be long
270. aster station for monitoring alarming and logging purposes and to precondition MSG instructions to each particular slave This second use is based on the supposition that if a slave station did not respond the last time it was polled it may not be able to receive and respond to a MSG instruction now and so it would most likely process the maximum number of retties and time outs before completing in error This slows down both the poll scan and any other messaging going on Using this technique the minimum time to message to every responding slave station actually decreases as the number of slave stations that can t respond Zzereases IMPORTANT norder to remotely monitor and program the slave stations over the half duplex network while the master station is configured for Standard polling mode the programming computer DF1 slave driver typically Rockwell Software RSLinx station address must be included in the master station poll list Protocol Configuration 431 About Polled Report by Exception Polled report by exception lets a slave station initiate data transfer to its master station freeing the master station from having to constantly read blocks of data from each slave station to determine if any slave input or data changes have occurred Instead through user programming the slave station monitors its own inputs for a change of state or data which triggers a block of data to be written to the master station when the mast
271. at another device has requested information from this controller Once the request has been satisfied the bit is cleared 0 1 MRP Incoming Message Reply Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller determines that another device has supplied the information requested by a MSG instruction executed by this controller When the appropriate MSG instruction is serviced during end of scan SVC or REF this bit is cleared 0 2 MCP Outgoing Message Command Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller has one or more MSG instructions enabled and in the communication queue This bit is cleared 0 when the queue is empty 3 SSB Selection Status Bit This bit indicates that the controller is in the System Mode It is always set 4 CAB Communications Active Bit This bit is set 1 when at least one other device is onthe DH 485 network If no other devices are on the network this bit is cleared 0 5to14 Reserved 15 Communications Toggle Push Button Communications Defaults Active This bit is set 1 whenever Channel 0 is in the default communications mode The bit is cleared 0 when Channel 0 is in user configured communications mode Always 0 for 1764 LRP Processor Channel 1 This bit is not available with the Series A controllers 5 0to7 Node Address This byte value contains the node address of your controller on the network 8to 15 Baud Rate This byte value contains the baud rate of the controller on the
272. ata When at least one of the operands is a Floating Data Point value e f either Source is NAN then the result is NAN e All overflows result in infinity with the correct sign e All underflows result in plus zero e All denormalized Source values are treated as plus zero e Results are always rounded using the Round to Even rule e f Destination is an integer and the result is NAN or infinity a saturated result 32768 or 32767 for word or 2 147 836 648 or 2 147 836 647 for long word is stored in Destination and the Math Overflow Selection Bit is ignored e f Destination is an integer the rounded result is stored If an overflow occurs after rounding a saturated result is stored in Destination and the Math Overflow Selection Bit is ignored The saturated results are f Destination is an integer and the result is positive overflow Destination is 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 long word f Destination is an integer and the result is negative overflow Destination is 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 long word Updates to Math Status Bits e Carry is reset e Overflow Is set if the result is infinity NAN or if a conversion to integer overflows otherwise it is reset e Zero Is set if the lower 31 bits of the Floating Point Data result is all zero s otherwise it is reset e Sign Is set if the most significant bit of the Destination is set bit 15 for word bit 31 for long word or floating point
273. ata Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time System Status File Fault Messages and Error Codes Protocol Configuration Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 MSG Instruction Ladder Losier sare me kk eee Pars Re e kts Local WIGS ACCS cit os ire iem i ae hs ev dite nes Configuring a Local Message osse MAM os CU Local M ssaeime Hxamples s wsi baw np e eco bee tert e s Rettiote JMVeSSaEE Sas d idea debo det ch aa od Eu d dei rar ide odid Configuring a Remote Message iic ee ove eR ub MSG Instruction Error Codes id cope epe b RR EA Chapter 22 RCP Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only i ceu eee re RR wt D ta POGUE 5 cies bue x PORTAE Pe Sat TA PE Ta He ORE Queues and Records ober ea oie RE RR NEUES Configuring Data Log Queues ees eer ert uec e ee DEG Data bog Instruction 2 ores D SMS uS ee ed D ta Top St tus File dssdo erre Pec e Toe epos Retrieving Reading Recotds 44 oec er he ehe ce a Accessing the Retrieval File 025 41 eR OU s SOR RR Conditions that Will Erase the Data Retrieval File Appendix A Programming Instructions Memory Usage and Execution Time MicroLogix 1200 Scan Time Worksheet 00005 Appendix B Programming Instructions Memoty usage and Execution Time MicroLogix 1500 Scan Time Worksheet 4 sd ese ie vt Appendix C Status File Ov
274. ated while the rung is true e Length The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Source if they are file data types The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 256 Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Source if they are file data types It determines the next location in the stack to receive the current compatison data Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 for words and 0 to 127 for long words The position is incremented on each false to true transition Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 218 Sequencer Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table SOC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 ous Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode o Er Parameter E 8 2 E e S amp E S m 3 ls 3 T z e a a je g le le z E EB le ln lm 14 JE e S le S s s o o Ia e z 5h E a EE Ela ES E le a E J J 8 ic File ele e e e e e e e Mask e e e e e e e e e e e Source o e e e e e e e e Control 2 e Length Position 1 See Important note abo
275. ation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Supersedes Publication 1762 RM001G EN P October 2011 Copyright 2014 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved
276. ator is immediately cleared 0 when it reaches the high preset A low preset cannot be defined in this mode Counter with external direction Counter with external direction reset and hold Two input counter up and down Two input counter up and down with external reset and hold Quadrature counter phased inputs A and B Sy O O1 A j N Quadrature counter phased inputs A and B with external reset and hold Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 102 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSC Mode 0 Up Counter HSC Mode 0 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO ICE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Not Used Not Used Not Used Example 1 d on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example 2 ff lon IU loff 0 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care rising edge y falling edge HSC Mode 1 Examples TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 1 Up Counter with External Reset and Hold Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSC0 111 0 0 2
277. ave control over these outputs Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 468 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 17605 Quick Start Message MSG Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2011 Communications Specifications The MicroLogix 1200 amp 1500 processors contain a total of 12 Message Buffers 8 Incoming Any incoming MSG s Communications and or responses to a command the ML1200 1500 initiated 4 Outgoing Any outgoing MSG s Communications and or responses to incoming request for data The Outgoing queue also supports unlimited queuing This means that even if a buffer is not available the MSG will simply wait until one of the outgoing buffers becomes available and then transmit TIP If a message has been waiting in the queue at the moment of buffer availability the most current data will be sent not the data that was available at the time the message instruction was first scanned true How quickly a message is actually sent or received to by a destination device depends on a number of issues including the selected channels communication protocol baud rate of the communications port number of retries destination devices readiness to receive ladder logic scan time etc Definition of the Message MSG instruction The message instruction MSG is an output instruction which when configured correctly allows data to be sent or received to other compatible devices The MSG instruction in the MicroLogix 1200 1500 co
278. base 2 The Data Log Que window appears Double click on Data Log Configuration Data Log Que Configuration Es XD Appearance of Data Data Log Configuration pp Log Que Configuration window before creating a queue Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 369 3 The Data Log Que dialog box appears as shown below Use this dialog box to enter the queue information Data Log Que Configuration Number of Records i Js Separator Character Cancel dM Date Stamp Help Time Stamp Address to Log C Delete Curent Address List Enter the following information Data Log Queue Configuration Parameter Number of Records Description Defines the number of records data sets in the queue Separator Character Choose the character to act as the separator for the data in this queue tab comma or space The separator character may be the same or different for each queue configured Date Stamp optional if selected the date is recorded in mm dd yyyy format Time Stamp optional if selected the time is recorded in hh mm ss format Address to Log Enter the address of an item to be recorded and click on Accept to add the address to the Current Address List The address can be any 16 or 32 bit piece of data Current Address List This is the list of i
279. basic structure is shown below Refer to the Compact I O DeviceNet Scanner Module User Manual publication 1769 UM009 for more detailed information Input Data Image The input data image is transferred from the scanner module to the controller Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 36 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Word Description Data Type 0 to 63 Status Structure 64 word array 64 and 65 Module Status Register 2 words 66 to 245 Input Data Image 180 word array Output Data Image The output data image is transferred from the controller to the scanner module Word Description Data Type 0 and 1 Module Command Array 2 word array 2 to 181 Output Data Image 180 word array The following table shows the bit descriptions for the Module Command Array Word Bit Operating Mode 0 0 1 Run 0 Idle 1 1 Fault 2 1 Disable Network 3 Reserved 4 1 Reset 9 to 15 Reserved 1 Oto 15 Reserved 1 DO NOT manipulate Reserved Bits Doing so may interfere with future compatibility 1769 SM1 Compact I O to DPI SCANport Module The 1769 SM1 Compact I O to DPI SCANport module provides a Compact I O connection for up to three DPI or SCANport enabled drives or power products It can be used with a MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Series C or higher Refer to the 1769 SM1 Compact I O DPI SCANport Module User Manual publication 1769 UM010 for detailed info
280. below lists pages of this manual where new information appeats See Page Added a note on the Clear Controller Memory feature not being supported in FRN 14 and later 54 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 4 Summary of Changes Notes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Table of Contents Summary of Changes Firmware Revision History is desse es OC ee aod 1 3 Firmware Upgrades s ossis ca oe Oe ERR AHCR RACE S S RP RUE dp 1 3 New Information dua Dives heed ua RET ERE ER UR WE TAPA 1 3 Table of Contents Preface Who Should Use this Manual usi dace e a eR og f ear 1 13 Purpose or this Marial sern ees ef Vere S t Eat oet 1 13 Common Techniques Used in this Manual esses 1 13 Related Documentation ak fete te ua e eee da o qr tO etc A 1 14 Rockwell Automation Support 5244229 s aer yo etes x Y 1 14 Chapter 1 1 0 Configuration Embedded I6 uisus EPIRI der RU ERI XS 1 15 MicroLogix 1200 Expansion I O c voee EP rH RA eV du 1 16 MicroLogix 1200 Expansion I O Memory Mapping 1 17 MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion I O 00005 1 24 MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion I O Memory Mapping 1 26 DO Addr ssing du eris boa toco eS P rh e de teen 1 37 IC D Otra curo ioci Rx do somos pa Ce Ro t p t A adl 1 38 Input PUteHno sees how gare test XP p Rc te ORO du IA 1 38 Pac aro TA PUL ied os m piat e ra Kb t FP e Va kg idis 1 39 Configuring Expansion I O Using RSLogix 500 suu 1 42
281. bit of the destination word All other bits in the destination word are cleared The DCD instruction converts the values as shown in the table below Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Source Bits Destination Bits 15to 04 03 02 01 00 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 X 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x not used ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Instruction Type output ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Execution Time for the ENC Instruction ource N7 0 0000000000000000 Controller When Rung Is Dest N7 1 0000h True False MicroLogix 1200 1 2 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 6 8 us 0 0 us Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Conversi
282. ble is not a special file within the controller it is programmed and operates the same as any other program file From the control program perspective it is unique in that it is automatically scanned based on the STI set point STI Error Code ER Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ER Error Code STI 0 ER word INT status read only Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Using Interrupts 245 Error codes detected by the STI sub system are displayed in this register The table below explains the error codes STI Error Code Recoverable Fault Description Controller Invalid Program File Program file number is less than 3 greater than 255 or does na Number exist STI User Interrupt Executing UIX Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIX User Interrupt Executing STI 0 UIX binary bit status read only The UIX User Interrupt Executing bit is set whenever the STI mechanism completes timing and the controller is scanning the STI PEN The UIX bit is cleared when the controller completes processing the STI subroutine The STI UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an STI interrupt is executing STI User Interrupt Enable UIE Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIE User Interrupt Enable STI 0 UIE binary
283. blication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 378 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ys Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Wee I False True wide n Convert to BCD TOD 0 0 17 2 1 8 Long Word addressing level does not apply Off Delay Timer TOF 13 0 2 9 3 9 On Delay Timer TON 3 0 18 0 3 9 User Interrupt Disable UID 0 0 0 8 0 9 User Interrupt Enable UIE 0 0 0 8 0 9 User Interrupt Flush UIF 0 0 12 3 0 9 Examine if Closed XIC 0 8 0 9 1 0 Examine if Open X10 0 8 0 9 1 0 Exclusive Or XOR 0 0 3 0 2 8 0 0 9 9 3 0 1 Only valid for MicroLogix 1200 Series B Controllers 2 This value for the SVC instruction is for when the communications servicing function is accessing a data file The time increases when accessing a function file Indirect Addressing The following sections describe how indirect addressing affects the execution time of instructions for the Micrologix 1200 controllers The timing for an indirect address is affected by the form of the indirect address For the address forms in the following table you can interchange the following file types Input I and Output O e Bit B Integer N Timer T Counter C and Control R Execution Times for
284. broutine processing This bit must be set if you want the controller to process the EI subroutine when an EII event occurs If you need to restrict when the EII subroutine is processed clear the UIE bit An example of when this is important is if a series of math calculations need to be processed without interruption Before the calculations take place clear the UIE bit After the calculations are complete set the UIE bit and EII subroutine ptocessing resumes Ell User Interrupt Lost UIL Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIL User Interrupt Lost EIIO UIL binary bit status read write UIL User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize track and clear the lost condition Ell User Interrupt Pending UIP Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIP User Interrupt Pending EII 0 UIP binary bit status read only UIP User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot execute immediately This bit is automati
285. bus RTU Master driver can be used with the following controllers MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and higher Message instructions are used to transfer information between the data files in the Modbus RTU Master and the Modbus RTU Slaves Refer to Chapter 21 for detailed information about configuring a MSG instruction for Modbus Communications Modbus addressing is limited to 16 bits per memory group each with a range of 1 to 65 536 There are four memory groups one for each function coils generally addressed as 0xxxx contacts 1xxxx e input registers 3xxxx holding registers 4xxxx Protocol Configuration 447 Coils and contacts are addressed at the bit level Coils are like outputs and can be read and written to Contacts are like inputs and are read only Input registers and holding registers are addressed at the word level Input registers are generally used for internally storing input values They are read only Holding registers are general purpose and can be both read and written to The most significant digit of the address is considered a prefix and does not get entered into the Modbus Data Address field when configuring the message instruction When the message is sent the address is decremented by 1 and converted into a 4 character hex number to be transmitted via the network with a range of 0 FFFFh the slave increments the address by 1 and selects the appropriate memory group based
286. by an executing PTO or PWM function an instruction error is generated The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers allow users to configure groups of DC inputs for high speed or normal operation Users can configure each input group s response time A configurable filter determines how long the input signal must be on or off before the controller recognizes the signal The higher the value the longer it takes for the input state to be recognized by the controller Higher values provide more filtering and are used in electrically noisy environments Lower values provide less filtering and are used to detect fast or narrow pulses You typically set the filters to a lower value when using high speed counters latching inputs and input interrupts Input filtering is configured using RSLogix 500 programming software To configure the filters using RSLogix 500 1 Open the Controller folder 2 Open the I O Configuration folder 3 Open slot 0 controller Latching Inputs 1 0 Configuration 39 4 Select the embedded I O configuration tab The input groups are pre arranged Simply select the filter time you require for each input group You can apply a unique input filter setting to each of the input groups Controller MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 Input Groups e Qand 1 e and 1 e2and3 e 2 and 3 e 4 and above e 4A and 5 e 6and7 e 8 and above The minimum and maximum response times associated
287. bytes entered must be greater than or equal to the number of bytes than the DeviceNet device will return DeviceNet devices return a fixed number of bytes depending on the Class and Service If more data is returned than expected the message will error and no data will be written If less data is returned than expected the data will be written and the remainder of the bytes will be filled with zeros In the example screen shown below N7 0 will receive 2 bytes 1 word of data Target Device MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 Expansion Comms Port Communications Instructions 343 Message Timeout Message timeout is specified in seconds If the target does not respond within this time period the message instruction will generate a specific error see MSG Instruction Error Codes on page 351 The amount of time that is acceptable should be based on application requirements and network capacity loading Target Type You can select either Module or Network Device If you need to message to a device on DeviceNet select Network Device If you need to message to a DeviceNet parameter on the scanner select Module This allows the control program access to module parameters TIP Note many module parameters are not editable and some can only be edited when the module is in Idle Mode Local Node address This is the target device s DeviceNet node number Service DeviceNet uses setvices to provide specific messaging functions A numb
288. cally set and cleared by the controller The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the pending bit Using Interrupts 251 Ell Event Interrupt Enable EIE Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access EIE Event Interrupt Enabled Ell O EIE binary bit control read write EIE Event Interrupt Enabled allows the event interrupt function to be enabled or disabled from the control program When set 1 the function is enabled when cleared 0 default the function is disabled This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle Ell Auto Start AS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access AS Auto Start EIl 0 AS binary bit control read only AS Auto Start is a control bit that can be used in the control program The auto start bit is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit automatically sets the EII Event Interrupt Enable EIE bit when the controller enters any executing mode Ell Error Detected ED Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ED Error Detected EII 0 ED binary bit status read only The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used by the control program to detect if an error is pres
289. ccel Decel Pulses PTO 1 7 OoOoOoOcoOocoOococcocoocoocococococococococco Ll Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 460 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Enter the following parameters as the Minimum Configuration required for the PTO to generate pulses PTO 0 OUT Select Destination Output for pulses Output O 0 2 or O 0 3 PTO 0 OF Output Frequency Frequency of pulses 0 to 20 000 Hz Data less then zero and greater then 20 000 generates a PTO error PTO 0 TOP Total Output Pulses Determines total number of pulses to be generated by the controller PTO 0 ADP Accel Decel Pulses How many of the total pulses will be used for the Accel Decel component Example The following example will generate 10 000 pulses on Output O 0 2 at a frequency of 500Hz and 100 pulses will be used for Accelerating and 100 pulses will be used for Decelerating Function Files OF x Hsc PTO pwM stl Jen ATC par rer MMi el E PTO 0 H OUT Output LDN Done DS Decelerating Status L RS Run Status HAS Accelerating Status H RP Ramp Profile LIS Idle Status ED Error Detected Status H NS Normal Operation Status HJPS Jog Pulse Status H JES Jog Continuous Status HJF Jog Pulse HJE Jog Continuous EH Enable Hard Stop EN Enable Status follows rung state ER Error Code H OF Output Frequency Hz OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz HJF Jog Frequency Hz H TOP
290. characters date 2 bytes 10 characters time 2 bytes 8 characters For queue 5 the formatted string length is 29 characters as shown below Data Time N7 11 11 3 0 1122 1 Characters 8 1 J6 1 16 1 16 8 14 6 1 6 1 6 29 characters Number of Records Using Queue 5 as an example each record consumes Record Field Memory Consumption Time 2 bytes N7 11 2 bytes 11 3 0 2 bytes 11 2 1 2 bytes Integrity Check 2 bytes Total 10 bytes Each record consumes 10 bytes So if only one queue was configured the maximum number of records that could be stored would be 4915 The maximum number of records is calculated by Maximum Number of Records Data Log File Size Record Size 48K bytes 10 bytes 48 1024 10 4915 records Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 368 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Configuring Data Log Data Logging is configured using RSLogix 500 programming software version V4 00 00 or latet Queues 1 Open a 1764 LRP application The first step in using Data Logging is to configure the data log queue s Access to this function is provided via the RSLogix 500 Project tree EXAMPLE RESET DLG Mel i 5 Controler Program Files Double click H E Data Files Configuration to EJ Data Logging access Data Log Po Configuration H Force Files FJ Custom Data Monitors H E Data
291. ching the High or Low presets The bit pattern stored in the OMB variable defines which outputs are controlled by the HSC and which outputs are not controlled by the HSC The bit pattern of the OMB variable directly corresponds to the output bits on the controller Bits that ate set 1 are enabled and can be turned on or off by the HSC sub system Bits that are clear 0 cannot be turned on or off by the HSC sub system The mask bit pattern can be configured only during initial setup The table below illustrates this relationship Affect of HSC Output Mask on Base Unit Outputs Output Address 16 Bit Signed Integer Data Word 15 14 13 17 11 1709 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 HSC 0 HPO high preset output HSC 0 0MB output mask 00 0 0 The outputs shown in the black boxes ate the outputs under the control of the HSC sub system The mask defines which outputs can be controlled The high preset output or low preset output values HPO or LPO define if each output is either ON 1 or OFF 0 Another way to view this is that the high or low preset output is written through the output mask with the output mask acting like a filter The bits in the gray boxes are unused The first 12 bits of the mask word are used and the remaining mask bits ate not functional because they do not correlate to any physical outputs on the base unit The mask bit pattern can be config
292. clock provides year month day of month day of week hour minute and second information to the Real Time Clock RTC Function File in the controller The Real Time Clock parameters and their valid ranges are shown in the table below Real Time Clock Function File Feature Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access YR RIC Year RTC 0 YR word 1998 to 2097 status read only MON RTC Month RTC 0 MON word 1 to 12 status read only DAY RTC Day of Month RTC 0 DAY word 1 to 31 status read only HR RTC Hours RTC 0 HR word 0 to 23 military time status read only MIN RTC Minutes RTC 0 MIN word 0 to 59 status read only SEC RTC Seconds RTC 0 SEC word 0 to 59 status read only DOW RTC Day of Week RTC 0 DOW word 0 to 6 Sunday to Saturday status read only DS Disabled RTC 0 DS binary 0 or 1 status read only BL RTC Battery Low RTC 0 BL binary 0 or 1 status read only Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Function Files 57 Writing Data to the Real Time Clock The programming screen is shown below ma Function Files Hsc PTO stl Jen BHI MMI par re cs Pwe ios Day of Week a EO EN DD AMME Yvvr n Yen Daes p p n MON Month HH MM SS j DAY Day Tme B 1 5 1 mis H MIN Minute SEC Second Set Date amp Time H DOW Day OfThe Week LDS Disabled Disable Clack L BL ATC Battery is Low ojojojojojojojojo When
293. col DFT Full Duplex 1 39 20 1 13 1 10 1 09 1 08 1 08 1 08 1 00 DFT Half Duplex 1 18 12 1 09 1 08 1 07 1 07 1 06 1 06 1 01 DH 485 N A 14 1310 N A N A N A N A N A 1 06 at 19 2K 1 09 at 9 6K Modbus 121 12 1 09 1 08 1 08 1 08 1 08 1 08 1 00 Asc 1 52 1 33 1 24 1 20 1 19 1 18 1 18 1 17 1 00 Shut Down 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 Inactive is defined as No Messaging and No Data Monitoring For DH 485 protocol inactive means that the controller is not connected to a network 2 Applies to MicroLogix 1500 Series B Processors only Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 388 MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Notes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Status File Overview System Status File Appendix C The status file lets you monitor how your controller works and lets you direct how you want it to work This is done by using the status file to set up control bits and monitor both hardware and programming device faults and other status information The status file S contains the following words IMPORTANT Do not write to reserved words in the status file If you intend writing to status file data it is imperative that you first understand the function fully Address Function Page S 0 Arithmetic Flags 390 S 1 Controller Mode 391 S 2 STI Mode 396 S 2 9 Memory Module Program Compare 39
294. compile reload the program and enter configuration the Run mode or e Replace the module e Cycle power x70 I O CONFIGURATION e The expansion 1 0 configuration Non User e Either correct the user program I O MISMATCH in the user program did not configuration to match the actual match the actual configuration configuration or or e With power off correct the actual 1 0 e The expansion I O configuration configuration to match the user program in the user program specified a configuration module but one was not found or e The expansion I O module configuration data size for a module was greater than what the module is capable of holding xxgglt EXPANSION 1 0 The number of input or output image Non User e Correct the user program I O MODULE words configured in the user configuration to reduce the number of CONFIGURATION program exceeds the image size in input or output words and ERROR the expansion 1 0 module e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode xx89g 2 EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion I O module generated Non User e Refer to the 1 0 status file MODULE ERROR anertor e Consult the documentation for your specific I 0 module to determine possible causes of a module error xxgA 12 EXPANSION 1 0 e Either an expansion 0 cable is Non User e Correct the user program to eliminate a CABLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH ERROR configured in the user program but no cable is present or e an expansion
295. conds are less than 30 then RTC Seconds is reset to 0 e If RTC Seconds ate greater than or equal to 30 then the RTC Minutes are incremented by 1 and RTC Seconds ate reset to 0 Trim Pot Information Function File Function Files 59 The following conditions cause the RTA instruction to have no effect on the RTC data e No RTC attached to the controller RTC is present but disabled An external via communications message to the RTC is in progress when the RTA instruction is executed External communications to the RTC takes precedence over the RTA instruction To re activate the RTA instruction the RTA rung must become false and then true TIP There is only one internal storage bit allocated in the system for this instruction Do not use more than one RTA instruction in your program TIP You can also use a MSG instruction to write RTC data from one controller to another to synchronize time To send write RTC data use RTC 0 as the source and the destination This feature not available with the Series A controllers The composition of the Trim Pot Information TPI Function File is described below Trim Pot Function File Data Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access TPD Data O TPI 0 POTO Word 0 250 Status Read Only 16 bit integer TPD Data 1 TPI 0 POT1 Word 0 250 Status Read Only 16 bit integer TPO Error Code TPI 0 ER Word bits 0 to 7 0 3 Status Read Only TP1 Error Code Word b
296. controller enters any executing mode Using the Event Input Interrupt Ell Function File Using Interrupts 247 STI Error Detected ED Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ED Error Detected STI 0 ED binary bit status read only The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used by the control program to detect if an error is present in the STI sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set the user should look at the error code in parameter STI 0 ER This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller STI Set Point Milliseconds Between Interrupts SPM Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access SPM Set Point STEO SPM word INT 0 to control read write Msec 65 535 When the controller transitions to an executing mode the SPM set point in milliseconds value is loaded into the STI If the STI 1s configured correctly and enabled the program file identified in the STI variable PEN is scanned at this interval This value can be changed from the control program by using the STS instruction TIP The minimum value cannot be less than the time required to scan the STI program file STI 0 PFN plus the Interrupt Latency The EJI event input interrupt is a feature that allows the user to scan a specific pro
297. croLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 29 ee Important note about indirect addressing 1 D The Data Log Status file can only be used by th S 1 c1 ep Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor he F file is valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series C and higher controllers only Some elements can be written to Consult the function file for details IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Updates to Math Status Bits After a MOV instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0 to 3 in the processor status file S2 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets 0 1 Overflow sets when an overflow infinity or NAN not a number condition is detected otherwise resets 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if result is negative MSB is set otherwise resets 5 0 Math Overflow Trap sets Math Overflow Trap minor error if the Overflow bit is set Bi otherwise it remains in last state 1 Control bit TIP If you want to move one word of data without affecting the math flags use a copy COP instruction with a length of 1 word instead of the MOV instruction MVM Masked Move
298. croLogix 1500 only the DAT see the MicroLogix 1500 User Manual publication 1764 UM001 Data Access Tool DAT configuration is stored in the processor in a specialized configuration file called the DAT Function File The DAT Function File which is part of the user s control program is shown below a Function Files HSC PTO PwM sTI Ell b DP Data Access Terminal present H FIP F1 key Pressed H FIL F1 Key Latched F2P F2 Key Pressed H F2L F2 Key Latched H FMA Firmware Major TBF Target Bit File H PST Power Save Timeout minutes 0 255 H DFT DAT Functional Type Rev 1 x H FMI Firmware Minor Rev x 1 Ed CN 4 Catalog Number TIF Target Integer File ATC DAT re MMI BHI cso cs l goajolo ooo ool o o nteger The DAT function file contains the Target Integer File the Target Bit File and the Power Save Timeout parameter These three parameters are described in the table below Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access Target Integer File DAT 0 TIF Word int Control Read Only Target Bit File DAT 0 TBF Word int Control Read Only Power Save Timeout DAT O PST Word int Control Read Only Target Integer File TIF The value stored in the TIF location identifies the integer file with which the DAT will interface The DAT can read or wtite to any valid integer file within the controller Valid integer files are N3 through N2
299. ction INT Interrupt Subroutine Use this instruction to identify a program file as an interrupt subroutine INT label versus a regular subroutine SBR label This should be the first instruction in your interrupt subroutine Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 238 Using Interrupts INT Interrupt Subroutine STS Selectable Timed INT Instruction Used To Page STS Selectable Timed Use the STS Selectable Timed Interrupt Start 238 Start instruction to the start the STI timer from the control program rather than starting automatically UID User Interrupt Disable Use the User Interrupt Disable UID and the User 239 UIE User Interrupt Enable Interrupt Enable UIE instructions to create zones in laa which I O interrupts cannot occur UIF User Interrupt Flush Use the UIF instruction to remove selected pending 241 interrupts from the system 1 0 Interrupt Start STS Selectable Timed Start Time 1 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Instruction Type input Execution Time for the INT Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 1 0 us 1 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1 0 us 1 0 us The INT instruction is used as a label to identify a user interrupt service routine ISR This instruction is placed as the first instruction on a rung and is always evaluated as true Use of the INT instruction is o
300. ction MSG Message MSG Read Write Message Setup Screen MSG File MG9 0 E EN DN ER Instruction Type output Execution Time for the MSG Instruction Communications Instructions 313 Controller Rung Condition When Rung Is True False 1200 False to True Transition for Reads 230 0 us False to True Transition for Writes 264 us 1 6 us per word MicroLogix Steady State True 17 0 us 6 0 us 1900 False to True Transition for Reads 205 0 us 1764 LSP False to True Transition for Writes 228 us 1 4 us per word MicroLogix Steady State True 17 0 us 6 0 us 1900 Communications via base unit or 1764 LRP communications port 1764 LRP False to True Transition for Reads 234 0 us 6 0 us False to True Transition for Writes 257 us 1 4 us per word Communications via Compact I O communication module i e 1769 SDN False to True Transition for Reads 206 0 us 6 0 us False to True Transition for Writes 234 us 1 4 us per word Any preceding logic on the message rung must be solved true before the message instruction can be processed The example below shows a message instruction B3 0 0000 3 r i MSG Read Write Message MSG File MG11 0 Setup Screen If B3 0 is on 1 the MSG rung is true and MG11 0 is not already processing a message then MG11 0 is processed If one of the four buffers is available the message and it
301. ction File HSC 0 or HSC 1 Sub Element Description Address DataFormt HSC Function UserProgram For More Modes Access Information PFN Program File Number HSC 0 PFN word INT 0 to 7 control read only 90 ER Error Code HSC 0 ER word INT Oto7 status read only 90 UIX User Interrupt Executing HSC 0 UIX bit 0 to 7 status read only 93 UIE User Interrupt Enable HSC 0 UIE bit 0 to 7 control read write 93 UIL User Interrupt Lost HSC 0 UIL bit Oto7 status read write 94 UIP User Interrupt Pending HSC 0 UIP bit 0 to 7 status read only 94 FE Function Enabled HSC O FE bit 0 to 7 control read write 91 AS Auto Start HSC 0 AS bit 0 to 7 control read only 91 ED Error Detected HSC 0 ED bit 0 to 7 status read only 92 CE Counting Enabled HSC 0 CE bit 0 to 7 control read write 92 SP Set Parameters HSC 0 SP bit 0 to 7 control read write 92 LPM Low Preset Mask HSC 0 LPM bit 2to 7 control read write 95 HPM High Preset Mask HSC 0 HPM bit 0 to 7 control read write 96 UFM Underflow Mask HSC 0 UFM bit 2 to 7 control read write 98 OFM Overflow Mask HSC 0 0FM bit Oto7 control read write 99 LPI Low Preset Interrupt HSC 0 LPI bit 2to 7 status read write 95 HPI High Preset Interrupt HSC 0 HPI bit 0 to 7 status read write 96 UFI Underflow Interrupt HSC O UFI bit 2 to 7 status read write 98 OFI Overflow Interrupt HSC 0 OFI bit 0 to 7 status r
302. ction copies 15 elements of data from N27 10 N27 10 to N27 24 to N7 0 N7 0 to N7 14 TIP If a number larger than 255 is placed in N50 100 in this example a controller fault occurs This is because the controller has a maximum of 255 data files In addition the file defined by the indirection should match the file type defined by the instruction in this example an integer file Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Programming Instructions Overview 85 TIP This example also illustrates how to perform a limit check on the indirect address The limit instruction at the beginning of the rung is monitoring the indirect element If the data at N50 100 is less than 10 or greater than 25 the copy instruction is not processed This procedure can be used to make sure an indirect address does not access data an unintended location Indirect Addressing of Bit B3 0 B3 0 0002 lE EJ 825 0 16 0003 CEND gt e Address B3 B25 0 Desctiption In this example the element to be used for the indirection is B25 0 The data in B25 0 defines the bit within file B3 If the value of location B25 0 1017 the XIC instruction is processed using B3 1017 TIP If a number larger than 4096 or larger than the number of elements in the data file is placed in B25 0 in this example data integrity cannot be guaranteed Exceeding the number of elements inthe data file would cause the file boundary to be crossed These are only some o
303. d The DLG instruction only captures data on a false to true rung transition The DLG rung must be reset scanned false before it will capture data again Never place the DLG instruction alone on a rung It should always have preceding logic as shown below DLG Data Log queue number 0 There is a Data Log Status DLS file element for each Data Log Queue The DLS file does not exist until a data log queue has been configured The Data Log Status file has 3 word elements Word 0 is addressable by bit only through ladder logic Words 1 and 2 are addressable by word and or bit through ladder logic The number of DLS file elements depends upon the number of queues specified in the application The status bits and words are described below Data Log Status DLS File Elements Control Element Word 15 14 13 12 J11 10 09 los 07 06 los o4 o3 02 Jot Joo 0 EN 10 Jpn love o o o o jo jo jo jo jo o o jo Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 371 Data Log Status DLS File Elements Control Element Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 1 FSZ File Size number of records allocated 2 RST Records Stored number of records recorded 1 EN Enable Bit 2 DN Done Bit 3 OV Overflow Bit Data Logging Enable EN When the DLG instruction rung is true t
304. d Structure SER No Field Function Description DST Destination Node SRC Source Node CMD Command Code STS Status Code Set to zero 0 TNS Transaction Number Always 2 bytes FNC Function Code Byte Size Number of bytes to be read Formatted string length see equation below File Number Always set to zero 0 File Type Must be A5 hex Element Number Queue number Determines the queue to be read 0 to 255 Sub Element Number Always set to zero 0 Equation Record Field 1 Record Field 2 Record Field 3 Record Field 7 Formatted String Length Record Field Sizes Data Type Maximum Size Word 7 bytes characters Long Word 12 bytes characters Date Field 11 bytes characters Time Field 9 bytes characters Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 374 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Reply Structure TIP The formatted string length cannot exceed 80 bytes in length TIP The last byte will be a zero value representing the terminator character Controller Responds with Reply s Bs C Ss OTS Field Function Description SRC Source Node DST Destination Node CMD Command Code STS Status Code TNS Transaction Number Always 2 bytes DATA Formatted string Conditions that Will Erase the Data Retrieval File Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 If
305. d by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing OTL Output Latch OTU Output Unlatch B3 0 IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output Execution Time for the OTL and OTU Instructions Controller OTL When Rung Is OTU When Rung Is True False True False MicroLogix 1200 11 0 us 0 0 us 1 1 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 10 9 us 0 0 us 0 9 us 0 0 us The OTL and OTU instructions are retentive output instructions OTL turns on a bit while OTU turns off a bit These instructions are usually used in pairs with both instructions addressing the same bit Publication 1762 RMO001H EN P July 2014 150 Relay Type Bit Instructions ONS One Shot N7 1 4 ons F 0 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 OTE or UIE this instruction must be the ast instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL Since these are latching outputs once set or reset they remain set or reset regardless of the rung condition field devices energizes with the return of power if the OTL bit was set when ATTENTION In the event of a power loss any OTL controlled bit including IN
306. d counter to operate Set Parameters SP Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access SP Set HSC O SP bi Parameters t 0to7 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The SP Set Parameters control bit is used to load new variables to the HSC sub system When an OTE instruction with the address of HSC 0 SP is solved true off to on rung transition all configuration variables currently stored in the HSC function are checked and loaded into the HSC sub system The HSC sub system then operates based on those newly loaded settings Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 93 This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit SP can be toggled while the HSC 1s running and no counts are lost User Interrupt Enable UIE Description Address Data HSC Type User Program Format Modes Access UIE User Interrupt Enable HSC O UIE bit 0 to 7 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The UIE User Interrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable HSC subroutine processing This bit must be set 1 if the user wants the controller to process the HSC subroutine when any of the following conditions exist Low preset reached e High preset reached Overfl
307. d error codes D 413 HSC error codes 5 91 major error code status C 402 math overflow trap bit 10 171 math status bits 10 170 MSG instruction error codes 21 351 PID runtime errors 19 268 PTO error codes 6 136 PWM error codes 6 144 STI error code 18 244 troubleshooting guide D 414 errors identifying D 413 event input interrupt Ell function file 18 247 examine if closed instruction 7 147 examine if open instruction 7 147 example active station file 3 79 E 437 DLG Quick Start F 481 Index 501 HSC Quick Start F 463 MSG Quick Start F 468 PTO Quick Start F 459 PWM Quick Start F 462 RTC Quick Start F 473 RTC Synchronization Quick Start F 478 STI Quick Start F 477 trim pots Quick Start F 475 user interrupt disable UID Quick Start F 477 exclusive OR instruction 12 193 executing mode 1 491 execution time MicroLogix 1200 instructions A 375 MicroLogix 1500 instructions B 381 expansion O 1 16 1 24 analog 1 0 configuration 1 19 1 29 discrete 1 0 configuration 1 17 1 26 F false 1 497 fault messages D 413 D 414 fault override at power up bit C 392 fault recovery procedure D 414 fault routine description of operation 18 236 file number status C 405 manually clearing faults D 414 operation in relation to main control program 18 233 priority of interrupts 18 235 faults automatically clearing D 413 identifying D 413 manually clearing using the fault routine D 414 recoverable and non recoverable 18 236 FET 1 491 FFL instructio
308. d higher encoder A device that detects position and transmits a signal representing that position executing mode Any run or test mode false The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung FET Field Effect Transistor DC output capable of high speed operation FIFO First In First Out The order that data is stored and retrieved from a file file A collection of data or logic organized into groups full duplex A mode of communication where data may be transmitted and received simultaneously contrast with half duplex Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 492 Glossary Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 half duplex A mode of communication where data transmission is limited to one direction at a time hard disk A storage device in a personal computer high byte Bits 8 to 15 of a wotd housekeeping The portion of the scan when the controller performs internal checks and services communications input device A device such as a push button or a switch that supplies an electrical signal to the controller input scan The controller reads all input devices connected to the input terminals inrush current The temporary surge of current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized instruction A mnemonic defining an operation to be performed by the processor A rung in a program consists of a set of input and output instructio
309. d in STI 0 SPM The valid range is 0 01 to 10 24 seconds Zero Crossing Deadband ZCD Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access ZCD Zero Crossing PD10 0 2CD word INT O to 32 767 control read write Deadband The deadband extends above and below the setpoint by the value entered The deadband is entered at the zero crossing of the process variable and the setpoint This means that the deadband is in effect only after the process variable enters the deadband and passes through the setpoint The valid range is 0 to the scaled maximum or 0 to 16 383 when no scaling exists Feed Forward Bias FF Tuning Parameter Address_ Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access FF Feed Forward PD10 0 FF word 16 383 to 416 383 control read write Bias INT The feed forward bias is used to compensate for disturbances that may affect the CV output Scaled Error SE Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access SE Scaled Error PD10 0 SE word INT 32 768 to 432 767 status read only Scaled error is the difference between the process variable and the setpoint The format of the difference E SP PV or E PV SP is determined by the control mode CM bit See Control Mode CM on page 264 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014
310. d outputs 1762 L24BXB 1762 L40BXB and 1764 28BX D e When OUT 3 PTO pulses output 3 O0 0 0 3 of the embedded outputs 1764 28BXB only TIP Forcing an output controlled by the PTO while it is running stops all output pulses and causes a PTO error Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 126 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 PTO Done DN Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access DN Done PTO 0 DN bit 00r 1 status read only The PTO DN Done bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The DN bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction has completed its operation successfully Cleared 0 When the rung the PTO is on 1s false If the rung is false when the PTO instruction completes the Done bit is set until the next scan of the PTO instruction PTO Decelerating Status DS Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access DS Decelerating Status PTO 0 DS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO DS Decel bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The DS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is within the deceleration phase of the output pro
311. d to even rule If the bits of the result to the right of the least significant bit LSB represent a value less than one half of the LSB then the result remains as is If the bits to the right of the LSB represent a value greater than one half of the LSB the result is rounded up by adding one LSB If the bits to the right of the LSB represent a value of exactly one half LSB the result is rounded up or down so that the LSB is an even number Addressing Floating Point Files The addressing format for floating point data files is shown below Format Explanation Ff e F Floating Point file f File number The valid file number range is from 8 default to 255 Element delimiter e Element number The valid element number range is from 0 to 255 Examples F8 2 Floating Point File 8 Element 2 F10 36 Floating Point File 10 Element 36 Programming Floating Point Values The following table shows items to consider when using floating point data IMPORTANT These rules do not apply to the SCP instruction See page 179 for the rules for that instruction Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 174 Math Instructions ADD Add SUB Subtract ADD Add Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt Dest N7 2 0 lt SUB Subtract Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt Dest N7 2 0 lt Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Considerations When Using Floating Point D
312. data otherwise it is reset e Overflow Trap The Math Overflow Trap Bit is only set if the Overflow bit is set Otherwise it remains in its last state Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ADD and SUB Instructions Controller Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 ADD word 2 us 0 0 us long word 11 9 us 0 0 us SUB word 34 us 0 0 us long word 12 9 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 ADD word 2 5 us 0 0 us long word 10 4 us 0 0 us SUB word 2 9 us 0 0 us long word 11 2 us 0 0 us MUL Multiply DIV Divide MUL 1 Multiply Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt Dest N7 2 0 lt DIV Divide Source A N7 0 0 Source B N7 1 0 Dest N72 0 lt NEG Negate NEG Negate b Source N7 0 0 lt Dest N7 1 0 lt Math Instructions 175 Use the ADD instruction to add one value to another value Source A Source B and place the sum in the Destination Use the SUB instruction to subtract one value from another value Source A Source B and place the result in the Destination Instruction Type output Execution Time for the MUL and DIV Instructions Controller Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 MUL word 6 8 us 0 0 us long word 31 9 us 0 0 us DIV word 12 2 us 0 0 us long word 42 8 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 MUL word 5 8 us 0 0 us long word 27 6 us
313. data During operation the processor may set or reset the bit based on logical continuity of ladder rungs You can address a bit as many times as your program requires Instruction Type input Execution Time for the XIC and XIO Instructions Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 10 9 us 0 8 us MicroLogix 1500 10 9 us 0 7 us Use the XIC instruction to determine if the addressed bit is on Use the XIO instruction to determine if the addressed bit is off When used on a rung the bit address being examined can correspond to the status of real world input devices connected to the base unit or expansion I O or internal addresses data or function files Examples of devices that turn on or off a push button wired to an input addressed as 11 0 4 an output wired to a pilot light addressed as O0 0 2 e a timer controlling a light addressed as T4 3 DN a bit in the bit file addressed as B3 16 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 148 Relay Type Bit Instructions The instructions operate as follows XIO and XIC Instruction Operation Rung State Addressed XIC Instruction XIO Instruction Bit True Off Returns a False Returns a True True On Returns a True Returns a False False Instruction is not evaluated Instruction is not evaluated Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table XIC and XIO Instructions Valid Address
314. dder logic program it executes immediately It is never sent to the ASCII queue to wait for execution The following tables list the ASCII string control instructions used by the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers MicroLogix 1200 Series A AIC Integer to String MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 and later MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 and later ACI String to Integer AIC Integer to String ACN String Concatenate ASC String Search AEX String Extract ASR ASCII String Compare ASCII Port Control These instructions use or alter the communication channel for receiving or transmitting data The following tables list the ASCII port control instructions used by the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers MicroLogix 1200 Series AU ACL ASCII Clear Buffer AWA ASCII Write with Append AWT ASCII Write 1 Forthe MicroLogix 1200 Series A these instructions only transmit data MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 and later MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 and later ABL Test Buffer for Line ARD ASCII Read Characters ACB Number of Characters in Buffer ARL ASCII Read Line ACL ASCII Clear Buffer AWA ASCII Write with Append AHL ASCII Handshake Lines AWT ASCII Write When the ACL ASCII Clear Buffer instruction is encountered in a ladder logic program it executes immediately and causes all instructions to be removed from the ASCII queue including stopping execution of
315. dentifies whether the operation is a Load from the database or a Store to the database When executed on a True rung the RCP instruction transfers data between the recipe database and the specified data locations Addressing Modes and File Types are shown in the following table RCP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2 Data Files Function Files 2 Address Mode Address Level E c E zz Parameter E gt E 2 T je LI i S lela e zie Em E lE le e e ce I o e x O E LE Eo E lt q n 2 zm ks E 2 2 o v la fe 2z wu 16 S E z a v m a S a e a 1S IS E j a 2 Z j Recipe Number File e e e e e e e Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 361 Recipe File and Programming Example rece o Lap2 Ei Data Files oo X Configuring the RCP file Cross Reference E o0 ourPur DI n INPUT 1 Using RSLogix 500 locate and select RCP Configuration Files Right click and D s2 status select Nem E 83 BINARY E T4 TIMER E c5 COUNTER 2 Create a RCP File E R6 CONTROL E F8 FLOAT a Data Logging EJ Configuration File 0 D Status Cancel Dg FRCP Configuration Files Number
316. depend on whether you are using word or Jong word as the data format Usage and Execution Time MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ys Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True sind in False True wee m ASCII Test Buffer for Line ABL 12 5 115 8 6 char 13 3 Long Word addressing level does not apply ASCII Number of Characters in ACB 12 1 103 1 33 Buffer Absolute Value ABS 0 0 3 8 ASCII String to Integer ACI 0 0 17 6 7 2 char 1 5 0 0 24 6 11 6 char 1 5 ASCII Clear Buffer ACL 0 0 clear 1 2 Long Word addressing level does not apply both 249 1 receive 28 9 transmit 33 6 ASCII String Concatenate ACN 0 0 een 11 5 20 Add ADD 0 0 2 7 3 3 0 0 11 9 3 5 ASCII String Extract AEX 0 0 14 8 2 9 char 2 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply ASCII Handshake Lines AHL 113 109 4 53 ASCII Integer to String AIC 0 0 29 3 45 2 char 1 4 0 0 82 0 1 6 And AND 0 0 22 2 8 0 0 9 2 3 0 ASCII Read Characters ARD 11 8 e 49 7 4 3 Long Word addressing level does not apply char ASCII Read Line ARL 114 bd 50 1 14 3 char Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 316 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time
317. destination TOD Convert to Binary Coded Converts the integer source value to BCD format 187 Decimal and stores it in the destination Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Conversion Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page amp 2 i Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode o Er Parameter E 8 2 E e S ec BS e 3 t S G El oO o jo 8 S j l l Ie l ly lw E R ts Je Js Je ls o l l loa elz uab h Ea lE Elala Ejs EBs a lg Elaz ls ie Source ele e o o ele e Destination eje e o jo eje 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 182 Conversion Instructions DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Instruction Type output DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Execution Time for the DCD Instruction Source N7 0 3 0000h lt Controller When Rung Is S E 0000000000000000 True False MicroLogix 1200 1 9 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 0 9 us 0 0 us The DCD instruction uses the lower four bits of the source word to set one
318. dle Status r ED Error Detected Status H NS Normal Operation Status Enable Hard Stop Enable Status follows rung state Error Code Output Frequency Hz L OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz L DC Duty Cycle e g 456 45 6 VII Bd Using High Speed Outputs Pulse Width Modulated The variables within each PWM element along with what type of behavior and Function File Elements Summary access the control program has to those variables are listed individually below Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program For More Access Information OUT PWM Output PWM 0 0UT word INT 20r3 status read only 139 DS Decelerating Status PWM 0 DS bit 0 or 1 status read only 140 RS PWM Run Status PWM 0 RS bit 0 or 1 status read only 140 AS Accelerating Status PWM 0 AS bit 0 or 1 status read only 140 PP Profile Parameter Select PWM 0 PP bit 00r 1 control read write 141 IS PWM Idle Status PWM 0 IS bit 0 or 1 status read only 141 ED PWM Error Detection PWM 0 ED bit Dor 1 status read only 141 NS PWM Normal Operation PWM 0 NS bit 0 or 1 status read only 142 EH PWM Enable Hard Stop PWM 0 EH bit 00r 1 control read write 142 ES PWM Enable Status PWM 0 ES bit 0 or 1 status read only 142 OF PWM Output Frequency PWM 0 0F word INT 0to 20 000 control read write 143 OFS PWM Ope
319. duplicated at STI 0 SPM SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 242 for more information STI File Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 31 word 0 to 65535 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 PEN SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 242 for more information Channel 0 Communications Incoming Command Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 0 binary 0 or 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 0 See General Channel Status Block on page 67 for more information Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 406 System Status File Message Reply Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 1 binary 0 or 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 1 See General Channel Status
320. e The PTO RP Ramp Profile bit controls how the output pulses generated by the PTO sub system accelerate to and decelerate from the Output Frequency that is set in the PTO function file PTO 0 OF It can be used by an input or output instruction on any rung within the control program The RP bit operates as follows e Set 1 Configures the PTO instruction to produce an S Curve profile Cleared 0 Configures the PTO instruction to produce a Trapezoid profile PTO Idle Status IS Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access IS Idle Status PTO 0 IS bi t 0 or 1 status read only Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 128 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 The PTO IS Idle Status is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used in the control program by an input instruction The PTO sub system must be in an idle state whenever any PTO operation needs to start The IS bit operates as follows e Set 1 PTO sub system is in an idle state The idle state is defined as the PTO is not running and no errors are present Cleared 0 PTO sub system is not in an idle state it is running PTO Error Detected ED Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access ED Error Detected Status PTO 0 ED bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO
321. e The LPC Load Program Compare bit shows the status of the load program compare selection in the memory module s user program status file It enables you to determine the value without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Memory Module Program Compare on page 396 for more information LE Load on Error The LE Load on Error bit represents the status of the load on error setting in the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Load Memory Module On Error Or Default Program on page 393 for mote information LA Load Always The LA Load Always bit represents the status of the load always setting in the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Load Memory Module Always on page 393 for more information MB Mode Behavior The MB Mode Behavior bit represents the status of the mode behavior setting in the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Power Up Mode Behavior on page 393 for more information DAT Function File Function Files 63 H TIP This section describes the DAT Function File For instructions on operating Mi
322. e The user can attempt to clear the Major Error Halted bit 1 13 Note You may initiate a MSG instruction from the controller to another device to identify the fault condition of the controller Non Recoverable Non Recoverable Faults are caused by the user and cannot be recovered from The user fault routine executes when this type of fault occurs However the fault cannot be cleared Note You may initiate a MSG instruction to another device to identify the fault condition of the controller Non User Fault Non User Faults are caused by various conditions that cease ladder program execution The user fault routine does not execute when this type of fault occurs Status File Data Saved The Arithmetic Flags Status File word S 0 are saved on entry to the user fault subroutine and re written upon exiting the subroutine Creating a User Fault Subroutine To use the user fault subroutine 1 Create a subroutine file Program Files 3 to 255 can be used 2 Enter the file number in word S 29 of the status file Controller Operation The occurrence of recoverable or non recoverable faults causes the controller to read S 29 and execute the subroutine number identified by 8 29 If the fault is recoverable the routine can be used to correct the problem and clear the fault bit S 1 13 The controller then continues in its current executing mode The routine does not execute for non user faults Instru
323. e e o o e Length REF 1 0 Refresh C REF gt Instruction Type output Execution Time for the REF Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 see p 380 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 see p 386 0 0 us The REF instruction is used to interrupt the program scan to execute the I O scan and service communication portions of the operating cycle for all communication channels This includes write outputs service communications all communication channels communications toggle push button DAT MicroLogix 1500 only and comms housekeeping and read inputs The REF instruction has no programming parameters When it is evaluated as true the program scan is interrupted to execute the I O scan and service communication portions of the operating cycle The scan then resumes at the instruction following the REF instruction The REF instruction cannot be executed from an STI subroutine HSC subroutine EII subroutine or a user fault subroutine Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 232 Input and Output Instructions TIP Using an REF instruction may result in input data changing in the middle of a program scan This condition needs to be evaluated when using the REF instruction REF instruction You must insure that the REF instruction is not placed inside a non terminating program loop Do not place the
324. e BXB models of the MicroLogix 1200 or 1500 PWM Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 v4 50 00 or later and select the PWM tab then select the next to PWM 0 See Below Function Files Iof x Hsc Pro PWM stTi jen Rrc oat re MMi alel Value El PwM OUT Output H RS Run Status IS Idle Status ED Error Detected Status NS Normal Operation Status EH Enable Hard Stop m pe r ES Enable Status follows rung state ER Error Code OF Dutput Frequency Hz H OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz DC Duty Cycle e g 456 45 6 DCS Duty Cycle Status e g 456 45 6 TAI Enter the following parameters as the Minimum Configuration required for the PWM to generate a waveform at the specified frequency PWM 0 0UT Select Destination Output for pulses Output O 0 2 or O 0 3 PWM 0 0FS Output Frequency Frequency of the PWM 0 to 20 000 Hz PWM 0 DC PWM Duty Cycle Controls the output signal of the PWM 1 to 1000 DC 1000 100 Output ON Constant no waveform DC 0750 075 Output ON 025 Output OFF DC 0500 050 Output ON 050 Output OFF DC 0250 025 Output ON 075 Output OFF DC 0000 000 Output OFF Constant no Waveform Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2011 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 463 Example The following example will generate a waveform on Output O 0 2 at a frequency of 250Hz and a 50 Duty Cycle 3 Fu
325. e Multiple Coils 0xxxx 16 Write Multiple Registers 4xxxx Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 346 Communications Instructions Remote Messages Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Data Table Address Local file types must be Binary B or Integer N for Modbus commands Starting data table address for coil input bit commands 1 2 5 and 15 require a bit address Starting data table addresses for register commands 3 4 6 and 16 require a word address Size in Elements Size in elements defaults to 1 For coil input commands 1 2 5 and 15 elements are in bits For register commands 3 4 6 and 10 elements are in words Target Device Message Timeout Message timeout is specified in seconds If the target does not respond within this time period the message instruction will generate a specific error see MSG Instruction Error Codes on page 351 The amount of time that is acceptable should be based on application requirements and network capacity loading A 2 second message timeout is generally sufficient as long as only one message is triggered at a time Modbus Data Address decimal The default Modbus Data Address is 1 The Range is 1 to 65 536 Slave Node Address decimal The default Slave Node Address is 1 The Range is 0 to 247 Zero is the Modbus broadcast address and is only valid for Modbus write commands 5 6 15 and 16 The controller is also capable of remote or off link mes
326. e Quick Starts 483 5 Complete the Data Log Queue as shown below The Number of records and Addresses selected were arbitrary for this example Data Log Queue r Configuration Number of Records fi 00 K Separator Character 4 Cancel Space Help x di C Comma C Tab v Date Stamp IV Time Stamp Address to Log IMPORTANT Integer file N10 must be created with a length of 5 or the software will not compile the ladder program Also a 1764 RTC 1764 MMT1RTC 1764 MM2RTC must be installed and configured if the Date and Time stamp are to be used If an RTC module is not installed amp configured the data for these fields will contain zeros 6 Click OK when completed 7 Click OK and accept the Data Log Que window 8 Once the N10 file has been created enter the following values for each amp 3Data File N10 dec DATA N10 0 Radix Decimal v Smt SS E Columns f10 Desc DN mo Properties Usage Help 9 Download the program to your MicroLogix 1500 LRP 10 Go On Line 11 Toggle the Data Logging Enable B3 0 0 bit Off to On a total of 5 times Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2011 484 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Using the Data Logging Utility Software to recover data the computers communication port or if the wrong COM port is selected or a processor other then the 1764 LRP is connected to the computer you will not be able to continue
327. e User Program Access 0 3 binary Oor1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation or data handling instruction is negative Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 When a STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 3 is restored when execution resumes Controller Mode User Application Mode Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 1 0 to S 1 4 binary 0to 11110 status read only Bits 0 through 4 function as follows 1 0 to S 1 4 Mode Controller Mode Use by MicroLogix Controller S1 A 3 3 S12 san sin 7200 1500 0 0 0 0 0 0 remote download in progress e e 0 0 0 0 1 1 remote program mode e 0 0 0 1 1 3 remote suspend mode operation halted by execution e of the SUS instruction 0 0 1 1 0 6 remote run mode e 0 0 1 1 1 7 remote test continuous mode e 0 1 0 0 0 8 remote test single scan mode e 1 0 0 0 0 16 download in progress N A e 0 0 0 1 17 program mode N A 1 0 1 1 2 suspend mode operation halted by execution of the N A SUS instruction 1 1 1 0 30 run mode N A e 1 Valid modes are indicated by the symbol N A indicates an invalid mode for that controller Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 392 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014
328. e called a FIFO stack The data is unloaded using first in first out order After the unload completes the data in the stack is shifted one element toward the top of the stack and the last element is zeroed out Instruction parameters have been programmed in the FFL FFU instruction pair shown below FFL 7 e N7 10 UN Destination Position FIF N7 12 ON 712 HEM N7 11 itc N72 0 Length 34 N7 13 1 Sigh 3 FFU instruction N7 14 2 FF unloads data from 3 FIFO UNLOAD EU stack N7 12 at 4 FIFO N7 12 HDN ition 0 N7 12 Dest N7 11 HEM UE 5 34 words are allocated pu n 6 for FIFO stack starting Position 9 7 at N7 12 ending at N7 45 FFL and FFU Instruction Pair Source 8 N7 10 r 9 FFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next N745 33 available position 9 in this case Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 This instruction uses the following operands FIFO The FIFO operand is the starting address of the stack Destination The destination operand is a word or long word address that stotes the value which exits from the FIFO stack The FFU instruction unloads this value from the first location on the FIFO stack and places it in the destination address The address level of the destination must match the Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 File Instructions 209 FIFO stack If FIFO is a wotd size f
329. e e e e e e e e e Destination eje e jojo Length 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 TheF file is valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series C and higher controllers only IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DATI TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 BSL Bit Shift Left BSL Bit Shift Left I EN 5 File B3 1 Control R6 0 lt DN gt Bit Address B32 0 0 Length 1 lt File Instructions 203 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the BSL Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 32 us 1 3 us word 1 3 us MicroLogix 1500 26 1 us 1 06 uis word 1 4 us The BSL instruction loads data into a bit array on a false to true rung transition one bit at a time The data is shifted left through the array then unloaded one bit at a time The following figure shows the operation of the BSL instruction Source Bit 22 12 Data block is shifted one bit at a time from bit 16 to bit 73 31 30 78 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 119 18 17 16 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 132 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 M 98 Bit Array B3 1 RESERVED 73 72 70 69 68 67 66 65 64
330. e executed EFH PCCC Description Overflow histogram overflow FOH PCCC Description No access F1H Local processor detects illegal target file type F2H PCCC Description Invalid parameter invalid data in search or command block F3H PCCC Description Address reference exists to deleted area FAH PCCC Description Command execution failure for unknown reason PLC 3 histogram overflow F5H PCCC Description Data conversion error F6H PCCC Description The scanner is not able to communicate with a 1771 rack adapter This could be due to the scanner not scanning the selected adapter not being scanned the adapter not responding or an invalid request of a DCM BT block transfer F7H PCCC Description The adapter is not able to communicate with a module F8H PCCC Description The 1771 module response was not valid size checksum etc F9H PCCC Description Duplicated Label FAH Target node cannot respond because another node is file owner has sole file access FBH Target node cannot respond because another node is program owner has sole access to all files FCH PCCC Description Disk file is write protected or otherwise inaccessible off line only FDH PCCC Description Disk file is being used by another application update not performed off line only FFH Local communication channel is shut down TIP For 1770 6 5 16 DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual users The MSG error code reflects the STS field of the reply
331. e l _ E t le k le la Ele l Je 15 12 IE o la ja e lz lu 5 l S a E 2 E IB le jE js E 82 je ja 5 sS le jz S e Channel Destination Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation When the rung goes from false to true the Enable bit EN is set When the instruction 1s placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction Once the requested number of characters are in the buffer the characters are moved to the destination string The number of characters moved is put in the POS field of the control data file The number in the POS field is continuously updated and the Done bit DN is not set until all of the characters are read Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 TIP For information on thetiming of this instruction see the timing diagram on page 305 ARL ASCII Read Line ARL ASCII Read Line I CEN gt Channel 0 Dest ST10 5 CDN gt Control R6 4 String Length 15 lt ER gt Characters Read 0 lt Error 0 lt Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ARL Instruction Controller ASCII Instructions 301 When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FAN 3 or later 139 7 us 50 1 us character 11 7 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 114 u
332. e not supported The controller does not support this Modbus function or 1 subfunction 3 Bad Command Length The Modbus Command is the wrong size 3 4 Bad Length The function attempted to read write past the end of a data file 13 5 Bad parameter The function cannot be executed with these parameters 1 6 Bad File Type The file number being referenced is not the proper file type 2 7 Bad File Number The file number does not exist 2 8 Bad Modbus Address The function attempted to access an invalid Modbus address 3 9 Table Write protected The function attempted to write to a read only file 3 10 File Access Denied Access to this file is not granted 2 11 File Already Owned Data file is already owned by another process 2 1 If Modbus Command is sent with a valid Broadcast address then no exception reply will be sent for Error Codes 2 through 11 2 See on page 451 for valid Modbus memory mapping The following table lists the possible error codes and error descriptions for the Modbus RTU Master MSG Instruction Modbus Error Codes in Modbus RTU Master MSG Instruction MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and higher Error Error Description Received Exception Code Code 81 Illegal Function The function code sent by the Master is not supported by the slave 1 or has an incorrect parameter 82 Illegal Data Address The data address referenced in the Master command does not exist 2 in the slave or access to that addre
333. e offset from CO by the same amount This proves the linearity of your process The following example shows an offset progression of fifteen CO 20 PV 35 CO 40 PV 55 CO 60 PV 75 Process Control Instruction 271 CO 80 PV 95 If the values you recorded are not offset by the same amount e Either your scaling is incorrect or the process is not linear or your equipment is not properly connected and or configured Make the necessary corrections and repeat steps 2 10 Determining the Initial Loop Update Time To determine the approximate loop update time that should be used for your process perform the following 1 2 Place the normal application values in MinS and MaxS Type 50 in CO Type 60 in CO and immediately start your stopwatch Watch the PV When the PV starts to change stop your stopwatch Record this value It is the deadtime Multiply the deadtime by 4 This value approximates the natural period For example if deadtime 3 seconds then 4 x 3 12 seconds natural period Divide the value obtained in step 5 by 10 Use this value as the loop updated time For example if natural period 12 seconds then 12 10 1 2 seconds Therefore the value 120 would be entered as the loop update time 120 x 10 ms 1 2 seconds Enter the following values the initial setpoint SP value a reset T of 0 a rate Tg of 0 a gain K of 1 and the loop
334. e output data bits 0 through 6 or the sign bit 15 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 1 0 Configuration 31 e Hx Hold Last State bits When set 1 these bits indicate that the channel is in a Hold Last State condition Words 6 and 7 These words reflect the analog output data echo of the analog value being converted by the digital analog converter not necessarily the electrical state of the output terminals They do not reflect shorted or open outputs IMPORTANT Itis only important to use the loopback function of input words 6 and 7 if the controller supports the Program Mode or Fault Mode functions and if it is configured to use them 1769 IFAXOF2 Output Data File The output data file applies only to output data from the module as shown in the table below Bit Position 15 14 13 172131 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 SGN Analog Output Data Channel 0 0 0 JO JO JO SGN Analog Output Data Channel 1 9 Word c c c c c ce c IMPORTANT Bits 0 through 6 and Bit 15 of output data words 0 and 1 should always be set to zero in your control program If they are not set to 0 the invalid data flag Ex will be set for that channel However the channel will continue to operate with the previously converted value If a MVM Move with Mask instruction is used with a mask of 7F80 hexidecimal to move data to the output words writing to bits 0 through 6 and bit 15 can be avoided S
335. e queue is already filled 3 DN Asynchronous Done Bit is set when an instruction successfully completes its operation 4 EM Synchronous Done Bit not used 5 ER Error Bit when set indicates that an error occurred while executing the instruction 6 UL Unload Bit when this bit is set by the user the instruction does not execute If the instruction is already executing operation ceases If this bit is set while an instruction is executing any data already processed is sent to he destination and any remaining data is not processed Setting this bit will not cause instructions to be removed from the ASCII queue This bit is only examined when the instruction is ready to start executing 7 RN Running Bit when set indicates that the queued instruction is executing 8 FD Found Bit when set indicates that the instruction has found the end of line or termination character in the buffer only used by the ABL and ACB instructions Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 284 ASCII Instructions Addressing Control Files The addressing scheme for the control data file is shown below Format Explanation R Control file R e s b f File number The valid file number range is from 3 to 255 Element delimiter e Element number The valid element number range is from 0 to 255 Each element is 3 words in length as shown in Subelement delimiter S Subelement number The valid subelement number
336. e3 on off on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example 4 on off off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 5 on U off on off Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 6 f Clear accumulator 0 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care rising edge y falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used Using the Quadrature Encoder The Quadrature Encoder is used for determining direction of rotation and position for rotating such as a lathe The Bidirectional Counter counts the rotation of the Quadrature Encoder The figure below shows a quadrature encoder connected to inputs 0 1 and 2 The count direction is determined by the phase angle between A and B If A leads B the counter increments If B leads A the counter decrements Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 105 The counter can be reset using the Z input The Z outputs from the encoders typically provide one pulse per revolution o Input 0 A p Input 1 B Quadrature Encoder Input 2 Z Reset input Forward Rotation Reverse Rotation ry A Y Yd L B 1 2 3 2 1 i Count
337. each slave station address configured by the user in the poll list s in round robin fashion as soon as the end of the polling list is reached the master station immediately goes back and starts polling slave stations from the top of the polling list over again This is independent and asynchronous to any MSG instructions that might be triggered in the master station ladder logic In fact this polling continues even while the master station is in program mode When a MSG instruction is triggered while the master station is in run mode the master station will transmit the message packet just after it finishes polling the current slave station in the poll list and before it starts polling the next slave station in the poll list no matter where it currently is in the poll list If multiple MSG Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 430 Protocol Configuration Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 instructions have been triggered simultaneously at least four message packets may be sent out between two slave station polls Each of these messages will have an opportunity to complete when the master polls the slave station that was addressed in the message packet as it comes to it in the poll list If each of the transmitted message packets is addressed to a different slave station the order of completion will be based upon which slave station address comes up next in the poll list not the order in which the MSG instructions w
338. ead only The PWM ES Enable Status is controlled by the PWM sub system When the rung preceding the PWM instruction is solved true the PWM instruction is enabled and the enable status bit is set When the rung preceding the PWM instruction transitions to a false state the enable status bit is reset 0 immediately e Set 1 PWM is enabled Cleared 0 PWM has completed or the rung preceding the PWM is false Using High Speed Outputs 143 PWM Output Frequency OF Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access OF PWM Output Frequency PWM 0 O0F word INT Oto 20 000 control read write The PWM OF Output Frequency variable defines the frequency of the PWM function This frequency can be changed at any time PWM Operating Frequency Status OFS Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access OFS PWM Operating PWM 0 0FS word INT 0to 20 000 status read only Frequency Status The PWM OFS Output Frequency Status is generated by the PWM sub system and can be used in the control program to monitor the actual frequency produced by the PWM sub system PWM Duty Cycle DC Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access DC PWM Duty Cycle jPWM O DC word INT 1to 1000 control read write The PWM DC Duty Cycle va
339. ead write 99 LPR Low Preset Reached HSC 0 LPR bit 2to7 status read only 96 HPR High Preset Reached HSC 0 HPR bit 2to7 status read only 97 DIR Count Direction HSC 0 DIR bit Oto7 status read only 100 UF Underflow HSC 0 UF bit Oto7 status read write 97 OF Overflow HSC 0 O0F bit 0 to 7 status read write 99 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 90 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch High Speed Counter Function File HSC 0 or HSC 1 Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Function User Program For More Modes Access Information MD Mode Done HSC 0 MD bit 0 or 1 status read write 100 CD Count Down HSC 0 CD bit 2to7 status read only 101 CU Count Up HSC 0 CU bit 0 to 7 status read only 101 MOD HSC Mode HSC 0 MOD word INT 0to 7 control fread only 101 ACC Accumulator HSC 0 ACC long word 32 bit INT 0 to 7 control read write 106 HIP High Preset HSC 0 HIP long word 32 bit INT 0 to 7 control read write 106 LOP Low Preset HSC 0 LOP long word 32 bit INT 2to7 control read write 107 OVF Overflow HSC 0 0VF long word 32 bit INT 0to7 control read write 107 UNF Underflow HSC 0 UNF long word 32 bit INT 2to7 control read write 108 OMB Output Mask Bits HSC 0 0MB word 16 bit binary 0 to 7 control fread only 109 HPO High Preset Output HSC 0 HPO word 16 bit binary 0 to 7 control read write 110 LPO Low Preset Output HSC 0
340. ed the processor waits indefinitely for a reply If an acknowledge ACK is received indicated by the ST bit being set but the reply is not received the MSG instruction appears to be locked up although it is actually waiting for a reply from the target device Enable EN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 EN Binary On or Off Control Read Write The Enable Bit EN is set when rung conditions go true and the MSG is enabled The MSG is enabled when the command packet is built and put into one of the MSG buffers or the request is put in the MSG queue It remains set until the message transmission is completed and the rung goes false You may clear this bit when either the ER or DN bit is set in order to re trigger a MSG instruction with true rung conditions on the next scan IMPORTANT Do not set this bit from the control program Enabled and Waiting EW Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 EW Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Enabled and Waiting Bit EW is set after the enable bit is set and the message is in the buffer not in the queue and waiting to be sent The EW bit is cleared after the message has been sent and the processor receives acknowledgement ACK from the target device This is before the target device has processed the message and sent a reply Error ER Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG
341. efines the controller s operation controller A device such as a programmable controller used to control output devices controller overhead A portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping purposes memory checks tests communications etc control profile The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions counter A device that counts the occurrence of some event CPU Central Processing Unit The decision making and data storage section of a programmable controller data table The part of processor memory that contains I O status and files where user data such as bit integer timers and counters is monitored manipulated and changed for control purposes DIN rail Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus DIN standards a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting of your devices download The transfer of program or data files to a device Glossary 491 DTE Data Terminal Equipment EMI Electromagnetic interference embedded I O Embedded I O is the controller s on board I O For MicroLogix controllers embedded I O is all I O residing at slot 0 expansion I O Expansion I O is I O that is connected to the controller via a bus or cable MicroLogix 1200 controllers use Bulletin 1762 expansion I O MicroLogix 1500 controllers use Bulletin 1769 expansion I O For MicroLogix controllers embedded I O is all I O residing at slot 1 an
342. eing used as the destination processor Node 1 and the number 63 is entered into the above example all the outputs will be energized or turn If the number entered is greater then 63 then a fault may occur with an error stating that the extended I O bit S 0 8 was not set In this case clear the fault go offline set bit S 0 8 and re download the ladder program The above example uses the DF1 Full Duplex protocol This is a point to point or One Device to One Device protocol using this protocol no other devices can be connected To create a network of multiple processors or devices use the DH485 protocol and 1761 NET AIC devices TIP This example was written using a ML1500 communicating to a ML1000 however any DF1 or DH485 device could have been substituted for the ML1000 i e MicroLogix 1200 SLC 5 03 5 04 5 05 PLC 5 Bar Code Scanners etc 17653 Quick Start Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Knowledgebase Quick Starts 471 What is an Interrupt An interrupt is an event that causes the processor to suspend the task it is currently performing perform a different task and then return to the suspend task at the point where it suspended STI Definition The STI provides a mechanism to solve time critical control requirements The STI is a trigger mechanism that allows you to scan or solve control program logic that is time sensitive Example A Block of logic that needs to be scanned more often then the rest of the ladde
343. eld Memory Consumption Date 2 bytes Time 2 bytes N7 11 2 bytes L14 0 4 bytes T4 5 ACC 2 bytes 11 3 0 2 bytes B3 2 2 bytes Integrity Check 2 bytes Total 18 bytes In this example each record consumes 18 bytes So if one queue was configured the maximum number of records that could be stored would be 2730 The maximum number of records is calculated by Maximum Number of Records Data Log File Size Record Size 48K bytes 18 bytes 48 1024 18 2730 records Example Queue 5 Queue 5 Time v Delimiter TAB Time N7 11 11 3 0 11 2 1 Record 0 20 00 00 TAB 2315 TAB 8190 TAB 4465 Record 1 20 30 00 TAB 2400 TAB 8210 TAB 4375 Record 2 21 00 00 TAB 2215 TAB 8150 TAB 4335 Record 3 21 30 00 TAB 2380 TAB 8195 TAB 4360 Record 4 22 00 00 TAB 2293 TAB 8390 TAB 4375 Record 5 22 30 00 TAB 2301 TAB 8400 TAB 4405 Record 6 23 00 00 TAB 2308 TAB 8100 TAB 4395 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 367 String Length of Record The size of a record is limited so that the length of the maximum formatted string does not exceed 80 characters The following table can be used to determine the formatted string length Data Memory Consumed Formatted String Size delimiter 0 bytes 1 character word 2 bytes 6 characters long word 4 bytes 11
344. elow for data files 3 through 7 are the default filetypes for those file numbers and cannot be changed Data files 9 through 255 can be added to your program to operate as bit timer counter control integer string long word message or PID files ae er ee ee a IL 0 Output File HSC High Speed Counter 0 System File 0 0 Data Log Queue 0 1 Input File po Pulse Train Output 1 System File 1 1 Data Log Queue 1 2 Status File pw Pulse Width 2 Program File 2 2 to 255 Data Log Queues 2 to Modulation 255 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 44 Controller Memory and File Types Bit File Selectable Timed 3 to 255 Program Files 3 to 255 40 Recipe File 0 Interrupt 4 Timer File Ell Event Input Interrupt 1 Recipe File 1 5 Counter File RTC Real Time Clock 2 to 255 Recipe Files 2 to 255 6 Control File TPI Trim Pot Information 7 Integer File MMI Memory Module Information 8 Floating Point File par Data Access Tool 9 to 255 B Bit BHI Base Hardware Information T Timer CS Communications Status C Counter IOS I O Status 1 Asia Dis Data Log Status N Integer F Floating Point ST String L Long Word MG Message PD PID PLS Programmable Limit Switch 1 Specialty files for Data Logging are only used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP processor Specialty files for Recipes are only used by MicroLogix 1500 Series C processors 2 The PTO
345. emory module password mismatch status bit C 400 memory usage checking controller memory usage 2 47 MicroLogix 1200 instructions A 375 MicroLogix 1500 instructions B 381 MEQ 9 166 MEQ instruction 9 166 message Quick Start example F 468 message MG file 27 374 message errors 21 351 message instruction 21 313 message reply pending status bit C 406 messages local 21 324 local messaging examples 21 333 remote 21 346 messaging local DeviceNet message 21 338 remote station to remote station F 437 messaging overview 21 309 minor error bits C 399 MMI function file 3 60 mnemonic 1 493 Modbus definition 7 493 Modbus RTU protocol 447 Modbus to MicroLogix memory map F 452 E 453 E 454 E 455 mode behavior C 394 mode status C 391 modem 1 493 modes 1 494 monitoring controller operation fault recovery procedure D 414 MOV instruction 13 195 move instructions 13 195 MSG Quick Start example F 468 MSG instruction 21 313 error codes 21 351 ladder logic 21 323 local messaing examples 21 333 timing diagram 21 320 MUL instruction 70 175 multiply instruction 10 175 MVM instruction 13 197 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 504 Index NEG instruction 10 175 negate instruction 10 175 negative logic 1 494 NEQ instruction 9 164 network 1 494 node address status C 404 nominal input current 7 494 normally closed 1 494 normally open 1 494 not equal instruction 9 764 NOT instruction 12 194 0 OEM lock 2 53 OEM lock status bit C
346. en messages are sent Whenever I 1 0 is set and message MG11 0 is not enabled the message instruction on rung 0001 is enabled User Supplied Message Input Enable Bit I1 MG11 0 B3 0 0000 J IF cL 0 EN 0 The message instruction is enabled with each false to true transition of bit B3 0 0 B3 0 MSG 0001 JL Read Write Message MSG File MG11 0 Setup Screen Message Done Bit MG11 0 B3 0 0002 lE CU DN 0 Message Error Bit MG11 0 J E zip ER 0003 CEND gt Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 324 Communications Instructions Local Messages The controller is capable of communicating using local or remote messages With a local message all devices are accessible without a separate device acting as a bridge Different types of electrical interfaces may be required to connect to the network but the network is still classified as a local network Remote messages use a remote netwotk where devices are accessible only by passing or routing through a device to another network Remote networks are discussed on page 346 Local Networks The following three examples represent different types of local networks Example 1 Local DH 485 Network with AIC 1761 NET AIC Interface AIC AIC 0 le 4 le LJ 3 3 OOO Ooo ti d 0000 l EI z on U SLC 5 04 PanelView 550 DH 485 Network AI
347. ent in the EI sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set look at the specific error code in parameter EII 0 ER This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller Ell Edge Select ES Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ES Edge Select EII 0 ES binary bit control read only The ES Edge Select bit selects the type of trigger that causes an Event Interrupt This bit allows the EII to be configured for rising edge off to on 0 to 1 or falling edge on to off 1 to 0 signal detection This selection is based on the type of field device that is connected to the controller Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 252 Using Interrupts Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 The default condition is 1 which configures the EII for rising edge operation Ell Input Select IS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access IS Input Select EII 0 IS word INT control read only The IS Input Select parameter is used to configure each EII to a specific input on the controller Valid inputs are 0 to 7 which correspond to 11 0 0 0 to 11 0 0 7 This parameter is configured with the programming device and cannot be changed from the control program Using Interrupts 253 Notes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 254 Using Interr
348. er Address Data Format Type User Program Access S 60 ASCII A to ZZ status read only This register identifies the Catalog Number for the processor Processor Series Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 61 ASCII AtoZ status read only This register identifies the Series of the processor System Status File 411 Processor Revision Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 62 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the revision Boot FRN of the processor User Program Functionality Type Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 63 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the level of functionality of the user program in the controller Compiler Revision Build Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 64 low byte byte 0 to 255 status read only This register identifies the Build Number of the compiler which created the program in the controller Compiler Revision Release Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 64 high byte byte 0 to 255 status read only This register identifies the Release of the compiler which created the program in the controller Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014
349. er Simply place the SVC instruction on a rung within the control program When the rung is scanned the controller services any communications that need to take place You can place the SVC instruction on a rung without any preceding logic or you can condition the rung with a number of communications status bits The table on page 312 shows the available status file bits TIP The amount of communications servicing performed is controlled by the Communication Servicing Selection Bit CSS and Message Servicing Selection Bit MSS in the Channel 0 Communication Configuration File For best results place the SVC instruction in the middle of the control program You may not place an SVC instruction in a Fault DIL STI or I O Event subroutine Channel Select When using the SVC instruction you must select the channel to be serviced The channel select variable is a one word bit pattern that determines which channel is serviced Each bit corresponds to a specific channel For example bit 0 equals channel 0 When any bit is set 1 the corresponding channel 1s serviced Controller Channel Select Setting Channel s Serviced MicroLogix 1200 1 0 MicroLogix 1500 with 1764 LSP Processor 1 0 MicroLogix 1500 with 1764 LRP Processor 1 0 2 1 3 both 0 and 1 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 312 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Communication Status Bits The following comm
350. er at 0 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Double click on the Channel Status Icon Located beneath the Configuration icon to bring up the Channel Status screen Protocol Configuration 435 DF1 Half Duplex Master Channel Status Channel Status data is stored in the Communication Status Function File Viewing Channel Status Data for DF1 Half Duplex Master UNTITLED E t Project a Help Controller i Controller Properties Processor Status Function Files AM 10 Configuration Channel Status B E Program Files syso SYS1 LaD2 Data Files B Cross Reference E 00 output E n input El s2 status F co mame la xl E b Channel Configuration 3 Channel Status E Channel 1 Ini x DF1 Half Duplex Master Messages Sent 0 Messages Retried Messages Received fs Undelivered Messages D Duplicate Messages Received El Bad Packet No ACK Sent p Max Normal Poll List Scan 100ms D Max Priority Poll List Scan 100ms D Last Normal Poll List Scan 100ms Last Priority Poll List Scan 100ms fo Modem Lines RTS CTS Clear Communication Status Function DF1 Half Duplex Master Channel Status Status Field Status File Location Definition Messages Sent CSx 10 The total number of DF1 messages sent by the processor including message retries Messages Received
351. er of standard services with their corresponding parameters have been preconfigured for ease of use Expansion Comms Port 1 CIP Generic N7 0 1 5 Network Device 6 6 Read Assembl 70 112 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 344 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 If you need to use a service that is not available select one of the Genetic services The Generic service allows you to enter specific service code parameters Information on what services a target device supports is usually provided in the device s documentation MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 j CIP Generic Read Output Point Read Input Point Read Parameter Write Parameter Read Analog Input Write Analog Output Generic Get Attribute Single Generic Set Attribute Single Generic Get Member Generic Set Member Example 5 Configuring a Modbus Message This section describes how to configure a local message using the Modbus communication commands Since configuration options are dependent on which channel is selected the programming software has been designed to only show the options available for the selected channel Before configuring the MSG instruction open the Channel Configuration screen and set the Driver to Modbus RTU Master For more information on Channel Configuration see Modbus RTU Master Configuration on page 448 Communications Instructions 345 Message Setup
352. er scan provided the memory module is first recognized by the controller To be recognized by the controller the memory module must be installed prior to power up or when the controller is in a non executing mode If a memory module is installed when the controller is in an executing mode it is not recognized If a recognized memory module is removed during an executing mode this bit is cleared 0 at the end of the next ladder scan WP Write Protect When the WP Write Protect bit is set 1 the module is write protected and the user program and data within the memory module cannot be overwritten IMPORTANT Once the WP bit is set 1 it cannot be cleared Only set this bit if you want the contents of the memory module to become permanent Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 62 Function Files Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 FO Fault Override The FO Fault Override bit represents the status of the fault override setting of the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the FO bit without actually loading the program from the memory module IMPORTANT The memory module fault override selection in the Memory Module Information MMI file does not determine the controller s operation It merely displays the setting of the user program s Fault Override bit S 1 8 in the memory module See Fault Override At Power Up on page 392 for more information LPC Load Program Compar
353. er station polls the slave About Slave to Slave Messaging If one slave station has a message to send to anothet it simply includes the destination slave station s address in the message instruction s destination field in place of the master station s address when responding to a poll The master station checks the destination station address in every packet header it receives from any slave station If the address does not match the slave s own station address the entire message is forwarded back onto the telemetry network to the appropriate slave station without any further processing Addressing Tips Each station on the network including the master station must have a unique address The address range is 0 to 254 so you can have a maximum of 255 stations on a single telemetry network Station address 255 is the broadcast address which you cannot select as a station s individual address DF1 Half Duplex Master Standard Polling Mode With standard polling mode the master device initiates all communication by polling each slave address configured in the priority and normal polling ranges The slave device may only transmit message packets when it is polled by the master Based on a slave s inclusion in the priority and or normal poll ranges the master polls each slave on a regular and sequential basis to allow slave devices an opportunity to communicate During a polling sequence the master polls a slave either repeatedly until the
354. ere executed and transmitted When a slave station receives a poll packet from the master station if it has one or more message packets queued up to transmit either replies to a command received earlier or MSG commands triggered locally in ladder logic the slave station will transmit the first message packet in the transmit queue If the standard mode selection is singe message per poll scan then the master station will then go to the next station in the poll list If the standard mode selection is multiple messages per poll scan the master station will continue to poll this slave station until its transmit queue is empty The master station knows the slave station has no message packets queued up to transmit when the slave station responds to the master poll packet with a 2 byte poll response Every time a slave station responds or fails to respond to its poll packet the master station automatically updates its Active Node Table again even if it s in program mode In this list one bit is assigned to each possible slave station address 0 to 254 Ifa slave station does not respond when it is polled its Active Node Table bit is cleared If it does respond when it is polled its Active Node Table bit is set Besides being an excellent online troubleshooting tool two common uses of the Active Node Table are to report good bad communication status for all slave stations to an operator interface connected to the m
355. eries B and higher controllers Message File Target Location Information Target Device CIP Generic MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Series C FRN 6 and higher Processor only Sub Name Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 12 largetClass Y Word readonly 13 MG11 0 TFN Target Instance Y Word read write 14 MG11 0 ELE CIP Send Data Count Y Word read write 15 Reserved Y Word read only Message File Target Location Information Target Device Modbus Device MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Series C FRN 9 and higher Processor only Sub Name Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 12 starting bit address for coils Y Word read only and inputs 13 MG11 0 TFN Modbus Target Data Y Word read write Address 1 14 Reserved Y Word read write 15 Reserved Y Word read only Communications Instructions 317 The Control Bits Sub Element 16 of the MSG File Element are defined below Message File Sub Element 16 Control Bits Bit Address Description Parameter Size User Program Access 15 MG11 0 0 EN Enable N bit read write 1 MSG enabled 0 MSG not enabled 9 to 14 Reserved N bit read write 8 MG11 0 0 TO Time Out N bit read write 1 MSG time out by user O no user MSG time out 0to7 Reserved N bit read write The Status Bits Sub Element 17 of the MSG File Element are defined below Message Fi
356. ero Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ABS Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 3 8 US 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 3 1 us 0 0 us The ABS instruction takes the absolute value of the Source and places it in the Destination The data range for this instruction is 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 ot IEEE 754 floating point value Source and Destination do not have to be the same data type However if the signed result does not fit in Destination the following will occur ABS Result Does Not Fit in Destination When Both Operands Are Integers When At Least One Operand is Floating Point Data e f the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear a saturated result e The ABS instruction clears the sign bit No operation is 32767 for word or 2 147 836 647 for long word is stored in performed on the remaining bits the Destination e f Destination is an integer and Source is NAN or infinity a e f the Math Overflow Selection Bit isset the unsigned truncated saturated result 32767 for word or 2 147 836 647 for long value of the result is stored in the Destination word is stored in Destination and the Math Overflow Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Selection Bit is ignored e f Destination is an integer the rounded result is stored If an overflow occurs after rounding a saturated result 32767 for word or 2 147 836 647 for long word is stored in Destination and the Ma
357. error flag is also set 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if the source word is negative otherwise resets Changes to the Math Register Contains the 5 digit BCD result of the conversion This result is valid at overflow TIP To convert numbers larger than 9999 decimal the destination must be the Math Register S 13 You must reset the Minor Error Bit S 5 0 to prevent an error Example The integer value 9760 stored at N7 3 is converted to BCD and the BCD equivalent is stored in N7 0 The maximum BCD value is 9999 TOD 1 To BCD I scot Source N7 3 The destination value is 9760 lt displayed in BCD format Dest N10 0 9760 lt MSB LSB 9 7 6 O N73 Decimal 0010 0110 0010 0000 9 7 6 Q0 N70 4 digitBCD 1001 0111 0110 0000 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Conversion Instructions 189 GCD Gray Code Instruction Type output GCD Execution Time for the GCD Instructions Gray Code Soli 1 20 Controller When Rung Is 225 lt True False Dest Ye MicroLogix 1200 9 5 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 8 2 us 0 0 us The GCD instruction converts Gray code data Source to an integer value Destination If the Gray code input is negative high bit set the Destination is set to 32767 and the overflow flag is set Addressing Modes and File Types are shown in the following table GCD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and
358. erview 2 cc e a otatus Hile Details i 35 ev Rr ERR IDEE Ee Ex Appendix D Identifying Controller Faults ee a5 55 rrt dS ek was Contacting Rockwell Automation for Assistance Appendix E DH 485 Communication Protocol 0 00 eee DEL Full Duplex Protocol ass is ne dG eee er rs ydo DF1 Half Duplex PROLOGO 24 ecc Mek finde pp tec e DF1 Radio Modem Protocol n 0 00 ccc ccc ences Modbus RTU Protocol 2 0 ccc cee nen ASCITIfivetis15 educ Ree P AO Ua Table of Contents 11 Appendix F Knowledgebase Quick Starts 17583 Quick Start Pulse Train Output PTO F 459 17585 Quick Start Pulse Width Modulation PWM F 462 17586 Quick Start High Speed Counter HSC suus P 463 17605 Quick Start Message MSG s diwdiccts sonatas ena F 468 17653 Quick Start Selectable Timed Interrupt STI P 471 17655 Quick Start Real Time Clock RTC esses P 473 17657 Quick Start Trim Pots opin eh ss excl E Prog Vade P 475 17712 Quick Start User Interrupt Disable UID F 477 18689 Quick Start RTC Synchronization Between Controllers F 478 18728 Quick Start Data Logging DLG oa ke ecce tees F 481 Glossary Index MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 List of Instructions and Function Files Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 12 Table of Contents Notes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Who Should Use
359. erwise resets The math overflow bit S 5 0 is not set 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit always resets Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 184 Conversion Instructions FRD Convert from Binary Coded Decimal BCD FRD 4 From BCD L Source S 0 0000h Dest N7 0 0 lt Instruction Type output Execution Time for the FRD Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 14 1 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 12 3 us 0 0 us The FRD instruction is used to convert the Binary Coded Decimal BCD source value to an integer and place the result in the destination Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table FRD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode o Parameter E 8 2 E e S ec a _ 8 i Bis is 3 z S a in lo le jo j _ l E le l la la JE e 1S l 5S 8 5 o o la e lz ha B h E a E E Elas Fs la E S Elaz ls le Source e o o o o o e 2 Destination eje e e e eje 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 See FRD Instruction Source Operand on page 184 Publication
360. es or All files in order to locate your saved file The headings for each column are not stored in the data file these were added for readability Date Time N10 0 N10 1 N10 2 N10 3 N10 4 6 1 2000 8 00 00 5 10 15 20 25 5 1 2000 8 00 02 5 10 15 20 25 511 2000 8 00 05 5 10 15 20 25 6 1 2000 8 00 07 5 10 15 20 25 Each time the DLG instruction receives a false to true transition another entry is saved in the Data Logging queue The above data reflects that the DLG instruction was executed 5 times The above data also reflects that no data points had changed during each DLG execution Frequently Asked Questions Q1 Can I write my own software application to retrieve the data stored in the Data Logging queue A1 Yes In the MicroLogix 1200 1500 Instruction Set Reference manual under the Data Logging chapter all the information necessary to create your own software application for retrieving the data stored in the processors Data Logging queue is shown Knowledgebase Quick Starts 487 Q2 Can the MicroLogix 1500 LRP processor automatically send the information stored in the Data Logging queue directly to a printer A2 No To retrieve the data either the free Data Logging Utility software must be used or a custom application must be created by the user If the data does not need to be stored in the processor but sent directly to a printer then use the ASCII instructions of the MicroLogix processor to send out t
361. es are counted from left to right on each bank as shown in the illustrations below Vertical Orientation Embedded 1 0 Slot 0 D Expansion Expansion sr i9 Ss N IU E Horizontal Orientation Embedded 1 0 Slot 0 O gat iD s eo bg LO 5 Sis N N N ur d TRE L Vy LI Lp u Lp ty Expansion Expansion TIP In most cases you can use the following address format X s b X file type letter s slot number b bit number See I O Addressing on page 37 for complete information on address formats Expansion Power Supplies and Cables To use a MicroLogix 1500 controller with a 1769 Expansion I O Power Supply verify that you have the following MicroLogix 1500 Processor Catalog Number 1764 LSP FRN 3 and higher Catalog Number 1764 LRP FRN 4 and higher Operating System Version You can check the FRN by looking at word 8 59 Operating System FRN in the Status File Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 26 1 0 Configuration IMPORTANT If your
362. es to the TIMER PRESET OR timer preset or accumulator accumulated or preset word of a timer ACCUMULATOR make certain these values are not negative e Reload the program and enter the Run mode 0035 ILLEGAL The program contains a Temporary Non Recoverable e Correct the program INSTRUCTION IN End TND Refresh REF or Service Re ile reload th dent INTERRUPT FILE Communication instruction in an ee ied eee E interrupt subroutine STI Ell HSC or user fault routine 0036 INVALID PID An invalid value is being used fora Recoverable See page 253 Process Control Instruction for PARAMETER PID instruction parameter more information about the PID instruction 0037 HSC ERROR An error occurred in the HSC Recoverable See the Error Code in the HSC Function File configuration for the specific error 003B PTO ERROR An error occurred in the PTO Recoverable or See the Error Code in the PTO Function file for instruction configuration Non User the specific error 003C PWM ERROR An error occurred in the PWM Recoverable or See the Error Code in the PWM Function File instruction configuration Non User for the specific error 003D INVALID SEQUENCER A sequencer instruction SOO SQC Recoverable Correct the user program then re compile LENGTH POSITION SQL length position parameter is reload the program and enter the Run mode greater than 255 003E INVALID BIT SHIFT OR A BSR or BSL instruction length Recoverable Correct the user program or a
363. ess t 0 or 1 control read write JP Jog Pulse PTO 0 JP bi The PTO JP Jog Pulse bit is used to instruct the PTO sub system to generate a single pulse The width is defined by the Jog Frequency parameter in the PTO function file Jog Pulse operation is only possible under the following conditions e PTO sub system in idle Jog continuous not active Enable not active The JP bit operates as follows e Set 1 Instructs the PTO sub system to generate a single Jog Pulse Cleared 0 Arms the PTO Jog Pulse sub system PTO Jog Pulse Status JPS Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access JPS Jog Pulse Status PTO 0 JPS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO JPS Jog Pulse Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO has generated a Jog Pulse Using High Speed Outputs 135 The JPS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction outputs a Jog Pulse Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction exits the Jog Pulse state TIP The output jog pulse is normally complete with the JP bit set The JPS bit remains set until the JP bit is cleared 0 off PTO Jog Continuous JC Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access JC Jog Continuous PTO 0 JC bit 0 o
364. essage done DN p Message Transmitting ST o Message Enabled EN o Ignore if timed out TO o Eror Error Code Hex 0 Ignore if Timed Out TO Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 TO Binary On or Off Control Read Write The Timed Out Bit TO can be set in your application to remove an active message instruction from processor control You can create your own timeout routine by monitoring the EW and ST bits to start a timer When the timet times out you can set the TO bit which removes the message from the system The controller resets the TO bit the next time the associated MSG rung goes from false to true Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Communications Instructions 319 An easier method is to use the message timeout variable described on page 331 because it simplifies the user program This built in timeout control is in effect whenever the message timeout is non zero It defaults to 5 seconds so unless you change it the internal timeout control is automatically enabled When the internal timeout is used and communications are interrupted the MSG instruction will timeout and error after the set period of time expires This allows the control program to retry the same message or take other action if desired To disable the internal timeout control enter zero for the MSG instruction timeout parameter If communications are interrupt
365. eue for another instruction The controller bases its decision on the state of the channel s Communication Servicing Selection CSS and Message Servicing Selection MSS bits the network communication requests from other nodes and whether previous message instructions are already in progress If the controller determines that it should not access the queue the message instruction remains as it was Either the EN and EW bits remain set 1 or only the EN bit is set 1 until the next end of scan REF or SVC instruction If the controller determines that it has an instruction in the queue it unloads the communications queue entries into the message buffers until all four message buffers are full If an invalid message is unloaded from the communications queue the ER bit in the MG file is set 1 and a code is placed in the MG file to inform you of an error When a valid message instruction is loaded into a message buffer the EN and EW bits for this message are set 1 The controller then exits the end of scan REF or SVC portion of the scan The controller s background communication function sends the messages to the target nodes specified in the message instruction Depending on the state of the CSS and MSS bits you can service up to four active message instructions per channel at any given time 3 If the target node successfully receives the message it sends back an acknowledge ACK The ACK causes the processor to clear 0 the E
366. evet if the queue is empty the instruction executes immediately Upon execution the Run bit RN is set The controller determines the number of characters up to and including the termination characters and puts this value in the POS field of the control data file The Done bit DN is then set If a zero appears in the POS field no termination characters were found The Found bit FD is set if the POS field is set to a non zeto value Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 ACB Number of Characters in Buffer ACB _ Ascii Chars In Buffer Channel Control Characters Error 0 R6 1 2 lt 0 lt cCEN5 cDN gt CER gt ASCII Instructions 293 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ACB Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 84 2 us 11 0 us Use the ACB instruction to determine the number of characters in the buffer On a false to true transition the controller determines the total number of characters and records it in the POS field of the control data file The channel configuration must be set to ASCII Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 Control is the control data file See page 283 e Characters are the number
367. executes an Suspend SUS instruction the SUS code is written to this location S 7 This pinpoints the conditions in the application that caused the Suspend mode The controller does not clear this value Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting ot as runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors Suspend File Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 word 0 to 255 status read write When the controller executes an Suspend SUS instruction the SUS file is written to this location S 8 This pinpoints the conditions in the application that caused the Suspend mode The controller does not clear this value Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting ot as runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors Active Nodes Nodes 0 to 15 System Status File 403 Address Data Format Type User Program Access 9 word 0 to FFFF status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 27 See Active Node Table Block on page 78 for more information Active Nodes Nodes 16 to 31 Address Data Format Type User Program Access 10 word 0 to FFFF status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via
368. f the examples that can be used others include e File and Element Indirection N N10 0 N25 0 Input Slot Indirection I1 N7 0 0 Each group of instructions may or may not allow indirection Please review the compatibility table for each instruction to determine which elements within an instruction support indirection IMPORTANT You must exercise extreme care when using indirect addressing Always be aware of the possibility of crossing file boundaries or pointing to data that was not intended to be used Example Using Indirect Addressing to Duplicate Indexed Addressing In this section an indexed addressing example is shown first Then an equivalent indirect addressing example is shown Indexed addressing is supported by SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1000 programmable controllers The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 do not support indexed addressing This example is shown for comparison purposes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 86 Programming Instructions Overview Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Indexed Addressing Example The following ADD instruction uses an indexed address in the Source A and Destination addresses If the indexed offset value is 20 stored in 8 24 the controller uses the data stored at the base address plus the indexed offset to perform the operation Indexed ADD Working ADD Add L Add L Source A N7 0 Source A N7 20 Source B 25 Source B 2
369. ff 0 fon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example3 off 0 off 0 Jon 1 Reset accumulator to zero Example 4 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 5 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 6 off 0 Jon 1 Hold accumulator value Example 7 off 0 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 2 Count input A leads count input B 3 Count input B leads count input A Blank cells don t care ft rising edge y falling edge TIP Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used Accumulator ACC Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ACC Accumulator HSC 0 ACC long word 32 bit INT control read write Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 The ACC Accumulator contains the number of counts detected by the HSC sub system If either mode 0 or mode 1 is configured the value of the software accumulator is cleared 0 when a high preset is reached ot when an overflow condition is detected High Preset HIP Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access HIP High Preset HSC 0 HIP long word 32 bit INT control read write The HIP High Preset is the upper setpoint in counts that defines when the HSC sub system generates an interrupt To load data into the high preset the control program must do one of the following Using the High Speed
370. file Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the deceleration phase of the output profile PTO Run Status RS Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access RS Run Status PTO 0 RS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO RS Run Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The RS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is within the run phase of the output profile Using High Speed Outputs 127 Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the run phase of the output profile PTO Accelerating Status AS Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access AS Accelerating Status PTO O AS bi t Oor1 status read only The PTO AS Accelerating Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The AS bit operates as follows Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is within the acceleration phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the acceleration phase of the output profile PTO Ramp Profile RP Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access RP Ramp Profile PTO 0 RP lbi t 0 or1 control read writ
371. for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ys Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True wee I False True wide n ASCII String Search ASC 0 0 16 2 4 0 6 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply matching char ASCII String Compare ASR 0 0 9 2 4 0 1 8 matching char ASCII Write with Append AWA 14 1 268 12 char 3 4 ASCII Write AWT 14 1 268 12 char 3 4 Bit Shift Left BSL 1 3 32 1 3 word 3 8 Bit Shift Right BSR 1 3 32 1 3 word 3 8 Clear CLR 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 0 6 3 1 0 File Copy COP 0 0 19 0 8 word 2 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply Copy Word CPW 0 0 18 3 0 8 word Count Down CTD 9 0 9 0 24 Count Up CTU 92 9 0 24 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD 0 0 1 9 1 9 Divide DIV 0 0 12 2 2 0 0 0 42 8 3 5 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC 0 0 7 2 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Equal EQU 1 1 3 1 3 1 9 28 2 6 FIFO Load FFL 11 1 11 3 34 112 11 7 3 9 FIFO Unload FFU 10 4 33 0 8 word 13 4 10 4 36 1 5 long word 3 4 Fill File FLL 0 0 4 0 6 word 2 0 0 0 154 1 2 long word 2 5 Convert from BCD FRD 0 0 4 1 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Gray Code GCD 0 0 9 5 Greater Than or Equal To GEO 1 1 1 3 1 3 2 7 2 8 2 9 Greater Than GRT 1 1 3 1 3 2 7 2 8 2 4 High Speed Load HSL 0 0 46
372. fset is 32768 to 32767 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table SCL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 3 Ne Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 gt Mode Level P l E c o a Parameter Eig SiL a 5 e a n 59 T E T eia amp egps zmER LIm E5Ps3 5855 e lalak zla i Ea E io BSS 2 8 S a Eja S mm Su Source ele elele ele e Rate ele e eje ojojo e Offset ele e eje elele e Destination e eje ele 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files IMPORTANT Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Destination parameter in the SCL instruction SCP Scale with Parameters Instruction Type output SCP a e w Parameters ati Execution Time for the SCP Instruction nput d 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Input Min 7 0 lt True False Input Max jo MicroLogix 1200 word 31 5 us 0 0 us Scaled Min jn long word 522 us 0 0 us Scaled Max 74 MicroLogix 1500 word 21 0 us 0 0 us Output o long word 44 7 us 0 0 us 0 lt The
373. g Registers Read Input Registers Write Single Coil Write Single Holding Register Echo Command Data Clear Diagnostic Counters Write Multiple Coils gt CO CO MD OF By WY N Write Multiple Holding Registers 1 Broadcast is supported for this command Supported Modbus Commands as a Modbus RTU Master MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and higher Command Function Code Subfunction Code decimal decimal Read Coil Status 1 Read Input Status 2 Read Holding Registers 3 Read Input Registers 4 Write Single Coil 5 Write Single Holding Register 6 Write Multiple Coils 15 Write Multiple Holding Registers 16 1 Broadcast is supported for this command Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 454 Protocol Configuration Modbus Error Codes Upon receiving a Modbus command that is not supported or improperly formatted the controller configured for Modbus RTU Slave will respond with one of the exception codes listed below Modbus Error Codes Returned by Modbus RTU Slave MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors only Error Error Description J Wansmited Code Exception Code 0 No error none 1 Function Code cannot Broadcast The function does not support Broadcast nothing transmitted 2 Function Cod
374. gram Access UFI Underflow HSC 0 UFI bi Interrupt t 2to7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The UFI Underflow Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator counts through the underflow value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the underflow condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the underflow this bit is used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected Low Preset Interrupt executes High Preset Interrupt executes Overflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 99 Overflow OF Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access OF Overflow HSC 0 OF bi 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 t 0to7 status read write The OF Overflow status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC has counted through the overflow variable HSC 0 OFP This bit is transitional and is set by the HSC sub system It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear 0 the overflow condition Overflow cond
375. gram file subroutine when an input condition is detected from a field device Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 248 Using Interrupts Within the function file section of RSLogix 500 the user sees an EII folder Within the folder ate four EI elements Each of these elements EII 0 EII 1 EIE2 and EIE are identical this explanation uses EII 0 as shown below 3 Function Files HSC PTO sti_ Ell ER Error Code H UI User Interrupt Executing H UIE User Interrupt Enable H UIL User Interrupt Lost H UIP User Interrupt Fending LEIE Event Interrupt Enabled LAS Auto Start LED Error Detected LES Edge Select L 8 Input Select LE CE nrc BHi MMI bat y Lale BE Each ElI can be configured to monitor any one of the first eight inputs 11 0 0 0 to 11 0 0 7 Each EH can be configured to detect rising edge or falling edge input signals When the configured input signal is detected at the input terminal the controller immediately scans the configured subroutine Event Input Interrupt Ell Function File Sub Elements Summary Event Input Interrupt Function File Ell 0 Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program For More Access Information PFN Program File Number EII 0 PFN word INT control read only 249 ER Error Code EIl 0 ER word INT status read only 249 UIX User Interrupt Executing EII 0 UIX binary bit status read only 249 UIE
376. guration Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 1769 IQ6XOWA Output Image For each module the output data file contains the current state of the control program s directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 3 correspond to output terminals 0 through 3 bits 4 through 15 are not used Output Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 X X X X X X X X X X X X r w r W r w r w Word e co e c1 A Cc N e r w read and write x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1769 0A8 1769 0B8 1769 OW8 and 1769 0W81l Output Image For each module the output data file contains the current state of the control program s directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 7 correspond to output terminals 0 through 7 bits 8 through 15 are not used Output Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 X X X X X X X X r w Ir w r w Ir w Ir w rw Ir w r w Word e co e c1 A Cc N e r w read and write x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1769 0A16 1769 0B16 1769 OB16P 1769 OV16 and 1769 OW16 Output Image For each module the output data file contains the current state of the control program s directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 15 correspond to output terminals 0 through 15 Output Bit Position 15 14 13 122 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
377. h the switch Semiconductor switches and transient suppression components which are sometimes used to protect switches have a small current flow when they are in the Glossary 495 off state This current is referred to as the off state leakage current To ensure reliable operation the off state leakage current rating must be less than the minimum operating current rating of the device that is connected on delay time The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been presented at the input terminal of the controller one shot A programming technique that sets a bit ON or OFF for one program scan online When a device is scanning controlling or when a programming device is communicating with the controller operating voltage For inputs the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state For outputs the allowable range of user supplied voltage output device A device such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil that receives a signal or command from the controller output scan The controller turns on off or modifies the devices connected to the output terminals PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Commands processor A Central Processing Unit See CPU processor files The set of program and data files resident in the controller program file Areas within a processor that contain the logic programs MicroLogix controller
378. hannel Configuration screen The default append characters are carriage return and line feed Programming AWA Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions always precede the ASCII instruction with conditional logic that detects when new data needs to be sent or send data on a time interval If sent on a time interval use an interval of 0 5 second or greater Do not continuously generate streams of ASCII data out of a communications port IMPORTANT _ If ASCII write instructions execute continuously you may not be able to re establish communications with RSLogix 500 when the controller is placed into the RUN mode This instruction will execute on either a false or true rung However if you want to repeat this instruction the rung must go from false to true When using this instruction you can also perform in line indirection See page 305 for more information Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 L RP only you can select either Channel 0 or Channel 1 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 288 ASCII Instructions Source is the string element you want to write Control is the control data file See page 283 String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to write from the source string 0 to 82 If you enter a 0 the entire string is written This is wotd 1 in the cont
379. hannel and retry operation communications channel has been shut down via the channel configuration menu 8 0x08 The instruction cannot be executed because another ASCII Resend the transmission transmission is already in progress 9 0x09 Type of ASCII communications operation requested is not Reconfigure the channel and retry operation supported by the current channel configuration 10 0x0A The unload bit UL is set stopping instruction execution None required 11 0x0B The requested number of characters for the ASCII read was too Enter a valid string length and retry operation large or negative 12 0x0C The length of the Source string is invalid either a negative Enter a valid string length and retry operation number or a number greater than 82 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 ASCII Instructions 307 Error Code Description Recommended Action decimal hexadecimal 13 0x0D The requested length in the Control field is invalid either a Enter a valid length and retry operation negative number or a number greater than 82 14 0x0E Execution of an ACL instruction caused this instruction to abort None required 15 OxOF Communications channel configuration was changed while None required instruction was in progress ASCII Character Set The table below lists the decimal hexadecimal octal and ASCII conversions Standard ASCII Character Set Column 1 C
380. he Data Logging Enable EN is set 1 and the DLG instruction records the defined data set To addtess this bit in ladder logic use the format DLSO Q EN where Q is the queue number Data Logging Done DN The Data Logging Done DN bit is used to indicate when the associated queue is full This bit is set 1 by the DLG instruction when the queue becomes full This bit is cleared when a record is retrieved from the queue To address this bit in ladder logic use the format DLSO Q DN were Q is the queue number Data Logging Overflow OV The Data Logging Overflow OV bit is used to indicate when a record gets overwritten in the associated queue This bit is set 1 by the DLG instruction when a record is overwritten Once set the OV bit remains set until you clear 0 it To address this bit in ladder logic use the format DLSO0 Q OV where Q is the queue numbet File Size FSZ File Size FSZ shows the number of records that are allocated for this queue The numbet of records is set when the data log queue is configured FSZ can be used with RST to determine how full the queue is To address this word in ladder logic use the format DLSO0 Q FSZ where Q is the queue number Records Stored RST Records Stored RST specifies how many data sets are in the queue RST is decremented when a record is read from a communications device To address this word in ladder logic use the format DLSO Q RST where Q is the queue number
381. he HSC of a MicroLogix 1200 or 1500 To use the PLS function an HSC must first be configured PLS Data File Data files 9 to 255 can be used for PLS operations Each PLS data file can be up to 256 elements long Each element within a PLS file consumes 6 user words of memory The PLS data file is shown below 5 Data File PLS10 BEE 0 o000 0000 0000 0000 o000 0000 0000 0000 HJE PLS10 0 HIP Radim H Symbol Eaunes A Desc pesn Properties Usage Help Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 113 PLS Operation When the PLS function is enabled and the controller is in the run mode the HSC will count incoming pulses When the count reaches the first preset High HIP or Low LOP defined in the PLS file the output source data High OHD or Low OLD will be written through the HSC mask At that point the next preset High HIP or Low LOP defined in the PLS file becomes active When the HSC counts to that new preset the new output data is wtitten through the HSC mask This process continues until the last element within the PLS file is loaded At that point the active element within the PLS file is reset to zero This behavior is referred to as circular operation TIP The Output High Data OHD is only written when the High preset HIP is reached The Output Low Data OLD is written when the low preset is reached TIP Output High Data is only operational when the counter
382. he data Using the DATALOG Utility to retrieve data remotely via a Remote Access Modem Kit RAD For more information on Remote Access Modem Kits visit http support rockwellautomation com modem modem Main asp The following outlines the configuration and steps that can be used to read data log records from an MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP controller remotely via a 1747CHORAD Remote Access Modem Kit This example assumes that the programmet has configured the DLG instruction in the ML1500 to log data and that HyperTerminal is installed configured and the user is familiar with its use ESTABLISHING CONNECTIONS 1 Connect the modem to Channel 1 of the 1764 LRP 2 Configure Channel 1 9 Pin for DF1 Full Duplex 9600 baud no parity and full duplex modem handshaking This setting is critical as the system will not communicate if fu duplex modem handshaking isn t applied to the comms channel connected to the modem 3 Configure HyperTerminal for direct connection to the PC COMM port the modem is connected to Make sure the HyperTerminal connection is configured for 9600 baud 4 Save configuration as DataLog 5 Send the following dial out string using HyperTerminal to dial the modem and establish the connection Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2011 488 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 AT amp C1DT Phone number of destination Modem then press enter your modem will
383. he store amp forward table by clicking on Processor Status and then selecting the tab for the DF 1 Master channel Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 444 Protocol Configuration o Project H Help Eg Controller 15 xl EI Status 0 x a Ehan Double click on the Channel Status Icon Located beneath the Configuration icon to bring up the Channel Status screen E Program Files E C Data Files Example Store amp Forward Table 4Data File 52 STATUS ox Main Proc Scan Times Math Chan 0 Debug Errors Protection Mem DF1 Radio Modem Store And Forward Table Node 0 o olololo jojo o 32 Sjela Sls Sle Leele Sjelele eprele teres Od eere Seele oleje Eca gaada OCEA joyoyo ysl reprejels oj eel e ee S o eres joyoyo ys o etel opepreje Sjees erejreljs Lekeleke foyeoyeye rerejelms Sejas oq ere foyoye ye rerejeljae orejrels oj eje Radix Structured Y Help Properties i DF1 Radio Modem Channel Status Channel Status data is stored in the Communication Status Function File Viewing Channel Status for DF1 Radio Modem DF1 Radio Modem i Controller Properties Q Processor Status Function Files Au IO Configuration E be Channel Configuration Messages Sent 0 Undelivered Messages 0 Messages Received D Duplicate MessagesReceived 0 Lack ofMemoy D BadPacketsReceived
384. henever a PWM instruction is in an error state Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM instruction is not in an error state Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 142 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 PWM Normal Operation NS Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access NS PWM Normal Operation PWM 0 NS Ibit 0 or 1 status read only The PWM NS Normal Operation bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PWM is in its normal state A normal state is defined as ACCEL RUN or DECEL with no PWM errors e Set 1 Whenever a PWM instruction is in its normal state e Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM instruction is not in its normal state PWM Enable Hard Stop EH Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access EH PWM Enable Hard Stop PWM O EH bit 00r 1 control read write The PWM EH Enable Hard Stop bit stops the PWM sub system immediately A PWM hard stop generates a PWM sub system error e Set 1 Instructs the PWM sub system to stop its output modulation immediately output off 0 Cleared 0 Normal operation PWM Enable Status ES Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ES PWM Enable Status PWM 0O ES bit Oor1 status r
385. her it is a word ot byte offset MicroLogix controllers and SLC processors use word offset PLC 5 and ControlLogix processors use byte offset Modbus MB Data Address 1 65536 Modbus addressing is limited to 16 bits per memory group each with a range of 1 to 65 536 There are four memory groups one for each function coils generally addressed as Oxxxx contacts Ixxxx e input registers 2xxxx holding registers Axxxx Coils and contacts are addressed at the bit level Coils are outputs and can be read and written Contacts are inputs and are read only Input registers and holding registers are addressed at the word level Input registers are generally used for internally storing input values They are read only Holding registers are general purpose and can be both read and written The most significant digit of the address is considered a prefix and does not get entered into the MB Data Address field when configuring the message instruction Local Messaging Examples Communications Instructions 333 When the message is sent the address is decremented by 1 and converted into a 4 character hex number to be transmitted via the network with a range of 0 FFFEb the slave increments the address by 1 and selects the appropriate memory group based on the Modbus function TIP Modbus protocol may not be consistently implemented in all devices The Modbus specification calls for the addressing range to start at 1 however
386. his allows multiple steps or stages of acceleration or deceleration to occur PWM Error Code ER Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ER PWM Error Codes PWM 0 ER word INT 2 to 5 status read only PWM ER Error Codes detected by the PWM sub system are displayed in this register The table identifies known errors Error Non User Recoverable Instruction Error Description Code Fault Fault Errors Name 2 Yes No verlap An output overlap is detected Multiple functions are assigned to the same Error physical output This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute Example PWMO and PWM1 are both attempting to use a single output 1 Yes No Output An invalid output has been specified Output 2 and output 3are the only valid Error choices This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute 0 Normal Normal 0 no error present Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Using High Speed Outputs 145 No No Yes Hardstop This error is generated whenever a hardstop is detected This error does not Error fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the hardstop condition is removed No No Yes Output The configured PWM output 2 or 3 is currently forced The forced condition Forced must be removed for the PWM to operate This error does not fault the Error controller It
387. ight of this paragraph Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 14 Preface Rel ated Documentation The following documents contain additional information concerning Rockwell Automation products To obtain a copy contact your local Rockwell Automation office or distributor For Read this Document Document Number Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1200 Programmable MicroLogix 1200 Programmable 1762 INO06 Controller including a mounting template and door labels Controllers Installation Instructions Detailed information on planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting MicroLogix 1200 Programmable 1762 UM001 your MicroLogix 1200 system Controllers User Manual Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1500 Base Units MicroLogix 1500 Programmable 1764 IN001 including a mounting template for easy installation Controllers Base Unit Installation Instructions Detailed information on planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting MicroLogix 1500 Programmable 1764 UM001 your MicroLogix 1500 system Controllers User Manual A description on how to install and connect an AIC This manual also Advanced Interface Converter AIC User 1761 6 4 contains information on network wiring Manual Information on how to install configure and commission a DNI DeviceNet Interface User Manual 1761 6 5 Information on DF1 open protocol DF1 Protocol and Command Set 1770 6 5 16 Refere
388. ile 1o Type Programmable Limit S Y Name Desc Elements Attributes z Debug Programmable Limit Switch Skip When Deleting Unused M Scope Global Local To File z z Protection Constant C Static None Memory Module Download OK Cancel Help 4 Elements refers to the number of PLS steps For this example enter a value of 4 If more steps are required at a later time simply go to the properties for the PLS data file and increase the number of elements 5 Under Data Files PLS70 should appear as shown to the left Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 116 4 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 6 Double click on PL 570 under Data Files For this example enter the values as illustrated below 4 Data File PLS10 OLD Symbol 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 gt PLS10 0 HIP 3 Columns 4 v PLS Data File Definitions Data Description Data Format HIP High Preset 32 bit signed integer LOP Low Preset OHD Output High Data 16 bit binary OLD Output Low Data bit 15 gt 0000 0000 0000 0000 lt bit 0 Once the values above have been entered for HIP and OHD the PLS is configured Configuring the HSC for Use with the PLS 1 Under Controller double click on Function Files 2 F
389. ile destination must be a word size file If FIFO is a long wotd size file destination must be a long wotd size file Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 wotds Word 0 Bmw m eS not used Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the stack Word 2 Position the next available location where the instruction unloads data 1 EU Enable Unload Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates FIFO is empty Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word Position Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 word or 0 to 63 long word The position is decremented after each unload Data is unloaded at position zero Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table FFU Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 i 4 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level 2 Mode P E Parameter E 8 2 E e A
390. in the same program file Multiple JMP instructions may cause execution to proceed to the same label The immediate data range for the label is from 0 to 999 The label is local to a program file Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 224 Program Control Instructions LBL Label Instruction Type input 02 0 J1BL Execution Time for the LBL Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 11 0 us 1 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1 0 us 1 0 us The LBL instruction is used in conjunction with a jump JMP instruction to change the order of ladder execution Jumps cause program execution to go to the rung marked LBL abel number The immediate data range for the label is from 0 to 999 The label is local to a program file JSR Jump to Subroutine Instruction Type output JSR Jump To Subroutine Execution Time for the JSR Instruction SBR File Number U 255 Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 18 4 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 18 0 us 0 0 us The JSR instruction causes the controller to start executing a separate subroutine file within a ladder program JSR moves program execution to the designated subroutine SBR fie number After executing the SBR control proceeds to the instruction following the JSR instruction The immediate data range for the JSR file is from 3 to 255 SBR Subroutine Label Instruction Type input SBR
391. ination Characters Termination 1 INN Termination 2 ur Protocol Control Control Line Ho Handshaking Delete Mode CRT E ATS Off Delay 20 ms fo ATS Send Delay x20 ms fo The controller updates changes to the channel configuration at the next execution of a Service Communications SVC instruction I O Refresh REF instruction or when it performs Communications Servicing whichever comes first When the driver is set to ASCII the following parameters can be changed ASCII Channel Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and higher and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Parameter Description Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and higher Channel 0 0 1200 amp LSP MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Channel 0 or 1 0 or 1 LRP Driver ASCII Baud Rate Toggles between the communication rate of 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K and 38 4K 1200 Parity Toggles between None Odd and Even None Termination 1 Specifies the first termination character The termination character defines the one or two character Md sequence used to specify the end of an ASCII line received Setting the first ASCII termination character to undefined Mf indicates no ASCII receiver line termination is used Termination 2 Specifies the second termination character The termination character defines the one or two Mf character sequence used to specify
392. information Long Word File L 9 to 255 2 The Long Word File is a general purpose file consisting of 32 bit signed integer data words Message File MG 9 to 255 25 The Message File is associated with the MSG instruction See Communications Instructions on page 309 for information on the MSG instruction Programmable PLS 9 to 255 6 The Programmable Limit Switch PLS File allows you to configure the Limit Switch File High Speed Counter to operate as a PLS or rotary cam switch See Programmable Limit Switch PLS File on page 112 for information PID File PD 9 to 255 23 The PID File is associated with the PID instruction See Process Control Instruction on page 253 for more information 1 File Number in BOLD is the default Additional data files of that type can be configured using the remaining numbers Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Protecting Data Files During Download Controller Memory and File Types 49 Data File Download Protection Once a user program is in the controller there may be a need to update the ladder logic and download it to the controller without destroying user configured variables in one or more data files in the controller This situation can occur when an application needs to be updated but the data that is relevant to the installation needs to remain intact This capability is referred to as Data File Download Protection The protection feature operates when e A User Pr
393. ing the Done bit DN is set and the number of characters found is stored in the POS word of the control data file TIP For information on the timing of this instruction see thetiming diagram on page 305 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ASC Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FAN 3 or later 16 2 us 4 0 us matching character 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 113 4 us 3 5 us matching character 0 0 us Use the ASC instruction to search an existing string for an occurrence of the source string This instruction executes on a true rung Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source is the address of the string you want to find Index is the starting position from 1 to 82 within the search string An index of 1 indicates the left most character of the string e Search is the address of the string you want to examine Result is the location from 1 to 82 that the controller uses to store the position in the Search string where the Source string begins If no match is found result is set equal to zero ASCII Instructions 303 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ASC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address
394. ing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 m Address Data Files Function Files S 3 Address Level 2 Mode sS Parameter 8 2 E e s F a eo 2 Se S D pn E 3 E 2 2 m gw o _ jn e ls le S E o l jo lm le le lu b h IS A E IP IG E ie S lo E 8 le jaj la 2 a Si Operand Bit e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing OTE Output Energize B3 E 0 es Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output Execution Time for the OTE Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 1 4 us 1 1 us MicroLogix 1500 1 2 us 0 0 us Use an OTE instruction to turn a bit location on when rung conditions are evaluated as true and off when the rung is evaluated as false An example of a device that turns on or off is an output wired to a pilot light addressed as
395. ing to normal processing If an interrupt occuts while a higher priority interrupt is being serviced executed and the pending bit has been set for the lower priority interrupt the currently executing interrupt routine continues to completion Then the lower priority interrupt runs before returning to normal processing The priorities from highest to lowest are User Fault Routine highest priority Event Interrupt 0 Event Interrupt 1 High Speed Counter Interrupt 0 Event Interrupt 2 Event Interrupt 3 High Speed Counter Interrupt 1 MicroLogix 1500 only Selectable Timed Interrupt lowest priority Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 236 Using Interrupts Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Interrupt Latency Interrupt Latency is defined as the worst case amount of time elapsed from when an interrupt occurs to when the interrupt subroutine starts to execute The tables below show the interaction between an interrupt and the controller operating cycle Program Scan Activity When an Interrupt Can Occur Input Scan Between word updates Ladder Scan Start of Rung Output Scan Between word updates Communications Service Anytime 2 Housekeeping Anytime 1 Communications Services includes 80 us to get into a subroutine 2 Communication Service includes 60 us for a time tick To determine the interrupt latency 1 First determine the execution time for the l
396. instruction 11 187 changes to the math register 71 188 example 11 188 TOF instruction 8 156 TON instruction 8 755 TPI Quick Start example F 475 TPI function file 3 59 trim pots 3 60 error conditions 3 60 function file 3 59 Quick Start example F 475 troubleshooting D 414 D 421 automatically clearing faults D 413 contacting Allen Bradley for assistance D 421 identifying controller faults D 413 manually clearing faults D 414 using the fault routine D 414 true 1 498 U UID Quick Start example F 477 UID instruction 18 239 UIE instruction 78 240 UIF instruction 18 241 upload 1 498 user application mode status C 391 user fault routine creating a user fault routine 78 237 file number status C 405 major error detected status bit C 400 recoverable and non recoverable faults 18 236 user interrupt disable instruction 18 239 user interrupt enable instruction 18 240 user interrupt flush instruction 18 247 user memory 2 44 user program functionality type status C 411 W watchdog scan time C 397 write 1 498 Index 507 X XIC instruction 7 147 XIO instruction 7 147 XOR instruction 12 193 Z zero flag C 390 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 508 Index Notes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 List of Instructions and Function Files
397. instruction can be used as an output instruction to disable selected Interrupt Disable UID Once a user interrupt is disabled the User Interrupt Enable bit UIE for the selected interrupt will be cleared or reset to a zero 0 This stops the interrupt from executing To re enable an interrupt the UIE bit must be set to a one 1 or a UIE instruction must be used The following table indicates the types of interrupts disabled by the UID interrupt Element Decimal Value Corresponding Bit EN Event Input Inerupts een 9 JE EI Event Input interrupts JE HSC High Speed Counter bt4 EI Event Input Interrupts eim 8 JE Ell Event Input interrupts bit2 HSC High Speed Counter bi STI Selectable Timed Interrupts a a bito Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero To disable interrupt s follow these steps 1 Select which Interrupt s to disable from the above table 2 Locate the decimal value for each Interrupt s Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 478 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 18689 Quick Start RTC Synchronization Between Controllers Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 3 Add the decimal values together if more then one Interrupt was selected 4 Enter the sum into the UID instruction For example to disable EII Event 1 and EH Event 3 EII Event 1 32 EI Event 3 04 32 04 36 Enter this value in the UID instruction Notes on using Interrupt bits
398. int SPS Input Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access SPS Setpoint PD10 0 SPS word INT 0 to 16383 control read write 1 The range listed in the table is for when scaling is not enabled With scaling the range is from minimum scaled MINS to maximum scaled MAXS The SPS Setpoint is the desired control point of the process variable Process Variable PV Input Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access PV Process user defined word INT Oto 16383 control read write Variable The PV Process Variable is the analog input variable Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Process Control Instruction 257 Setpoint MAX MAXS Input Address Data Range Type User Parameter Format Program Descriptions Access MAXS Setpoint PD10 0 MAXS word 32 768 to 32 767 control read write Maximum INT If the SPV is read in engineering units then the MAXS Setpoint Maximum patameter corresponds to the value of the setpoint in engineering units when the control input is at its maximum value Setpoint MIN MINS InputParameter Address Data Range Type User Descriptions Format Program Access MINS Setpoint PD10 0 MINS word 32 768 to 432 767 control read write Minimum INT If the SPV is read in engineering units
399. ion Selectable Time Interrupt STI Function File Sub Elements Summary Selectable Timed Interrupt Function File STI 0 Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program For More Access Information PFN Program File Number STI 0 PFN word INT control read only 244 ER Error Code STI O ER word INT status read only 244 UIX User Interrupt Executing STI 0 UIX binary bit status read only 245 UIE User Interrupt Enable STI O UIE binary bit control read write 245 UIL User Interrupt Lost STEO UIL binary bit status read write 245 UIP User Interrupt Pending STI 0 UIP binary bit status read only 246 TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled STEO TIE binary bit control read write 246 AS Auto Start STI 0 AS binary bit control read only 246 ED Error Detected STI 0 ED binary bit status read only 247 SPM Set Point Msec STI 0 SPM word INT control read write 247 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 244 Using Interrupts STI Function File Sub Elements STI Program File Number PFN Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access PFN Program File Number STI 0 PFN word INT control read only The PFN Program File Number variable defines which subroutine is called executed when the timed interrupt times out A valid subroutine file is any program file 3 to 255 The subroutine file identified in the PFN varia
400. ion 1 0 Non User e Check expansion 1 0 terminator on last TERMINATOR terminator was removed O module REMOVED e Cycle power MicroLogix 1500 only xxg1 EXPANSION 1 0 The controller cannot communicate Non User e Check connections HARDWARE ERROR with an expansion 1 0 module e Check for a noise problem and be sure proper grounding practices are used e Replace the module e Cycle power 0083 MAX 1 0 CABLES The maximum number of expansion Non User e Reconfigure the expansion I O system so EXCEEDED 1 0 cables allowed was exceeded that it has an allowable number of cables e Cycle power Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 420 Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0084 MAX I 0 POWER The maximum number of expansion Non User e Reconfigure the expansion 1 0 system so SUPPLIES EXCEEDED 1 0 power supplies allowed was that it has the correct number of power exceeded supplies 0085 MAX I O MODULES The maximum number of expansion Non User e Reconfigure the expansion 1 0 system so EXCEEDED 1 0 modules allowed was exceeded that it has an allowable number of modules e Cycle power xxgg EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion I O module could not Non User e Change the baud rate in the user program MODULE BAUD RATE communicate at the baud rate 1 0 configuration and ERROR specified in the user program 1 0 e Re
401. ion Type output PID PID I Execution Time for the PID Instruction PID File PD8 0 Process Variable N7 0 Controller When Rung Is Control Variable N7 1 Setup Screen True False MicroLogix 1200 295 8 us 11 0 us MicroLogix 1500 251 8 us 8 9 us It is recommended that you place the PID instruction on a rung without any conditional logic If conditional logic exists the Control Variable output remains at its last value and the CVP CV term and integral term are both cleared when the rung is false TIP In order to stop and restart the PID instruction you need to create a false to true rung transition The example below shows a PID instruction on a rung with RSLogix 500 programming software B3 0 PID 0047 3t PID 0 PID File PD8 0 Process Variable N7 0 Control Variable N71 Setup Screen When programming the setup screen provides access to the PID instruction configuration parameters The illustration below shows the RSLogix 500 setup screen x m Tuning Parameters Inputs Flags Controller Gain Ke EM Scaled Set Point SPS tM o m Setpoint MAx Smax D M 0 Reset Ti oo es Setpoint MIN Smin 5 M o Rate Td L 0 P Variable PV Loop Update sai ales c SC Control Mode E SP PV m Output TF 0 PID Control AUTO Control Output CV U pa 0 Time Mode OutputMax CV z 0 DB 0
402. ion is used for embedded 1 0 only It is not designed to be used with expansion 0 Execution Time for the IIM Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 26 4 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 22 5 US 0 0 us The IIM instruction allows you to selectively update input data without waiting for the automatic input scan This instruction uses the following operands Slot This operand defines the location where data is obtained for updating the input file The location specifies the slot number and the word where data is to be obtained For example if slot I 0 input data from slot 0 starting at word 0 is masked and placed in input data file I 0 starting at word 0 for the specified length If slot 10 1 word 1 of slot 0 is used and so on IMPORTANT _ Slot 0 is the only valid slot number that can be used with this instruction IIM cannot be used with expansion 1 0 e Mask The mask is a hex constant or register address containing the mask value to be applied to the slot If a given bit position in the mask is a 1 the Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 230 Input and Output Instructions corresponding bit data from slot is passed to the input data file A 0 prohibits corresponding bit data in slot from being passed to the input data file The mask value can range from 0 to OxFFFF Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 le 5 4 3 2 M 0 Real
403. ion of the data to be loaded into the HSC accumulator The data range is from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 112 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Valid Addressing Modes and File Types are shown below RAC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 i p p Address Data Files Function Files Address Level 2 Mode 2 5 Parameter E s g T z o o c c e a a o S a Ils o zt cc a E n 1 ize 1 2 6 e T c E e g la 2 9 o Selig l amp a a 95 5 2 f a Ee F a gm uU zog c o ja IE ule io S la 2 1G je S la e 13 le la E la la S 8 la Counter Number Source elele Programmable Limit Switch PLS File Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 The Programmable Limit Switch function allows you to configure the High Speed Counter to operate as a PLS programmable limit switch or rotary cam switch When PLS operation is enabled the HSC High Speed Counter uses a PLS data file for limit cam positions Each limit cam position has corresponding data parameters that are used to set or clear physical outputs on the controller s base unit The PLS data file is illustrated below IMPORTANT ThePLS Function only operates in tandem with t
404. iption Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access t Oor1 control jread write PP Profile Parameter Select PWM 0 PP bi The PWM PP Profile Parameter Select selects which component of the waveform is modified during a ramp phase e Set 1 selects Frequency Cleared 0 selects Duty Cycle The PWM PP bit cannot be modified while the PWM output is running enabled See PWM ADD on page 144 for more information PWM Idle Status IS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type UserProgram Access IS PWM Idle Status PWM 0 IS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PWM IS Idle Status is controlled by the PWM sub system and represents no PWM activity It can be used in the control program by an input instruction Set 1 PWM sub system is in an idle state Cleared 0 PWM sub system is not in an idle state it is running PWM Error Detected ED Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access ED PWM Error Detection PWM O ED bit Dor 1 status read only The PWM ED Error Detected bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PWM instruction is in an error state If an error state is detected the specific error is identified in the error code register PWM 0 ED e Set 1 W
405. is 5 seconds 2 seconds for Modbus commands The maximum timeout value is 255 seconds If the message timeout is set to zero the message instruction will never timeout Set the Time Out bit TO 1 to flush a message instruction from its buffer if the destination device does not respond to the communications request Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 332 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Data Table Address Offset This variable defines the starting address in the target controller The data table address is used for a 500CPU and PLC5 type messages A valid address is any valid configured data file within the target device whose file type is recognized by the controller Valid combinations are shown below Message Type Local File Type Target File Type 500CPU and PLC5 0 1 B N FL 0 1 S B N FU L T T C C R R ATC N RTC 1 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series C and later and 1500 Series C and later only Message Type must be 500CPU or PLC5 The Local File Type and Target File Type must both be Floating Point 2 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later only The data table offset is used for 485CIF type messages A valid offset is any value in the range 0 to 255 and indicates the word or byte offset into the target s Common Interface File CIF The type of device determines whet
406. is automatically cleared when the force condition is removed Yes Yes No Frequency The frequency value is less than 0 or greater than 20 000 This error faults Error the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine Reserved Yes Yes No Duty Cycle The PWM duty cycle is either less than zero or greater than 1000 Error This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 146 Using High Speed Outputs Notes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 XIC Examine if Closed XI0 Examine if Open B3 0 ze B3 0 0 Chapter Relay Type Bit Instructions Use relay type bit instructions to monitor and or control bits in a data file or function file such as input bits or timer control word bits The following instructions are described in this chapter Tnstruction JUsedio Pag XIC Examine if Closed Examine a bit for an ON condition 147 XIO Examine if Open Examine a bit for an OFF condition 147 OTE Output Enable Turn ON or OFF a bit non retentive 148 OTL Output Latch Latch a bit ON retentive 149 OTU Output Unlatch Unlatch a bit OFF retentive 149 ONS One Shot Detect an OFF to ON transition 150 OSR One Shot Rising Detect an OFF to ON transition 151 OSF One Shot Falling Detect an ON to OFF transition 151 These instructions operate on a single bit of
407. is counting up Output Low Data is only operational when the counter is counting down If invalid data is loaded during operation an HSC error is generated within the HSC function file The error will not cause a controller fault If an invalid parameter is detected it will be skipped and the next parameter will be loaded for execution provided it is valid You can use the PLS in Up high Down low or both directions If your application only counts in one direction simply ignore the other parameters The PLS function can operate with all of the other HSC capabilities The ability to select which HSC events generate a user interrupt are not limited Publication 1762 RMO001H EN P July 2014 114 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Addressing PLS Files The addressing format for the PLS file is shown below Format Explanation PLSfe s PLS Programmable Limit Switch file f File number The valid file number range is from 9 to 255 Element delimiter e Element number The valid element number range is from 0 to 255 Sub Element delimiter S Sub Element number The valid sub element number range is from 0 to 5 Examples PLS10 2 PLS File 10 Element 2 PLS12 36 5 PLS File 12 Element 36 Sub Element 5 Output Low Source PLS Example Setting up the PLS File 1 Using RSLogix 500 create a new project give it a name and select the appropriate controller Select Proces
408. is for when the communica Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 ions servicing function is accessing a data file The time increases when accessing a function file MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 385 Indirect Addressing The following sections describe how indirect addressing affects the execution time of instructions in the Micrologix 1500 processor The timing for an indirect addtess is affected by the form of the indirect address For the address forms in the following table you can interchange the following file types Input I and Output O e Bit B Integer N e Timer T Counter C and Control R Execution Times for the Indirect Addresses For most types of instructions that contain an indirect address es look up the form of the indirect address in the table below and add that time to the execution time of the instruction indicates that an indirect reference is substituted MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Instruction Execution Time Using Indirect Addressing Address Operand Address Operand Address Operand Form Time ys Form Time ps Form Time ys du 48 T4 1 2 13 3 LETZTE 21 6 0 1 0 12 3 0 1 0 5 9 LEITI 21 9 o 12 4 0 1 VT 6 5 T4 DN 5 7 B3 48 0 0 14 1 T 1 DN 20 4 B 1 19 9 O1 1 14 5 T T ST DN 20 7 B E 20 1 B3 2 5 4 T4 ACC 2 6 4 L8 5 2 B 1 2 20 4 T
409. is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word File Instructions 207 Word 0 FIFO The FIFO operand is the starting address of the stack Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the stack Word 2 Position the next avai lable location where the instruction loads data 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates tha 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates FIFO is empty t the stack is full ransition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack to receive the value or constant found in the source The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word The position is incremented after each load Position This is the current location pointed to in the FIFO stack It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value ot constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 word or 0 to 63 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table FFL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the te
410. isplays the control variable as a percentage The range is 0 to 100 If the PD10 0 AM bit is off automatic mode CVP tracks the control variable CV output being calculated by the PID equation If the PD10 0 AM bit is on manual mode CVP tracks the value that can be manipulated in the Control Variable CV data word The only way for a programmer to have control of the PID CV is to place the PID instruction in manual mode and write to the CV word via the control program or Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 260 Process Control Instruction programming software If no change is made to CV while in manual mode the CVP will display the last value calculated by the PID equation Scaled Process Variable SPV Input Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access SPV Scaled Process Variable PD10 0 SPV word INT O to 16383 status read only The SPV Scaled Process Variable is the analog input variable If scaling is enabled the range is the minimum scaled value MinS to maximum scaled value MaxS If the SPV is configured to be read in engineering units then this parameter corresponds to the value of the process vatiable in engineering units See Analog I O Scaling on page 269 for more information on scaling Tuning Parameters The table below shows the tuning parameter addresses data formats and type
411. itions do not generate a controller fault Overflow Mask OFM Description Address Data Format Hsc Modes Type User Program Access OFM Overflow HSC 0 OFM bi Mask 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 t 0 to 7 control read write The OFM Overflow Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow an overflow interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and an overflow reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Overflow Interrupt OFI Description Address Data Format Hsc Modes Type User Program Access OFI Overflow HSC 0 OFI bi Interrupt t 0to7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The OFI Overflow Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator counts through the overflow value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the overflow variable caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the overflow this bit is used as conditional logic Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 100 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Using the High Speed Counter and
412. its 8 to 15 The data resident in TPI 0 POTO represents the position of trim pot 0 The data resident in TPI 0 POT1 corresponds to the position of trim pot 1 The valid data range for both is from 0 counterclockwise to 250 clockwise Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 60 Function Files Error Conditions If the controller detects a problem with either trim pot the last values read remain in the data location and an error code is put in the error code byte of the TPI file for whichever trim pot had the problem Once the controller can access the trim pot hardware the error code is cleared The error codes are described in the table below Trim Pot Error Codes Error Code Description 0 Trim pot data is valid 1 Trim pot subsystem detected but data is invalid 2 Trim pot subsystem did not initialize 3 Trim pot subsystem failure Memory Module The controller has a Memory Module Information MMI File which is updated with data from the attached memory module At power up or on detection of a Information Function memory module being inserted the catalog number series revision and type File memory module and or real time clock are identified and written to the MMI file in the user program If a memory module and or real time clock is not attached zeros are written to the MMI file The memory module function file programming screen is shown below 7 4 Function Files
413. ived oid Received N K Bad Packets Received LackofMemoy 0 Modem Lines RTS CTS DCD T Clear DF1 Half Duplex Master Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Channel 1 only Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 3 9 0 CTS 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD 4to15 Reserved 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 Total Message Packets Received 12 Undelivered Message Packets 13 Message Packets Retried 14 Reserved 15 Polls Sent 16 Bad Message Packets Received 17 No Buffer Space Received Packet Dropped 18 Duplicate Message Packets Received 19 Last Normal Poll List Scan 20 Max Normal Poll List Scan 21 Last Priority Poll List Scan 22 Max Priority Poll List Scan Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Function Files 73 amp 3Channel Status Channel 0 it DF1 Half Duplex Master Messages Sent p Messages Retried oid Messages Received D Undelivered Messages 0 PollsSent 0 Duplicate Messages Received n Lack of memoy p BadPacketsReceived 0 Last Normal Poll List Scan 100ms 0 Max Normal Poll List Scan 100ms 0 Last Priority Poll List Scan 100ms 0
414. j la 2 S la Storage Bit OSR One Shot Rising OSF One Shot Falling OSR One Shot Rising Storage Bit B3 0 0 Output Bit B3 0 1 OSF 1 One Shot Falling Storage Bit B3 0 0 Output Bit B3 0 1 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the OSR and OSF Instructions Controller OSR When Rung Is OSF When Rung Is True False True False MicroLogix 1200 3 4 us 3 0 us 2 8 US 3 7 US MicroLogix 1500 3 2 US 2 8 US 2 7 us 3 4 us Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 152 M Relay Type Bit Instructions TIP The OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 does not provide the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers For the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers use the ONS instruction Use the OSR and OSF instructions to trigger an event to occur one time These instructions trigger an event based on a change of rung state as follows e Use the OSR instruction when an event must start based on the false to true rising edge change of state of the rung e Use the OSF instruction when an event must start based on the true to false falling edge change of state of the rung These instructions use two parameters Storage Bit and Output Bit e Storage Bit This is the bi
415. king line received by the 1 x equals Channel number processor DF1 Radio Modem System Limitations The following questions need to be answered in order to determine if you can implement the new DF1 Radio Modem driver in your radio modem network 1 Are all of the devices MicroLogix 1200 or 1500 controllers or SLC 5 03 5 04 or 5 05 processors In order to be configured with the DF1 Radio Modem driver using RSLogix 6 0 or higher MicroLogix 1200 controllers must be at FRN 7 or higher and MicroLogix 1500 controllers must be at FRN 8 or higher SLC 5 03 5 04 or 5 05 processors must all be at FRN C 6 or higher in otder to be configured with the DF1 Radio Modem driver using RSLogix 500 version 5 50 or higher Does each node receive the radio transmissions of every other node being both within radio transmission reception range and on a common receiving frequency either via a Simplex radio mode or via a single common full duplex repeater If so then go to question 3 to see if you can use the DF1 Radio Modem driver to set up a peer to peer radio network If not then you may still be able to use the DF1 Radio Modem driver by configuring intermediary nodes as Store amp Forward nodes Do the radio modems handle full duplex data port buffering and radio transmission collision avoidance If so and the answer to 2 is yes as well then you can take full advantage of the peer to peer message initiation capabi
416. l Variable Output Level EA Detector pe Control Valve The PID equation controls the process by sending an output signal to the control valve The greater the error between the setpoint and process variable input the greater the output signal Alternately the smaller the error the smaller the output signal An additional value feed forward or bias can be added to the control output as an offset The PID result control variable drives the process variable towatd the set point Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 254 Process Control Instruction The PID Equation PD Data File instruction zet H55 Oy x Eg Projet x7 Help HE Controller m3 Program Files Data Fies Cross Reference OO OUTPUT conf INPUT Dp s2 STATUS wf Ba BINARY El T4 TIMER E cs COUNTER El R6 CONTROL INTEGER PD file created by RSLogix 500 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 The PID instruction uses the following algorithm Standard equation with dependent gains _ i d PV Output Kf 7 es Ty S bias Standard Gains constants ate Term Range Low to High Reference Controller Gain Ke 0 01 to 327 67 dimensionless Proportional Reset Term 1 T 327 67 to 0 01 minutes per repeat Integral Rate Term Tp 0 01 to 327 67 minutes Derivative 1 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 PID range when
417. l Source A N7 0 0 Source B N71 0 lt NEQ Not Equal Source A N7 0 0 Source B N71 0 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing 4 TheF file is valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series C and higher controllers only 5 Only use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for Source A in GRT LES GEQ and LEQ instructions IMPORTANT Youcannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files When at least one of the operands is a Floating Data Point value e For EQU GEQ GRT LEQ and LES If either Source is not a number NAN then rung state changes to false e For NEQ If either Source is not a number NAN then rung state remains true Instruction Type input Execution Time for the EQU and NEO Instructions Controller Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False Microogix1200 EAU wod i3us iius long word 28 us 1 9 us NEO word 1 3 us 1 1 us long word 2 5 US 2 7 US MicroLogix 1500 EQU word 1 2 us 1 1 us long word 2 6 us 1 9 us NEO word 1 2 us 1 1 us long word 23 us 2 5 us The EQU instruction is used to tes
418. l DeviceNet devices are compliant with CIP messaging The MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP processor Series C has an enhanced message instruction that provides simple easy to use CIP messaging Selecting CIP Generic configures the message instruction to communicate with DeviceNet devices that do not support PCCC messaging When CIP Generic is chosen you will notice that a number of message parameters change and many new ones become available depending upon the service selected MSG Rung 3 0 MG11 1 Expansion Comms Port CIP Generic Data Table Address Receive and Send This value identifies the data file location within the 1764 LRP controller that will receive data from the DeviceNet device and or the starting data file location that will be sent to the destination DeviceNet device Expansion Comms Port 1 CIP Generic N70 td 5 Network Device 0 0 Custom Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 342 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Size in Bytes Receive and Send Since all data transmitted on DeviceNet is byte based you must enter the number of bytes that will be received and sent You must make sure that enough memory is available in the destination device Word elements within 1764 LRP controllers contain 2 bytes each These include Bit and Integer data files Long word and Floating point elements contain 4 bytes each For receive the Size in
419. lace the result in the destination Truth Table for the NOT Instruction Destination A NOTB Source 1 1 11 1 11 10 11 10 0 10 JO JO 1 11 10 JO Destination O JO JO JO JO 1 JO 1 1 1 1 11 JO JO 1 1 Por more information see Using Logical Instructions on page 191 and Updates to Math Status Bits on page 192 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Chapter 13 Move Instructions The move instructions modify and move words Instruction Used to Page MOV Move Move the source value to the destination 195 MVM Masked Move Move data from a source location to a selected 197 portion of the destination MOV Move Instruction Type output MOV Move Execution Time for the MOV Instruction Source N7 0 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Dest N7 1 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 word 24 us 0 0 us long word 8 3 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 2 3 US 0 0 us long word 6 8 us 0 0 us The MOV instruction is used to move data from the source to the destination As long as the rung remains true the instruction moves the data each scan Using the MOV Instruction When using the MOV instruction observe the following e Source and Destination can be different data sizes The source is converted to the destination size when the instruction executes If the signed value of the Source does no
420. ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 28 See Active Node Table Block on page 78 for more information Math Register Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 13 word 32 768 to status read write 132 767 low byte 8 14 word 32 768 to status read write 432 767 high byte These two words are used in conjunction with the MUL DIV FRD and TOD math instructions The math register value is assessed upon execution of the instruction and remains valid until the next MUL DIV FRD or TOD instruction is executed in the user program Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 404 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 System Status File Node Address Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 15 low byte byte 0 to 255 status read only 1 This byte can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 5 0 through CSx 0 5 7 SeeGeneral Channel Status Block on page 67 for more information Baud Rate Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 15 high byte byte 0 to 255 status read only 1 This byte can only be accessed via
421. lation Error When S 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code S 6 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ACN Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FAN 3 or later 122 6 us 11 5 us character 0 0 is MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 17 9 us 10 2 us character 0 0 us The ACN instruction combines two ASCII strings The second string is appended to the first and the result stored in the destination Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 296 ASCII Instructions Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Source A is the first string in the concatenation procedure Source B is the second string in the concatenation procedure e Destination is where the result of Source A and B is stored Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ACN Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address iles Function Files Address Level Data Files 2 Mode l Parameter E 8 2 P z E lo ss es 9 ec amp a PF Z ls l8 s E a la lo lg le l _ l E Ie Ie le la la E le ls le 2 IE o l la e lz uw E E
422. le Queue 0 on page 365 Example Queue 5 on page 366 Retrieval Tools on page 373 e Information for Creating Your Own Application on page 373 The following reasons may help you chose which type of memory to use e The advantage to using User Program memory is that you can save the recipe data to the controller s memory module If you use Data Log Queue you cannot save the recipe data to the controller s memory module Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 360 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only The advantage to using Data Log Queue memory is that the recipe data will not consume User Program space If you are not using the data logging function choosing Data Log Queue memory allows you more memory up to 48K bytes for RCP files Yoz can use tbe Data Log Queue for data logging and recipe data but the total cannot exceed 48K bytes e If you choose to use the Data Log Queue for one RCP file all the RCP files in your project will also use the Data Log Queue memory space See step 2 Create a RCP File on page 361 for the recipe file procedure The RCP instruction uses the following parameters Recipe File Number this is the file number that identifies the custom list of addresses associated with a recipe Recipe Number specifies the number of the recipe to use If the recipe number is invalid a user fault code 0042 is generated e File Operation i
423. le Sub Element 17 Status Bits Bit Address Description Parameter Size User Program Access 15 Reserved N bit read only 14 MG11 0 0 ST Start N bit read only 1 MSG transmitted and acknowledged by target device 0 MSG has not been received by target 13 MG11 0 0 DN Done N bit read only 1 2 MSG completed successfully 0 MSG not complete 12 MG11 0 0 ER Error N bit read only error detected 0 no error detected 11 Reserved N bit read only 10 MG11 0 0 EW Enabled and Waiting N bit read only 1 MSG Enabled and Waiting 0 MSG not Enabled and Waiting Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 318 Communications Instructions Message File Sub Element 17 Status Bits Bit Address Description Parameter Size User Program Access 1to9 Reserved N bit read only 0 MG11 0 0 R For PCCC Messaging Y bit read only Range 1 Local 0 Remote For CIP Messaging Target 1 Comms Module 0 Network Device For Modbus Messaging Range 1 Local Control Bits Parameters 3 MSG Rung 2 0 MG11 0 0 xj General r This Controller Communication Command Data Table Address Size in Elements r Target Device Message Timeout Data Table Address Local Node Addr dec Local Remote r Error Description No errors SOOCPU Read N70 Channel FINI octal Control Bits Awaiting Execution EW p Error ER p M
424. least significant bit LSB 1 493 LED light emitting diode 1 493 LEQ instruction 9 165 LES instruction 9 165 less than instruction 9 165 less than or equal to instruction 9 165 LFL instruction 14 210 LFU instruction 14 212 LIFO Last In First Out 1 493 LIFO load instruction 14 210 LIFO unload instruction 14 212 LIM instruction 9 167 limit instruction 9 167 load memory module always bit C 393 load memory module on error or default program bit C 393 local messages 21 324 logic 1 493 logical instructions 12 191 logical NOT instruction 12 194 logical OR instruction 12 193 low byte 1 493 major error code status C 402 major error detected in user fault routine status bit C 400 major error halted status bit C 395 manuals related 1 14 mask compare for equal instruction 9 166 masked move instruction 13 197 master control relay MCR 1 493 master control reset instruction 16 226 math instructions 10 169 math overflow selection bit C 397 math register status C 403 maximum scan time status C 404 MCR instruction 16 226 memory 2 43 clearing controller memory 2 53 memory mapping MicroLogix 1200 1 0 1 17 MicroLogix 1500 Compact 1 0 1 26 memory module boot status bit C 400 memory module compare bit C 396 memory module information function file 3 60 fault override 3 62 functionality type 3 67 load always 3 62 load on error 3 62 Index 503 mode behavior 3 62 module present 3 67 program compare 3 62 write protect 3 67 m
425. lectable Timed Interrupt An interrupt must be configured and enabled to execute When any one of the interrupts is configured and enabled and subsequently occurs the user program 1 The MicroLogix 1200 has one HSC Interrupt HSCO The MicroLogix 1500 has two HSCO and HSC1 Publication 1762 RMO001H EN P July 2014 234 Using Interrupts Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 suspends its execution performs a defined task based upon which interrupt occurred returns to the suspended operation Interrupt Operation Example Program File 2 Program File 2 is the main control program fung Program File 10 Program File 10 is the interrupt routine rung 123 e An Interrupt Event occurs at rung 123 e Program File 10 is executed e Program File 2 execution resumes immediately after program file 10 is scanned rung 275 Specifically if the controller program is executing normally and an interrupt event occurs 1 2 the controller stops its normal execution determines which interrupt occurred goes immediately to rung 0 of the subroutine specified for that User Interrupt begins executing the User Interrupt subroutine or set of subroutines if the specified subroutine calls a subsequent subroutine completes the subroutine s resumes normal execution from the point where the controller program was interrupted When Can the Controller Operation be Interrupted The Micrologix 1200
426. lex data port buffering and radio transmission collision avoidance Like DF1 Half Duplex protocol up to 255 devices are supported with unique addresses from 0 to 254 A node ignores any packets received that have a destination address other than its own with the exception of broadcast packets A broadcast write command initiated by any DF1 radio modem node is executed by all of the other DF1 radio modem nodes that receive it No acknowledgement or reply is returned Unlike either DF1 Full Duplex or DF1 Half Duplex protocols DF1 Radio Modem protocol does not include ACKs NAKs ENQs or poll packets Data integrity is ensured by the CRC checksum Using the DF1 Radio Modem Using RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 or higher the DF1 Radio Modem driver can be configured as the system mode driver for Channel 0 in MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 or higher and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 or higher and for Channel 1 in MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 or higher Channel configuration appears as follows Figure shows Channel 0 configuration and Figure shows Channel 1 configuration options DF1 Radio Modem Channel 0 Configuration MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Channel Configuration x General Channel 0 Driver DF1 Radio Modem esset 1 decimal Baud 19200 Parity NONE Store and Forward File amp fo Protocol Control Control Line No Handshaking Error Detection CRC E Pre Transmit Delay 1 ms 0 Publicati
427. lity in every node i e the ladder logic in any node can trigger a MSG instruction to any other node at any time If not then you may still be able to use the DF1 Radio Modem driver Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 446 Protocol Configuration Modbus RTU Protocol Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 but only if you limit MSG instruction initiation to a single master node whose transmission can be received by every other node 4 Can I take advantage of the SLC 5 03 5 04 and 5 05 channel to channel passthru to remotely program the other SLC nodes using RSLinx and RSLogix 500 running on a PC connected to a local SLC processor via DH or Ethernet Yes with certain limitations imposed based on the radio modem network Refer to the SLC 500 Instruction Set Reference Manual publication number 1747 RMO001 for more passthru details and limitations when using the DF1 Radio Modem driver This section shows the configuration parameters for Modbus RTU Remote Terminal Unit transmission mode protocol For more information about the Modbus RTU protocol see the Modbus Protocol Specification available from http www modbus org The driver can be configured as Modbus RTU Master or Modbus RTU Slave The Modbus RTU Slave driver maps the four Modbus data types coils contacts input registers and holding registers into four binary and or integer data table files created by the user Modbus RTU Master TIP Mod
428. ller Data Size When Rung Is Source B N7 1 0000h True False Dest P RS MicroLogix 1200 word 3 0 us 0 0 us long word 9 9 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 2 3 us 0 0 us long word 8 9 us 0 0 us The XOR instruction performs a logical exclusive OR of two sources and places the result in the destination Truth Table for the XOR Instruction Destination A XOR B Source A 11111 1 11 10 1 10 10 JO 0 10 1 41 JO JO Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 194 Logical Instructions Truth Table for the XOR Instruction Source B 1 11 10 10 1 11 41 11 1 11 10 JO JO JO 1 11 Destination O JO 1 11 JO 1 JO 1 1 JO JO 1 1 1 11 IMPORTANT Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions Por more information see Using Logical Instructions on page 191 and Updates to Math Status Bits on page 192 NOT Logical NOT Instruction Type output NOT NOT Execution Time for the NOT Instruction Source N7 0 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Dest N7 1 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 word 24 us 0 0 us long word 92 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 24 us 0 0 us long word 8 1 us 0 0 us The NOT instruction is used to invert the source bit by bit one s complement and then p
429. llocate more LIFO FIFO parameter is greater than 2048 or an data file space using the memory map then PARAMETER FFU FFL LFU LFL instruction length reload and Run parameter is greater than 128 word file or greater than 64 double word file 003F COP CPW FLL A COP CPW or FLL instruction length Recoverable e Correct the program to ensure that the OUTSIDE OF DATA parameter references outside of the length and parameter do not point outside FILE SPACE entire data space of the data file space e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0042 INVALID RECIPE Number of Recipes specified is Recoverable e Correct the value for Number of Recipes NUMBER greater than 256 e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Fault Messages and Error Codes 419 Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0044 INVALID WRITE TO Write attempt to RTC function file Recoverable e Correct the invalid data RTC FUNCTION FILE failed This only occurs when e Re compile reload the program and enter attempting to write invalid data to the Run mode the RTC function file Examples of i invalid data are setting the Day of Week to zero or setting the Date to February 30th 0050 CONTROLLER TYPE A particular controller type was Non User e Connect to the hardware that is specified MISMATCH selected i
430. llowing the target node s reply the controller examines the message from the target device If the reply is successful the DN bit is set 1 and the ST bit is cleared 0 If it is a successful read request the data is written to the data table The message instruction function is complete If the reply is a failure with an error code the ER bit is set 1 and the ST bit is cleared 0 The message instruction function is complete 6 If the DN or ER bit is set 1 and the MSG rung is false the EN bit is cleared 0 the next time the message instruction is scanned See MSG Instruction Ladder Logic on page 323 for examples using the message instruction Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Communications Instructions 323 MSG Instruction Ladder Enabling the MSG Instruction for Continuous Operation Logic 0000 0001 0002 The message instruction is enabled during the initial processor program scan and each time the message completes For example when the DN or ER bit is set MSG o Read Write Message CEN gt MSG File MG11 0 DN gt Setup Screen I ER 5 Message Done Bit Message Enable Bit MG11 0 MG11 0 JE lt U gt MES m DN EN Message Error Bit MG11 0 jc IE ER CEND gt Enabling the MSG Instruction Via User Supplied Input This is an example of controlling when the message instruction operates Input I 1 0 could be any uset supplied bit to control wh
431. lock 69 Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 0 9 Total Message Packets Received 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 0 to 7 Message Packet Retries 8to15 Retry Limit Exceeded Non Delivery 12 0to7 INAK No Memories Sent 8to15 INAK No Memories Received 13 0to7 Total Bad Message Packets Received 8to15 Reserved 14 to 22 Reserved Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 70 Function Files ji iChannel Status ___ ol xl Channel 0 t DH 485 Total Bad Packets Received p Messages Received oid Messages Sent 0 MessagesRetied D 1 Retry Limit Exceeded bo Sent NAK NoMemory 0 Received NAK No Memory oid Active Nodes 0 10 20 30 0 0 010 0109 0 ololo olololo o olo lolololo olo o lolololololo o Clear DF1 Full Duplex Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 Length always 30 7 8 Format Code always 1 9 CTS RTS Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD 0 1 2 Reserved 3 4 to 15 Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Total Message Packets Received Undelivered Message Packets ENQuiry Packets Sent NAK Packets Received Bad Message Packets Received and NAKed No Buffer Space and
432. ly 2014 UIE User Interrupt Enable Interrupt Types Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UID Instruction Interrupt Element Decimal Corresponding Value Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 HSC High Speed Counter HSCI 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero 1 The MicroLogix 1200 has one HSC Interrupt HSCO The MicroLogix 1500 has two HSCO and HSC1 To disable interrupt s 1 Select which interrupts you want to disable 2 Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected 3 Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt 4 Enter the sum into the UID instruction For example to disable EH Event 1 and EII Event 3 EII Event 1 32 EI Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value Instruction Type output Execution Time for the UIE Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 0 8 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 10 8 us 0 0 us The UIE instruction is used to enable selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding enable bits Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UIE Instruction Interrupt Decimal Corresponding Value Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 UI
433. ly turn outputs on or off based on the low preset being reached The low output bit pattern can be configured during initial setup or while the controller is operating Use the HSL instruction or the SP bit to load the new parameters while the controller is operating Instruction Type output Controller Data Size Execution Time When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 46 7 us 0 0 us long word 47 3 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 39 7 us 0 0 us long word 40 3 us 0 0 us The HSL High Speed Load instruction allows the high and low presets and high and low output source to be applied to a high speed counter These parameters are described below Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 111 Counter Number Specifies which high speed counter is being used 0 HSCO and 1 HSC1 MicroLogix 1500 only High Preset Specifies the value in the high preset register The data ranges for the high preset are 32786 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Low Preset Specifies the value in the low preset register The data ranges for the low preset are 32786 to 32767 wotd and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Output High Source Specifies the value in the HPO high preset output register The data range for the output high source is from 0 to 65 535 Output Low Source Specifies the value in the LPO low preset output register The data range
434. m enden 18 238 UID User Interrupt Disable eek beer een 18 239 UIE User Interrupt Enable 4 ere Er ea 18 240 UIF User Int rrapt Flush ruo p oy anda vt PETER i el ad 18 241 Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File 18 242 Using the Event Input Interrupt ET Function File 18 247 Process Control Instruction ASCII Instructions Communications Instructions Table of Contents Chapter 19 The PID Conceptii o1 orsi oie ed etd Poe qe en cg 19 253 The PID EquaHofio cete D Iq eo OP IR CA D Qe RR 19 254 PD Date ute epe tarta actae cotes EE cap etre 19 254 PID Proportional Integral Derivative 00 00 00 eee 19 255 Input Parameters ta as tetra ee deant S Ot haste py aaa Ud 19 256 Output Parameters i oo suut ai i eee Grades oF ERN SE 19 259 qi ntio Pardmietetes eos ben ap eret te REA AU EU NE TON RI 19 260 Rantime E EtOfSo cvs o pice vata e boo oe Beo nee t E ete pr ER LIOS 19 268 Analog T O Scaling 2 e e pc t o eb b WC E DE 19 269 Application DOLOS Lehre CCS edo b ae a E AE 19 270 Application Examples 5 cess sical Di Rae d Feld ag ndr dicens 19 274 Chapter 20 General Information 124 e 4am adeard idea depen e dro nba 20 279 JUS COLI ISCO TS cs co tet ades b neo patties Mel oc o pd en PA 20 279 Instruction Types and Operation id exer 20 280 Protocol OVERVIEW aee Pod oe TRU pO Fa HF TERRES 20 281 Stans ST Data Miles ass tet4ii o Ud eX eib ee oa aA 20 282 Control Data Ple aeq eae Ba ned GL
435. m processor This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these functions In this implementation the user defines the total number of pulses to be generated which corresponds to distance traveled and how many pulses to use for each acceleration deceleration period The number of pulses not used in the acceleration deceleration period defines how many pulses are generated during the run phase In this implementation the acceleration deceleration intervals are the same TIP With MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 and higher the accelerate decelerate intervals are no longer required to be the same Independent values can now be defined for these intervals The ADI bit in the PTO function file is used to enable this feature See page 124 Within the PTO function file there are PTO element s An element can be set to control either output 2 O0 0 2 on 1762 L24BXB 1762 L40BXB and 1764 28BXB or output 3 O0 0 3 on 1764 28BXB only The interface to the PTO sub system is accomplished by scanning a PTO instruction in the main program file file number 2 or by scanning a PTO instruction in any of the subroutine files A typical operating sequence of a PTO instruction is as follows 1 The rung that a PTO instruction is on is solved true 2 The PTO instruction is started and pulses are produced based on the accelerate decelerate ACCEL parameters which define the number of A
436. m the output file IMPORTANT _ Slot 0 is the only valid slot number that can be used with this instruction IOM cannot be used with expansion I 0 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Input and Output Instructions 231 e Mask The mask is a hex constant or register address containing the mask value to be applied If a given bit position in the mask is a 1 the corresponding bit data is passed to the physical outputs A 0 prohibits corresponding bit data from being passed to the outputs The mask value can range from 0 to OxFFFF Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 Output Data Output Word Mask 0 JO I0 Jo l0 0 0 0 1 t 1 Real Outputs Data is Not Updated Updated to Match Output Word Length This is the number of masked words to transfer to the outputs Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below IOM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 i Address Data Files Function Files gt Mod Address Level 8 ode Parameter z E g ie T z Elo s S aS e e e amp ja S Je 8 S x i 9 o L T gt lE e g i e 2 J2 le z S l l a a 14 E IS Is e S Lr a e E f a a o aa E 2 o L v uw io S la le a o m a S la e 1S 2 a E j S a S S la Slot Mask e e
437. mOrDirWr Range12To15 3 HiLimOrDirWr 29 Range12To15 2 Type 30 n js n Range12To15 2 LoadDirectWrite Range12T015 3 LowLimit Range12T015 3 LowLimit B Range12To15 2 Invert 32 Out15 Out14 Out13 Out12 Out11 Out10 Out09 Out08 Out07 OutOG OutOS Out04 OutO3 Out02 Out01 Out00 Range12To15 3 OutputControl 0 15 33 Inv Low Type ToThisCtr eae Config US Range12T015 3 ToThisCounter 0 Range12T015 3 ToThisCounter 1 Range12T015 3 Type Range12To15 3 LoadDirectWrite Range12T015 3 Invert 1769 HSC High Speed Counter Module Input Array The information in the following table is a quick reference of the array Refer to the Compact I O High Speed Counter User Manual publication 1769 UM006 for detailed information The default value for the Input Array is all zeros 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description 0 zi B1 A1 Z0 B0 AO inputStateA0 InputStateZ1 1 Outi5 Outi4 Out13 Out12 Outil Out10 Out09 Out08 OutO7 Out06 Out 05 Out04 Out03 Out02 Out01 Out00 Readback 0 Readback 15 2 InvalidRangeLimit12 15 InvalidCtrAssignToRange12 15 GenErr InvOut MCfg Out Overcurrent Out3 Status Flags nvalidRangeLimit12 15 RangeActive 0 3 R15 R14 R13 R12 R11 R10 R09 R08 R07 R06 R05 R04 R03 R02 R01 R00 RangeActive 15 InvalidCtrAssignToRange12 15 4 Ctr 0 CurrentCount Ctr 0 CurrentCount GenError 6 InvalidOutput Ctr 0 StoredCount Ctr 0 StoredCount 1 ModConfig 8 Ctr 0 C
438. mat Type User Program Access 33 9 binary Oor1 status read write The controller changes the status of this bit at the end of each scan It is reset upon entry into an executing mode Last 100 Sec Scan Time Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 35 word 0 to 32 767 status read write This register indicates the elapsed time for the last program cycle of the controller in 100 us increments Data File Overwrite Protection Lost Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 336 10 binary 00r 1 status read write When clear 0 this bit indicates that at the time of the last program transfer to the controller protected data files in the controller were not overwritten or there were no protected data files in the program being downloaded When set 1 this bit indicates that data has been overwritten See User Program Transfer Requirements on page 50 for more information SeeSetting Download File Protection on page 49 for more information RTC Year Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 37 word 1998 to 2097 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 YR SeeReal Time Cl
439. mat ysc Modes Type User Program Access UF Underflow HSC 0 UF bi 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 t 0to7 status read write The UF Underflow status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC has counted through the underflow variable HSC 0 UNP This bit is transitional and is set by the HSC sub system It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear 0 the underflow condition Underflow conditions do not generate a controller fault Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 98 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Underflow Mask UFM Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UFM HSC 0 UFM bit 2to7 control read write Underflow Mask 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The UFM Underflow Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a underflow interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a Underflow Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Underflow Interrupt UFI Description Address Data Format ys Modes Type User Pro
440. mation circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence SHOCK HAZARD labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures PED IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation MicroLogix and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Firmware Revision History Firmware Upgrades New Information For This New Information Su
441. memory module passwords do not match the Memory Module Password Mismatch bit is set 1 SeePassword Protection on page 52 for mote information STI Lost Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 5 10 binary 00r 1 status read write 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 UIL SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 242 for more information Hetentive Data Lost MicroLogix 1200 only System Status File 401 Address Data Format Type User Program Access S 5 11 binary 00r 1 Status read write This bit is set 1 whenever retentive data is lost This bit remains set until you clear 0 it The controller validates retentive data at power up If user data is invalid the controller sets the Retentive Data Lost indicator The data in the controller are the values that were in the program when the program was last transferred to the controller If the Retentive Data Lost bit is set a fault occurs when entering an executing mode but only if the Fault Override bit S 1 8 is not set Processor Battery Low MicroLogix 1500 only Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 11 binary 0 or 1 status read only This bit is set 1 when the batter
442. ments of these functions The HSC is extremely versatile the user can select or configure each HSC for any one of eight 8 modes of operation Operating Modes are discussed later in this chapter See section HSC Mode MOD on page 101 Some of the enhanced capabilities of the High Speed Counters are e 20 kHz operation e High speed direct control of outputs e 32 bit signed integer data count range of 2 147 483 647 e Programmable High and Low presets and Overflow and Underflow setpoints e Automatic Interrupt processing based on accumulated count e Run time editable parameters from the user control program Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 89 The High Speed Counter function operates as described in the following diagram Overflow 2 147 483 647 maximum High Preset 1 Low Preset Underflow 2 147 483 648 minimum High Speed Counter Each HSC is comprised of 36 sub elements These sub elements are either bit Function File function or provide HSC status information for use within the control program Sub Elements Summary Each of the sub elements and their respective functions are described in this chapter A summary of the sub elements is provided in the following table All examples illustrate HSCO Terms and behavior for HSC1 are identical word or long word structures that are used to provide control over the HSC High Speed Counter Fun
443. message is local or remote Modbus messages are local only 1 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 2 485CIF write ST to 485CIF only 3 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only 500 Series B and later Example 1 Local Read from a 500CPU Message Instruction Setup za MSG Rung 2 34 MG11 0 This Controller r Control Bits Communication Command S00CPU Read Ignore if timed out TO Data Table Address hy7 0 a Awaiting Execution E pl Size in Elements 7 Channel g Error ER Message done DM Target Device Message Timeout 5 Message Transmitting ST Data Table Address N7 50 Message Enabled EN Local Node Addr dec 2 octal Local Remote Local r Error Eror Code Hex 0 No errors I Description In this example the controller reads 10 elements from the target s Local Node 2 N7 file starting at word N7 50 The 10 words are placed in the controller s integer file starting at word N7 0 If five seconds elapse before the message completes ertot bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the message timed out Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 336 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Valid File Type Combinations Valid transfers between file types are shown below for Micro
444. mit Alarm PD10 0 LL binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 266 SP Setpoint Out of Range PD10 0 SP binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 267 PV PV Out of Range PD10 0 PV binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 267 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Process Control Instruction 261 Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User For More Descriptions Program Information Access DN Done PD10 0 DN binary bit 0 or 1 status read only 267 EN Enable PD10 0 EN binary bit 0 or 1 status read only 267 IS Integral Sum PD10 0 1S long word 2 147 483 648 to status read write 268 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 AD Altered Derivative Term PD10 0 AD long word 2 147 483 648 to status read only 268 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 Controller Gain K Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access KC Controller Gain K PD10 0 KC word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write Gain K word 3 is the proportional gain ranging from 0 to 3276 7 when RG 0 ot 0 to 327 67 when RG 1 Set this gain to one half the value needed to cause the output to oscillate when the reset and rate terms below are set to zero TIP Controller gain is affected by the reset and gain range RG bit For information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 265 Reset Term T Tuning Parameter Address
445. mmary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes to this manual since the last printing as publication 1762 RM001F EN P October 2009 To help you locate new and updated information in this release of the manual we have included change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph Features ate added to the controllers through firmware upgrades See the latest release notes 1762 RN001 to be sure that your controller s firmware is at the level you need Firmware upgrades are not required except to allow you access to the new features See Firmware Upgrades for details Enhanced features are added to the controllers through a firmware upgrade This firmware upgrade is not required except to allow you access to the latest features To use the newest features be sure your controller s firmware is at the following level Programmable Firmware Revision Catalog Numbers Controller MicroLogix 1200 Series C Revision H FRN14 1762 L24AWA 1762 L24BWA 1762 L24BXB 762 L40AWA 1762 L40BWA 1762 LAOBXB 762 L24AWAR 1762 L24BWAR 762 L24BXBR 1762 L40AWAR 762 L40BWAR 1762 L40BXBR 764 LSP 1764 LRP processors l c MicroLogix 1500 Series C Revision D FRN14 To upgrade the firmware for a MicroLogix controller visit the MicroLogix web site at http www ab com micrologix To use all of the latest features RSLogix 500 programming software must be version 6 10 10 or higher The table
446. mple the SLC 5 04 on Link ID1 node 17 is the passthru device Passthru Link ID Set the Passthru Link ID in the General tab on the Channel Configuration screen The Link ID value is a user defined number between 1 and 65 535 All devices that can initiate remote messages and are connected to the local network must have the same number for this variable Channel Configuration x al i Chan 0 System System Driver DH495 User Driver Shutdown Memory Module Overwrite Protected Passthru Link ID dec 1 Edit Resource Owner Timeout x 1sec eo I Comms Servicing Selection M Message Servicing Selection Cancel Appl Help MSG Instruction Error When the processor detects an error during the transfer of message data the Codes processor sets the ER bit and enters an error code that you can monitor from your programming software Error Code Description of Error Condition 02H Target node is busy NAK No Memory retries by link layer exhausted 03H Target node cannot respond because message is too large 04H Target node cannot respond because it does not understand the command parameters OR the control block may have been inadvertently modified 05H Local processor is off line possible duplicate node situation 06H Target node cannot respond because requested function is not available 07H Target node does not respond 08H Target node cannot respond 09H Local modem connection has
447. n Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel O or Channel f Control is the control data file See page 283 Characters are the number of characters in the buffer that the controller finds 0 to 1024 This parameter is read only and resides in word 2 of the control data file Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 306 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ABL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level 2 Mode 7 l E c o T Parameter E 5s amp i SL ec a 72799 5 is m g la le lg le l l z E lz l k la la JE e 3 le l2 5 o m e jz uw a S a E 2 Elb je S s FS e la JE 6 2 e jz S fe Channel Control e e 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation When the rung goes from false to true the Enable bit EN is set The instruction is put in the ASCII instruction queue the Queue bit EU is set and program scan continues The instruction is then executed outside of the program scan How
448. n Note This value will not update while viewing online in RS Logix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values RTC Day of Week Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 53 word 0 to 6 status read only 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 DOW SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 56 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RS Logix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 410 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 System Status File OS Catalog Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 57 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the Catalog Number for the Operating System in the controller 0S Series Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 58 ASCII AtoZ status read only This register identifies the Series letter for the Operating System in the controller OS FRN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 59 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the FRN of the Operating System in the controller Processor Catalog Numb
449. n 14 206 FFU instruction 14 208 FIFO First In First Out 1 491 FIFO load instruction 14 206 FIFO unload instruction 14 208 file 1 497 file instructions 14 199 fill file instruction 14 201 filtering inputs 1 38 first scan status bit C 395 FLL instruction 14 201 forces enabled status bit C 392 forces installed status bit C 392 forcing inputs and outputs 1 38 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 502 Index FRD example 11 186 instruction 11 184 free running clock C 398 free running clock status C 398 full duplex 1 491 function files 3 55 base hardware information BHI 3 66 communications status CS file 3 66 DAT function file 3 63 event input interrupt Ell 78 247 high speed counter HSC 5 87 input output status file IOS 3 79 memory module information MMI 3 60 pulse train output PTO 6 123 pulse width modulation PWM 6 138 real time clock RTC 3 56 selectable timed interrupt STI 18 242 trim pot information TPI 3 59 future access status bit C 395 G GCD instruction 11 189 GEQ instruction 9 165 Gray code instruction 11 189 greater than instruction 9 165 greater than or equal to instruction 9 165 GRT instruction 9 165 H half duplex E 431 1 492 hard disk 1 492 high byte 1 492 high speed counter Quick Start example F 463 high speed counter function file 5 87 high speed counter load instruction 5 110 high speed outputs 6 119 housekeeping 1 492 HSC Quick Start example F 463 HSC functi
450. n 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 16 1 0 Configuration MicroLogix 1200 Expansion 1 0 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 AC embedded inputs have fixed input filters DC embedded inputs have configurable input filters for a number of special functions that can be used in your application These ate high speed counting event interrupts and latching inputs The 1764 28BXB has two high speed outputs for use as pulse train output PTO and or pulse width modulation PWM outputs The 1762 L24BXB and L40BXB each have one high speed output If the application requires more I O than the controller provides you can attach I O modules These additional modules are called expansion I O Expansion 1 0 Modules MicroLogix 1200 expansion I O Bulletin 1762 is used to provide discrete and analog inputs and outputs and specialty modules For the MicroLogix 1200 you can attach up to six additional I O modules The number of 1762 I O modules that can be attached to the MicroLogix 1200 is dependent on the amount of power required by the I O modules See the MicroLogix 1200 User Manual publication 1762 UM001 for more information on valid configurations TIP Visit the MicroLogix web site http Awww ab com micrologix for the MicroLogix 1200 Expansion 1 0 System Qualifier Addressing Expansion 1 0 Slots The figure below shows the addressing for the MicroLogix 1200 and its I O The expansion I O is addressed as slots 1 through 6 the c
451. n Used To Page PTO Pulse Train Output Generate stepper pulses 119 PWM Pulse Width Modulation Generate PWM output 137 IMPORTANT The PTO function can only be used with the controller s embedded 1 0 It cannot be used with expansion I O modules IMPORTANT The PTO instruction should only be used with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units Relay outputs are not capable of performing very high speed operations Instruction Type output Execution Time for the PTO Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1500 72 6 us 21 1 us The MicroLogix 1200 1762 L24BXB and 1762 L40BXB controllers each support one high speed output A MicroLogix 1500 controller utilizing a 1764 28BXB Base Unit supports two high speed outputs These outputs can be used as standard outputs not high speed or individually configured for PTO or PWM operation The PTO functionality allows a simple motion profile or pulse profile to be generated directly from the controller The pulse profile has three primary components Total number of pulses to be generated e Accelerate decelerate intervals e Run interval Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 120 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 The PTO instruction along with the HSC and PWM functions are different than most other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main syste
452. n address contains 32 767 word or 2 147 483 647 long word if the result is positive or 32 768 word or 2 147 483 648 long word if the result is negative To provide protection from inadvertent alteration of your selection program an unconditional OTL instruction at address S 2 14 to ensure the new math overflow operation Program an unconditional OTU instruction at address S 2 14 to ensure the original math overflow operation Watchdog Scan Time Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 3H Byte 2 to 255 control read write This byte value contains the number of 10 ms intervals allowed to occur during a program cycle The timing accuracy is from 10 ms to 0 ms This means that a value of 2 results in a timeout between 10 and 20 ms Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 398 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 System Status File If the program scan time value equals the watchdog value a watchdog major error is generated code 0022H Free Running Clock Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S4 binary 0 to FFFF status read write This register contains a free running counter This word is cleared 0 upon entering an executing mode Bits in status word 4 can be monitored by the user program The bits turn on and off at a particular rate cycle time The On Off times are identical and are added together to determine the
453. n element address BSL Bit Shift Left Load and unload data into a bit array one bitata 203 i BSR Bit Shift Right i 204 FFL First In First Out FIFO Load Load words into a file and unload them in the 206 der first in first out FFU First In First Out FIFO SEIQG KGGEATISEAISERUM 208 Unload LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load Load words into a file and unload them in reverse 210 der last in first out LFU Last In First Out LIFO order Vesti SEU 212 Unload SWP Swap Swap low byte with high byte in a specified 214 MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series B and higher controllers only number of words Instruction Type output Execution Time for the CPW Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Serres C and higher only 10 3us 0 8us word 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series C and higher only 15 8 us 0 7 us word 0 0 us The CPW instruction copies words of data in ascending order from one location Source to another Destination Although similar to the File Copy COP instruction the CPW instruction allows different source and destination parameters Examples include integer to long word long word to floating point long word to integer integer to PTO function file Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 200 File Instructions COP Copy File COP 4 CopyFile Source N7 0 Dest N7 1 Length 1
454. n length as shown in Subelement delimiter S Subelement number The valid subelement number range is from 0 to 41 You can also specify LEN for word 0 and DATA 0 through DATA 40 for words 1 to 41 The subelement represents a word address Examples ST9 2 ST17 1 LEN ST137 DATA 1 String File 9 Element 2 String File 17 Element 1 LEN Variable String File 13 Element 7 word 2 characters 2 and 3 Control Data File NOTE The RN bit is not addressable via the Control R file File Description The control data element is used by ASCII instructions to store control information required to operate the instruction The control data element for ASCII instructions includes status and control bits an error code byte and two character wotds as shown below ASCII Instructions Control Data File Elements Control Element Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 0 EN JEU DNE pM ERE JuL RNO pp 8 Error Code Byte 1 Number of characters specified to be sent or received LEN 2 Number of characters actually sent or received POS 1 EN Enable Bit indicates that an instruction is enabled due to a false to true transition This bit remains set until the instruction completes execution or generates an error 2 EU Queue Bit when set indicates that an ASCII instruction was placed in the ASCII queue This action is delayed if th
455. n the local controller Valid file types for the Data Table Address are shown below Message Read Message Write Bit B Output 0 Timer T Input I Counter C Bit B Control R Timer T Integer N Counter C Floating Point FJ Control R Long Word L Integer N Floating Point F Long Word L String ST 28 Real Time Clock RTC 4 1 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series C and later and 1500 Series C and later only Message Type must be 500CPU or PLC5 The Local File Type and Target File Type must both be Floating Point 2 3 4 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later only 485CIF write ST to 485CIF only 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 330 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 TIP Only Bit B and Integer N file types are valid for Modbus Command messages Modbus bit commands require a starting bit address for the Data Table Address Size in Elements This variable defines the amount of data in elements to exchange with the tatget device The maximum amount of data that can be transferred via a MSG instruction is 103 words 120 words for Modbus commands and is determined by the destination data type The destination data type is defined by the type of message read or write For Read Messages When a read message is used the destination file is the da
456. n the user program in the user program or configuration but did not match the e Reconfigure the program to match the actual controller type attached hardware 0051 BASE TYPE A particular hardware type AWA Non User e Connect to the hardware that is specified MISMATCH BWA BXB was selected in the user in the user program or program configuration but did no e Reconfigure the program to match the match the actual base attached hardware 0052 MINIMUM SERIES The hardware minimum series Non User e Connect to the hardware that is specified ERROR selected in the user program in the user program or configuration was greater than the e Reconfigure the program to match the series on the actual hardware attached hardware 0070 EXPANSION 1 0 The required expansion I O Non Recoverable e Check the expansion 1 0 terminator on TERMINATOR terminator was removed the last REMOVED 1 0 module l MicroLogix 1500 only S UE KONEI x1 EXPANSION 1 0 The controller cannot communicate Non Recoverable e Check connections HARDWARE ERROR with an expansion 1 0 module e Check for a noise problem and be sure proper grounding practices are used e Replace the module e Cycle power xg9 EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion I O module generated Non Recoverable e Refer to the 1 0 Module Status IOS file MODULE ERROR apu e Consult the documentation for your specific 1 0 module to determine possible causes of a module error 0080 EXPANSION 1 0 The required expans
457. n to take TIP For information on the timing of this instruction see the timing diagram on page 305 AWT ASCII Write Instruction Type output AWT al D A lt EN gt Execution Time for the AWT Instruction mad c m Controller When Instruction Is String Length 40 lt ER gt Characters Sent 0 True False Error d MicroLogix 1200 268 us 12 us character 14 1 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 237 us 10 6 us character 12 8 us Use the AWT instruction to write characters from a source string to an external device Programming AWT Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions always precede the ASCII instruction with conditional logic that either detects when new data needs to be sent or send data on a time interval If sent on a time interval use an interval of 0 5 second or greater IMPORTANT Do not continuously generate streams of ASCII data out of a communications port If ASCII write instructions execute continuously you may not be able to re establish communications with RSLogix 500 when the controller is placed into the RUN mode This instruction executes on a true rung Once started if the rung goes false the instruction continues to completion If you want to repeat this instruction the rung must transition from false to true Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 290 ASCII Instructions When using this instruction you can also perform in line indirection
458. nce Manual In depth information on grounding and wiring Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Programmable Controller 1770 4 1 programmable controllers Grounding and Wiring Guidelines A description of important differences between solid state programmable Application Considerations for SGI 1 1 controller products and hard wired electromechanical devices Solid State Controls An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment National Electrical Code Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary AG 7 1 Rockwell Automation Support Before you contact Rockwell Automation for technical assistance we suggest you please review the troubleshooting information contained in this publication first If the problem persists call your local distributor or contact Rockwell Automation in one of the following ways Phone United States Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States Canada You can access the phone number for your country via the Internet 1 Go to http Awww ab com 2 Click on Product Support http support automation rockwell com 3 Under Support Centers click on Contact Information Internet Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 1 Go to http www ab com 2 Click on Product Support http support automation rockwell com
459. nction Files Ioj x Hsc Pro PWM stTi Jen RTC oat re MMi alel ml E Pw H OUT Output RS Run Status IS Idle Status ED Error Detected Status H NS Normal Operation Status H EH Enable Hard Stop ES Enable Status follows rung state ER Error Code DF Output Frequency Hz OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz DC Duty Cycle e g 456 45 6 DCS Duty Cycle Status e g 456 45 6 e c urcrnccococcocococgrao e The following ladder logic will need to be entered into File 2 By toggling Bit B3 0 the PWM can be activated TIP Once activated the PWM will continueto generate a waveform until B3 0 is toggled OFF or the PWM 0 EH Enable Hard Stop bit has been activated 17586 Quick Start High General Information Speed Counter HSC The MicroLogix 1200 has one 20Khz high speed counter The counter has four dedicated inputs that are isolated from all other inputs on the unit The HSC can utilize inputs 0 through 3 Input device connection depends on the counter mode selected The MicroLogix 1200 uses a 32 bit signed integer for the HSC this allows for a count range of 2 147 483 647 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 464 Knowledgebase Quick Starts The MicroLogix 1500 has two 20Khz high speed counters Each counter has four dedicated inputs that are isolated from all other inputs on the base unit HSC 0 can utilize inputs 0 through 3 a
460. nd HSC 1 can utilize inputs 4 through 7 Input device connection depends on the counter mode selected Each counter is completely independent and isolated from the other The MicroLogix 1500 uses a 32 bit signed integer for the HSC this allows for a count range of 2 147 483 647 Getting Started Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 and select the HSC tab then select the next to HSC 0 See Below HSC Pro Pww sm Jen nrc oat TPI MMI t E HSC 0 H PFN Program File Number ER Error Code UIX User Interrupt Executing H UIE User Interrupt Enable H UIL User Interrupt Lost H UIP User Interrupt Pending H FE Function Enabled AS Auto Start H ED Error Detected DF Cantina F nahled 2 O0oO0oO0coococooox t Enter the following parameters for the Minimum Configuration required for the HSC to count pulses TIP There is no additional ladder logic required to enable the High Speed Counter In other words there is no HSC instruction needed for the ladder logic program HSC 0 PEN Program File Number defines which subroutine is executed when the HSC 0 accumulated count equals the High or Low preset or passes through Overflow or Underflow The Integer number entered must be a valid sub routine program file 3 to 255 HSC 0 AS Auto Start defines if the HSC function will automatically start when the MicroLogix enters run of test HSC 0 CE Counting Enabled control
461. nd PD10 0 CVL Control Variable Low A disabled 0 value disables OL Output Limiting Control Variable High Limit CVH Output Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access CVH Control PD10 0 CVH word INT Oto10096 control read write Variable High Limit When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is enabled 1 the CVH Control Value High you enter is the maximum output in percent that the control variable attains If the calculated CV exceeds the CVH the CV is set overridden to the CVH value you entered and the upper limit alarm bit UL is set When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is disabled 0 the CVH value you enter determines when the upper limit alarm bit UL is set If CV exceeds the maximum value the output is not overridden and the upper limit alarm bit UL 1s set Control Variable Low Limit CVL Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access CVL Control PD10 0 CVL word 0 to 100 control read write Variable Low Limit INT When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is enabled 1 the CVL Control Value Low you enter is the minimum output in percent that the Control Variable attains If the calculated CV is below the minimum value the CV is set overridden to the CVL value you entered and the lower limit alarm bit LL is set Process Control Instruction 259 When the
462. nd by length each recotd 1s 1 to 80 characters The length and the maximum number of records determine how much memory is used by the queue You can choose to have one large queue or multiple small queues Program Files 6 to 255 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 365 The memory used for data logging is independent of the rest of the processor memory and cannot be accessed by the User Program Each record is stored as the instruction is executed and is non volatile battery backed to prevent loss during power down Data Files Function Files Specialty Files 00 1 01 2 Q2 3 Q3 Q4 to 255 Example Queue 0 This queue is used to show how to calculate the string length of each record and maximum number of records Queue 0 Date v Time v Delimiter Date Time N7 11 L14 0 T4 5 ACC 11 3 0 B3 2 Record 01 10 2000 20 00 00 2315 103457 1200 8i90 4465 Record 01 10 2000 20 3000 2400 103456 1250 go 4375 Record2 01 10 2000 210000 2275 103455 225 eso 4335 Record3 01 10 2000 213000 2380 103455 223 e195 4360 Record 01 10 2000 220000 2293 103456 218 8390 4375 Records 01 10
463. nel Configuration menu as shown below Channel Configuration IM x General Channel 0 Driver Modbus RTU Master Baud 19200 h Parity NONE X Protocol Control Control Line DERMEE InterChar Timeout 1 mso RTS Off Delay x20 ms 0 RTS Send Delay x20 ms 0 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 Cancel amp pply Help The Baud defaults to 19200 The Control Line can be configured as No Handshaking Full Duplex Modem RTS on e Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS handshaking The Protocol Control defaults are No Handshaking e InterChar Timeout 0 Pre Transmit Delay 0 When the system driver is Modbus RTU Master the following communication port parameters can be changed Modbus RTU Master Communications Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and higher Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogx 1200 FAN 8 and higher Channel O OLI200NLSP MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and higher Channel 0 or 1 0 or 1 LRP Driver Modbus RTU Master Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even odd none Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Protocol Configuration 449 Modbus RTU Master Communications Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and higher Parameter ptions Programming Software Default Control Line No Handshaki
464. ng e Source A N7 e Source B T4 ACC Destination N ADD Instruction Times e ADD Instruction 2 7 us e Source A 5 8 us e Source B 6 5 Us e Destination 24 5 Us Total 36 5 us Execution Time Example Bit Instruction Using an Indirect Address XIC B3 e XIC 0 9 Us 5 8 us 6 7 Us True case e XIC 0 9 Us 5 8 us 6 7 us False case Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 380 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1200 Scan Calculate the scan time for your control program using the worksheet below Time Worksheet Input Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion I 0 is used 55 us Expansion Input Words X 10 us or X 14 us if Forcing is used Number of modules with Input words X 80 us Input Scan Sub Total Program Scan Add execution times of all instructions in your program when executed true Program Scan Sub Total Output Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion 1 0 used 30 us Expansion Output Words X 3 us or X 7 us if Forcing is used Output Scan Sub Total Communications Overhead Worst Case 1470 us Typical Case 530 us any other device Use this number if the communications port is configured but not communicating to 200 us Use this number if the communications port is in Shutdown mode Ous Communications Overhead Sub Total
465. ng Full Duplex Modem RTS on Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS handshaking No Handshaking Inter character Timeout x1 ms 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 3 5 character times Specifies the minimum delay between characters that indicates the end of a message packet 0 RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 x20 ms Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 x20 ms Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from receive to transmit mode When the Control Line is set to Ha f Duplex Modem or Full Duplex Modem this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion Modbus RTU Slave Configuration The Modbus configuration screen and configuration procedure are shown below Channel Configuration j General Channel Channel 1
466. ng extract 20 296 ascii string manipulation error C 401 ASCII string search instruction 20 302 ASCII string to integer instruction 20 294 ASCII test buffer for line instruction 20 291 ASCII timing diagram 20 305 ASCII write instruction 20 289 ASCII write with append instruction 20 287 ASR instruction 20 304 AWA and AWT timing diagram 20 305 AWA instruction 20 287 AWT instruction 20 289 base hardware information file 3 66 battery life expectancy 3 58 operation 3 58 battery low status bit C 401 baud rate 1 489 baud rate status C 404 BHI Function File 3 66 bit 1 489 bit instructions 7 147 bit shift left instruction 14 203 bit shift right instruction 14 204 bit wise AND instruction 12 192 block diagrams 1 489 Boolean operators 1 489 branch 1 490 BSL instruction 14 203 BSR instruction 14 204 C carry flag C 390 catalog number status C 410 channel 0 communications status C 405 CSO communications status file 3 66 channel configuration DF1 full duplex parameters F 426 DF1 half duplex parameters F 433 F 438 Publication 1762 RMO001H EN P July 2014 500 Index DF1 radio modem parameters E 441 E 442 DH485 parameters F 424 Modbus RTU Master parameters F 449 Modbus RTU Slave parameters F 450 E 451 clear instruction 10 176 clearing controller faults D 413 controller memory 2 53 clock free running C 398 CLR instruction 10 176 common techniques used in this manual 1 13 communication instructions 27 309 communication pro
467. ng from a field device wired toan input on the controller the on and off duration of the incoming signal must not be more than twice the controller scan time assuming 5096 duty cyde This condition is needed to enable the counter to detect false to true transitions from the incoming device RES Reset Instruction Type output R6 0 C RES gt Execution Time for the RES Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 15 9 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 14 8 us 0 0 us The RES instruction resets timers counters and control elements When the RES instruction is executed it resets the data defined by the RES instruction The RES instruction has no effect when the rung state is false The following table shows which elements are modified RES Instruction Operation When using a RES instruction with a Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Timer Element Counter Element Control Element The controller resets the The controller resets the The controller resets the ACC value to 0 ACC value to 0 POS value to 0 DN bit OV bit EN bit TT bit UN bit EU bit EN bit DN bit DN bit CU bit EM bit CD bit ER bit UL bit Timer and Counter Instructions 161 Because the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and status bits do not use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF instruction If the TOF accumulated value and status bits are reset unpredictable machine ope
468. ng length of Source A or Source B exceeds 82 characters the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 is set and the rung goes false Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 ASCII Instructions 305 Timing Diagram for ARD ARL AWA and AWT Instructions Rung Condition ON OFF 4 Enable Bit EN ON OFF Queue Bit EU ON OFF 14 Running Bit RN ON TT OFF Done Bit Error Bit ON DN or ER OFF 1 2 6 34 5 1 5 2 6 3 4 NOTE The RN bit is not addressable 1 rung goes true via the Control R file 2 instruction successfully queued 3 instruction execution complete 4 instruction scanned for the first time after execution is complete 5 rung goes false 6 instruction execution starts Using In line Indirection This allows you to insert integer and long word values into ASCII strings The Running bit RN must be set before the string value can be used The following conditions apply to performing in line indirection e All valid integer N and long word L files can be used Valid range is from 3 to 255 File types are not case sensitive and can include either a colon or semicolon Positive value symbol and leading zeros are not printed Negative values ate printed with a leading minus sign Commas ate not inserted where they would normally appear in numbers greater than one thousand Publication 1762 R
469. nge for length is from 0 to 2048 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table BSR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 AE Address Data Files Function Files Address Level gt Mode P Parameter E 8 2 E e S E t ec ex p 3 is E v E e g la e 2 2 j k lz 2 li l a a 3 JE e Is Je Is le ls Il cdm j Z ja 6 la e 2 kou Ei a 6 S ja E la m z S ja File e e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length Source e e e e e e e e e 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 206 File Instructions FFL First In First Out FIFO Load Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Instruction Type output FFL Pd Load iu I EN2 Execution Time for the FFL Instruction ource bis n RUN Controller Data Size When Rung Is ontro A Length 1 lt CEM 5 True False P
470. nging Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 88 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 HSC pto sm jen atc gM ww par tr Address L PFN Program File Number b ER Error Code Ub User Interrupt Executing UIE User Interrupt Enable UIL User Interrupt Lost UIP User Interrupt Pending FE Function Enabled AS Auto Start ED Error Detected CE Counting Enabled SP Set Parameters LPM Low Preset Mask HPM High Preset Mask LIFM Undertow Mask OFM Overflow Mask LFI Low Preset Interrupt HFI High Preset Interrupt UFI Underflow Interrupt OF Overflow Interrupt LPR Low Preset Reached HFF High Preset Reached DIR Count Direction LIF Underflow DF Overflow MD Mode Done CD Count Down CU Count Up MOD HSC Mode ACC Accumulator HIP High Preset 2147483647 LOP Low Preset 2147483648 OVE Overtlow 2147483547 UNF Underflow 2147483648 OMB Qutput Mask Bits HPO High Preset Output LPO Low Preset Output VLLL E E E E E E z E E E E E E L E E E E E E E E E L E E E L E E E E E E The HSC function along with the PTO and PWM instructions are different than most other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor This is necessary because of the high performance require
471. nly 13 MG11 0 TFN Y Word read write 14 MG11 0 ELE Y Word read write 15 Y Word read only 16 Control bits See Control Bits table on page 317 for details N 16 bits read write 17 Status bits and Range parameter See table on page 317 for details Mixed 16 bits read only 18 MG11 0 ERR Error code See Error Codes on page 351 N Word read only 19 Time since message started in seconds N Word read only 20 Reserved Word read only 21 Internal message start time in seconds N Word fread only 22 Enhanced error information The low byte is the same as element 18 N Word read only ERR The high byte contains an additional error code For comms module messaging the high byte contains the actual error code returned by the comms module when ERR is OxEO For Modbus Master the high byte contains the non standard Modbus exception reply returned by the slave when ERR is 0x89 Codesreturned with other errors are for internal use only 23 Only used for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Series C and higher Extended Status Error Code from expansion I O communications module 24 Only used for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Series C and higher Supplemental Routing Path Data Address bits 7 to 0 Starting Element bits 15 to 8 File Number 1 User access refers to user pi ogram access MSG File word or bit used as an operand for an instruction in a ladder program or access via Comms while in any mode other than download via Programming Software o
472. nnel 1 Configuration MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP channel Configuration xi General Channel Channel 1 Diver DFtRadoModem v Mede amp ddess gag isco 1 decimal Pari NONE v ibi Store and Forward File amp 0 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Protocol Control Control Line Hat Duplex Modem with DCD handshakir Error Detection CRC RTS Off Delay x20ms 0 RTS Send Delay x20 ms DCD Wait Delay x1 Sec Pre Transmit Delay 1 ms 0 Protocol Configuration 441 When the system driver is DF1 Radio Modem the following parameters can be changed for Channel 1 DF1 Radio Modem Channel 1 Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Channel 1 only Driver DF1 Radio Modem Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 255 is reserved for broadcast Store and Forward Store and Forward allows messages between two out of radio range nodes to be routed through 0 File Number one or more in radio range nodes This is the starting address for the Store amp Forward Table Control Line No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking Half Duplex Modem with DCD No Handshaking Handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments onl
473. nput image is normally on 1 and changes to off 0 for one scan Falling Edge Behavior Example 1 Scan Number X Scan Number X1 Scan Number X 2 Scan Number X 3 Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan External Input 3 Latched Status Input File Value I Falling Edge Behavior Example 2 Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X 2 Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan External Input Latched Status 1l Input File Value TIP The gray area of the Latched Status waveform is the input filter delay IMPORTANT The input file value does not represent the external input when the input is configured for latching behavior When configured for falling edge behavior the input file value is normally on off for 1 scan when a falling edge pulse is detected Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 42 0 Configuration Configuring Exp ansion Expansion O must be configured for use with the controller Configuring ion I O can be done either manually or automatically Using RSLogix 500 1 0 Using RSLogix 500 1 Open the Controller folder 2 Open the
474. ns The input instructions are evaluated by the controller as being true or false In turn the controller sets the output instructions to true or false instruction set The set of instructions available within a controller I O Input and Output Glossary 493 jump Changes the normal sequence of program execution In ladder programs a JUMP MP instruction causes execution to jump to a specific rung in the user program ladder logic A graphical programming format resembling a ladder like diagram The ladder logic programing language is the most common programmable controller language least significant bit LSB The element or bit in a binary word that carries the smallest value of weight LED Light Emitting Diode Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and outputs LIFO Last In First Out The order that data is stored and retrieved from a file low byte Bits 0 to 7 of a wotd logic A general term for digital circuits or programmed instructions to perform required decision making and computational functions Master Control Relay MCR A hard wired relay that can be de enetgized by any series connected emergency stop switch mnemonic A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a complex or lengthy set of information Modbus RTU Slave A half duplex serial communication protocol modem Modulator demodulator Equipment that connects data terminal equipment to a comm
475. ntact your local Rockwell Automation 1500 controller representative if the error persists 0022 WATCHDOG TIMER The program scan time exceeded the Non Recoverable e Determine if the program is caught in a EXPIRED SEE S 3 watchdog timeout value S 3H loop and correct the problem e Increase the watchdog timeout value in the status file 0023 STI ERROR An error occurred in the STI Recoverable See the Error Code in the STI Function File for configuration the specific error 0028 INVALID OR e A fault routine number was Non User e Fither clear the fault routine file number NONEXISTENT USER entered in the status file S 29 in the status file or FAULT ROUTINE number 8 29 but either the e create a fault routine for the file number VALUE fault routine was not physically reference in the status file S 29 The file created or number must be greater than 2 and less e the fault routine number was than 256 less than 3 or greater than 255 0029 INSTRUCTION An indirect address reference in the Recoverable Correct the program to ensure that there are INDIRECTION ladder program is outside of the no indirect references outside data file space OUTSIDE OF DATA entire data file space SPACE Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 002E Ell ERROR An error occurred in the Ell Recoverable See the Error Code in the Ell Function File for configuration the specific error 0030 SUBROUTINE The JSR instruction nesting level Non User Correct the user
476. nter 62 Function Code 2 Message Counter 63 Function Code 3 Message Counter 64 Function Code 4 Message Counter 65 Function Code 5 Message Counter 66 Function Code 6 Message Counter 67 Function Code 8 Message Counter 68 Function Code 15 Message Counter 69 Function Code 16 Message Counter ix Channel 0 Channel 1 Modbus ATU Slave Messages Sent 0 Messages Received This Slave oid Messages Received n Link Layer EnorCount n Link Layer Eror Code 0 Modem Lines RTS CTS Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 76 Function Files Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Modbus RTU Master Diagnostic Counters Block Data Link Layer MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 9 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 9 and higher Word Bit Description 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 9 9 0 CTS 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD 4to15 Reserved 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 Reserved 12 Total Message Packets Received 13 Link Layer Error Count 14 Link Layer Error Code 15 to 22 Reserved Modbus RTU Master Diagnostic Counters Block Presentation Layer MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 9 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 9 and higher Word Bit Description 52 Diagnostic Counters Ca
477. ntroller uses a Data File MG to process the message instruction All message elements are accessed using the MG prefix example MSG done bit MG11 0 DN Continuous Message Example The following example illustrates how by using the MSG Done DN and Error ER bits to unlatch the Enable EN bit the MSG instruction can be configured for continuous execution This example uses MG11 0 for the MSG file and will require two MicroLogix controllers one a ML1500 and the other either a ML1000 or ML1500 The ML1500 will need to be configured as Node 1 and the other processor as node 4 Knowledgebase Quick Starts 469 The processor at node 1 will contain the ladder logic below and transfer data from it s N7 0 Integer file to the processor at node 4 s N7 0 Integer file Since N7 0 is the source file for this example data must be entered into this register for node 1 For this example Locate N7 0 in the ML1500 Node 1 and enter the value 63 MicroLogix 1500 MicroLogix 1000 Node 1 Node 4 Micrologix 1500 Node 1 Ladder Logic 0000 MG11 0 DN MG11 0 EN 0001 D MG11 0 ER MSG Setup Screen MSG MG11 0 1 Elements SODCPU Write NM Micrologix 1000 Node 4 Ladder Logic No ladder logic is required in the destination processor however the communications channel must be configured to match the source processor Since the default settings for the ML1500 communications channel is DF1 protocol 19 200 Kbaud the ML1000 m
478. ock Function File on page 56 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RS Logix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 408 System Status File RTC Month Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 38 word to 12 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 MON SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 56 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RS Logix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values RTC Day of Month Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 39 word 1 to 31 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 DAY SeeReal Time Clock Function File on page 56 for more information Note This value will not update while viewing online in RS Logix 500 Monitor address in function file to see online values RTC Hours Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 40 word 0 to 23 status read only
479. odules MicroLogix 1200 1 17 I O images for expansion modules MicroLogix 1500 1 26 input I 2 48 input and output addressing examples 1 37 integer N 2 48 long word L 2 48 message MG file 21 314 organization and addressing 20 282 output 0 2 48 PID PD 19 254 programmable limit switch PLS 5 112 protecting data files 2 49 status S file C 389 string ST file 20 282 timer T 8 153 data logging 22 364 22 370 Quick Start example F 481 data table 1 490 DCD instruction 11 182 decode 4 to 1 of 16 instruction 17 782 Defaults Output Array 1 33 DeviceNet network configuration 21 338 DF1 full duplex protocol E 426 configuration parameters E 426 description E 426 DF1 half duplex protocol 427 configuration parameters F 433 E 438 E 441 E 442 description 427 DF1 protocol half duplex 427 DH485 communication protocol 423 configuration parameters E 424 E 425 description F 423 protocol E 424 token rotation F 424 DIN rail 1 490 DIV instruction 10 175 divide instruction 10 175 DLG Quick Start example F 487 DLG Instruction 22 370 download 1 490 DTE definition 1 497 E Ell function file 18 247 embedded 1 0 1 75 EMI 1 491 ENC instruction 11 182 encode 1 of 16 to 4 instruction 11 182 encoder definition 1 491 quadrature 5 104 END instruction 16 226 EQU instruction 9 164 equal instruction 9 164 error codes D 413 D 414 ASCII instruction error codes 20 306 Ell error codes 18 248 fault messages an
480. of broadcast packets as well IMPORTANT Once Store amp Forward is enabled duplicate packet detection is also automatically enabled Whenever Store amp Forward is used within a radio modem network every node should have a Store amp Forward Table file configured even if all of the bits in the file are cleared so that duplicate packets will be ignored Applying DF1 Radio Modem Protocol 2nd Rebroadcast Note 4 REPLY 1 REPLY 1 DST 1 SRC 4 CMD 1 No Bits DST 4 SRC 1 1 3 4 1st Rebroadcast 2nd Rebroadcast Note 2 Note 1 The link layer of Node 1 blocks the re transmission of a packet that is received with the SRC byte equal to the receiving node s station address Packets received that originate from the receiving node should never be re transmitted Note 2 To prevent Node 2 from re transmitting a duplicate packet the link layer of Node 2 updates the duplicate packet table with the last 20 packets received Note 3 The link layer of Node 4 blocks the re transmission of a packet that is received with the SRC byte equal to the receiving node s station address Packets received that originate from the receiving node should never be re transmitted Note 4 To prevent Node 3 from re transmitting a duplicate packet the link layer of Node 3 updates the duplicate packet table with the last 20 packets received If you are using RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 or higher you can view t
481. of the string data LENGTH a negative zero or value greater element for invalid values and correct the than 82 data 1 xx indicates module number If xx 0 problem cannot be traced to a specific module 2 The xx in this error code means that the error occurs at the location of the last properly configured Expansion 1 0 module 1 You should use this information in conjunction with the specific error code to determine the source of the problem 3 Applies to MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors Contacting Rockwell Automation for Assistance If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for assistance it is helpful to obtain the following information ready controller type series letter and revision letter of the base unit series letter revision letter and firmware FRN number of the processor on bottom side of processor unit TIP in the Status File e controller LED status You can also check the FRN by looking at word S 59 Operating System FRN controller error codes found in S2 6 of status file Rockwell Automation phone numbets are listed on the back cover of this manual To contact us via the Internet go to http www rockwellautomation com Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 422 Fault Messages and Error Codes Notes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 DH 485 Communication Protocol Appendix E Protocol
482. ogram MCR instructions note that You must end the zone with an unconditional MCR instruction You cannot nest one MCR zone within another Do not jump into an MCR zone If the zone is false jumping into it activates the zone TIP The MCR instruction is not a substitute for a hard wired master control relay that provides emergency stop capability You still must install a hard wired master control relay to provide emergency I O power shutdown If you start instructions such as timers or counters in an MCR zone instruction operation ceases when the zone is disabled Re program critical operations outside the zone if necessary Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 228 Program Control Instructions Notes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 IIM Immediate Input with Mask IIM ot Mask Length Immediate Input w Mask SI 0 1 0 0 N7 0 1 Chapter 17 Input and Output Instructions The input and output instructions allow you to selectively update data without waiting for the input and output scans Instruction Used To Page IIM Immediate Input with Mask Update data prior to the normal input scan 229 IOM Immediate Output with Update outputs prior to the normal output scan 230 Mask REF 1 0 Refresh Interrupt the program scan to execute the 231 1 0 scan write outputs service communications read inputs Instruction Type output TIP This instruct
483. ogram has to those variables are listed individually below All unctio e examples illustrate PTO 0 Terms and behavior for PTO 1 MicroLogix 1500 only Sub Elements Summary are identical Pulse Train Output Function File PTO 0 Sub ElementDescripion Address Data jRange lype User Program For More Format Access Information OUT Output PTO 0 QUT word INT 2 or 3 control read only 125 DN Done PTO 0 DN bit 00r 1 status read only 126 DS Decelerating Status PTO 0 DS bit 0 or 1 status read only 126 RS Run Status PTO 0 RS bit 0 or 1 status read only 126 AS Accelerating Status PTO 0 AS bit 0 or 1 status read only 127 RP Ramp Profile PTO 0 RP bit Oor1 control read write 127 IS Idle Status PTO 0 IS bit 0 or 1 status read only 127 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Using High Speed Outputs 125 Pulse Train Output Function File PTO 0 Sub Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program For More Format Access Information ED Error Detected Status PTOO ED bit Oori status fread only 128 NS Normal Operation Status PTO 0 NS bit 0 or 1 status read only 128 JPS Jog Pulse Status PTO 0 JPS bit 0 or 1 status read only 134 JCS Jog Continuous Status PTO 0 JCS bit 0 or 1 status read only 135 ADI Accel Decel Pulses Independent PTO 0 ADI bit 00r 1 control read
484. ogram is downloaded via programming software e A User Program is downloaded from a Memory Module Setting Download File Protection Download File Protection can be applied to the following data file types Output O Input 1 e Binary B e Timer T Counter C Control R Integer N Floating Point F e String ST Long Word L Proportional Integral Derivative PD e Message MG Programmable Limit Switch PLS TIP The data in the Status File cannot be protected Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 50 Controller Memory and File Types Access the Download Data File Protect feature General using RSLogix 500 programming software For each File 7 data file you want protected check the Memory Type N Module Download item within the protection box Name INTEGER in the Data File Properties screen as shown in this Bes illustration To access this screen right mouse click Elements 6 on the desired data file Attributes gt Debug Skip When Deleting Unus d Memory Scope Goga C Local To fale Lan p m Hone Cancel Apply Help User Program Transfer Requirements Data File Download Protection only operates when the following conditions are met during a User Program or Memory Module download to the controller The controller contains protected data files e The program being downloaded has the same number of protected data files
485. ogrammable Limit Switch 101 Count Down CD Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access CD Count Down HSC O0 CD bi t 207 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The CD Count Down bit is used with the bidirectional counters modes 2 to 7 If the CE bit is set the CD bit is set 1 If the CE bit is clear the CD bit is cleared 0 Count Up CU Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access CU Count Up HSC 0 CU fbi t 0 to 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The CU Count Up bit is used with all of the HSCs modes 0 to 7 If the CE bit is set the CU bit is set 1 If the CE bit is clear the CU bit is cleared 0 HSC Mode MOD Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access MOD HSC Mode HSC 0 MOD word INT control read only The MOD Mode variable sets the High Speed Counter to one of 8 types of operation This integer value is configured through the programming device and is accessible in the control program as a read only variable HSC Operating Modes Mode Type Number 0 Up Counter The accumulator is immediately cleared 0 when it reaches the high preset A low preset cannot be defined in this mode 1 Up Counter with external reset and hold The accumul
486. ol and Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs bit 13 T4 0 DN DN timer done accumulated value gt preset value the appropriate RES instruction is enabled bit 14 T4 0 TT TT timer timing rung state is true and accumulated e rung state goes false or value preset value e DN bit is set bit15 T4 0 EN EN timer enable rung state is true rung state goes false To reset the accumulator of a retentive timer use an RES instruction See RES Reset on page 160 How Counters Work The figure below demonstrates how a counter works The count value must remain in the range of 32 768 to 32 767 If the count value goes above 32 767 the counter status overflow bit OV 1s set 1 If the count goes below 32 768 the counter status underflow bit UN is set 1 A reset RES instruction is used to reset 0 the counter 32 768 0 132 767 Count Up rm Hm Counter Accum lator Value Count Down Underflow Overflow Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 158 Timer and Counter Instructions Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Using the CTU and CTD Instructions Counter instructions use the following parameters Counter This is the address of the counter within the data file All counters ate 3 word data elements Word 0 contains the Control and Status Bits Word
487. oller determines the number of characters in the buffer and puts this value in the POS field of the control data file The Done bit DN is then set If a zero appears in the POS field no characters were found The Found bit FD is set when the POS filed is set to a non zero value Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ACI Instruction Controller Data Size When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B word 17 6 us 7 2 us character 0 0 us FRN 3 or later long word 24 6 us 11 6 pis character 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B 14 2 us 6 3 us character 0 0 us FRN 4 or later Use the ACI instruction to convert a numeric ASCII string to an integer word or long word value Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Source The contents of this location ate converted to an integer value e Destination This is the location which receives the result of the conversion The data range is from 32 768 to 32 767 if the destination is a wotd and from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 if the destination is a long wotd ASCII Instructions 295 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ACI Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level 2 Mode 7 Parameter z E s
488. olumn 2 Column 3 Column 4 Ctrl DEC IHEX OCT JASC DEC IHEX JOCT JASC DEC HEX JOCT ASC DEC HEX OCT IASC A 00 00 000 INUL 432 20 040 ISP 64 40 100 96 60 140 N A 01 01 001 SOH 433 21 041 65 41 101 A 97 61 141 a B 02 02 002 STX 34 22 042 66 42 102 B 98 62 142 b C 03 03 003 ETX 35 23 043 67 43 103 IC 99 63 143 Ic D 04 04 004 EOT 436 24 044 68 44 104 D 100 64 144 ld E 05 05 005 ENQ 437 25 045 96 69 45 105 JE 101 65 145 Ie F 06 06 006 JACK 438 26 046 amp 70 46 106 IF 102 66 146 f G 07 07 007 BEL 439 27 047 71 47 107 IG 103 167 14 1g H 08 08 010 BS 40 28 050 72 48 110 JH 104 168 150 Jh 08 08 011 HT 41 29 051 73 49 111 105 169 151 i AJ 10 0A 012 LF 42 2A 052 74 4A 112 J 106 6A 152 j AK 1 0B 013 IVT 43 2B 053 75 4B 113 K 107 6B 153 k L 2 0C 014 FF 44 2C 054 76 4C 114 IL 108 6C 154 I M 3 0D 015 ICR 45 2D 055 l 77 4D 115 M 109 6D 155 Im N 4 OE 016 ISO 46 2E 056 78 4E 116 IN 110 6E 156 In 0 15 OF 017 JSI 47 2F 057 79 4F 117 10 111 6F 157 lo P 16 10 020 DLE 148 30 060 J0 80 50 120 JP 112 70 160 p 17 11 021 DC1 149 31 061 1 81 51 121 113 71 61 q R 8 12 022 DC2 450 32 062 2 82 52 122 R 114 172 62 r S 9 13 023 DC3 51 33 063 13 83 53 123 IS 115 73 63 Js AT 20 14 024 DC4 52 34 064 l4 84 54 124 IT 116 74 64 t U 21 15 025 INAK 53 35 065 5 85 55 125 JU 117 175 65 Ju NN 22 16 026 SYN 54 36 066 6 86 56 120 V 118 76 66 fv W 123 17 027 ETB 55 37 067 7 87
489. on 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 440 Protocol Configuration When the system driver is DF1 Radio Modem the following parameters can be changed for Channel 0 DF1 Radio Modem Channel 0 Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Channel 0 0 Driver DF1 Radio Modem Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 255 is reserved for broadcast 1 Store and Forward Store and Forward allows messages between two out of radio range nodes to be routed through 0 File Number one or more in radio range nodes This is the data table file number used for the Store amp Forward Table Control Line No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking No Handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 1 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from transmit to receive mode When the Control Line is set to Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the next RTS assertion DF1 Radio Modem Cha
490. on Bit is set the unsigned truncated value of the Source is stored in the Destination e Sources can be constants or an address but both sources cannot be constants e Valid constants ate 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word ressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Math Instructions ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG CLR Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 J Address Data Files Function Files a Address Level Mode 3 Parameter E g E e E t ec a _ 8 9 R ils E 2 El oO o a je Of i z Sle l la lw 2 IE e ls Je ls o L l la le z i l E a E 2 E5 lala s Els lalf j 2 is 2 S Source A e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Source B e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor for the following math instructions ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG and SCP 3 See Important note about indirect addressing 4 The F file is valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 150
491. on Instructions 183 The ENC instruction searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit looking for the first bit set The corresponding bit position is wtitten to the destination as an integer The ENC instruction converts the values as shown in the table below Source Bits Destination Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 15to04 03 02 01 00 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 X determines the state of the flag TIP If source is zero the destination is zero and the math status is zero the flag is set to 1 Updates to Math Status Bits Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets 0 1 Overflow sets if more than one bit in the source is set oth
492. on file 5 87 HSL instruction 5 710 I l 0 1 492 I O addressing 1 24 1 0 configuration 1 15 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 l O forcing 1 38 l 0 refresh instruction 17 231 identifying controller faults D 473 IIM instruction 17 229 immediate input with mask instruction 17 229 immediate output with mask instruction 17 230 in line indirection 20 305 input and output instructions 17 229 input device 1 492 input filter selection modified status bit C 401 input filtering 1 38 input scan 1 492 input output status file 3 79 inrush current 1 492 instruction 1 492 instruction execution time B 381 instruction set definition 1 492 MicroLogix 1200 execution times A 375 MicroLogix 1500 execution times B 381 overview 4 81 INT instruction 18 237 interrupt subroutine instruction 18 237 interrupts interrupt instructions 18 237 interrupt subroutine INT instruction 18 238 latency 18 236 overview 18 233 selectable timed start STS instruction 18 238 user fault routine 18 236 user interrupt disable UID instruction 18 239 user interrupt enable UIE instruction 18 240 user interrupt flush UIF instruction 18 241 IOM instruction 17 230 IOS function file 3 79 J JMP instruction 16 223 JSR instruction 16 224 jump 1 493 jump to label instruction 16 223 jump to subroutine instruction 16 224 L label instruction 16 224 ladder logic 1 493 last 100 Sec scan time status C 407 latching inputs 1 39 LBL instruction 16 224
493. on the Modbus function TIP Modbus protocol may not be consistently implemented in the field The Modbus specification calls for the addressing range to start at 1 however some devices start addressing at 0 The Modbus Data Address in the Message Setup Screen may need to be incremented by one to properly access a Modbus slave s memory depending on that slave s implementation of memory addressing Modbus RTU Slave TIP Modbus RTU Slave driver can be used with the following controllers All MicroLogix 1200 controllers MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and higher All MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP The coil and contact files can contain up to 4096 coils or contacts in each register when the data table file is configured for a maximum size of 256 words Each input register and holding register file can contain up to 256 registers when the data table file is configured for a maximum size of 256 words With the Expanded box checked the controllers can be specifically configured to use up to six 256 word data table files for a total of 1536 Modbus Holding registers TIP A request to access a group of holding registers that span across two files is permitted Note that the maximum number of registers in a command does not allow for more than two files to be accessed during a single Modbus command Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 448 Protocol Configuration Modbus RTU Master Configuration Select the Modbus RTU Master from the Chan
494. onfiguration be Channel Configuration Ei gg Program Files syso SYs1 4 Lap2 if LAD 3 Hsc suB MOV Move Source HSC 0 ACC 0 lt Dest Proper wiring of a single ended encoder Typical Allen Bradley 845TK when configuring HSC MOD for Mode 6 Quadrature Counter The following diagram illustrates connecting an encoder to the MicroLogix 1500 but the same wiring can be applied for the MicroLogix 1200 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2011 466 Knowledgebase Quick Starts The minimum configuration required for Mode 6 operation is to enter a file number for the PFN parameter set the AS and CE bits to a 1 and enter a 6 for the MOD parameter Note If the encoder is a High Voltage Differential Line Driver do not terminate A B or Z amp Indicates a wire makes a connection 1764 248 WA pg FUE 168 J BN ul GM U 1 1 1 8 Era 172 ir8 Efe n TM 0 8 077 ora ore TADWA TROUBLESHOOTING Problem 1 The input LEDS on the Micrologix Base unit turn on and off but no counts are seen in the HSC accumulator Solution The input filter frequency may need to be adjusted in order to capture the input pulses Follow the steps below Select I O Configuration Highlight the 1764 Micrologix 1500 Select Adv Config Select the
495. onfiguring a message instruction set the target node address to 1 for broadcast messages Broadcast messages ate handled as follows DF1 Half Duplex Master Driver Broadcast Messages A broadcast write command initiated by the DF1 half duplex master is received and executed by all DF1 half duplex slaves A broadcast write command received by the DF1 half duplex master after polling a DF1 half duplex slave is received acknowledged and re broadcast without being executed by the DF1 half duplex master It is treated like any other slave to slave command except that no acknowledgement is expected after re broadcast DF1 Half Duplex Slave Driver Broadcast Messages When a broadcast write command is initiated by a DF1 half duplex slave it is queued up just like any other MSG command until it receives a poll from the DF1 half duplex master After transmitting the broadcast write command the DF1 half duplex slave receives an acknowledgement that the DF1 half duplex master received the packet without error When the DF1 half duplex master re broadcasts the broadcast write command the initiating DF1 half duplex slave receives and executes the command along with all of the other slave nodes receiving the broadcast packet No acknowledgement or reply is returned Choosing a Polling Mode for DF1 Half Duplex Master A master station can be configured to communicate with slave stations in either Message based polling mode or Standard polling mode The p
496. ongest executing rung in your control program maximum rung time See MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time on page 375 or MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time on page 381 for more information 2 Multiply the maximum rung time by the Communications Multiplier corresponding to your configuration in the MicroLogix 1200 Scan Time Worksheet on page 380 or MicroLogix 1500 Scan Time Worksheet on page 386 Evaluate your results as follows Controller If the time calculated in step 2 is Then the Interrupt Latency is MicroLogix 1200 fless than 133 us 411 us greater than 133 us the value calculated in step 2 plus 278 us MicroLogix 1500 fless than 100 us 360 us greater than 100 us the value calculated in step 2 plus 260 us User Fault Routine The user fault routine gives you the option of preventing a controller shutdown when a specific user fault occurs The fault routine is executed when any recoverable or non recoverable user fault occurs The fault routine is not executed for non user faults User Interrupt Instructions Using Interrupts 237 Faults are classified as recoverable non recoverable and non user faults A complete list of faults is shown in Fault Messages and Error Codes on page 413 The basic types of faults are described below Recoverable Recoverable Faults are caused by the user and may be recovered from by executing logic in the user fault routin
497. ontroller s embedded I O is addressed as slot 0 Modules are counted from left to right as shown below Expansion I 0 MicroLogix 1200 Expansion l 0 Memory Mapping 1 0 Configuration 17 TIP In most cases you can use the following address format X s b X file type letter s slot number b bit number See I O Addressing on page 37 for complete information on address formats Discrete 1 0 Configuration 1762 IA8 and 1762 108 Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 7 correspond to input terminals 0 through 7 Bit Position 15 14 13 12 7 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 X x x k x x x Ix r r r r r r r r Word r read only x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1762 1016 Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 15 correspond to input terminals 0 through 15 T Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r read only 1762 1032T Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 15 together with word 0 1 correspond to input terminals 0 31
498. operation This instruction uses the following operands o File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents are received on an element by element basis from the source TIP If file type is word then mask and source must be words If file type is long word mask and source must be long words Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position sequencer file The address level of the source must match the sequencer file If file is a word type then source must be a word type If file is a long word type then source must be a long word type The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 222 Sequencer Instructions Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value ate stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Length contains the index of the last element in the sequencer reference file Word 2 Position the current position in the sequence 1 EN Enable Bit is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false 3 ER Error Bit is set when
499. or H 5C 0 configure the HSC MOD to use PLS10 and for the HSC to operate in mode 00 IMPORTANT The value for MOD must be entered in Hexadecimal For example PLS10 0A and HSC Mode 00 L HPR High Preset Reached I DIR Count Direction H UF Underflow OF Overflow H MD Mode Done L CD Count Down H CU Count Up MOD PLS file bits 15 8 HSC Mode bits 7 0 AQ hy H ACC Accumulator H HIP High Preset 1000 H LOF Low Preset 0 H OVF Overflow 2147483647 ecOococooccoc Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 117 PLS Operation for This Example When the ladder logic first runs HSC ACC equals 0 therefore PLS10 0 OLD s data is sent through the HSC OMB mask and sets all the outputs off When HSC ACC equals 250 the PLS10 0 OHD is sent through the HSC OMB mask and energizes the outputs This will repeat as the HSC ACC reaches 500 750 and 1000 Once completed the cycle resets and repeats Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 118 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 PTO Pulse Train Output PTO Pulse Train Output PTO Number Pulse Train Output Function Chapter 6 Using High Speed Outputs The high speed output instructions allow you to control and monitor the PTO and PWM functions which control the physical high speed outputs Instructio
500. or Suspend REM Suspend REM Run or Run REM Run Run Don t Care REM Run True Don t Care Don t Care REM Program w Fault MicroLogix 1500 Major Error Power Up Mode at Last Power Down Power Up Mode Mode Switch Position Halted Mode Behavior at Power Up Program False Dont Care Dont Care Program True Program w Fault Remote False Last State REM Download Download REM Program REM Program Program or Any Test mode REM Suspend or Suspend REM Suspend REM Run or Run REM Run Run Don t Care REM Run True Don t Care Don t Care REM Program w Fault Run False Last State REM Suspend or Suspend Suspend Any Mode except REM Suspend or Suspend Run Run Don t Care Run True Don t Care Don t Care Run w Fault 1 Run w Fault is a fault condition just as if the controller were in the Program w Fault mode outputs are reset and the controller program is not being executed However the controller enters Run mode as soon as the Major Error Halted flag is cleared Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 See also MB Mode Behavior on page 62 System Status File 395 Major Error Halted Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 13 binary Oor1 status read write The controller sets 1 this bit when a major error is encountered The controller enters a fault condition and word S 6 contains the Fault Code that can be used to diagnose the condition Any time bit S 1 13 is set the controller turns
501. ortant note about indirect addressing communications or hard fault This was corrected in MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and MicroLogix 1500 FRN 8 firmware IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Updates to Math Status Bits After a MVM instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0 3 in the processor status file S2 Math Status Bits In earlier firmware versions when the MVM instruction was configured to execute with a Long Word Source value set to zero the processor could potentially lose With this Bit The Controller S070 Cary aWwaysmses hCSFt lt 2 lt 2S SCT 0 1 Overflow always resets 0 2 Zero Bit sets if destination is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if the MSB of the destination is set otherwise resets Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 CPW Copy Word CPW Copy Word Source HSC 0 2 Dest N7 0 Length 1 File Instructions Chapter 14 The file instructions perform operations on file data Instruction Used To Page CPW Copy Word Copy words of data from one location to another 199 COP Copy File Copy a range of data from one file location to 200 another FLL Fill File Load a file with a program constant or a value 201 from a
502. osition ds MicroLogix 1200 word 11 3 us 11 1 us long word 117 us 11 2 us MicroLogix 1500 word 10 0 us 9 8 us long word 10 9 us 97 us On a false to true rung transition the FFL instruction loads words or long words into a user created file called a FIFO stack This instruction s counterpart FIFO unload FFU is paired with a given FFL instruction to remove elements from the FIFO stack Instruction parameters have been programmed in the FFL FFU instruction pair shown below FFL zw EE LOAD N7 10 NET Destination Position FIFO N7 12 dus 7412 HEM N7 11 rl N7 12 0 Length 34 N7 13 1 Postion 3 FFU instruction N7 14 2 FF unloads data from 3 FIFO UNLOAD EU stack N7 12 at 4 FIFO N7 12 HDN position 0 N7 12 Dest N7 11 HEM 5 34 words are allocated pua i8 6 for FIFO stack starting Position 9 7 at N7 12 ending at N7 45 FFL and FFU Instruction Pair Source 8 N7 10 m gt 9 FFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next N7 45 33 available position 9 in this case Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 This instruction uses the following operands e Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position in the FIFO stack The address level of the soutce must match the FIFO stack If FIFO is a word size file source must be a word value or constant If FIFO is a long word size file source must be a long word value or constant The data range for the source
503. ou want to extract An index of 1 indicates the left most character of the string e Number is the number of characters from 1 to 82 you want to extract starting at the indexed position If the Index plus the Number is greater than the total characters in the source string the Destination string will be the characters from the Index to the end of the Source string Destination is the string element ST where you want the extracted string stored Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below AEX Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address iles i i Data Files Function Files 2 Mode Address Level P m E s T Parameter T E E 5 s m 5 le e a 87 7528 2 5 n g la jo 8 jo j l l lb l Lb ln a JE L siis sis u 5 a S la m 5 s e 8 Is ja E 6 Z fe z S S Source Index Number e e Destination 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation This instruction executes on a true rung The following conditions cause the controller to set the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 e Source string length is less than 1 or greater than 82 ndex value is less than 1 or greater than 82 e
504. our local Rockwell Automation representative for more information about available operating systems your controller 000B BASE HARDWARE FAULT The base hardware faulted or is incompatible with the OS Non User e Upgrade the OS using ControlFlash e Replace the Controller MicroLogix 1200 only e Replace the Base Unit MicroLogix 1500 only e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for more information about available operating systems your controller 0011 EXECUTABLE FILE 2 IS MISSING Ladder File 2 is missing from the program Non User e Re compile and reload the program Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 416 Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0012 LADDER PROGRAM The ladder program has a memory Non User e Reload the program or re compile and ERROR integrity problem reload the program If the error persists be sure to use RSI programming software to develop and load the program e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controller s User Manual 0015 1 0 CONFIGURATION The user program 1 0 configuration Non User Re compile and reload the program and enter FILE ERROR is invalid the Run mode If the error persists be sure to use RSI programming software to develop and load the program 0016 STARTUP The user fault
505. output limit bit PD10 0 OL is disabled 0 the CVL value you enter determines when the lower limit alarm bit LL is set If CV is below the minimum value the output is not overridden and the lower limit alarm bit LL is set Output Parameters The table below shows the output parameter addresses data formats and types of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter Output Parameter Descriptions Address Data Format Range Type User Program For More Access Information V Control Variable User defined word INT 0 to 16 383 control X read write 259 CVP Control Variable Percent PD10 0 CVP word INT 0 to 100 control _ read write 259 SPV Scaled Process Variable PD10 0 SPV word INT 0 to 16383 status read only 260 Control Variable CV Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access CV Control Variable User defined word INT 0 to 16 383 control read write The CV Control Variable is user defined See the ladder rung below PID 0000 PID PID File PD10 0 Process Variable N7 0 Control Variable N7 1 Setup Screen Control Variable Percent CVP Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access CVP Control Variable Percent PD10 0 CVP word INT O to 100 control status read CVP Control Variable Percent d
506. ow condition count up through the overflow value e Underflow condition count down through the underflow value If this bit is cleared 0 the HSC sub system does not automatically scan the HSC subroutine This bit can be controlled from the user program using the OTE UIE or UID instructions OTE or UIE this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL User Interrupt Executing UIX Description Address Data HSC Modes Type User Program Format Access UIX User Interrupt Executing HSC O UIX bit 0 to 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The UIX User Interrupt Executing bit is set 1 whenever the HSC sub system begins processing the HSC subroutine due to any of the following conditions Low preset reached e High preset reached Overflow condition count up through the overflow value Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 94 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Underflow condition count down through the underflow value The HSC UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an HSC interrupt is executing The HSC sub system will clear 0 the UIX
507. pecialty 1 0 Configuration 1769 IR6 RTD resistance Module Input Data File The first six words 0 to 5 of the input data file contain the analog RTD or resistance values of the inputs Words 6 and 7 provide sensor channel status feedback for use in your control program as shown below Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 1029 8 7 6 5b 4 3 2 1 JO RID resistance Input Data Channel 0 RTD resistance Input Data Channel 1 RTD resistance Input Data Channel 2 RTD resistance Input Data Channel 3 gt X gt gt fWord RTD resistance Input Data Channel 4 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 32 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RID resistance Input Data Channel 5 Not Used 0C5 0 4 0C3 OC2 OC1 OCO Not Used S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0 gt e IWord UO 00 jU1 01 U2 02 U3 O3 U4 04 U5 05 NotUsed Wotd 6 and 7 status bits are defined as follows e Sx General status bit for channels 0 through 5 This bit is set 1 when an error over or under range open circuit or input data not valid exists for that channel An input data not valid condition is determined by the user program This condition occurs when the first analog to digital conversion is still in progress at power up or after a new configuration has been sent to the module Refer to the RTD
508. ple Active Node Table Main Proc Scan Times Math Chan 0 t Node 0 4 Data File 52 STATUS DF1 Half Duplex Master Active Node T able 0 1000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 Properties 16 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 09000 0000 0000 00 0900 0000 90000 00 0000 0000 0000 00 099000 0000 9000 00 Usage Debug Errors Protection Mem gt lol x Radix Structured b Help At power up or after reconfiguration the master station assumes that all slave stations are inactive A station is shown active only after it responds to a poll packet Protocol Configuration 437 DF1 Half Duplex Slave Configuration When the system driver is DF1 Half Duplex Slave the following parameters can be changed DF1 Half Duplex Slave Configuration Parameters All MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Channel 0 0 1200 amp LSP MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Channel 0 or 1 0 or 1 LRP Driver DF1 Half Duplex Slave Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 255 is reserved for broadcast 1 Control Line No Handshaking H
509. ponses auto detect enabled auto detect Duplicate Packet Message Detect enabled disabled enabled ACK Timeout x20 ms 1 to 65535 counts 20 ms increments 50 counts NAK retries 0 to 255 3 retries ENQ retries 0 to 255 3 retries Stop Bits not a setting always 1 1 DF1 Half Duplex Protocol With MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and MicroLogix 1500 FRN 8 a DF1 Half Duplex Master driver has been added to complement the DF1 Half Duplex Slave driver already available in the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers TIP DF1 Half Duplex Master driver can be used with the following controllers MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Channel 1 only DF1 Half Duplex Protocol DF1 Half Duplex protocol provides a multi drop single master multiple slave network In contrast to the DF1 Full Duplex protocol communication takes place in one direction at a time You can use the RS 232 port on the MicroLogix controller as both a Half Duplex programming port and a Halt Duplex peer to peer messaging port MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers support Half Duplex modems using RTS CTS hardware handshaking Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 428 Protocol Configuration Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 DF1 Half Duplex supports up to 255 devices addresses 0 to 254 with address 255 reserved for master broadcasts Noze When c
510. process variable is within the zero crossing deadband range Process Control Instruction 265 PLC 5 Gain Range RG Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access RG PLC 5 Gain Range PD10 0 RG binary bit 0 or 1 control read write When set 1 the reset TI and gain range enhancement bit RG causes the reset minute repeat value and the gain multiplier KC to be divided by a factor of 10 That means a reset multiplier of 0 01 and a gain multiplier of 0 01 When clear 0 this bit allows the reset minutes repeat value and the gain multiplier value to be evaluated with a reset multiplier of 0 1 and a gain multiplier of 0 1 Example with the RG bit set The reset term TI of 1 indicates that the integral value of 0 01 minutes repeat 0 6 seconds repeat is applied to the PID integral algorithm The gain value KC of 1 indicates that the error is multiplied by 0 01 and applied to the PID algorithm Example with the RG bit clear The reset term TT of 1 indicates that the integral value of 0 1 minutes repeat 6 0 seconds repeat is applied to the PID integral algorithm The gain value KC of 1 indicates that the error is multiplied by 0 1 and applied to the PID algorithm TIP The rate multiplier TD is not affected by this selection Setpoint Scaling SC Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access SC
511. program to reduce the NESTING EXCEEDS exceeded the controller memory nesting levels used and to meet the LIMIT space restrictions for the JSR instruction Then reload the program and Run 0031 UNSUPPORTED The program contains an Non User e Modify the program so that all INSTRUCTION instruction s that is not supported instructions are supported by the DETECTED by the controller controller e Re compile and reload the program and enter the Run mode Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 418 Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0032 Q0 SOC SOL A sequencer instruction length Recoverable e Correct the program to ensure that the OUTSIDE OF DATA position parameter references length and position parameters do not FILE SPACE outside of the entire data file space point outside data file space e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0033 BSL BSR FFL FFU LFL The length position parameter ofa Recoverable e Correct the program to ensure that the LFU CROSSED DATA BSL BSR FFL FFU LFL or LFU length and position parameters do not FILE SPACE instruction references outside of the point outside of the data space entire data file space e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0034 NEGATIVE VALUE IN A negative value was loaded toa Recoverable e f the program is moving valu
512. ption of Error Condition D7H Connection refused by destination host D8H Connection was broken DSH Reply not received before user specified timeout DAH No network buffer space available EOH Expansion I O Communication Module Error The error code returned can be found in the upper byte of sub element 22 E1H PCCC Description Illegal Address Format a field has an illegal value E2H PCCC Description Illegal Address format not enough fields specified E3H PCCC Description Illegal Address format too many fields specified EAH PCCC Description Illegal Address symbol not found EBH PCCC Description Illegal Address Format symbol is 0 or greater than the maximum number of characters support by this device E6H PCCC Description Illegal Address address does not exist or does not point to something usable by this command E H Target node cannot respond because length requested is too large E8H PCCC Description Cannot complete request situation changed file size for example during multi packet operation ESH PCCC Description Data or file is too large Memory unavailable EAH PCCC Description Request is too large transaction size plus word address is too large EBH Target node cannot respond because target node denies access ECH Target node cannot respond because requested function is currently unavailable EDH PCCC Description Resource is already available condition already exists EEH PCCC Description Command cannot b
513. ptional Instruction Type output Execution Time for the STS Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 57 5 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 50 7 us 0 0 us The STS instruction can be used to start and stop the STI function or to change the time interval between STI user interrupts The STI instruction has one operand Time This is the amount of time in milliseconds which must expire prior to executing the selectable timed user interrupt A value of zero disables the STI function The time range is from 0 to 65 535 milliseconds The STS instruction applies the specified set point to the STI function as follows Using Interrupts 239 e If a zero set point is specified the STI is disabled and STI 0 TIE is cleared 0 If the STI is disabled not timing and a value greater than 0 is entered into the set point the STI starts timing to the new set point and STI 0 TIE is set 1 If the STI is currently timing and the set point is changed the new setting takes effect immediately and the STI continues to time until it reaches the new set point Note that if the new setting is less than the current accumulated time the STI times out immediately For example if the STI has been timing for 15 microseconds and the STI set point is changed from 20 microseconds to 10 microseconds an STI user interrupt occurs at the next start of rung Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below
514. quencer Instructions This instruction uses the following operands e File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents on an element by element basis are masked and stored in the destination TIP If file type is word then maskand source must be words If filetype is long word mask and source must be long words e Mask The mask operand contains the mask value When mask bits are set to 1 data is allowed to pass through to destination When mask bits are reset to 0 the data is masked does not pass through to destination The immediate data ranges for mask are from 0 to OxFFFF word or 0 to OxFFFFFFFF long word TIP If mask is direct or indirect the position selects the location in the specified file Destination The destination operand is the sequencer location or file Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value ate stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 used Word 1 Length contains the index of the last element in the sequencer reference file Word 2 Position the current position in the sequence 1 2 3 EN Enable Bit is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled DN Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false ER
515. r a unique value for each ADI 1 In the example below e TOP total output pulses 12 000 e ADP accelerate decelerate pulses 6 000 This is the maximum ADP value that may be entered without causing a fault The run portion will equal 0 Accel Run Decel 4ag 12 000 __ gt Accel Run Decel 6 000 0 6 000 In this example the maximum value that could be used for accelerate decelerate is 6000 because if both accelerate and decelerate are 6000 the total number of pulses 12 000 The run component would be zero This profile would consist of an acceleration phase from 0 to 6000 At 6000 the output frequency OF variable is generated and immediately enters the deceleration phase 6000 to 12 000 At 12 000 the PTO operation would stop output frequency 0 If you need to determine the ramp petiod accelerate decelerate ramp duration e 2x ADP OF duration in seconds OF output frequency The following formulas can be used to calculate the maximum frequency limit for both profiles The maximum frequency the integer which is less than or equal to the result found below OF output frequency For Trapezoid Profiles OF x OF 4 0 5 For S Curve Profiles 0 999 x OF x SQRT OF 6 Using High Speed Outputs 133 PTO Controlled Stop CS Sub Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access CS Controlled Stop PTO 0 CS bit 0 or 1 con
516. r 1 control read write The PTO JC Jog Continuous bit instructs the PTO sub system to generate continuous pulses The frequency generated is defined by the Jog Frequency parameter in the PTO function file Jog Continuous operation is only possible under the following conditions e PTO sub system in idle Jog Pulse not active e Enable not active The JC bit operates as follows e Set 1 Instructs the PTO sub system to generate continuous Jog Pulses Cleared 0 The PTO sub system does not generate Jog Pulses When the Jog Continuous bit is cleared the current output pulse is truncated PTO Jog Continuous Status JCS Sub Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access JCS Jog Continuous Status PTO 0 JCS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO JCS Jog Continuous Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO is generating continuous Jog Pulses The JCS bit operates as follows Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is generating continuous Jog Pulses Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not generating continuous Jog Pulses Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 136 Using High Speed Outputs Pulse Train Output Error Codes PTO Error Code ER Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access ER Er
517. r 5 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch The MicroLogix 1200 has one 20 kHz high speed counter the MicroLogix 1500 has two Functionally the counters are identical Each counter has four dedicated inputs that are isolated from other inputs on the controller HSCO utilizes inputs 0 through 3 and HSC1 MicroLogix 1500 only utilizes inputs 4 through 7 Each counter operates independently from the other TIP HSCO is used in this document to define how any HSC works The MicroLogix 1500 s HSC1 is identical in functionality IMPORTANT The HSC function can only be used with the controller s embedded 1 0 It cannot be used with expansion I O modules This chapter describes how to use the HSC function and also contains sections on the HSL and RAC instructions as follows High Speed Counter HSC Function File on page 87 e HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 110 e RAC Reset Accumulated Value on page 111 The Programmable Limit Switch function allows you to configure the High Speed Counter to operate as a PLS programmable limit switch or rotary cam switch See page 112 for more information Within the RSLogix 500 Function File Folder you see a HSC Function File This file provides access to HSC configuration data and also allows the control program access to all information pertaining to each of the High Speed Counters TIP If the controller is in the run mode the data within sub element fields may be cha
518. r Memory Module The Target file information contained in Sub Elements 12 through 15 of the MSG File Element depend upon the message type as shown in the tables below Message File Target Location Information Target Device 485 CIF Sub Name Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 12 Reserved Y Word read only 13 MG11 0 TFN Target File Number Y Word read write 14 MG11 0 ELE Offset in elements into CIF IY Word read write 15 Reserved Y Word read only Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 316 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Message File Target Location Information Target Device 500CPU or PLC 5 Sub X Address Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 12 Target File Type Y Word read only 13 MG11 0 TFN Target File Number Y Word read write 14 MG11 0 ELE Target File Element Number forB Y Word read write S N F T C R L ST and RTC files or Target File Slot Number for O and l files 15 Target File Element Number for O Y Word read only and files Set to zero for any file other than Oorl 1 The file number for RTC function files is set to 0 by the programming software 2 TheF file is only permitted in the MSG instruction for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series C and higher controllers 3 RTC and ST are only permitted in the MSG instruction for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 S
519. r our example the value 4 is used to provide a rate term of 0 04 minutes per repeat Place the process in the AUTO mode If you have an ideal process the PID tuning is complete Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 216 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 15 To make adjustments from this point place the PID instruction in the MANUAL mode enter the adjustment then place the PID instruction back in the AUTO mode This technique of going to MANUAL then back to AUTO ensures that most of the gain error is removed at the time each adjustment is made This allows you to see the effects of each adjustment immediately Toggling the PID rung allows the PID instruction to restart itself eliminating all of the integral buildup You may want to toggle the PID rung false while tuning to eliminate the effects of previous tuning adjustments Verifying the Scaling of Your Continuous System To ensure that your process is linear and that your equipment is properly connected and scaled do the following 1 10 11 Place the PID instruction in MANUAL and enter the following parameters type 0 for MinS type 100 for MaxS type 0 for CO Enter the REM RUN mode and verify that PV 0 Type 20 in CO Record the PV Type 40 in CO Record the PV Type 60 in CO Record the PV Type 80 in CO Record the PV The values you recorded should b
520. r program Getting Started Locate the Function Files under Controller in RSLOGIX 500 v4 00 or later and select the STI tab See Below Function Files Iof x En Rrc Dat TP MMI BHI cso wos L PFN Program File Number LER Error Code H UIX User Interrupt Executing H UIE User Interrupt Enable H UIL User Interrupt Lost H UIP User Interrupt Pending L TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled LAS Auto Start LED Error Detected L SPM Set Point Msec between interrupts qo ooo ooo oo Enter the following parameters as the Minimum Configuration required for the STI STI 0 PFN Program File Number defines which subroutine is executed when the SPM value has timed out The Integer number entered must be a valid sub routine program file 3 to 255 STI 0 AS Auto Start defines if the STI function will automatically start when the MicroLogix 1500 enters run or test Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2011 472 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 STI 0 UIE User Interrupt Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the STI subroutine from processing STI 0 SPM Setpoint in milliseconds defines the interval that the interrupt will scan the PEN sub routine Example The following example configures the STI to execute sub routine file 3 PFN 3 every 2 seconds SPM 2000 In the subroutine file there is an ADD instruction simply adding the value of
521. r program when executed true Program Scan Sub Total Output Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion 1 0 used 29 us Expansion Output Words X 2 us or X 6 5 us if Forcing is used Output Scan Sub Total Communications Overhead Worst Case 1100 us Typical Case 400 us Use this number if the communications port is configured but not communicating to 150 us any other device Use this number if the communications port is in Shutdown mode Ous Pick one of the four numbers for Channel 0 Pick one of the four numbers for Channel 1 Communications Overhead Sub Total System Overhead Add this number if your system includes a 1764 RTC 1764 MM1RITC or MM2RTC 80 us Add this number if your system includes a 1764 DAT 530 us Housekeeping Overhead 240 us 240 System Overhead Sub Total Totals Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 387 Sum of all Multiply by Communications Multiplier from Table X Time Tick Multiplier X1 02 Total Estimated Scan Time 1 Communications Overhead is a function of the device connected to the controller This will not occur every scan Communications Multiplier Table Multiplier at Various Baud Rates 38 4K 19 2K 9 6K 48K 24K T2K 600 300 Inactive Proto
522. ram The mode of the controller after the transfer takes place is determined by the controller mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S 1 12 See also LA Load Always on page 62 Power Up Mode Behavior Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 81 12 binary 0 or 1 control read only If Power Up Mode Behavior is clear 0 Last State the mode at power up is dependent upon the position of the mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only e state of the Major Error Halted flag S 1 13 mode at the previous power down Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 394 System Status File If Power Up Mode Behavior is set 1 Run the mode at power up is dependent upon the IMPORTANT position of the mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only e state of the Major Error Halted flag S 1 13 If you want the controller to power up and enter the Run mode regardless of any previous fault conditions you must also set the Fault Override bit S 1 8 so that the Major Error Halted flag is cleared before determining the power up mode The following table shows the Power Up Mode under various conditions MicroLogix 1200 Major Error Power Up Mode at Last Power Down Power Up Mode Halted Mode Behavior Remote False Last State REM Download Download REM Program REM Program Program or Any Test mode REM Suspend
523. range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 using RTD inputs only These bits can be used in the control program for error detection Under range detection for direct resistance inputs is not indicated because 0 is a valid number 1762 114 Thermocouple Module Input Data File For each module slot x words 0 through 3 contain the analog values of the inputs The input data file is shown below ri rd b ud ol elie tM D AH Bit 0 Analog Input Data Channel 0 Z 1 Analog Input Data Channel 1 Z 2 Analog Input Data Channel 2 Z 3 Analog Input Data Channel 3 Z 4 Reserved 0C4 0C3 0C2 OC1 OCO Reserved S4 83 S2 S1 ISO 5 UO 00 U1 101 U2 J02 U3 103 U4 04 Reserved Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 24 1 0 Configuration The bits ate defined as follows e Sx General status bits for channels 0 through 3 SO through S3 and the CJC sensor S4 This bit 1s set 1 when an error over range under range open circuit or input data not valid exists for that channel An input data not valid condition is determined by the user program Refer to the MicroLogix 1200 I O Thermocouple mV Input Module User Manual publication number 1762 UM002 for additional details e OCx Open circuit indication for channels 0 through 3 OCO through OC2 and the CJC sensor OC4 Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 O0 through O3 and the CJC sensor O4
524. rating Frequency Status PWM 0 0FS word INT Oto 20 000 status read only 143 DC PWM Duty Cycle PWM 0 DC word INT 1to1000 control read write 143 DCS PWM Duty Cycle Status PWM 0 DCS word INT 1to1000 status read only 144 ADD Accel Decel Delay PWM 0 ADD word INT 0to 32 767 control read write 144 ER PWM Error Codes PWM 0 ER word INT 2to05 status read only 44 PWM Output OUT Element Address Data Range Type User Program Access Description Format OUT PWM Output PWM O OUT word INT 2or3 status readonly The PWM OUT Output variable defines the physical output that the PWM instruction controls This variable is set within the function file folder when the control program is written and cannot be set by the user program The outputs are defined as O0 0 2 or O0 0 3 as listed below e O0 0 0 2 PWM modulates output 2 of the embedded outputs 1762 L24BXB 1762 L40BXB and 1764 28BX B e O0 0 0 3 PWM modulates output 3 of the embedded outputs 1764 28BXB only Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 139 140 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 PWM Decelerating Status DS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access DS Decelerating Status PWM 0 DS bit Qor1 status read only The PWM DS Decel bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input ins
525. ration or injury to personnel may occur Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table RES Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 z g Address Address Data Files Function Files Mode Level o a Parameter z 2 E ec 3 3583s I 1 te Oo ol e Tot e gajo 9 jo ziERI I omEsESgsLs t e E A qian l ie 2 x eo J S fue S IE i mo S FS S a Ela lo S S la Structure Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 162 Timer and Counter Instructions Notes Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Chapter 9 Compare Instructions Use these input instructions when you want to compare values of data Instruction Used To Page EQU Equal Test whether two values are equal 164 NEQ Not Equal Test whether one value is not equal to a 164 second value LES Less Than Test whether one value is less than a second 165 value LEQ Less Than or Equal To Test whether one value is less than or equal 165 to a second value lt GRT Greater Than Test whether one value is greater than a 165 second value gt GEO Greater Than or Equal To Test whether one value is greater than or 1
526. re is transferred through a mask and compared against the source for equality While the rung remains true the source is compared against the reference data for every scan If equal the FD bit is set in the SQCs control counter Applications of the SQC instruction include machine diagnostics The following figure explains how the SQC instruction works Word B10 11 B10 12 B10 13 B10 14 B10 15 0010 1111 sac Sequencer Compare CEN gt File B10 11 Mask FFF CDN gt Source 1 3 0 Control R6 21 CFD 5 Length 4 lt Position 2 lt Input Word 1 3 0 0100 1 001 1101 Mask Value FFFO 1111 L 111 0000 Y Sequencer Ref File B10 11 0000 Step Aa wD SQC FD bit is set when the instruction detects that an input word matches through mask its corresponding reference word The FD bit R6 21 FD is set in the example since the input word matches the sequencer reference value using the mask value Sequencer Instructions 217 This instruction uses the following operands o File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents on an element by element basis are masked and compared to the masked value stored in soutce TIP If file type is word then mask and source must be words If file type is long word mask and source must be long words e Mask The mask operand contains the mask constant word
527. red in a user configured battery backed queue The size of the queue is 48K bytes independent of the rest of the processor memory Configuring the DLG instruction in the Micrologix 1500 LRP 1 Create a new RSLogix 500 project for the 1764 LRP processor 2 Create a new rung of ladder logic in File 2 as shown below DLG DataLog queue rumber FYI The DLG instruction ONLY captures data on a false to true rung transition Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 482 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 3 Double Click Data Logging Configuration in the controller organizer to access the Data Log Queue Configuration window DATALOGEXAMPLE RSS mix m Help Egg Controller i Controller Properties Processor Status o Function Files Al IO Configuration pe Channel Configuration Bg Program Files svso SYS1 4 Lap2 Data Files Cross Reference E 00 ourPur El n input Ei 2 status E 83 BINARY E 14 TIMER E c5 COUNTER E R6 CONTROL E N7 INTEGER El F8 FLOAT B Data Logging D Configuration E status FYI Every time Configuration above is double clicked a new queue is added To delete queues simply select the queue with the mouse and press the delete key on the keyboard Double Click on Data Log configuration to open the Configuration window Data Log Queue Configuration BE xl Data Log Configuration Cancel Help Knowledgebas
528. respond CONNECT 9600 Once the connection is established exit Hyper Terminal by selecting File Exit from the pull down menu When asked Do you want to close connection select Yes This will only close the connection from HyperTerminal to the RS 232 port The connection will remain active FYI It will appear as though HyperTerminal has disconnected It has not the connection is still established only HyperTerminal is no longer running 6 Open the Data Logging Utility 7 Select in the DLG Utility the COMM port that the PC modem is configured for 8 Click Connect DISCONNECTING MODEM 1 1 Ensure the DLG Utility has been shutdown 2 2 Start HyperTerminal Do not re connect 3 3 Open the previously configured Datalog 4 Type to place modem in command mode Do not press the ENTER KEY Your modem will respond OK 5 Type ATH 6 Press Enter This will send the disconnect command to modem Glossary The following terms are used throughout this manual Refer to the A en Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary Publication Number AG 7 1 for a complete guide to Allen Bradley technical terms address A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location For example I 1 0 is the memory address for data located in Input file word 1 bit 0 AIC Advanced Interface Converter A device that provides RS 232 isolation to an RS 485 Half Duplex communication link Catalog Number 1761 NET AIC
529. ressing of a Word B3 0 ADD 0000 J E Add 0 Source A N7 N10 1 0 lt Source B 1234 1234 lt Dest N11 33 0 lt e Address N7 N10 1 n this example the element number to be used for source A in the ADD instruction is defined by the number located in N10 1 If the value of location N10 1 15 the ADD instruction operates as N7 15 Source B n this example the element specified by N10 1 must be between 0 and 255 because all data files have a maximum individual size of 256 elements TIP If a number larger than the number of elements in the data file is placed in N10 1 in this example data integrity cannot be guaranteed because a file boundary will be crossed This may not generate a controller fault but the data location is invalid unknown Indirect Addressing of a File LIM B3 0 COP 0001 Limit Test J E Copy File Low Lim 10 0 Source N N50 100 10 10 lt Dest N7 0 Test N50 100 Length 15 10 lt High Lim 25 25 lt e Address N N50 100 10 Description In this example the source of the COP instruction is indirected by N50 100 The data in N50 100 defines the data file number to be used in the instruction In this example the copy instruction source A is defined by N N50 100 10 When the instruction is scanned the data in N50 100 is used to define the data file to be used for the COP instruction If the value of location N50 100 27 this instru
530. rgized RTU Remote Terminal Unit save To save a program to a computer hard disk scan The scan is made up of four elements input scan program scan output scan and housekeeping scan time The time required for the controller to complete one scan sinking A term used to describe current flow between two devices A sinking device provides a direct path to ground sourcing A term used to describe current flow between two devices A sourcing device or circuit provides a power status The condition of a circuit or system terminal A point on an I O module that external devices such as a push button or pilot light are wired to Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 498 Glossary Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 throughput The time between when an input turns on and a corresponding output turns on or off Throughput consists of input delays program scan output delays and overhead true The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on a ladder rung upload Data is transferred from the controller to a programming or storage device watchdog timer A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle If the watchdog runs past its programmed time petiod it causes a fault wtite To send data to another device For example the processor writes data to another device with a message write instruction A ABL instruction 20 291
531. riable controls the output signal produced by the PWM sub system Changing this variable in the control program changes the output waveform Typical values and output waveform e DC 1000 100 Output ON constant no waveform e DC 750 75 Output ON 25 output OFF e DC 500 50 Output ON 50 output OFF e DC 250 25 Output ON 75 output OFF e DC 0 0 Output OFF constant no waveform Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 144 Using High Speed Outputs PWM Duty Cycle Status DCS Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access DCS PWM Duty Cycle Status PWM 0 DCS word INT 1to 1000 status read only The PWM DCS Duty Cycle Status provides feedback from the PWM sub system The Duty Cycle Status variable can be used within an input instruction on a rung of logic to provide PWM system status to the remaining control program PWM Accel Decel Delay ADD Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ADD Accel Decel Delay PWM 0 ADD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write PWM ADD Accel Decel Delay defines the amount of time in 10 millisecond intervals to ramp from zero to the specified frequency or duration Also specifies the time to ramp down to zero The PWM ADD value is loaded and activated immediately whenever the PWM instruction is scanned on a true rung of logic T
532. ription Page LIM Limit Test 167 MMI Memory Module Information 60 MCR Master Control Reset 226 PTO Pulse Train Output 123 MEO Mask Compare for Equal 166 PWM Pulse Width Modulation 138 MOV Move 195 RTC Real Time Clock 56 MSG Message 313 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt 242 MUL Multiply 175 TPI Trim Pot Information 59 MVM Masked Move 197 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com support Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Use the Worldwide Locator at http
533. rmation on using the module 1 0 Configuration 37 1 0 Addressing Addressing Details The I O addressing scheme and examples are shown below Slot Number Data File Number i Word File Type Y d Bit Input I or Output 0 Xd z S w b Slot Delimiter Word Delimiter Bit Delimiter 1 1 0 located on the controller embedded 1 0 is slot 0 1 0 added to the controller expansion 1 0 begins with slot 1 Format Explanation Od s w b X File Type Input I or Output 0 Data File Number optional 0 output 1 input Id s w b Slot delimiter optional not required for Data Files 2 to 255 S Slot number decimal Embedded 1 0 slot 0 Expansion I 0 e slots 1 to 6 for MicroLogix 1200 See page 16 for an illustration e slots 1 to 16 for MicroLogix 1500 See page 24 for an illustration Word delimiter Required only if a word number is necessary as noted below w Word number Required to read write words or if the discrete bit number is above 15 Range 0 to 255 Bit delimiter b Bit number 0 to 15 1 Slots 1 to 8 for Series A Base Units Addressing Examples Addressing Level Example Address Slot Word Bit Bit Addressing 0 0 4 2 Output Slot 0 Embedded 1 0 word 0 output bit 4 02 77 Output Slot 2 Expansion 1 0 word 0 output bit 7 1 42 Input Slot 1 Expansion 1 0 word 0 input bit 4 0 157 Input Slot 0 Embedded 1 0 word 0 input bit 15 Word Addres
534. rms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 i NES Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode P E Parameter 8 2 E e S z ec pe z is E 5 E oO o je R S j l z 2 Je l la Im 14 JE 2 Is Je Is JE Ila oO Il jm Z ja bil E 2 Roo E a RE 6 S ja E la la S ja Source e e e e e e e e e e e FIFO e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers or Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 208 File Instructions FFU First In First Out FIFO Unload Instruction Type output i Unload 2i I CEU gt Execution Time for the FFU Instruction d Mn CDN 5 Controller Data Size When Rung Is Length 1 L EM gt True False Fesiaan ds MicroLogix 1200 word 33 us 0 8 us word 10 4 us long word 36 us 1 5 us long word 10 4 us MicroLogix 1500 word 27 7 us 0 65 us word 97 us long word 29 4 us 1 25 us long word 9 7 us On a false to true rung transition the FFU instruction unloads words or long words from a user created fil
535. rms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode o Parameter E E 2 E e E ec a _ F 3 ls l 5 z c3 a la jo l jo l _ l E le 2 ln I JE e 1S l 15 2 5 o lv om Ie jz 5 lu S a E 2 IF IG al IS ls 18 S a j jz Su Source e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination o e jojo o LE 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Using Decode and Encode Instructions Chapter 11 Conversion Instructions The conversion instructions multiplex and de multiplex data and perform convetsions between binary and decimal values Instruction Used To Page DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Decodes a 4 bit value 0 to 15 turning on the 182 corresponding bit in the 16 bit destination ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Encodes a 16 bit source to a 4 bit value 182 Searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit and looks for the first set bit The corresponding bit position is written to the destination as an integer FRD Convert From Binary Converts the BCD source value to an integerand 184 Coded Decimal stores it in the
536. roLogix 1500 1764 LRP FRN 8 and higher Channel 1 only This driver implements a protocol optimized for use with radio modem networks that is a hybrid between DF1 Full Duplex and DF1 Half Duplex protocols and is not compatible with either protocol The primary advantage of using DF1 Radio Modem protocol for radio modem networks is in transmission efficiency Each read write transaction command and reply requires only one transmission by the initiator to send the command and one transmission by the responder to return the reply This minimizes the number of times the radios need to key up to transmit which maximizes radio life and minimizes radio power consumption It also maximizes communication throughput In contrast DF1 Half Duplex protocol requires five transmissions for the DF1 Master to complete a read write transaction with a DF1 Slave three by the master and two by the slave IMPORTANT The DF1 Radio Modem driver should only be used among devices that support and are configured for the DF1 Radio Modem protocol As of the release of this firmware no other devices besides the MicroLogix 1200 with FRN7 the MicroLogix 1500 with FRN8 and SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors with Series C FRN6 or higher support DF1 Radio Modem protocol Protocol Configuration 439 Like DF1 Full Duplex protocol DF1 Radio Modem allows any node to initiate to any other node at any time if the radio modem network suppotts full dup
537. rocessor Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 436 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Protocol Configuration Monitor Active Stations To see which slave stations are active when the channel is configured for Standard Polling Mode either single or multiple message per scan view the DF1 Half Duplex Master Active Node Table The table is stored in the Communications Status Function File words CSx 27 to CSx 42 where x is the channel number x 0 for MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP x 1 for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Each bit in the table represents a station on the link from 0 to 254 starting with CSx 27 0 for address 0 and CSx 42 14 for address 254 The bit for address 255 CSx 42 15 is never set since it is the broadcast address which never gets polled When valid Normal and or Priority Poll Ranges are defined o if a slave responded the last time it was polled by the master the bit corresponding to its address is set 1 active e if a slave didn t respond the last time it was polled by the master the bit corresponding to its address is cleared 0 inactive TIP The bit corresponding to the address configured for the DF1 Master is always cleared because the master address never gets polled If you are using RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 or higher you can view the active node table by clicking on Processor Status and then selecting the tab for the DF1 Master channel Exam
538. rol data file Characters Sent POS is the number of characters that the controller sends to an external device This is word 2 in the control data file Characters Sent POS is updated after all characters have been transmitted The valid range for POS is from 0 to 84 The number of characters sent to the destination may be smaller or greater than the specified String Length LEN as described below Characters Sent POS may be smaller than String Length LEN if the length of the string sent is less than what was specified in the String Length LEN field Characters Sent POS can be greater than the String Length LEN if the appended characters or inserted values from in line indirection are used If the String Length LEN is greater than 82 the string written to the destination is truncated to 82 characters plus the number of append characters this number could be 82 83 or 84 depending on how many append characters are used Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 306 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below AWA Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address iles
539. ror Code PTO 0 ER word INT 3 to 7 status read only PTO ER Error Codes detected by the PTO sub system are displayed in this register The error codes are shown in the table below Error Non User Recoverable Instruction Error Description Code Fault Fault Errors Name 3 No Yes Yes Undefined Acceleration Count and Deceleration not defined during going to run mode Accel when Accel Decel Pulses Independent ADI is set 1 Decel 2 Yes No No Overlap An output overlap is detected Multiple functions are assigned to the same Error physical output This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute Example PTOO and PTO1 are both attempting to use a single output 1 Yes No No Output An invalid output has been specified Output 2 and output3 are the only valid Error choices This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute 0 Normal Normal 0 no error present 1 No No Yes Hardstop This error is generated whenever a hard stop is detected This error doesnot Detected fault the controller To clear this error scan the PTO instruction on a false rung and reset the EH Enable Hard Stop bit to 0 2 No No Yes Output The configured PTO output 2 or 3 is currently forced The forced condition Forced must be removed for the PTO to operate Error This error does not fault the controller It is automaticall
540. ros and cons of each polling mode are described below Message Based Polling Mode Message based polling mode is best used in networks when communication with the slave stations is not time critical and where the user needs to be able to limit when and how often the master station communicates with each slave station It is not recommended for larger systems that require time critical communication between the master and all the slave stations or for systems where slave station initiated messages are going to be used Protocol Configuration 429 With Message Based polling mode the only time a master station communicates with a slave station is when a message MSG instruction in ladder logic is triggered to that particular slave station s address This polling mode gives the user complete control through ladder logic over when and how often to communicate with each slave station If multiple MSG instructions are triggered simultaneously they will be executed in order one at a time to completion i e the first MSG queued up will be transmitted and completed to done or error before the next queued up MSG is transmitted Any time a message is triggered to a slave station that cannot respond for instance if its modem fails the message will go through retries and time outs that will slow down the execution of all the other queued up messages The minimum time to message to every responding slave station increases linearly with the n
541. ruction 370 SOR Square Root 180 ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 182 STS Selectable Timed Start 238 END Program End 226 SUB Subtract 174 EQU Equal 164 SUS Suspend 225 FFL First In First Out FIFO Load 206 SWP Swap 214 FFU First In First Out FIFO Unload 208 TND Temporary End 225 FLL Fill File 201 TOD Convert to Binary Coded Decimal BCD 187 FRD Convert from Binary Coded Decimal BCD 184 TOF Timer Off Delay 156 GCD Gray Code 189 TON Timer On Delay 155 GEQ Greater Than or Equal To 165 UID User Interrupt Disable 239 GRT Greater Than 165 UIE User Interrupt Enable 240 HSL High Speed Counter Load 110 UIF User Interrupt Flush 241 IIM Immediate Input with Mask 229 XIC Examine if Closed 147 INT Interrupt Subroutine 238 XIO Examine if Open 147 IOM Immediate Output with Mask 230 XOR Exclusive OR 193 JMP Jump to Label 223 Function File Description Page JSR Jump to Subroutine 224 BHI Base Hardware Information 66 LBL Label 224 CS Communications Status 66 LEQ Less Than or Equal To 165 DAT Data Access Tool Information 63 LES Less Than 165 Ell Event Input Interrupt 247 LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load 210 HSC High Speed Counter 87 LFU Last In First Out LIFO Unload 212 IOS 1 0 Status 79 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 510 MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 List of Instructions and Function Files Instruction Description Page Instruction Desc
542. ruction with S 5 2 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 400 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 System Status File Mayor Error Detected in User Fault Routine Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 3 binary Oor1 status read write When set 1 the major error code S 6 represents the major error that occurred while processing the User Fault Routine due to another major error Memory Module Boot Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 8 binary 00r 1 status read write When this bit is set 1 by the controller it indicates that a memory module program has been transferred due to 1 10 Load Memory Module on Error or Default Program or S 1 11 Load Memory Module Always being set in an attached memory module user program This bit is not cleared 0 by the controller Your program can examine the state of this bit on the first scan using bit S 1 15 on entry into an Executing mode to determine if the memory module user program has been transferred after a power up occurred This information is useful when you have an application that contains retentive data and a memory module has bit S 1 10 or bit S 1 11 set Memory Module Password Mismatch Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 9 binary 00r 1 status read write At power up if Load Always is set and the controller and
543. ructions 221 S00 Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 7 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level 2 Mode o E Parameter 8 g E e iu le c S a ma SFE Bisigiz e 21 o a je 2 Ol Ilse lS i l ly lo JE IS Is S e O a ja e LL bz a a fe 2 E 5 ui Ei z a e 6 e a a E a a S S Mask e e e e e e Des ination e e e e e Control 3 Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 File Direct and File Indirect addressing also applies 3 Control file only SQL Sequencer Load SQL Sequencer Load File N7 0 Source 1 0 0 Control R6 0 Length 1 Position 0 lt cen gt N IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output Execution Time for the SOL Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 21 7 us 1 0 us long word 24 3 us 74 us MicroLogix 1500 word 19 1 us 6 3 us long word 21 1 us 6 3 us On a false to true rung transition the SOL instruction loads words or long words into a sequencer file at each step of a sequencer
544. rung conditions go false RTO Retentive Timer On Delay Timer Time Base Preset Accum Retentive Timer On CEN 5 10 lt DN gt 0 lt Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 ATTENTION Because the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and status bits do not use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF instruction If the TOF accumulated value and status bits are reset unpredictable machine operation may occur A Instruction Type output Execution Time for the RTO Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 18 0 us 2 4 us MicroLogix 1500 15 8 us 22 us Timer and Counter Instructions 157 Use the RTO instruction to delay turning on an output The RTO begins to count time base intervals when the rung conditions become true As long as the rung conditions remain true the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached The RTO retains the accumulated value when the following occur e rung conditions become false you change the controller mode from run or test to program the processor loses power a fault occurs When you return the controller to the RUN or TEST mode and or the rung conditions go true timing continues from the retained accumulated value RTO timers are retained through power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following control and status bits Counter Contr
545. s 44 3 ps character 10 6 us Use the ARL instruction to read characters from the buffer up to and including the Termination characters and store them in a string The Termination characters are specified via the Channel Configuration screen Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 L RP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 Destination is the string element where you want the string stored Control is the control data file See page 283 e String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to read from the buffer The maximum is 82 characters If you specify a length larger than 82 only the first 82 characters are read and moved to the destination A length of 0 defaults to 82 This is word 1 in the control data file Characters Read POS is the number of characters that the controller moved from the buffer to the string 0 to 82 This field is read only and resides in word 2 of the control data file Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 306 for error code desctiptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ARL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address
546. s support multiple program files Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 496 X Glossary Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 program mode When the controller is not scanning the control program program scan A part of the controller s operating cycle During the program scan the logic program is processed and the Output Image is updated programming device Programming package used to develop ladder logic diagrams protocol The rules of data exchange via communications read To acquire data For example the processor reads information from other devices via a read message relay An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits relay logic A representation of binary or discrete logic restore To transfer a program from a device to a controller reserved bit A location reserved for internal use retentive data Information data that is preserved through power cycles RS 232 An EIA standard that specifies electrical mechanical and functional characteristics for serial binary communication circuits Glossary 497 run mode An executing mode during which the controller scans or executes the logic program rung A rung contains input and output instructions During Run mode the inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true or false If a path of true logic exists the outputs are made true energized If all paths are false the outputs are made false de ene
547. s 0 through 6 and Bit 15 of words 6 and 7 should always be set to zero in your control program If they are not set to 0 the invalid data flag Ex will be setfor that channel by the module However the channel will continue to operate with the previously converted value The bits ate defined as follows e SGN Sign bit in two s complement format Always positive equal to zero for the 1769 IF4XOF2 module e Ix Over range flag bits for input channels 0 through 3 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection When set to 1 the bits signal that the input signal is outside the normal operating range However the module continues to convert analog data to the maximum full range value When the over range condition is cleared the bits automatically reset 0 Ox Word 5 bits 0 and 1 provide over range indication for output channels 0 and 1 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection When set to 1 the bits signal that the output signal is outside the normal operating range However the module continues to convert analog data to the maximum full range value When the over range condition is cleared the bits automatically reset 0 TIP Under range indication is not provided because zero is a valid number e Ex When set 1 this bit indicates that invalid data e g the value sent by the controller is outside the standard output range or increment e g 128 256 etc has been set in th
548. s associated data are processed immediately TIP How quickly the message is actually sent to the destination device depends on a number of issues including the selected channel s communication protocol the baud rate of the communications port the number of retries needed if any and the destination device s readiness to receive the message Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 314 Communications Instructions The Message Element The MSG instruction built into the controller uses a MG data file to process the Message File Element 1 3 Data Files TEST RSS Cmm message instruction The MG data file shown at left is accessed using the MG prefix Each message instruction utilizes an element within a MG data file For Cross Reference example MG11 0 is the first element in message data file 11 E OUTPUT E 1 INPUT E s2 STATUS E B3 BINARY E T4 Timer E cs COUNTER E R6 CONTROL E N7 INTEGER El mais Message File Sub Elements Each MSG instruction must use a unique Element in a MSG File The MSG z element for each MSG instruction holds all of the parameters and status information for that particular MSG instruction Each MSG File Element consists of Sub Elements 0 through 24 as shown in the following table Sub Name Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 0 to 1 Reserved Word read only 2 Messaging Type 0 for PCC
549. s at a time in a single rung You can use bit integer or double integer files with sequencer instructions SQC Sequencer Compare Instruction Type output Sac Sequencer campare lt EN gt Execution Time for the SQC Instruction Mask Me m lt N gt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Control R6 0 lt FD gt True False SUE M MicroLogix 1200 word 23 5 us 14 us long word 26 3 us 74 us MicroLogix 1500 word 20 1 us 6 3 us long word 22 7 us 6 3 us On a false to true rung transition the SQC instruction is used to compare masked source words or long words with the masked value at a reference address the sequencer file for the control of sequential machine operations When the status of all non masked bits in the source word match those of the corresponding reference word the instruction sets the found bit FD in the control word Otherwise the found bit FD is cleared Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 216 Sequencer Instructions Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 The bits mask data when reset 0 and pass data when set 1 The mask can be fixed or variable If you enter a hexadecimal code it is fixed If you enter an element address or a file address direct or indirect for changing the mask with each step it is variable When the rung goes from false to true the instruction increments to the next step word in the sequencer file Data stored the
550. s of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User For More Descriptions Program Information Access KC Controller Gain Kg PD10 0 KC word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 261 TI Reset Term T PD10 0 Ti word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 261 TD Rate Term Ty PD 10 0 TD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 262 TM Time Mode PD10 0 TM binary Oor1 control read write 262 LUT Loop Update Time PD10 0 LUT word INT 1 to 1024 control read write 262 ZCD Zero Crossing Deadband PD10 0 7CD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 263 FF Feed Forward Bias PD10 0 FF word INT 16 383 to 16 383 control read write 263 SE Scaled Error PD10 0 SE word INT 32 768 to 432 767 status read only 263 AM Automatic Manual PD10 0 AM binary bit Dor 1 control read write 264 CM Control Mode PD10 0 CM binary bit 0 or 1 control read write 264 DB PV in Deadband PD10 0 DB binary bit Oor1 status read write 264 RG PLC 5 Gain Range PD10 0 RG binary bit Oor 1 control read write 265 SC Setpoint Scaling PD10 0 SC binary bit 0 or 1 control read write 265 TF Loop Update Too Fast PD10 0 TF binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 265 DA Derivative Action Bit PD10 0 DA binary bit Oor1 control read write 266 UL CV Upper Limit Alarm PD10 0 UL binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 266 LL CV Lower Li
551. s of the time base e Accumulator The accumulator counts the time base intervals It represents elapsed time The accumulator data range is from 0 to 32767 Timers can be set to any one of three time bases Timer Base Settings Time Base Timing Range 0 001 seconds 0 to 32 767 seconds 0 01 seconds 0 to 327 67 seconds 1 00 seconds 0 to 32 767 seconds Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 154 Timer and Counter Instructions Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Each timer address is made of a 3 word element Word 0 is the control and status wotd wotd 1 stores the preset value and wotd 2 stores the accumulated value Timer File Word BE 00S 15 14 173 172 11 10 9 8 7 65 43 2 1 0 WordO JEN ITT JDN nternal Use Word 1 Preset Value Word2 Accumulated Value EN Timer Enable Bit TT Timer Timing Bit DN Timer Done Bit ATTENTION Do not copy timer elements while the timer enable bit EN is set Unpredictable machine operation may occur Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Timer Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address Address Data Files Function Files gt Mode Level P E E co T Parame
552. s the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 L RP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 300 ASCII Instructions Destination is the string element where you want the characters stored Control is the control data file See page 283 String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to read from the buffer The maximum is 82 characters If you specify a length larger than 82 only the first 82 characters will be read If you specify 0 characters LEN defaults to 82 This is word 1 in the control data file e Characters Read POS is the number of characters that the controller moved from the buffer to the string 0 to 82 This field is updated during the execution of the instruction and is read only This is word 2 in the control data file e Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 306 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below ARD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 Address iles Function Files Address Level Data Files 2 Mode l Parameter S2 T z E o S S z S g ec a S F B ls is 65 E g ls jo lg l
553. saging Remote messaging is the ability to exchange information with a device that is not connected to the local netwotk This type of connection requires a device on the local network to act as a bridge ot gateway to the other network Remote Networks DH 485 and DH Networks The illustration below shows two networks a DH 485 and a DH network The SLC 5 04 processor at DH 485 node 17 is configured for passthru operation Devices that are capable of remote messaging and are connected on either network can initiate read or write data exchanges with devices on the other network based on each device s capabilities In this example node 12 on DH 485 is a MicroLogix Communications Instructions 347 1500 The MicroLogix 1500 can respond to remote message requests from nodes 40 or 51 on the DH network and it can initiate a message to any node on the DH network TIP The MicroLogix 1000 can respond to remote message requests but it cannot initiate them TIP The MicroLogix 1200 capabilities are the same as the MicroLogix 1500 in this example This functionality is also available on Ethernet by replacing the SLC 5 04 at DH 485 node 17 with an SLC 5 05 processor DH 485 and DH Networks SLC 5 04 PanelView 5 DH 485 Network AIC AIC Node 12 AIC Node 17 AIC Fel sd gl MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 SLC 5 04
554. scaled process variable and scaled error in these units as well The control output percentage word 16 is displayed as a percentage of the 0 to 16383 CV range The actual value transferred to the CV output is always between 0 and 16383 When you select scaling the instruction scales the setpoint deadband process variable and error You must consider the effect on all these variables when you change scaling Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 272 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Zero Crossing Deadband DB The adjustable deadband lets you select an error range above and below the setpoint where the output does not change as long as the error remains within this range This lets you control how closely the process variable matches the setpoint without changing the output DB SP Error range DB Time Zeto crossing is deadband control that lets the instruction use the error for computational purposes as the process variable crosses into the deadband until it crosses the setpoint Once it crosses the setpoint error crosses zero and changes sign and as long as it remains in the deadband the instruction considers the error value zero for computational purposes Select deadband by entering a value in the deadband storage word word 9 in the control block The deadband extends above and below the setpoint by the value you enter A value of zero inhibits this feature The de
555. set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 438 Protocol Configuration DF1 Half Duplex Slave Configuration Parameters All MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Parameter Options Programming Software Default Message Retries 0 to 255 3 Specifies the number of times the master device attempts to re send a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the slave device For use in noisy environments where acknowledgements may become corrupted in transmission Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from transmit to receive mode When the Control Line is set to Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the next RTS assertion DF1 Radio Modem Protocol TIP DF1 Radio Modem driver can be used with the following controllers Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 MicroLogix 1200 FRN 7 and higher MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP FRN 8 and higher Mic
556. sing 0 1 0 Output Slot 1 Expansion 1 0 word 0 I7 3 Input Slot 7 Expansion 1 0 word 3 3 1 Input Slot 3 Expansion 1 0 word 1 1 The optional Data File Number is not shown in these examples 2 A word delimiter and number are not shown Therefore the address refers to word 0 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 38 1 0 Configuration 1 0 Forcing Input Filtering Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 I O forcing is the ability to override the actual status of the I O at the uset s discretion Input Forcing When an input is forced the value in the input data file is set to a user defined state For discrete inputs you can force an input on or off When an input is forced it no longer reflects the state of the physical input or the input LED For embedded inputs the controller reacts as if the force is applied to the physical input terminal TIP When an input is forced it has no effect on the input device connected to the controller Output Forcing When an output is forced the controller overrides the status of the control program and sets the output to the user defined state Discrete outputs can be forced on or off The value in the output file is unaffected by the force It maintains the state determined by the logic in the control program However the state of the physical output and the output LED will be set to the forced state TIP If you force an output controlled
557. slave indicates that it has no more message packets to transmit standard polling mode multiple messages per scan or just one time per polling sequence standard polling mode single message per scan depending on how the master is configured The polling algorithm polls all of the priority slave addresses each poll scan priority low to priority high and a subset of the normal slave address range The numbet of normal slave addresses to poll each poll scan is determined by the Normal Poll Group Size configuration parameter In order to poll all of the slave addresses each poll scan with equal priority you may define the entire slave address Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 432 Protocol Configuration Channel Configuration E F General Channel 0 range in either the Priority Poll Range or the Normal Poll Range and leave the other range disabled The Polling Range is disabled by defining the low address as 255 An additional feature of the DF1 Half Duplex protocol in Standard Polling Mode operation is that it is possible for a slave device to enable a MSG instruction in its ladder program to send or request data to from the master or another slave When the initiating slave is polled the message command is sent to the master If the message is addressed to the master then the master replies to the message If the master recognizes that the message is not intended for it but for another slave the master immediately re
558. sor Type 1747 L511 1764 1764 1764 1764 1764 1762 1762 1762 1761 1761 1761 1747 L40 1747 L40B Communication settings Driver Micrologix MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix 24 115 VAC 24 115 VAC 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1200 1200 1200 1000 1000 1000 In In 1K Mem Processor Name PLS 5701 CPU Micrologix Micrologix Micrologix LRP Series LRP Series LSP Series LSP Series LSP Series Series C Series B Series A Analog DH 485 HDSlave Td Oto 16 RLY Out 16 TRIAC Out E duh Processor Node AB_DF1 1 I Decimal 1 Who Active fio 5ec Octal Reply Timeout Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 OK Cancel Help d LAU Z fen Data Files Cross Reference E 00 ourPur E n Input E s2 status E B3 BINARY E 14 TIMER E c5 COUNTER E R6 CONTROL E N7 INTEGER E F8 FLOAT E PLs10 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch 115 2 Right click on Data Files and select Nem Program Files SYS 0 SYS 1 4 Lap 2 oa Cross Ei oo c El n ine El s2 s Ci 83 BINARY New UnHide Properties 3 Enter a file number 9 to 255 and select Programmable Limit Switch as the type A Name and or Description may be entered as well but is not required IIITIOxm x F
559. ss is not allowed 83 Illegal Data Value The data value being written is not allowed either because it is out 3 of range or it is being written to a read only address 84 Slave Device Failure An unrecoverable error occurred while the slave was attempting to 4 perform the requested action 85 Acknowledge The slave has accepted the request but a long duration of time will 5 be required to process the request 86 Slave Device Busy The slave is currently processing a long duration command 6 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Modbus Error Codes in Modbus RTU Master MSG Instruction MicroLogix 1200 FRN 8 and higher MicroLogix 1500 FRN 9 and higher Protocol Configuration 455 Error Error Description Received Exception Code Code 87 Negative Acknowledge The slave cannot perform the program function received in the 7 command 88 Memory Parity Error The slave attempted to read extended memory but detected a 8 parity error in the memory 89 Non standard Error Code An error code greater than 8 was returned by the slave gt 8 When Channel 0 or Channel 1 is configured for Modbus RTU Master or Modbus ASCII Driver RTU Slave the associated Channel Status screen displays a Link Layer Error Count and a Link Layer Error Code Use the table below to interpret the Link Layer Error Code being displayed Modbus RTU Link Layer Error Codes Error Code Description No error No receive b
560. st Low Limit or Test High Limit false High Limit Low Limit High Limit Test Low Limit false High Limit Low Limit Test 2 High Limit or Test Low Limit true The Low Limit Test and High Limit values can be word addresses ot constants restricted to the following combinations Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 168 Compare Instructions e If the Test parameter is a constant both the Low Limit and High Limit parameters must be word or long word addresses e If the Test parameter is a word or long word address the Low Limit and High Limit parameters can be either a constant a word or a long word address But the Low Limit and High Limit parameters cannot both be constants When mixed sized parameters are used all parameters are put into the format of the largest parameter For instance if a word and a long word are used the word is converted to a long wotd The data ranges are e 32768 to 32767 word e 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table LIM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 7 Address Data Files Function Files a Address Level gt Mode D 3 Parameter 8 8 E e uS Eri t cc a
561. suspend instruction resides are placed in the status file S 7 and S 8 The immediate data range for the suspend ID is from 32768 to 32767 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the TND Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 10 9 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 11 0 us 0 0 us Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 226 Program Control Instructions END Program End CEND gt MCR Master Control Reset CMCR Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 The TND instruction is used to denote a premature end of ladder program execution The TND instruction cannot be executed from a STI subroutine HSC subroutine EII subroutine or a user fault subroutine This instruction may appear more than once in a ladder program On a true rung TND stops the processor from scanning the rest of the program file In addition this instruction performs the output scan input scan and housekeeping aspects of the processor scan cycle prior to resuming scanning at rung 0 of the main program file 2 If this instruction is executed in a nested subroutine it terminates execution of all nested subroutines Instruction Type output The END instruction must appear at the end of every ladder program For the main program file file 2 this instruction ends the program scan For a subroutine interrupt or user fault file the END instruction causes a return from subroutine Instruction Type
562. t indicates LIFO is empty Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the LIFO stack The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word Position This is the next location in the LIFO stack where data will be unloaded Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 word or 0 to 63 long word The position is decremented after each unload LFU Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 DN Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level 2 Mode 7 Parameter E 2 E e T T a P Fe g fa le z 28 m g ja le 2 e le l z E t az la 2 3 JE e j le S sis o lv lm le le lu Ib 4 S le EIS GIG Ela Sls Elg e la E le s la jS ja LIFO e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e e Control 2 Length Position 1 See Important 2 Control file on note abo y Not val t indirect addressing id for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 214 File Instructions SWP Swap Swap Length
563. t 2107 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The LPM Low Preset Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a low preset interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a Low Preset Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Low Preset Interrupt LPI Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access LPI Low HSC 0 LPI ibi Preset Interrupt t 2to7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 101 The LPI Low Preset Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator reaches the low preset value and the HSC interrupt has been triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the low preset condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the low preset this bit would be used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also be cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected e High Preset Interrupt executes Underflow Interrupt executes Overflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode Publication 1762 RMO01H
564. t address that remembers the rung state from the previous scan Output Bit This is the bit address which is set based on a false to true OSR or true to false OSF rung transition The Output Bit is set for one program scan To re activate the OSR the rung must become false To re activate the OSF the rung must become true OSR Storage and Output Bit Operation Rung State Transition Storage Bit Output Bit false to true one scan bit is set bit is set true to true bit is set bit is reset true to false and false to false bit is reset bit is reset OSF Storage and Output Bits Operation Rung State Transition Storage Bit Output Bit true to false one scan bit is reset bit is set false to false bit is reset bit is reset false to true and true to true bit is set bit is reset Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table OSR and OSF Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 5 Address Data Files Function Files Address Level Mode o Er E cs o T Parameter E lo 8s s S ec a 8 f 59 S S g la le lg le l l lz E ie l W la Ie E le l 15 8 5 vV ja e Z ja bz a B la t 2 E ib i a a 6 e a j la 2 S la Storage Bit Output Bit e e e e e e e e
565. t and output scans User Interrupt STS INT UID UIE UIF The user interrupt instructions allow you to interrupt your program based on 233 defined events Process Control PID The process control instruction provides closed loop control 253 ASCII ABL ACB ACI ACL ACN AEX AHL AIC ARD ARL ASC ASR AWA AWT The ASCII instructions 279 convert and write ASCII strings They cannot be used with MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series A processors Communications MSG SVC The communication instructions read or write data to another station 309 Recipe RCP The recipe instruction allows you to transfer a data set between the recipe database and a set of 359 MicroLogix 1500 only user specified data table elements Data Logging DLG The data logging instruction allow you to capture time stamped and date stamped data 359 1 The RTA Real Time Clock Adjust Instruction appears on page 58 following the Real Time Clock Function File information Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 82 Programming Instructions Overview Using the Instruction Throughout this manual each instruction or group of similar instructions has a Descriptions table similar to the one shown below This table provides information for all sub elements or components of an instruction or group of instructions This table identifies the type of compatible address that can be used for each sub element of an instruction or group of instructions in a
566. t any other address within the file Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Function Files 65 Target Bit File TBF The value stored in the TBF location identifies the bit file with which the DAT will interface The DAT can read or write to any valid bit file within the controller Valid bit files are B3 through B255 When the DAT reads a valid bit file number it can access the first 48 bits 0 to 47 of the specified file on its display screen The next 48 bits 48 to 95 are used to define the read only or read write privileges for the first 48 bits The only bit file that the DAT interfaces with is the file specified in the TBF location The TBF location can only be changed by a program download IMPORTANT Use your programming software to ensure that the bitfile you specify in the TBF location as well as the appropriate number of elements exist in the MicroLogix 1500 user program The example table below shows how the DAT uses the configuration information with bit file number 51 DAT 0 TBF 51 Bit Number Data Address Protection Bit Bit Number Data Address Protection Bit 0 1 0 48 16 B51 B5 32 32 B51 80 1 B51 1 B51 49 33 B51 33 B51 81 2 B51 2 B51 50 34 B51 34 B51 82 3 B51 3 B51 51 35 B51 35 B51 83 4 B51 4 B51 52 36 B51 36 B51 84 5 B51 5 B51 53 37 B51 37 B51 85 6 B51 6 B51 54 38 B51 38 B51 86 7 B51 7 B51 55 39 B51 39 B51 87 8 B51 8 B51 56 40 B51 40 B51 88 9 B51
567. t fit in the Destination the overflow is handled as follows If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear a saturated result is stored in the Destination If the Source is positive the Destination is 32767 word If the result is negative the Destination is 32768 If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is set the unsigned truncated value of the Source is stored in the Destination Source can be a constant or an address e Valid constants ate 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 196 Move Instructions MOV Instruction Valid Addressing M Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table odes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 1 2 Address Data Files Function Files a 4 Address Level gt Mode a sS Parameter E 8 2 E r 2 B SPCR li kE c z d la jo l lo l _ l E le le Lt ln Iw le le s s 2 ol la a elz l l s a k l2 E5 ala S EES ile lal ile le is 3 ia Source e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e e 6 6 6 6 e e e e 1 The ST file is not valid for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series A processors 2 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are valid for Mi
568. t is set 1 when an error over range under range open circuit ot input data not valid exists for that channel An input data not valid condition is determined by the user program This condition occurs when the first analog to digital conversion is still in progress after a new configuration has been sent to the module OCx Open circuit detection bits indicate an open input circuit on channels 0 through 5 OCO through OC5 and on CJC sensors CJCO OC6 and CJC1 OC7 The bit is set 1 when an open circuit condition exists e Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 through 5 and the CJC sensors U6 and U7 For thermocouple inputs the under range bit is set when a temperature measurement is below the normal operating range for a given thermocouple type For millivolt inputs the under range bit indicates a voltage that is below the normal operating range These bits can be used in the control program for error detection Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 5 and the CRC sensors O6 and O7 For thermocouple inputs the over range bit is set when a temperature measurement is above the normal operating range for a given thermocouple type For millivolt inputs the over range bit indicates a voltage that is above the normal operating range These bits can be used in the control program for error detection 1769 HSC High Speed Counter Module Output Array The information in the following table is a quick reference of the
569. t whether one value is equal to a second value The NEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is not equal to a second value EQU and NEO Instruction Operation Thstruction Relationship of Source Values Resulting RungState W A 8B we aa AzB false NEQ A B false AzB true GRT Greater Than LES Less Than GRT Greater Than A gt B Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt LES Less Than A B Source A 7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt GEQ Greater Than or Equal To LEQ Less Than or Equal To GEQ Grtr Than or Eql A gt B I Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt LEQ Less Than or Egl A B Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt Instruction Type input Execution Time for the GRT and LES Instructions Compare Instructions 165 Controller Data Size When Rungis True False MicroLogix 1200 word 1 3 us 1 1 us long word 28 us 2 7 us MicroLogix 1500 word 1 2 us 1 1 us long word 2 6 us 2 5 US The GRT instruction is used to test whether one value is greater than a second value The LES instruction is used to test whether one value is less than a second value GRT and LES Instruction Operation Instruction Relationship of Source Values Resulting Rung State RT A gt B true A lt B false LES AB false A B true IMPORTANT Only use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC AC
570. ta SLC 500 command set all MicroLogix controllers Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 328 Communications Instructions Communication Command Types Communication Description Used For Command 500CPU Write The target device is compatible with and supports the sending data SLC 500 command set all MicroLogix controllers 485CIF Read The target device is compatible with and supports the reading data A85CIF PLC2 485CIF Write The target device is compatible with and supports the sending data A85CIF PLC2 PLC5 Read The target device is compatible with and supports the reading data PLC5 command set PLC5 Write The target device is compatible with and supports the sending data PLC5 command set CIP Generic The target device is compatible with and supports the CIP Sending and command set on DeviceNet 1769 SDN or DPI SCANport receiving data 1769 SM1 1 See Important note below 2 MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Series C FRN 6 and higher for DeviceNet messaging and DPI SCANport messaging IMPORTANT The Common Interface File CIF in the MicroLogix 1200 1500 and SLC 500 processors is File 9 The CIF in the MicroLogix 1000 controller is Integer File 7 Modbus Command 3 M56 Rung 2 0 MG11 1 i loj x General This Controller r Control Bits Channel Ignore if timed out TO 0 Modbus Command 5 Read Coil Status Dx EET D
571. ta file in the local or originating processot TIP Input output string and RTC file types are not valid for read messages For Wtite Messages When a write message is used the destination file is the data file in the target processor The maximum number of elements that can be transmitted or received are shown in the following table You cannot cross file types when sending messages For example you cannot read a timer into an integer file and you cannot write counters to a timet file The only exceptions to this rule are that long integer data can be read from or written to bit or integer files and e RTC files can be written to integer files MierolLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later only TIP The table below is not intended to illustrate file compatibility only the maximum number of elements that can be exchanged in each case Message Type File Type Element Size Maximum Number of Elements per Message A85CIF 0 1 B N 1 word 103 L 2 word 51 T C R 3 word 34 ST 42 word 2 write only 500CPU 0 1 B N 1 word 103 FEL 2 word 51 TC R 3 word 34 RTC 8 word 1 write only PLC5 0 1 B N 1 word 103 FU L 2 word 51 i 5 word 20 Communications Instructions 331 Message Type File Type Element Size Maximum Number of Elements per Message CIP B N 1 word 126 EL 2 words 63 Modbus B N command 5 1 bit 1 Commands B N command 6 1 word
572. tack Word2 Position the next available location where the instruction loads data 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates that LIFO is empty Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack to receive the value or constant found in the source The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word The position is incremented after each load Position This is the current location pointed to in the LIFO stack It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value ot constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 word or 0 to 63 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table LFL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level 2 Mode A 3 Parameter E 2 E x e z S fs e g 5 S g l jo lg le l _ f B t amp la lo la E e Is e PIS oO v ja je Z ja amp 4 EEE 2 E t m FA z a E 6 e a E jo la S
573. tegory Identifier Code always 6 53 Length always 32 54 Format Code always 0 55 ERR 1 Illegal Function 56 Last Device Reporting ERR 1 57 ERR 2 Illegal Data Address 58 Last Device Reporting ERR 2 59 ERR 3 Illegal Data Value 60 Last Device Reporting ERR 3 61 ERR 4 Slave Device Failure 62 ERR 5 Acknowledge 63 ERR 6 Slave Device Busy 64 ERR 7 Negative Acknowledgement 65 ERR 8 Memory Parity Error 66 Non Standard Response 67 Last Device Reporting ERR 4 to ERR 8 or Non Standard Response 68 and 69 Reserved always 0 Function Files 71 camesteus Channel 0 Channel 0 Ext Channel 1 Modbus RTU Master MessagesSent 0 Messages Received 0 Modem Lines Link Layer Eror Count 0 Link Layer Eror Code 0 RTS CTS ixi Channel 0 Channel 1 Modbus PL Error Code 1 Counter Last Device Reporting Error Code 1 Error Code 2 Counter Error Code 6 Counter fd fod p p fod fd Last Device Reporting Eror Code 2 0 Error Code 7 Counter n p p D fd B Error Code 4 Counter Error Code 5 Counter Error Code 3 Counter Error Code 8 Counter Last Device Reporting Error Code 3 Non Standard Response Counter Last Device Reporting Error Code 4 8 or Non Standard Response Clear ASCII Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1200 Series B Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors
574. tems to be recorded Record size can be up to 80 bytes You can use the Delete button to remove items from this list See page 365 for information on record size A record consists of configured Date Stamp Time Stamp Current Address List and Separator Characters 1 If the real time clock is not present on the controller and Date Stamp and Time Stamp are selected enabled the date is recorded as 00 00 0000 and the time as 00 00 00 4 After entering all the information for the data log queue click on OK The queue is added to the Data Log Que window with a corresponding queue number This is the queue number to use in the DLG instruction Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 370 Recipe MicroLogix 1500 only and Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only DLG Data Log Instruction DLG Data Log queue number 0 Data Log Status File Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the DLG Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1500 1 764 LRP 167 5 us 11 8 us date stamp 6 7 us 124 us time stamp 9 1 us word logged 16 2 us long word logged IMPORTANT You must configure a data log queue before programming a DLG instruction into your ladder program The DLG instruction triggers the saving of a record The DLG instruction has one operand Queue Numbet Specifies which data log queue captures a recot
575. ter E Elo Es 7 5 a o xia o zt e a L Fez 5s T gococgser imEtrF amp guyoe vszmB rZ ss e lt q N eS 2 or feo fre S ee t5 2 E amp be e len S J S SP eS El Ela S la Timer Time Base Preset Accumulator 1 Valid for Timer Files only TIP Use an RES instruction to reset a timer s accumulator and status bits Timer Accuracy Timer accuracy refers to the length of time between the moment a timer instruction is enabled and the moment the timed interval is complete Timer Accuracy Time Base Accuracy 0 001 seconds 0 001 to 0 00 0 01 seconds 0 01 to 0 00 1 00 seconds 1 00 to 0 00 TON Timer On Delay Timer and Counter Instructions 155 If your program scan can exceed 2 5 seconds repeat the timer instruction on a different rung identical logic in a different area of the ladder code so that the rung is scanned within these limits Repeating Timer Instructions Using the enable bit EN of a timer is an easy way to repeat its complex conditional logic at another rung in your ladder program TIP Timing could be inaccurate if Jump JMP Label LBL Jump to Subroutine JSR or Subroutine SBR instructions skip over the rung containing a timer instruction while the timer is timing If the skip duration is within 2 5 seconds no time is lost if the skip duration exceeds 2 5 seconds an undetectable timing error occurs When using subroutines
576. ters Block MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 69 23to 42 DLL Active Node Table Block MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 78 words 43 to 70 when using DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex DH 485 or ASCII 1 43 End of List Category Identifier Code MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 always 0 43to 70 Reserved e MicroLogix 1200 e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors words 43 to 70 when using Modbus RTU Slave 43to 69 Modbus Slave Diagnostic Counters Block e MicroLogix 1200 74 e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors 70 End of List Category Identifier Code e MicroLogix 1200 always 0 e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors 1 ASCII can only be used with the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and higher and 1764 LRP Processors The following tables show the details of each block in the Communications Status File General Status Block of Communications Status File General Channel Status Block Word Bit Description 0 Communications Channel General Status Information Category Identifier Code 1 Length 2 Format Code 3 Communications Configuration Error Code Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 68 Function Files Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 General Channel Status Block 4 0 ICP Incoming Command Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller determines th
577. th Overflow Selection Bit is ignored Math Instructions 177 The following table shows how the math status bits are updated upon execution of the ABS instruction Updates to Math Status Bits When Both Operands Are Integers e Carry Is set if input is negative otherwise resets e Overflow Is set if the signed result cannot fit in the Destination otherwise it is reset e Zero Is set if Destination is all zero s otherwise it is reset e Sign Is set if the most significant bit of the Destination is set otherwise it is reset e Overflow Trap The Math Overflow Trap Bit is only set if the Overflow bit is set Otherwise it remains in its last state When At Least One Operand is Floating Point Data e Carry Is reset e Overflow Is set if the signed result is infinity NAN or cannot fit in the Destination otherwise it is reset e Zero Is set if Destination is all zero s otherwise it is reset e Sign Is set if the most significant bit of the Destination is set otherwise it is reset e Overflow Trap The Math Overflow Trap Bit is only set if the Overflow bit is set Otherwise it remains in its last state Addressing Modes and File Types are shown in the following table ABS Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2
578. the Indirect Addresses For most types of instructions that contain an indirect address es look up the form of the indirect address in the table below and add that time to the execution time of the instruction indicates that an indirect reference is substituted MicroLogix 1200 Instruction Execution Time Using Indirect Addressing Address Form Operand Time ys Address Form Operand Time ys Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time 379 MicroLogix 1200 Instruction Execution Time Using Indirect Addressing Operand Time ps Address Form Operand Time ps B E 24 5 1 2 24 6 L8 6 1 L 2 25 3 L 1 24 4 L8 1 6 8 L 24 3 L amp 77 T4 6 0 L 1 1 26 0 TP 1 24 0 LITE 25 9 TEES 24 2 TA DN 6 6 T4 ACC 6 5 T 1 DN 24 4 T 1 ACC 24 4 T DN 24 9 T ACC 24 9 T4 ACC 2 7 4 0 1 2 6 3 T 1 ACC 2 24 4 0 1 0 2 152 T ACC 2 25 9 0 2 15 9 T4 T 6 5 0 1 0 6 8 T4 1 1 8 3 0 1 76 TTE 26 1 0 1 0 I 16 6 TESTES 26 8 O F LESTIE 16 9 T4 1 ACC 6 9 B3 2 6 3 T4 ACC 8 9 B 1 2 24 5 T 1 ACC 26 1 BI 1 2 25 3 T ACC 21 3 Execution Time Example Word Level Instruction Using and Indirect Address ADD Instruction Addressi
579. the data integrity check fails the record is deleted and an error is sent with STS of OxFO and ext STS of OxOE Por more information on writing a DF1 protocol refer to Allen Bradley publication 1770 6 5 16 DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual available from www theautomationbookstote com IMPORTANT The data in the retrieval file can only be read once Then it is erased from the processor The following conditions will cause previously logged data to be lost Program download from RSLogix 500 to controller e Memory Module transfer to controller except for Memory Module autoload of the same program Full Queue when a queue is full new records are recorded over the existing records starting at the beginning of the file You can put the following rung in your ladder program to prevent this from happening B3 1 LEO DLG Less Than or Eq A lt B Data Log 1 Source A DLSO 5 RST queue number 5 Soure B DLS0 5 FSZ Appendix A MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time This appendix contains a complete list of the MicroLogix 1200 programming instructions The list shows the memoty usage and instruction execution time for each instruction Execution times using indirect addressing and a scan time worksheet are also provided Programming The table below lists the execution times and memory usage for the programming Instructions Memory instructions These values
580. the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction Forty characters from string ST37 40 are sent through channel 0 The Done bit DN is set and a value of 40 is present in the POS word of the ASCII control data file When an error is detected the error code is written to the Error Code Byte and the Error Bit ER 1s set See ASCII Instruction Error Codes on page 306 for a list of the error codes and recommended action to take TIP For information on the timing of this instruction see the timing diagram on page 305 Instruction Type output Execution Time for the ABL Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later 115 us 8 6 us character 12 5 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 94 us 7 6 uis character 11 4 us The ABL instruction is used to determine the number of characters in the receive buffet of the specified communication channel up to and including the end of line characters termination This instruction looks for the two termination characters that you configure via the channel configuration screen On a false to true transition the controller reports the number of characters in the POS field of the control data file The channel configuration must be set to ASCII Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 292 ASCII Instructions Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instructio
581. thecontroller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set Length The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file this is also the length of source if it is a file data type The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 256 Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as source if it is a file data type It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value or constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table SOL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 62 i Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode o Er Parameter E amp 2 E e S 5 a zh 8 F F E E 5 z c g ln jo o i x z 99 is e S s o lv la e z Blh E a lE l E Elas E is a E S Elaz sja File e e e e e e e e Source e e e Control 3 Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 File Direct and File Indirect addressing also applies 3 Control file only IMPO
582. this Manual Purpose of this Manual Common Techniques Used in this Manual Preface Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual It provides information concerning e who should use this manual the purpose of this manual related documentation conventions used in this manual Rockwell Automation support Use this manual if you are responsible for designing installing programming or troubleshooting control systems that use MicroLogix 1200 or MicroLogix 1500 controllers You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic If you do not obtain the proper training before using this product This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 controllers It describes the procedures you use to program and troubleshoot your controller This manual gives you an overview of the file types used by the controllers provides the instruction set for the controllers contains application examples to show the instruction set in use The following conventions are used throughout this manual Bulleted lists such as this one provide information not procedural steps e Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information Italic type is used for emphasis Change bars appear beside information that has been changed or added since the last revision of this manual Change bars appear in the margin as shown to the r
583. this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 am Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level gt Mode o Er Parameter E 8 2 E e S A a c E zu S fs F E E e Sui E l T a l e Z 3 S 5 S o wimiu u a E la le 2 b E la S e 8 Ie la j e fa S ja File e e e e ele e e Control 2 Length Source o e e e e o o 1 See Important note abo t indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters BSR Bit Shift Right IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI Ell BHI MMI DATI TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 BSR a Shift Right sas CEN gt Execution Time for the BSR Instruction le Control R6 0 CDN Controller When Rung Is Bit Address I 0 15 Length 1 True False MicroLogix 1200 32 us 1 3 us word 1 3 us MicroLogix 1500 26 1 us 1 07 us word 1 4 us If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan you must create a loop in your application using the JMP LBL and CTU instructions The BSR instruction loads data into a bit array on a false to true rung transition one bit at a time The dat
584. tion depends on whether the rung is true or false on the first scan Word B10 1 B10 2 B10 3 B10 4 B10 5 Sequencer Instructions 219 e If the rung is true the instruction transfers the value in step zero e If the rung is false the instruction waits for the first rung transition from false to true and transfers the value in step one The bits mask data when reset 0 and pass data when set 1 The instruction will not change the value in the destination word unless you set mask bits The mask can be fixed or variable It is fixed if you enter a hexadecimal code It is variable if you enter an element address or a file address direct or indirect for changing the mask with each step The following figure indicates how the SQO instruction works Sao Sequencer Output I EN 5 File B10 1 Mask OFOF CDN gt Dest 014 0 Control R6 20 Length 4 lt Position 2 lt Destination 0 14 0 External Outputs 0 14 at Step 2 15 87 0 00 0000 10101 10000 1010 01 g 0N 02 Mask Value OFOF 03 ON 15 87 0 04 0000 1111 410000 11111 05 06 Sequencer Output File B10 1 07 Step 08 g ON 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 09 1010 10010 1111 20101 1 10 ON 1111 0101 0100 1010 2 Current Step 11 0101 10101 10101 0101 13 12 0000 1111 10000 1111 J4 13 14 15 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 220 Se
585. tions instruction 21 310 sign flag C 391 sinking 1 497 SLC 5 03 5 04 and 5 05 Active stations monitoring 437 Channel Status 436 sourcing 1 497 SQC instruction 15 215 SQL instruction 15 221 SQ0 instruction 75 218 SOR instruction 10 180 square root instruction 10 180 startup protection fault bit C 392 static file protection 2 57 Station addresses defining E 431 Station list viewing 437 status 7 497 status file C 389 STI enabled bit C 396 executing bit C 396 file number status C 405 function file 18 242 lost status bit C 400 mode status C 396 pending status bit C 396 Quick Start example F 471 set point status C 405 string data file 20 282 STS instruction 18 238 SUB instruction 10 174 subroutine label instruction 16 224 subtract instruction 10 174 SUS instruction 16 225 suspend code status C 402 suspend file status C 402 suspend instruction 16 225 SVC instruction 21 310 swap instruction 14 214 SWP instruction 14 214 T target bit file 3 63 3 65 target integer file 3 63 temporary end instruction 16 225 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 terminal 1 497 throughput 1 498 timer accuracy 8 154 timer and counter instructions 8 153 timer files 8 153 timer off delay instruction 8 156 timer on delay instruction 8 155 timing diagrams ASCII 20 305 AWA and AWT instructions 20 305 latching inputs 1 39 MSG instruction 21 320 PTO relative timing 6 121 quadrature encoder 5 104 TND instruction 16 225 TOD
586. to 32 768 0 0 40 Scaled for PID Format T Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10279 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 0 0 10 Channel 0 Data 0 to 16 383 0 0 1 0 J0 Channel 1 Data 0 to 16 383 0 0 1762 IF4 Input Data File For each module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the analog values of the inputs The module can be configured to use either raw proportional data or scaled for PID data The input data file for either configuration is shown below 1762 IF4 Input Data File Bit Position c 15 14 13 12 11 1709 8 7 l6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 0 SGNO Channel 0 Data 1 SGN1 Channel 1 Data 2 SGN2 Channel 2 Data 3 SGN3 Channel 3 Data 4 reserved S3 S2 81 S0 5 U0 00 U1 01 U2 02 U3 03 reserved 6 reserved 1 0 Configuration 21 The bits are defined as follows Sx General status bits for channels 0 through 3 This bit is set when an error over or under range exists for that channel or there is a general module hardware error Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 These bits are set when the input signal is above the user specified range The module continues to convert data to the maximum full range value during an over range condition The bits reset when the over range condition clears UIx Under range flag bits for input channels 0 through 3 These bits are set when the input signal is below the user specified range The module continues to
587. tocols DF1 full duplex F 426 DF1 half duplex 427 DH485 F 423 Modbus Slave RTU F 447 communication scan 1 490 communications active status bit C 406 channel 0 status C 405 mode selection status bit C 406 status file 3 66 compare instructions 9 163 compiler revision build number status C 411 release status C 411 contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance D 421 control profile 1 490 control program 1 490 control register error status bit C 399 controller definition 1 490 fault messages D 414 mode C 394 mode status C 391 overhead A 380 B 386 1 490 status file C 389 controller properties 2 47 conversion instructions 11 181 convert from binary coded decimal BCD instruction 11 184 convert to binary coded decimal BCD instruction 11 187 COP instruction 14 200 copy file instruction 14 200 copy word instruction 14 199 count down instruction 8 159 count up instruction 8 159 counters counter file 8 158 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 counter file and status bits 8 159 definition 1 490 how counters work 8 157 CPU central processing unit definition 1 490 CPW instruction 14 199 CS function file 3 66 CTD instruction 8 159 CTU instruction 8 159 D DAT configuration 3 63 function file 3 63 data file download protection 2 49 data file overwrite protection lost status bit C 407 data files 2 43 2 46 2 48 bit B 2 48 control R 2 48 counter C 8 158 floating point F 2 48 10 171 I O images for expansion m
588. trol read write The PTO CS Controlled Stop bit is used to stop an executing PTO instruction in the run portion of the profile by immediately starting the decel phase Once set the decel phase completes without an error or fault condition Normal Ramp Function without CS a Controlled Stop CS Set Ramp Function Normal Hamp Decel After CS Function is Set Accel Run Decel If the CS bit is set during the accel phase the accel phase completes and the PTO immediately enters the decel phase Controlled Stop CS Set Ramp Function Normal Ramp Decel After CS Function is Set Accel Decel Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 134 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Using High Speed Outputs PTO Jog Frequency JF Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access JF Jog Frequency Hz PTO 0 JF word INT 0to 20 000 control read write The PTO JF Jog Frequency variable defines the frequency of the PTO output during all Jog phases This value is typically determined by the type of device that is being driven the mechanics of the application or the device components being moved Data less than zero and greater than 20 000 generates a PTO error PTO Jog Pulse JP Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Acc
589. trol block is set However during subsequent execution of the PID loop if an invalid loop setpoint is entered the PID loop continues to execute using the old setpoint and bit 11 of word 0 of the control block is set 41H Scaling Selected Scaling Deselected Scaling Selected Scaling Deselected 1 Deadband lt 0 or 1 Deadband lt 0 or Change deadband to Change deadband to 0 deadband 0 deadband 16383 2 Deadband 3 Deadband 16383 eae MaxS MinS MaxS MinS lt 16383 51H 1 Output high limit 0 or Change output high limit to 0 lt output high limit lt 100 2 Output high limit gt 100 52H 1 Output low limit lt 0 or Change output low limit to 0 output low limit lt output high limit 100 2 Output low limit gt 100 53H Output low limit gt output high limit Change output low limit to 0 output low limit lt output high limit 100 Analog 1 0 Scaling To configure an analog input for use in a PID instruction the analog data must be scaled to match the PID instruction parameters In the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 the process variable PV in the PID instruction 1s designed to work with a data range of 0 to 16 383 The 1769 Compact I O analog modules 1769 IF4 and 1769 OF2 are capable of on board scaling Scaling data is required to match the range of the analog input to the input range of the PID instruction The ability to perform scaling in the I O modules reduces the amo
590. troller Using Static File Protection with Data File Download Protection Static File Protection and Data File Download Protection can be used in combination with any MicroLogix 1200 Controller Series B and higher and MicroLogix 1500 Processor Series B and higher Setting Static File Protection Static File Protection can be applied to the following data file types e Output O Input 1 e Status S e Binary B e Timer T Counter C Control R Integer N Floating Point F e String ST Long Word L Proportional Integral Derivative PD e Message MG Programmable Limit Switch PLS Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 52 Controller Memory and File Types Password Protection Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 Access the Static File Protect feature using RSLogix 500 programming software For each data file you want protected select the Static protection in the Data File Properties screen as shown in this illustration To access this screen right mouse click on the desired data file Data File Properties x General File 7 Type N Name INTEGER Dese Elements Boc Last NEB Attributes J Debug Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope Global Local Tio File Es 2 i Protection Constant Static Memory Module Download Cancel Apply Help MicroLogix controllers have a built in security system based
591. truction on any rung within the control program The DS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PWM output is within the deceleration phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM output is not within the deceleration phase of the output profile PWM Run Status RS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access RS PWM Run Status PWM O RS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PWM RS Run Status bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program e Set 1 Whenever the PWM instruction is within the run phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever the PWM instruction is not within the run phase of the output profile PWM Accelerating Status AS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access AS Accelerating Status PWM 0 AS bit Oor1 j status read only The PWM AS Accelerating Status bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The AS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PWM output is within the acceleration phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM output is not within the acceleration phase of the output profile Using High Speed Outputs 141 PWM Profile Parameter Select PP Element Descr
592. uffer available for reply Too short message received Too long message received 0 1 2 3 4 UART error during reply reception 5 Bad CRC in reply packet 6 7 9 1 1 1 CTS one second timeout prior to transmission CTS dropped in mid packet transmission Packet receive from unknown slave or bad slave Function code mismatch 0 1 Function code not supported 3 Reply timeout The ASCII driver provides connection to other ASCH devices such as bar code readers weigh scales serial printers and other intelligent devices You can use ASCII by configuring the RS 232 port channel 0 for ASCII driver For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel 0 or Channel 1 When configured for ASCII all received data is placed in a buffer To access the data use the ASCII instructions in your ladder program See ASCII Instructions on page 279 for information on using the ASCII instructions You can also send ASCII string data to most attached devices that accept ASCII data characters TIP Only ASCII instructions can be used when a channel is configured for ASCII If you use a Message MSG instruction that references the channel an error occurs Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 456 Protocol Configuration The channel configuration screen is shown below Channel Configuration General Channel U Channel 1 Driver esci Baud 1200 Parity NONE Term
593. uires that the User Program in the controller is the same as the one in the programming device If the programming device does not have a matching copy of the User Program access to the User Program in the controller is denied To access the User Program clear controller memory and reload the program TIP Functions such as change mode clear memory restore program and transfer memory module are allowed regardless of this selection Controller passwords are not associated with the Allow Future Access setting IMPORTANT The Clear Controller Memory feature is not supported in FRN 14 and later Controllers with FRN 14 and later do not clear the program and the project remains open when you execute the Clear Processor Memory function using the RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Version 9 00 or earlier Overview Function Files Chapter J Function Files This chapter describes controller function files The chapter is organized as follows Overview on page 55 Real Time Clock Function File on page 56 Trim Pot Information Function File on page 59 Memory Module Information Function File on page 60 DAT Function File MicroLogix 1500 only on page 63 Base Hardware Information Function File on page 66 Communications Status File on page 66 Input Output Status File on page 79 Function Files are one of the three primary file structures within the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 controllers Program Files and
594. umber of slave stations that cannot respond If the Message based selection is a ow slaves to initiate messages a slave station can initiate a message to the master station polled report by exception messaging ot to another slave station s ave to slave messaging The MSG command packet will remain in that slave station s transmit queue until the master station triggers its own MSG command packet to it which could be seconds minutes or hours later depending on the master s ladder logic If the Message based selection is dont allow slaves to initiate messages then even if a slave station triggers and queues up a MSG instruction in its ladder logic the master station will not process it Standard Polling Mode Standard polling mode is strongly recommended for larger systems that require time critical communication between the master and all the slave stations or for any system where slave station initiated messages are going to be used this includes slave programming over the network since this uses the same mechanism that slave to slave messaging uses The Active Node Table automatically keeps track of which slaves are and are not communicating Standard polling mode should sot be used in cases where the user needs to be able to limit when and how often the master station communicates with each slave station Standard polling mode causes the master station to continuously send one or more 4 byte poll packets to
595. unication line Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 494 Glossary Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 modes Selected methods of operation Example run test or program negative logic The use of binary logic in such a way that 0 represents the desired voltage level network A series of stations nodes connected by some type of communication medium A netwotk may be made up of a single link or multiple links nominal input current The typical amount of current seen at nominal input voltage normally closed Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de energized or deactivated They are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated normally open Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is de energized or the switch is deactivated They are closed when the relay 1s energized ot the switch is activated off delay time The OFF delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been removed from the input terminal of the controller The time is determined by circuit component delays and by any applied filter offline When a device is not scanning controlling or when a programming device is not communicating with the controller offset A continuous deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point off state leakage current When a mechanical switch is opened off state no current flows throug
596. unication status bits allow you to customize or monitor communications servicing See General Channel Status Block on page 67 for additional status information Communication Status Bits Address Description Channel 0 Channel 1 CS0 4 0 CS1 4 0 ICP Incoming Command Pending CS0 4 1 CS1 4 1 MPP Incoming Message Reply Pending CS0 4 2 CS1 4 2 MCP Outgoing Message Command Pending CS0 4 4 CS1 4 4 CAB Communications Active Bit 1 Channel 1 is valid for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP only Application Example The SVC instruction is used when you want to execute a communication function such as transmitting a message prior to the normal service communication portion of the operating scan CS0 4 SVC 0000 3t Service Communications MCP Channel Select 0001h You can place this rung after a message write instruction CS0 4 MCP is set when the message instruction is enabled and put in the communications queue When CS0 4 MCP is set 1 the SVC instruction is evaluated as true and the program scan is interrupted to execute the service communication s portion of the operating scan The scan then resumes at the instruction following the SVC instruction The example rung shows a conditional SVC which is processed only when an outgoing message is in the communications queue TIP You may program the SVC instruction unconditionally across the rungs This is the normal programming technique for the SVC instru
597. unt of programming required in the system and makes PID setup much easier The example shows a 1769 IF4 module The IF4 has 4 inputs which are individually configurable In this example analog input 0 is configured for 0 to 10V and is scaled in engineering units Word 0 is not being used in a PID instruction Input 1 word 1 1s configured for 4 to 20 mA operation with scaling configured for a PID instruction This configures the analog data for the PID instruction Field Device Input Signal Analog Register Scaled Data 5200m 63841174080 20 0 mA 16 383 4 0 mA 0 4 0 mA 819 to 1 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 270 Process Control Instruction The analog configuration screen is accessed from within RSLogix 500 Simply double click on the I O configuration item in the Controller folder and then double click on the specific I O module The configuration for the analog output is virtually identical Simply address the PID control variable CV to the analog output address and configure the analog output to Scaled for PID behavior Module 1 1769 IF4 Analog 4 Channel Input Module Ei Expansion General Configuration Analog Input Configuration Generic Extra Data Contig ward 0 ford 1 Filter Filter I Enable foo Hz V Enable eo Hz Input Range Input Range Oto 10 voc 4 to 20 mA Data Format Data Format Engineering Units Scaled for PID Word ae REESE
598. update time determined in step 17 Set the PID mode to STI or Timed per your ladder diagram If STI is selected ensure that the loop update time equals the STI time interval Enter the optional settings that apply output limiting output alarm MaxsS MinS scaling feed forward Return to page 275 and complete the tuning procedure starting with step 4 Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 278 Process Control Instruction Notes Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 General Information ASCII Instructions Chapter 20 This chapter contains general information about the ASCII instructions and explains how they function in your control program This chapter is arranged into the following sections Instruction Types and Operation on page 280 Protocol Overview on page 281 e String ST Data File on page 282 Control Data File on page 283 ASCII Instructions The ASCII instructions are arranged so that the Write instructions precede the Read instructions Instruction Function Valid Controller s Page ACL ASCII Clear Buffer Clear the receive and or transmit buffers e MicroLogix 1200 284 AIC Integer to String Convert an integer value to a string e MicroLogix 1500 Series B 286 AWA ASCII Write with Append Write a string with user configured characters appended FPN 4 or later 287 AWT ASCII Write Write a string 289 ABL Test Buffer for
599. upt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot execute immediately This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit STI Timed Interrupt Enabled TIE User Program Access Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled STEO TIE binary bit control read write The TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the timed interrupt mechanism When set 1 timing is enabled when clear 0 timing is disabled If this bit is cleared disabled while the timer is running the accumulated value is cleared 0 If the bit is then set 1 timing starts This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle STI Auto Start AS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access AS Auto Start STI 0 AS binary bit control read only The AS Auto Start is a control bit that can be used in the control program The auto start bit is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit automatically sets the STI Timed Interrupt Enable TIE bit when the
600. upts Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 The PID Concept Chapter 19 Process Control Instruction This chapter describes the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Proportional Integral Derivative PID instruction The PID instruction is an output instruction that controls physical properties such as temperature pressure liquid level or flow rate using process loops The PID instruction normally controls a closed loop using inputs from an analog input module and providing an output to an analog output module For temperature control you can convert the analog output to a time proportioning on off output for driving a heater or cooling unit An example appears on page 269 The PID instruction can be operated in the timed mode or the Selectable Time Interrupt STI mode In the timed mode the instruction updates its output periodically at a user selectable rate In the STI mode the instruction should be placed in an STI interrupt subroutine It then updates its output every time the STI subroutine is scanned The STI time interval and the PID loop update rate must be the same in order for the equation to execute properly See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 242 for more information on STI interrupts PID closed loop control holds a process variable at a desired set point A flow rate fluid level example is shown below Feed Forward Bias Set Point Error i x E py Flow Rate Process Contro
601. ured only during initial setup Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 110 Using the High Speed Counter and Programmable Limit Switch HSL High Speed Counter Load HSC Number L High Speed Counter Load HSCO High Preset N7 0 Low Preset N7 1 Output High Source N7 2 Output Low Source N7 3 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 High Preset Output HPO Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access HPO High Preset Output HSC O HPO word 16 bit binary control read write The HPO High Preset Output defines the state 1 ON or 0 OFF of the outputs on the controller when the high preset is reached See Output Mask Bits OMB on page 109 for more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off based on the high preset being reached The high output bit pattern can be configured during initial setup or while the controller is operating Use the HSL instruction or the SP bit to load the new parameters while the controller is operating Low Preset Output LPO Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access LPO Low Preset Output HSC O LPO word 16 bit binary control read write The LPO Low Preset Output defines the state 1 on 0 off of the outputs on the controller when the low preset is reached See Output Mask Bits OMB on page 109 for more information on how to direct
602. urns data read 1 or acknowledges receipt write m m mg 5 48 1 ER 6 l pup I h ied EW 0 I I ST 0 i DN ER TO 0 Sse Communications Instructions 321 1 If there is room in any of the four active message buffers when the MSG rung becomes true and the MSG is scanned the EN and EW bits for this message are set If this is a MSG write instruction the source data is transferred to the message buffer at this time Not shown in the diagram If the four message buffers are in use the message request is put in the message queue and only the EN bit is set The message queue works on a first in first out basis that allows the controller to remember the order in which the message instructions were enabled When a buffer becomes available the first message in the queue is placed into the buffer and the EW bit is set 1 TIP The control program does not have access to the message buffers or the communications queue Once the EN bit is set 1 it remains set until the entire message process is complete and either the DN ER or TO bit is set 1 The MSG Timeout period begins timing when the EN bit is set 1 If the timeout period expires before the MSG instruction completes its function the ER bit is set 1 and an error code 37H is placed in the MG File to inform you of the timeout error 2 At the next end of scan REF or SVC instruction the controller determines if it should examine the communications qu
603. urrentRate Ctr 0 CurrentRate Qut vercurrent 3 9 10 Ctr 0 Pulselnterval Ctr 0 Pulselnterval 11 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 1 0 Configuration 35 COPW RV IDW REZ CUdf COvf Ctr 0 StatusFlags Ctr 0 Overflow Reserved Ctr 0 Underflow Ctr 1 CurrentCount Ctr 1 CurrentCount Ctr 0 RisingEdgeZ Ctr 1 StoredCount Ctr 1 StoredCount ene Ctr 1 CurrentRate Ctr 1 CurrentRate Ctr 0 RateValid Ctr 0 PresetWarning Ctr 1 Pulselnterval Ctr 1 Pulselnterval CIPW RV Ic IDW REZ CUdf COvf Ctr 1 StatusFlags Ctr 1 0verflow Reserved Ctr 1 Underflow Ctr 2 CurrentCount Ctr 2 CurrentCount Ctr 1 RisingEdgeZ Ctr 1 InvalidDirectWrite Ctr 1 InvalidCounter Ctr 2 CurrentRate Ctr 2 CurrentRate Ctr 1 RateValid Ctr 1 PresetWarning C2PW RV Ic IDW CUdf COvf Ctr 2 StatusFlags Ctr 2 Overflow Reserved Ctr 2 Underflow Ctr 3 CurrentCount Ctr 3 CurrentCount Ctr 2 InvalidDirectWrite Ctr 2 InvalidCounter Ctr 3 CurrentRate Ctr 3 CurrentRate Ctr 2 RateValid Ctr 2 PresetWarning Ctr 3 StatusFlags 1769 SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module Data Organization Ctr 3 Overflow Ctr 3 Underflow Ctr 3 InvalidDirectWrite Ctr 3 InvalidCounter Ctr 3 RateValid Ctr 3 PresetWarning The scanner uses the input and output data images to transfer data status and command information between the scanner and the controller The
604. ust be configured to match See Below Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2011 470 Knowledgebase Quick Starts Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2011 Micrologix 1000 Channel Configuration DF1 485 Configuration x DH485 DF1 Primary Protocol C o Baud 13200 19200 Node Address hoc Boc Ful Duplex 2 Half Duplex Slave Cancel Help IMPORTANT After the ladder logic has been entered into the ML1500 and the ML1000 channel configuration has been changed in order for this example to function connect the controllers using a 1761 CBL HMO2 cable leave connected until the COMM 0 LED on the ML1500 starts to blink Verifying data has been sent To verify the data has been sent to node 4 disconnect the HM02 cable and connect the PC running RSLogix 500 to the ML1000 Node 4 Go to N7 0 and view the data this should match the data in N7 0 of node 1 Another way to verify the data is being sent to node 4 is to replace the Target Device Data Table Address with an output modules address In this example the output module is a ML1000 the address would be O 0 0 This will display in binary on the output LEDS what ever number that was entered into N7 0 of the ML1500 IMPORTANT By addressing 0 0 0 the outputs of the destination processor will be energized upon successful transmission of data Verify that nothing is connected to the outputs to ensure safe operation of the controller If a 16 Point MicroLogix 1000 is b
605. utputs Generally used with FET outputs BXB units Relay Type Bit XIC XIO OTE OTL OTU OSR ONS OSF The relay type bit instructions monitor and control the status 147 of bits Timer and Counter TON TOF RTO CTU CTD RES The timer and counter instructions control operations based on time or 153 the number of events Compare EQU NEQ LES LEQ GRT GEO MEQ LIM The compare instructions compare values by using a specific 163 compare operation Math ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG CLR ABS SQR SCL SCP SWP The math instructions perform arithmetic 169 operations Conversion DCD ENC TOD FRD GCD The conversion instructions multiplex and de multiplex data and perform 181 conversions between binary and decimal values Logical AND OR XOR NOT The logical instructions perform bit wise logical operations on words 191 Move MOV MVM The move instructions modify and move words 195 File CPW COP FLL BSL BSR FFL FFU LFL LFU The file instructions perform operations on file data 99 Sequencer SQC S00 SQL Sequencer instructions are used to control automatic assembly machines that have 215 consistent and repeatable operations Program Control JMP LBL JSR SBR RET SUS TND MCR END The program flow instructions change the flow of 223 ladder program execution Input and Output IIM IOM REF The input and output instructions allow you to selectively update data without waiting 229 for the inpu
606. valid data is sent to the real time clock from the programming device or another controller the new values take effect immediately In RSLogix 500 click on Set Date Time in the RTC Function File screen to set the RTC time to the current time on your PC The real time clock does not allow you to load or store invalid date or time data TIP Use the Disable Clock button in your programming device to disable the real time clock before storing a module This decreases the drain on the battery during storage Real Time Clock Accuracy The following table indicates the expected accuracy of the real time clock for vatious temperatures Real Time Clock Accuracy at Various Temperatures Ambient Temperature Accuracy 0 C 32 F 34 to 70 seconds month 25 C 77 F 36 to 68 seconds month 40 C 104 F 29 to 75 seconds month 55 C 131 F 133 to 237 seconds month 1 These numbers are worst case values over a 31 day month Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 58 Function Files RTA Real Time Clock Adjust Instruction RTA Real Time Clock Adjust Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 RTC Battery Operation The real time clock has an internal battery that is not replaceable The RTC Function File features a battery low indicator bit RTC 0 BL which represents the status of the RTC battery When the battery is low the indicator bit is set 1 This means that the battery will f
607. value is placed in the destination word Clearing S 14 before executing the FRD instruction is shown below I1 MOV OVE ddl N72 dece 0001 0010 0011 0100 4660 Dest 13 4660 CLR CLEAR Dest S14 0 FRD FROM BCD 13 and 8 14 are Source 13 m i OP displayed in BCD format Dest N7 0 1234 eS 0000 0100 1101 0010 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 TOD Convert to Binary Coded Decimal BCD TOD 4 To BCD Source N7 0 0 lt Dest N7 1 0000h lt Conversion Instructions 187 When the input condition I 0 1 is set 1 a BCD value transferred from a 4 digit thumbwheel switch for example is moved from word N7 2 into the math register Status word 8 14 is then cleared to make certain that unwanted data is not present when the FRD instruction is executed Instruction Type output Execution Time for the TOD Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 17 2 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 14 3 us 0 0 us The TOD instruction is used to convert the integer source value to BCD and place the result in the destination Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table TOD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 3 EO Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level
608. values where an upper limit of 100 corresponds to a Control Variable limit of 16383 Scaling to Engineering Units Scaling lets you enter the setpoint and zero crossing deadband values in engineering units and display the process variable and error values in the same engineering units Remember the process variable PV must still be within the range 0 to 16383 The PV is displayed in engineering units however Select scaling as follows 1 Enter the maximum and minimum scaling values MaxS and MinS in the PID control block The MinS value corresponds to an analog value of zero for the lowest reading of the process variable MaxS corresponds to an analog value of 16383 for the highest reading These values reflect the process limits Setpoint scaling is selected by entering a non zero value for one or both parameters If you enter the same value for both parameters setpoint scaling is disabled For example if measuring a full scale temperature range of 73 C PV 0 to 1156 C PV 16383 enter a value of 73 for MinS and 1156 for Maxs Remember that inputs to the PID instruction must be 0 to 16383 Signal conversions could be as follows Example Values Process limits 73 to 1156 C Transmitter output if used 4 to 20 mA Output of analog input module 0 to 16383 PID instruction MinS to MaxS 73 to 1156 C 2 Enter the setpoint word 2 and deadband word 9 in the same scaled engineering units Read the
609. ve the following Instructions e Source and Destination must be of the same data size i c all words or all long words IMPORTANT Do notuse the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions e Source and Source B can be a constant or an address but both cannot be constants e Valid constants ate 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Logical Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 82 i Address Data Files Function Files a 3 Address Level em Mode o 3 Parameter z sle E os Er z cc Ps p E le m E S 3 5 z o ee _ 0 9 is lw lo j o m e z uw 5 u a a is Ejs amp 18 ls lal j j is ls la Source A e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Source pul e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e e e e e e e e e a e e e 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing 4 Source
610. wing this event the input image point is turned on and remains on for the next controller scan It is then set to off at the next input scan The following figures help demonstrate this Rising Edge Behavior Example 1 Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X42 Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan External Input Latched Status L Input File Value Rising Edge Behavior Example 2 Scan Number X42 Scan Number X Scan Number X1 Input Scan Ladder Scan Output Scan Input Scan Ladder Scan Output Scan Input Scan Ladder Scan Output Scan External Input M ENS B B S p Latched Status Input File Value TIP The gray area of the Latched Status waveform is the input filter delay IMPORTANT The input file value does not represent the external input when the input is configured for latching behavior When configured for rising edge behavior the input file value is normally off on for 1 scan when a rising edge pulse is detected 1 0 Configuration 41 The previous examples demonstrate rising edge behavior Falling edge behavior operates exactly the same way with these exceptions The detection is on the falling edge of the external input e The i
611. wraps from 32 768 And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs a RES instruction with the same address as the CTD indicator to 32 767 and continues to count down instruction is enabled bit 13 C5 0 DN DN done accumulated value gt preset value e accumulated value preset value or indicator e a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled bit 14 C5 0 CD CD count down enable rung state is true e rung state is false e a RES instruction with the same address as the CTD instruction is enabled CTU Count Up CTD Count Down CTU Count Up L C CU 5 Counter C5 0 Preset 0 lt CDN 5 Accum 0 lt CTD Count Down C CU 5 Counter C5 0 Preset 0 lt CDN 5 Accum 0 lt Instruction Type output Execution Time for the CTU and CTD Instructions Controller CTU When Rung Is CTD When Rung Is True False True False MicroLogix 1200 9 0 us 9 2 us 9 0 us 9 0 us MicroLogix 1500 6 4 us 8 5 us 7 5 us 8 5 us Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 160 Timer and Counter Instructions The CTU and CTD instructions are used to increment or decrement a counter at each false to true rung transition When the CTU rung makes a false to true transition the accumulated value is incremented by one count The CTD instruction operates the same except the count is decremented TIP If the signal is comi
612. xecuted loading the following values to create Purple paint e N7 0 500 e N7 1 0 e N7 2 500 e T4 0 PRE 500 When B3 0 2 is energized and B3 0 0 and B3 0 1 are de energized Recipe File O Recipe number 2 is executed loading the following values to create White paint e N7 0 333 e N7 1 333 e N7 2 333 e T4 0 PRE 1000 Monitor the N7 data file Notice the values change after each bit is toggled This example describes oading values from a RCP file to data table addresses However note that by changing the RCP file operation from Load to Store values can be loaded by ladder logic into the recipe database for each Recipe number Data Logging allows you to capture store application data as a record for retrieval at a later time Each record is stored in a user configured queue in battery backed memory B Ram Records are retrieved from the 1764 LRP processor via communications This chapter explains how Data Logging is configured and used This section contains the following topics Queues and Records on page 364 Configuring Data Log Queues on page 368 DLG Data Log Instruction on page 370 Data Log Status File on page 370 Retrieving Reading Records on page 372 The 1764 LRP processor has 48K bytes 48 x 1024 of additional memory for data logging purposes Within this memory you can define up to 256 0 to 255 data logging queues Each queue is configurable by size maximum numbet of records stored a
613. y recommended to use a PID Loop tuner package for the best result i e RSTune Rockwell Software catalog number 9323 1003D Procedure 1 Create your ladder program Make certain that you have propetly scaled your analog input to the range of the process variable PV and that you have properly scaled your control variable CV to your analog output 2 Connect your process control equipment to your analog modules Download your program to the processor Leave the processor in the program mode ATTENTION Fnsure that all possibilities of machine motion have been A considered with respect to personal safety and equipment damage It is possible that your output CV may swing between 0 and 100 while tuning TIP If you want to verify the scaling of your continuous system and or determine the initial loop update time of your system go to the procedure on page 276 3 Enter the following values the initial setpoint SP value a reset T of 0 a rate Tg of 0 a gain K of 1 and a loop update of 5 Set the PID mode to STI or Timed per your ladder diagram If STI is selected ensure that the loop update time equals the STI time interval 10 11 12 13 14 Process Control Instruction 215 Enter the optional settings that apply output limiting output alarm MaxS MinS scaling feed forward Get prepared to chart the CV PV analog input or analog output as it varies with time with respect to the setpoint SP value
614. y cleared when the force condition is removed 3 No Yes No Frequency The operating frequency value OFS is less than 0 or greater than 20 000 Error This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within theUser Fault Routine 4 No Yes No Accel The accelerate decelerate parameters ADP are Decel Error e less than zero e greater than half the total output pulses to be generated TOP e Accel Decel exceeds limit See page 131 This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within theUser Fault Routine Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 Pulse Train Output Error Codes Using High Speed Outputs 137 Error Non User Recoverable Instruction Error Description Code Fault Fault Errors Name 5 No No Yes Jog Error PTO is in the idle state and two or more of the following are set e Enable EN bit set e Jog Pulse JP bit set e Jog Continuous JC bit set This error does not fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the error condition is removed 6 No Yes No Jog The jog frequency JF value is less than 0 or greater than 20 000 This error Frequency faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine Error 7 No Yes No Length The total output pulses to be generated TOP is less than zero This error Error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine PWM Pulse Width Modulation
615. y is low IMPORTANT Install a replacement battery immediately See your hardware manual for more information See also RTC Battery Operation on page 58 Input Filter Selection Modified Address Data Format Type User Program Access 5 13 binary Oor1 status read write This bit is set 1 whenever the discrete input filter selection in the control program is not compatible with the hardware ASCII String Manipulation Error Address Data Format Type User Program Access 5 15 binary Oor1 status read This bit is set 1 whenever an invalid string length occurs When S 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word S 6 This bit applies to the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series B Controllers Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 402 Publication 1762 RMO0O1H EN P July 2014 System Status File Major Error Code Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 6 word 0 to FFFF status read write This register displays a value which can be used to determine what caused a fault to occur Seeldentifying Controller Faults on page 413 to learn more about troubleshooting faults Suspend Code Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 7 word 32 768 to status read write 132 767 When the controller
616. y with control line set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments only with control line set to Half Duplex Modem 0 x20 ms RTS CTS Handshaking Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS DCD Wait Delay 0 to 255 1 Specifies the number of times the master device attempts to re send a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the slave device For use in noisy environments where acknowledgements may become corrupted in transmission Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to No Handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs 2 ms of delay time to change from transmit to receive mode When the Control Line is set to Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the next RTS assertion With RSLogix 500 version 6 10 10 and higher the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP offers a Halt Duplex Modem with DCD Handshaking
617. you use direct addressing you define a specific data location within the controller Any data location that is supported by the elements of an operand within the instruction being programmed can be used In this example we are illustrating a limit instruction where e Low Limit Numeric value from 32 768 to 32 767 entered from the programming software e Test Value TPI 0 POTO This is the current position value of trim pot 0 e High Limit N7 17 This is the data resident in Integer file 7 element 17 The Test Value TPI 0 POTO and High Limit N7 17 are direct addressing examples The Low Limit is immediate addressing Indirect Addressing Indirect addressing allows components within the address to be used as pointers to other data locations within the controller This functionality can be especially useful for certain types of applications recipe management batch processing and many others Indirect addressing can also be difficult to understand and troubleshoot It is recommended that you only use indirect addressing when it is required by the application being developed Publication 1762 RMO01H EN P July 2014 84 Programming Instructions Overview The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 support indirection indirect addressing for Files Words and Bits To define which components of an address are to be indirected a closed bracket is used The following examples illustrate how to use indirect addressing Indirect Add
618. your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists 0006 MEMORY MODULE HARDWARE FAULT The memory module hardware faulted or the memory module is incompatible with OS Non User e Upgrade the OS to be compatible with memory module e Obtain a new memory module 0007 MEMORY MODULE TRANSFER ERROR Failure during memory module transfer Non User Re attempt the transfer If the error persists replace the memory module 0008 FATAL INTERNAL SOFTWARE ERROR An unexpected software error occurred Non User e Cycle power on your unit Then re download your program and re initialize any necessary data e Start up your system e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controllers User Manual e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists 0009 FATAL INTERNAL HARDWARE ERROR An unexpected hardware error occurred Non User e Cycle power on your unit Then re download your program and re initialize any necessary data e Start up your system e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controllers User Manual e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists 000A 0S MISSING OR CORRUPT The operating system required for the user program is corrupt or missing Non User e Download a new OS using ControlFlash e Contact y
619. ze 1 e 42 word String elements valid size 1 to 2 e Timer 500CPU and 485CIF Counter and Control elements valid size 1 to 34 e PLC 5 Timer elements valid size 1 to 20 e Modbus bit elements 1 to 1920 e Modbus register elements 1 to 120 Publication 1762 RM001H EN P July 2014 Communications Instructions 335 Parameter Target Device Message Timeout Description Defines the amount of time the controller waits for the reply before the message errors A timeout of 0 seconds means that the controller waits indefinitely for a reply Valid range is from 0 to 255 seconds Data Table Address 500CPU and PLC5 message types For a Read this is the address in the processor which is to return data Valid file types are S B T C R N and L For a Write this is the address in the processor which receives data Valid file types are O S B T C R N L and RTCI2 4 Data Table Offset This is the word offset value in the common interface file byte offset for PLC device in the target processor which is to send the data 485CIF message types MB Data Address Specifies the Modbus address in the target device Valid range is from 1 to 65 536 Local Slave Node Specifies the node number of the device that is receiving the message Valid range is 0 to 31 Address for DH 485 protocol 0 to 254 for DF1 protocol 0 to 63 for DeviceNet or 0 to 247 for Modbus Local Remote Specifies whether the
620. ze and type for each required file The data table file s not including the five additional tables if Expanded is checked will be created automatically When the system driver is Modbus RTU Slave the following communication port patameters can be changed Modbus RTU Slave Communications Configuration Parameters MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 Series B and higher Processors only Parameter Options Programming Software Default Channel MicroLogix 1200 Channel 0 011200 amp LSP MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and higher Channel 0 and 1 1 LRP MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Channel 0 and 1 vr ModbsRiUSave Bg 9B 9 B 9 Parity none even odd none Node Address 1 to 247 decimal 1 Control Line No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem RTS CTS Handshaking No Handshaking Inter character 0 to 6553 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 3 5 character times 0 Timeout x1 ms Specifies the minimum delay between characters that indicates the end ofa message packet Modbus Data Table Coils Discrete outputs Modbus addresses 0001 to 4096 range 3 to 255 0 no file File Number Contacts Discrete inputs Modbus addresses 10001 to 14096 range 3 to 255 0 no file Assignment Input Registers Read Only Modbus addresses 30001 to 30256 range 3 to 255 0 no file Must be Binary or Holding Registers Read Write Modbus addresses 40001 to 40256 range 3 to 255 0 no Integer file type file oO CO O

1762-RM001 - Rockwell Automation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents